Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
VOLUME 3
ISSUE NO. 5
JANUARY 2011
Section
Temporary Works
Site Clearance
Landscaping Works
Fencing
Drainage Works
Earthworks
Geotechnical Works
10
Concrete Carriageways
11
Miscellaneous Roadworks
12
13
14
15
Not Used
16
Not Used
17
Piling Works
18
19
Steel Reinforcement
20
21
Prestressing
22
Steelwork
23
Bridgeworks
24
VOLUME
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
Section
25
26
27
28
29
Curtain Walling
30
31
(i)
January 2011
VOLUME
Section
32
33
34
Suspender Ceilings
35
36
Ironmongery
37
38
39
Wall Finishes
40
41
42
Signage
43
Not Used
VOLUME
Section
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Motors
54
55
Not Used
56
Not Used
57
58
59
Electromagnetic Compatibility
60
61
62
63
Fans
64
65
(ii)
January 2011
VOLUME
Section
66
67
68
69
Air Filters
70
71
72
73
Thermal Insulation
74
Sound Attenuator
75
76
77
Automatic Controls
78
Instruments
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
Water Supply
94
95
96
97
98
99
(iii)
January 2011
VOLUME
Section
VOLUME
AIRFIELD WORKS
Section
(iv)
January 2011
108.10
108.11
108.12
108.13
108.14
SECTION 109
NOT USED
SECTION 110
NOT USED
SECTION 111
NOT USED
SECTION 112
NOT USED
SECTION 113
NOT USED
SECTION 114
NOT USED
SECTION 115
NOT USED
SECTION 116
NOT USED
SECTION 117
NOT USED
SECTION 118
NOT USED
SECTION 119
NOT USED
13/13
January 2011
44.1
44.2
44.3
44.4
44.5
44.6
44.7
44.8
44.9
44.10
44.11
SECTION 45
45.1
45.2
SECTION 46
46.1
46.2
46.3
46.4
46.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 47
47.1
47.2
47.3
47.4
47.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 48
48.1
48.2
48.3
48.4
48.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
1/13
January 2011
SECTION 49
49.1
49.2
49.3
49.4
49.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 50
50.1
50.2
50.3
50.4
50.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 51
51.1
51.2
51.3
51.4
51.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 52
52.1
52.2
52.3
52.4
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Installation
SECTION 53
MOTORS
53.1
53.2
53.3
53.4
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
SECTION 54
54.1
54.2
54.3
54.4
54.5
54.6
54.7
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
HV Switchgear
Distribution Transformer
High Voltage Cable
Pilot Cables
Submissions
2/13
January 2011
SECTION 55
NOT USED
SECTION 56
NOT USED
SECTION 57
57.1
57.2
57.3
57.4
57.5
57.6
57.7
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Earthing Resistance
Earth Fault Loop Impedance
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 58
58.1
58.2
58.3
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
SECTION 59
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
59.1
59.2
59.3
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
SECTION 60
60.1
60.2
60.3
60.4
60.5
60.6
60.7
60.8
60.9
60.10
60.11
60.12
60.13
60.14
60.15
60.16
60.17
60.18
60.19
General
Terminology
Testing and Commissioning Phases
Quality Plans
Phase Notices
Test Results Forms
Phase Reports
Relevant Codes, Standards and Regulations
Contractors Testing and Commissioning Staff
Testing and Commissioning Equipment and Instruments
Notifications
Inspections and Testing
Specific Inspection, Testing and Commissioning Requirements
HV Distribution Cables
HV Distribution Transformer
Confidence Trials Phase
Emergency Generators
Daily and Underground Fuel Tanks
Pilot Cables
3/13
January 2011
SECTION 61
61.1
61.2
61.3
61.4
61.5
61.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Selection
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 62
62.1
62.2
62.3
62.4
62.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 63
FANS
63.1
63.2
63.3
63.4
63.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 64
64.1
64.2
64.3
64.4
64.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 65
65.1
65.2
65.3
65.4
65.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 66
66.1
66.2
66.3
66.4
66.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
4/13
January 2011
SECTION 67
67.1
67.2
67.3
67.4
67.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 68
68.1
68.2
68.3
68.4
68.5
68.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Design and Performance Criteria
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 69
AIR FILTERS
69.1
69.2
69.3
69.4
69.5
69.6
69.7
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Design and Performance Criteria
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
SECTION 70
70.1
70.2
70.3
70.4
70.5
70.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Design and Performance Criteria
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 71
71.1
71.2
71.3
71.4
71.5
71.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Selection
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 72
72.1
72.2
72.3
72.4
72.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
5/13
January 2011
SECTION 73
THERMAL INSULATION
73.1
73.2
73.3
73.4
General
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 74
SOUND ATTENUATORS
74.1
74.2
74.3
74.4
74.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 75
75.1
75.2
75.3
75.4
75.5
General
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
Design and Testing Requirements
SECTION 76
76.1
76.2
76.3
76.4
76.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 77
AUTOMATIC CONTROL
77.1
77.2
77.3
77.4
77.5
77.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Design and Performance Criteria
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 78
INSTRUMENTS
78.1
78.2
78.3
78.4
78.5
78.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Design and Performance Criteria
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
6/13
January 2011
SECTION 79
79.1
79.2
79.3
79.4
79.5
79.6
79.7
79.8
79.9
79.10
79.11
79.12
79.13
79.14
79.15
79.16
General
Terminology
Testing and Commissioning Phases
Quality Plans
Phase Notices
Test Results Forms
Phase Reports
Standards and Regulations
Contractors Testing and Commissioning Staff
Testing and Commissioning Equipment and Instruments
Notifications
Inspections and Testing
Factory Testing
Type Test Certificates
Site Testing and Commissioning
Rebalancing and Recommissioning to Suit Completion
SECTION 80
80.1
80.2
80.3
80.4
80.5
80.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
Pre-action Sprinkler System
SECTION 81
81.1
81.2
81.3
81.4
81.5
81.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
Street Hydrant System
SECTION 82
82.1
82.2
82.3
82.4
82.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 83
83.1
83.2
83.3
83.4
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
7/13
January 2011
SECTION 84
84.1
84.2
84.3
84.4
84.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 85
85.1
85.2
85.3
85.4
85.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 86
86.1
86.2
86.3
86.4
86.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 87
87.1
87.2
87.3
87.4
87.5
87.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Pipework and Fittings Materials
Valves and Fittings Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 88
88.1
88.2
88.3
88.4
88.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 89
89.1
89.2
89.3
89.4
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Workmanship
8/13
January 2011
SECTION 90
90.1
90.2
90.3
90.4
90.5
90.6
90.7
90.8
90.9
90.10
90.11
90.12
90.13
90.14
90.15
90.16
90.17
90.18
90.19
General
Terminology
Testing and Commissioning Phases
Quantity Plans
Phase Notices
Test Results Forms
Phase Reports
Standards and Regulations
Contractors Testing and Commissioning Staff
Testing and Commissioning Equipment and Instruments
Notifications
Inspections and Testing
Type Test Certificates
Factory Tests
Model Tests
Site Testing and Commissioning
FSD Inspection and Witness of Tests
Plant Integration Phase
Testing and Commissioning Report and Certificate of Completion
SECTION 91
91.1
91.2
91.3
91.4
91.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 92
92.1
92.2
92.3
92.4
92.5
92.6
92.7
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
Installation
Testing
SECTION 93
WATER SUPPLY
93.1
93.2
93.3
93.4
93.5
93.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Water Supply Requirements
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
9/13
January 2011
SECTION 94
94.1
94.2
94.3
94.4
94.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 95
95.1
95.2
95.3
95.4
95.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship
SECTION 96
96.1
96.2
96.3
96.4
96.5
96.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Gas Detection System
Submissions
Workmanship and Installation
SECTION 97
97.1
97.2
97.3
97.4
97.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Submissions
Workmanship for Pump Installation
SECTION 98
98.1
98.2
98.3
98.4
98.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
Materials
Workmanship
Submissions
10/13
January 2011
SECTION 99
99.1
99.2
99.3
99.4
99.5
99.6
99.7
99.8
99.9
99.10
99.11
99.12
99.13
99.14
99.15
General
Terminology
Testing and Commissioning Phases
Quality Plans
Phase Notices
Test Results Forms
Phase Reports
Standards and Regulations
Contractors Testing and Commissioning Staff
Testing and Commissioning Equipment and Instruments
Notifications
Inspections and Testing
Type Test Certificates
Factory Tests
Site Testing and Commissioning
SECTION 100
100.1
100.2
100.3
100.4
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
System Description
Monitoring and Control I/O Points
SECTION 101
101.1
101.2
101.3
101.4
101.5
101.6
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
System Description
Hardware
Monitoring and Control I/O Points
System Interfaces
SECTION 102
102.1
102.2
102.3
102.4
102.5
102.6
102.7
102.8
102.9
102.10
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
System Description
Fibre Optic Cables
Twisted Pair Cables
Distribution Frames
Voice and Data Outlets (VDO)
Cable Management and Identification
Cable Installation
Cable Testing
11/13
January 2011
SECTION 103
103.1
103.2
103.3
103.4
103.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
System Description
Performance Criteria of Equipment
Electromagnetic Interference
SECTION 104
104.1
104.2
104.3
104.4
104.5
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
System Description
Field Security Devices
System Testing and Commissioning
SECTION 105
105.1
105.2
105.3
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
System Description
SECTION 106
106.1
106.2
106.3
106.4
106.5
106.6
106.7
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
System Description
CCTV Cameras and Accessories
CCTV Cabling Network
Video Recording System
Testing and Commissioning
SECTION 107
107.1
107.2
107.3
107.4
General
Relevant Codes and Standards
General Performance Requirements
Cable
SECTION 108
108.1
108.2
108.3
108.4
108.5
108.6
108.7
108.8
108.9
General
Terminology
Testing and Commissioning Phases
Quality Plans
Phase Notices
Test Results Forms
Phase Reports
Standards and Regulations
Contractors Testing and Commissioning Staff
12/13
January 2011
108.10
108.11
108.12
108.13
108.14
SECTION 109
NOT USED
SECTION 110
NOT USED
SECTION 111
NOT USED
SECTION 112
NOT USED
SECTION 113
NOT USED
SECTION 114
NOT USED
SECTION 115
NOT USED
SECTION 116
NOT USED
SECTION 117
NOT USED
SECTION 118
NOT USED
SECTION 119
NOT USED
13/13
January 2011
44.1
Alternating Current
ACB
ACRA
ACS
ADC
AFFL
AHU
Al
Aluminium
AISI
ANSI
AOCC
AODB
APM
ARI
ASCII
ASHRAE
ASME
AS/NZS
ASTA
ASTM
BD
Building Department
BMS
BNC
Bayonet Neill-Concelman
BS
British Standards
BS EN
BSI
BSIHP
CADD
Cap
Chapter
CASE
CCD
1/34
Heating,
Refrigerating
and
Air-
January 2011
CCIR
CCITT
CCTV
CFC
Chlorofluorocarbon
CHW
Chilled Water
CLP
CONDW
Condenser Water
COP
Coefficient of Performance
CPC
CSA
CT
Current Transformer
Cu
Copper
DB
Dry Bulb
DC
Direct Current
DI
Ductile iron
dia
Diameter
DIDW
DOL
Direct on Line
DOS
DP
Double Pole
dpi
E&M
EA
Exhaust Air
EEC
EEX
E/F
Earth Fault
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
Electromagnetic interference
EMSD
EN
Euro-Norm
EPDM
EPROM
ERP
ESI
FCU
2/34
January 2011
FCS
FEWG
FFL
FIL
FIN
FRP
FSD
FSDCOP
FTNS
FTU
GBMS
GI
GM&WS
GUI
HCFC
Hydrochlorofluorocarbon
HDF
HEC
HFC
Hydrofluorocarbon
HKIE
HKSAR
HRC
HV
High Voltage
HVAC
HVCA
IAQ
IDF
IEC
IEE
IGBTS
I/O
Input / Output
IP
Index of Protection
ISO
LAN
LCD
LED
LEL
3/34
January 2011
LPHW
LSF
LSOH
LV
Low Voltage
MATV
MB
Megabyte
MBMS
MCB
MCC
MCCB
MCT
MDF
MDPE
MSB
MFTNC
MICC
MTBF
MTTR
MVAC
NC
Noise Criterion
Ni
Nickel
NFPA
NTSC
OA
Outdoor Air
O/C
Over Load
O&M
OFTA
OS
Operating System
OSI
PA
Public Address
PABX
PAF
PAL
PAU
PC
Personal Computer
PCT
PE
Polyethylene
PF
Power Factor
4/34
January 2011
PCB
Polychlorinated Biphenyls
PCP
PDS
PID
PIN
PLC
PN10
PN16
PN25
PN40
PPM
PRV
PSM
PTTA
PVC
Poly-vinyl Chloride
PWL
PWM
RA
RAM
RCB
RCCB
RCD
REF
RF
Radio Frequency
RFI
RH
Relative Humidity
RISC
RMS
RMU
RTI
SA
Supply Air
S/C
Server/ Concentrator
SCADA
SCHW
SCR
SMACNA
SNMP
5/34
January 2011
SP
Single Pole
STP
SWA
TCP/IP
TDF
TDS
TEFC
TODC
Time-Of-Day Clock
TTA
TMR
TMS
TP
Triple Pole
UK
United Kingdom
UHF
UL
Underwriters Laboratory
UPS
UTP
UV
Ultraviolet
VAC
Ventilation/Air Conditioning
VAV
VDO
VSD
WB
Wet Bulb
WSD
XLL SF
XLPE
6/34
January 2011
44.2
The edition of the codes and standards listed in this volume of the General
Materials and Workmanship Specification (GMWS) are for information only.
The Contractor shall comply with the latest edition of these codes and
standards, including all amendments issued by the relevant institutions, as at
the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
(b)
The Works shall comply with the standards and codes of practice of the
following institutions:
BSI
(c)
IEC
IETF
CIBSE
LPC
FOC
IEE
ISO
ASHRAE
ASME
ASTM
NBS
NEMA
NFPA
UL
DIN
The following regulations, codes and standards shall apply to the relevant
parts of the Works:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Air Pollution Control Ordinance 2001 (Chapter 311) and its subsidiary
regulations.
7/34
January 2011
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
(xiv)
(xv)
(xvi)
(xvii)
(xviii)
(xix)
(xx)
(xxi)
(xxii)
(xxiii)
8/34
January 2011
(xxv)
44.3
NOT USED
44.4
WORKMANSHIP
Workmanship shall be to the highest standard. Only personnel skilled in the
appropriate trade shall carry out work. Attention shall be given to the neatness and
alignment of equipment, cable, conduit and/or pipe runs as is appropriate.
44.4.1
44.5
(b)
(c)
MATERIALS
Materials shall comply with the Specification and the requirements of the Contract.
Where recognized Standards have not been specified, materials shall be to the
highest standard currently available and be subjected to review without objection by
the Project Manager.
44.5.1
Material Finishes
(a)
(b)
(c)
9/34
January 2011
(d)
44.5.2
44.5.3
44.5.4
44.5.5
(i)
(ii)
Stainless and heat resisting plate, sheet and strip complying with BS
1449 : Part 2.
(a)
Cast iron shall not be used for systems containing high-pressure air, oil or
water or for any components subject to tension or impact stresses.
(b)
Where cast iron is used, grades shall not be inferior to Class 14 of BS 1452.
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for electrical purposes shall comply
with BS 2898.
(b)
Bronze
Bronze castings for bearings, packing boxes, and similar applications shall be
of the phosphoric bronze type to BS 1400.
Brass
(a)
44.5.7
Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel tubes and plates used in the Works
shall be in accordance with the following standards:
Cast Iron
(a)
44.5.6
Brass tubing shall be of the heavy gauge seamless type and shall comprise
70% copper, 29% zinc and 1% tin.
Copper
(a)
(b)
10/34
January 2011
44.5.8
44.5.9
Wood
Any woodwork that forms part of the Permanent Works shall be appropriately
treated in a manner reviewed without objection by the Project Manager to protect it
against the ingress of moisture, growth of fungus or other forms of deterioration, and
it shall be fire resistant.
44.5.10 Adhesives
Adhesives shall be specially selected to ensure use of types that are impervious to
moisture, resistant to mould growth and other forms of attack or deterioration.
44.5.11 Insulating Materials
Non-impregnated paper, fabric, wood or press-palm shall not be used for insulating
purposes. Where synthetic resin bonded insulating boards are used, all cut edges
shall be sealed with a varnish reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
44.5.12 Bolts, Studs, Nuts and Washers
(a)
All bolts, studs and nuts shall be to a relevant standard reviewed without
objection by the Project Manager and to metric dimensions and shall generally
be of bright steel. Those items included in moving machinery subject to
vibration, high temperature or pressure shall be of high tensile material
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager. The use of black grade
bolts may only be permitted in locations reviewed without objection by the
Project Manager.
(b)
Bolts, studs, nuts and washers shall be made of free machining quality
stainless steel when:
(i)
(ii)
(c)
Bolts, studs and nuts shall be suitably machined. Rolled threads may be
permitted if they conform to a standard reviewed without objection by the
Project Manager. Washers shall be provided under all nuts and also bolt
heads where appropriate. Bolts and studs shall protrude by at least one
thread pitch beyond the outside face of nuts. Where beveled washers are
used they can be compressed only once.
(d)
Jacking screws shall be of high tensile steel with fine threads of a form
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
11/34
January 2011
(e)
Nuts, bolts, tap-bolts, set pins and any other items included in moving
machinery subjected to vibration shall be secured with locking devices
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
(f)
Where bolts pass through structural members taper washers shall be fitted
where necessary to ensure that no bending stress is caused in the bolt.
(b)
The Contractor shall design the holding-down, alignment and leveling bolts
completed with anchorages, nuts, washers, packing and anti-vibration
arrangements required to attach the Plant to the structure, without exceeding
the design stresses of the structure.
(c)
(d)
After final alignment checks have been completed, and the unit runs at
nominal output for not less than six hours alignment shall be rechecked and
the unit securely dowelled to the bedplates.
12/34
January 2011
44.6
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
44.6.1
Installation of Equipment
The equipment shall be carefully unpacked, assembled and installed in accordance
with the Contractors Drawings reviewed without objection by the Project Manager
and any instructions of the equipment manufacturer. All equipment, apparatus,
materials, and parts delivered to Site shall be kept in the packing cases or under
protective coverings until required for use. Where so packed or covered the
enclosures shall be clearly marked to identify the contents as to their types, grades,
materials and manufacturer.
44.6.2
44.6.3
location:
leveling and aligning shimming shall be accomplished with a minimum
number of blocks and shims. The number of blocks and shim packs,
their size and location shall be in strict conformance with the
manufacturer's requirements. Leveling blocks and shims, if required,
shall be placed on each side of anchor bolts and at locations where the
base could sag;
(ii)
materials:
leveling blocks and shim stock shall be mild carbon steel saw cut or
sheared with all burrs and rough surfaces removed by filing. Shims of
other type of materials shall be subject to the prior review without
objection by the Project Manager. Wedges for shimming shall not be
permitted;
(iii)
13/34
January 2011
(iv)
(b)
Grouting
Grouting to structural steelwork, machine bases, crane rails, electrical and
mechanical equipment and other electrical and mechanical installations shall
comply with the requirements as follows:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
14/34
January 2011
44.6.4
44.6.5
Final Alignment
(a)
After grout has set for a minimum of five days, the level and alignment of the
equipment shall be checked and adjusted to the correct level and alignment.
Where practicable, shims shall be installed as required for adjustments
between component parts of the equipment without disturbing the bond
between the grout and the underside of the equipment base. Where the
necessary level and alignment adjustments require breaking of the bond
between the equipment base and the grout, original grout shall be removed
and the base shall be re-grouted after completion of leveling and alignment.
(b)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
after the equipment has been lubricated, the equipment shall be slowly
turned over, carefully checked for clearances and improper adjustments
of alignment, and such corrections made as required. After final
alignment is obtained, the equipment shall be operated for a period of
time in accordance with the manufacturer's installation and operating
instructions and the alignment re-checked and adjusted if necessary.
Lubrication
(a)
All machinery and equipment shall be lubricated unless factory lubricated prior
to running the machinery and equipment. The Contractor shall lubricate
machinery and equipment in strict accordance with the recommendations of
the manufacturer using the products specified by the manufacturer. An
itemized list of required lubricants and hydraulic fluids shall be prepared
including quantities, required for all machinery and equipment. The itemized
list shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.
(b)
15/34
January 2011
44.6.6
44.7
44.7.1
General
All Plant, equipment, systems and services provided by the Contractor shall conform
to the energy efficiency and energy conservation requirement as stipulated in the
Codes of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Air Conditioning Installations, Lighting
Installations, Lift and Escalator Systems and Electrical Installations issued by
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department of the Hong Kong SAR
Government.
44.7.2
44.8
WELDING
44.8.1
Procedures
44.8.2
(a)
Full details of proposed procedures for off-Site and on-Site welding shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection. Welding shall
not commence until the procedures have been reviewed without objection by
the Project Manager.
(b)
Welded Joints
(a)
The design of welded joints and connections, and the fabrication of welded
steel parts shall conform to the requirements of a relevant code for structural
steelwork reviewed without objection by the Project Manager, and shall also
be stress-relieved to a code reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager.
(b)
16/34
January 2011
(c)
44.8.3
44.8.4
44.8.5
Surfaces prepared for welding shall exhibit sound metal without laminations
and other injurious defects. Surfaces of plates to be welded shall be free from
rust, grease, mill scale and other foreign matter over a distance of at least 25
mm back from weld edges.
Qualification of Welders
(a)
(b)
If at any time, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the work of any welder
appears questionable, the welder shall be required to undergo, in the
presence of the Project Manager, tests to determine the welder's ability to
undertake satisfactorily the type of work upon which he is engaged. An
independent examiner reviewed without objection by the Project Manager
shall then undertake appropriate tests upon the welded specimens.
Welding Process
(a)
All welding shall be performed by a process which will exclude the atmosphere
from the molten metal and, wherever possible, under procedure control using
automatic machines. Electric arc welding is preferred.
(b)
Welding electrodes for manual electric arc welding shall be of the heavily
coated type, suitable for all positions of welding.
Butt-Welding
Care shall be exercised in aligning and separating edges of members to be joined
by butt-welding in order to assure complete penetration and fusion at the bottom of
the joint. Where fillet welds are employed, members shall fit closely and be held
together during welding.
44.8.6
Cleaning of Welds
After deposition, welds shall be cleaned of slag and shall show uniform sections,
smoothness of weld metal, featheredges without overlay and freedom from porosity,
inclusions and undercut. Visual inspection at the edges and ends of welds shall
indicate sound fusion with the parent metal. In the case of pressure-tight
components, all slag shall be removed by shot blasting.
44.8.7
17/34
January 2011
44.9
44.9.1
Contractors Drawings
(a)
44.9.2
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for review without
objection Contractors Drawings which include detailed drawings of the
equipment and Plant, including control systems and wiring diagrams, supplied
by specialist manufacturers.
(b)
18/34
January 2011
44.9.3
44.9.4
The Contractor shall submit schematic diagrams showing the layout of each
item of equipment clearly identified with all interlocking and related facilities
and interfacing requirements with other services.
(b)
These drawings should include logic sequence piping, ducting and wiring
diagrams showing full details including terminal and wire numbers, liquid and
air flow rates, colour code etc. for all items of electrical/electronic equipment.
Inter-locking, reset or similar facilities shall be clearly shown.
(c)
Line diagrams should also be prepared and submitted for all physical wiring
detailing positions, enclosures, fixings, support, protection, sizes and number
of cables, piping, ducting and equipment for all runs. Contractors Drawings
also include those for switchgear, starter, control/ instrumentation/ motor
control panels/ air-conditioners and fans control/ ventilation facilities
(d)
The schematic layout drawings shall show positions in relation to the building
structure and other plant, equipment and/or installations.
(e)
Contractors Drawings shall include the physical construction and the internal
and external layout of all panels, cabinets, and cubicles including the physical
arrangement of all major and vital components, bus-bars, phase separation
barriers, interconnecting wiring, labels etc.
(f)
(g)
Contractors Drawings shall also include the proposed full wording of all labels
to be installed in Chinese and English characters.
As-Constructed Drawings
(a)
(ii)
individual floor plans and sections to a scale of not less than 1:50
showing all installations accurately located;
(iii)
plant room layouts, with sections, to a scale of not less than 1:20;
(iv)
(v)
sizes and positions of all plant, equipment, switch room, etc. clearly
identified by its service and dimensioned location;
(vi)
19/34
January 2011
(b)
44.10
The Contractor shall provide and install in the main L.V. switch room and
generator room schematic diagrams in the form of non-fade reduced prints
framed underglass to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
All parts of the work related to Sections 44 to 108 shall be painted with first
quality enamel paints, reviewed without objection by the Project Manager
except as otherwise specified or exempted from painting in the Specification.
(b)
The requirement for painting of all pipe work and ductwork is in addition to the
colour coding or banding specified in the Specification.
(c)
(d)
All paint used shall be from one manufacturer reviewed without objection by
the Project Manager. Finishes shall be full gloss unless otherwise specified.
(e)
Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the Contractor shall
submit the colour scheme to the Project Manager for review without objection.
Exposed metalwork shall be wire-brushed and cleaned from rust, scale, dirt
and grease, and shall then be given one priming coat, one undercoat and one
finishing coat of full gloss enamel reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager.
(b)
The priming coat for exposed galvanized iron shall be galvanized iron primer
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
(c)
The priming coat for exposed non-ferrous metalwork shall be suitable for the
metal to which it will be applied and reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager.
All galvanized iron surfaces concealed in roof spaces, false ceilings, building
ducts etc. shall not be painted.
(b)
All black iron and steel surface shall be wire brushed and given one coat of
zinc chromate.
(c)
20/34
January 2011
(b)
Turned parts of valves, controls etc, shall be cleaned and polished to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager.
(c)
The whole of the installation shall be painted in accordance with the following
schedule:
(i)
pipeworks:
Identification
Colour
coding
No.
Control Panels
: Grey
---
Electrical Motors
: As directed
As directed
Electrical Conduits
: As directed
As directed
: As directed
As directed
Where any pipes, ducts, cable containments and the like are visible from any
public area, all such pipes, ducts, cable containments and the like, including
but not limited to associated supports, shall be painted grey (RAL7036) or as
otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
21/34
January 2011
(d)
Where any pipes, ducts, cable containments, equipment and the like are
visible from the Head of Stand road, all such pipes, ducts, cable containments
and the like, including but not limited to associated supports, shall be painted
to grey (RAL7036) or as otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
(e)
All pipes, ducts, cable containments, equipment and the like, including but not
limited to associated supports, which are located in any open air-cooled chiller
space on the plant deck, shall be painted to grey (RAL7036) or as otherwise
instructed by the Project Manager.
(f)
All cable containments, equipment and the like, including but not limited to
associated hanging supports, which are located inside glazed lifts, shall be
painted to dark grey (RAL7036) or as otherwise instructed by the Project
Manager.
(g)
All ceiling mounted fixtures including but not limited to, diffusers, grilles,
sprinkler heads, detectors, remote indicators, modules and visual fire alarm,
lighting fittings, speakers, etc and their associated supports, which are
exposed to view from any public area, shall be painted to grey colour
(RAL7036) or as otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
(h)
All ceiling mounted fixtures including but not limited to, diffusers, grilles,
sprinkler heads, detectors, remote indicators, modules and visual fire alarm,
lighting fittings, speakers, etc and their associated supports, which are
exposed to view inside the toilets, nursing areas, prayer room, bulk head of
retail cabins and F&B cabins, shall be painted to white colour (RAL9016)
coated or as otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
(i)
All sprinkler heads under the escalators shall be silver colour coated by the
manufacturer. Colour sample shall be submitted to the Project Manager for
review without objection.
(j)
44.10.8 Finishes
(a)
22/34
January 2011
(b)
(ii)
internal surfaces of all oil service ferrous pipes and fittings shall be
carefully inspected to ensure that all scale and other particles or
contaminants have been removed and shall then be protected in a
manner reviewed without objection by the Project Manager to prevent
deterioration during transport and subsequent erection;
(iii)
(iv)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
23/34
January 2011
(c)
Galvanizing
(i)
(ii)
(d)
where paint finish is required the coating weight shall be not less
than 120 g/m2 of surface, that is, 60 g/m2 on both sides; or
steel wire, coating thickness shall comply with the tests of BS 443.
method of application:
-
General
The process shall be applicable to supportive rods and brackets, pipework,
ductwork and other equipment that are fabricated on Site and shall include the
following. No site painting shall be applied to all items of electrical equipment
supplied painted. Only touch-up as directed shall be required.
24/34
January 2011
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Preparation
(i)
(ii)
Colour Control
(i)
(ii)
Cleaniness
(i)
(ii)
all surfaces shall be kept clean and free from dust during painting and
drying; and
(iii)
Preparation of Materials
Paints shall be prepared as recommended by the manufacturer. Any paints
showing impurities, lumps, skin or uneven consistency shall be strained
through fine gauge prior to application. Different paints shall not be mixed.
Paints shall be stirred to attain an even consistency before use.
(f)
Protection
Freshly applied paints shall be adequately protected from damage. Wet
Paint signs shall be exhibited and protective barriers shall be provided on Site
where necessary. Surfaces adjacent to those being painted shall be
adequately protected.
(g)
Application
Paints shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations to clean and dry surfaces in dry atmospheric conditions and
after any previous coats have properly hardened.
25/34
January 2011
(h)
(i)
Priming
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Metal surfaces shall be primed on the same day they have been
cleaned;
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
Surface shall be cut in neatly and clearly. Adjacent surfaces shall not
be splashed or marked
(j)
(i)
Type of material;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Paints
(i)
26/34
January 2011
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the final external treatment for insulated pipes and ducts shall be as
indicated on the Employers Drawings or in the Specification;
(ii)
bare ducts, pipes and ducts concealed in false ceiling or ducts not
normally accessible and/or seen need not be painted but appropriate
colour code indications shall be applied;
(iii)
(iv)
all piping and ductwork run in normally visual areas shall be painted in
the appropriate colour throughout and identified with appropriate colour
code bands;
(v)
(vi)
27/34
January 2011
(b)
(c)
Identification of Pipelines
(i)
colour code numbers stated in the table below are those of BS 4800
colour code reference.
(1) Basic Identification Colour
BS 4800
Green
12D45
Silver
10A03
Brown
06C39
Yellow Ochre
08C35
Violet
22C37
Light Blue
20E51
Black
00E51
Orange
06E51
04E53
Yellow
08E51
Auxiliary
18E53
04D45
Emerald Green
14E53
Yellow
10E53
(ii)
(iii)
28/34
January 2011
(d)
(iv)
(v)
Schedule of Colour
Colour numbers as stated in the following table are those of BS 4800
Schedule of paint colours for ready paints.
Description
Basic
Colour
Basic
Colour
Drinking
Green
Blue
Green
Cooling
(Primary)
Green
White
Green
Boiler Feed
Green
Crimson
White
Crimson
Green
Condensate
Green
Crimson
White
Crimson
Green
Green
White
Emerald
Green
White
Green
Mains
Supply, Cold
Green
White
Blue
White
Green
Mains
Supply, Hot
Green
White
Blue
White
Green
Pipework:
Water Chilled
Sea, River
Untreated
Fire Fighting
Green
Green
Safety Red
Gases In either
gaseous or
liquefied
condition
(exception)
Yellow Ochre
Compressed Air
Light Blue
Steam
Silver Grey
Oil Lubricating
Gas
Town
Brown
Emerald Green
Brown
Yellow Ochre
Emerald Green
Yellow
Ochre
Drainage
Black
Violet
Green
29/34
January 2011
(e)
(f)
(g)
44.11
FACILITY IDENTIFICATION
(b)
(c)
The first field will contain up to a four-character reference that will be the
Contract number.
(d)
The second field will contain up to a three-letter code that will identify the type
of facility. The codes will be listed in the AAHK's Facility Management and
CADD Standard Manual.
(e)
The third field will contain up to a four-digit number that will identify the
individual item. Where there are five or more identical units of one item, for
example, light fittings, the same number may be used for each item subject to
review without objection by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall provide a Facility Identification Label (FIL) for every
facility. They shall be of multi-layer formica or other similar material, subject to
review by the Project Manager, capable of withstanding the environment in
which the facility is located and retaining legibility for a minimum of ten years.
30/34
January 2011
(b)
Each FIL shall be engraved with the appropriate FIN and shall be of sufficient
size, generally not less than 100mm long by 20mm high, to permit adequate
spacing between characters and fixings to ensure legibility. Each FIL shall be
attached to the facility at mounting positions, reviewed without objection by the
Project Manager, by brass roundhead bolts and nuts or brass woodscrews, or
similar fixings reviewed without objection by the Project Manager. Adhesives
or self-tapping screws shall not be permitted.
(c)
The Contractor shall submit one sample of each proposed FIL to the Project
Manager for review.
(d)
All lettering used on FIL shall be "Helvetica Bold" capitals, 10mm high, with
black letters on a white background unless otherwise specified.
(e)
In the event the Works include replacing a facility, the Contractor shall fix to
the replacement item a FIL bearing the same FIN as the defective item, unless
instructed otherwise by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall submit a Facility Data Sheet (FDS) for each facility with
a FIN to the Project Manager for review without objection. The FDS shall be
provided in a database format and shall contain full details of the facility, with
information not less than that shown in Table 44.3.
Table 44.3: Minimum Information Required on Facility Data Sheet
General Description of Facility
Attribute
Description
Facility FIN
Facility Name
Facility Description
Facility Location
Facility Value
Installation Date
Date of Acceptance
Manufacturer
Supplier/Vendor
Contractor
Manufacturers Model/Serial
Number
Performance
Drawings
31/34
January 2011
Physical Data
Attribute
Unit
Shipment
Height
Depth
Width
Diameter*
Mm
Weight
Kg
Quantity
Number off
Operating
Description
Part Number
Part Name
Part Description
Quantity
Supplier/Vendor
Supplier of part
Manufacturer
Manufacturer of part
Unit Price
Currency
Unit
Acoustic Level
dB (A)
Heat Dissipation
KW
32/34
January 2011
*Electrical Requirement
Attribute
Unit
Voltage
Frequency
Hz
*Power Consumption
Attribute
Unit
Current
Power
Power Factor
*Equipment Reliability
Attribute
Unit
hour
hour
Unit
Warranty Period
month
Preventive
Frequency
Maintenance month
*Where applicable
44.11.4 Practice of Labeling
(a)
(b)
(c)
Labels shall be attached to valves (or pipe adjacent thereto) with a light gauge
metal band or alternatively to be screwed to the insulated valve box where
provided. These labels shall state the valve number.
(d)
Distribution boards, starters etc. shall be labelled indicating the circuit number,
phase and item controlled.
(e)
Label shall be screwed or riveted to sheet metal. Adhesive fixing shall not be
permitted. Self-tapping screws are not acceptable.
(f)
Details of exact lettering shall be agreed with the Project Manager prior to
manufacture.
33/34
January 2011
SERVICE PENETRATIONS
(a)
(b)
Where pipe work penetrates the building fabric, the penetration shall be
detailed as follows :
-
34/34
January 2011
45.1
45.2
The Hong Kong International Airport receives power supply from CLP via a
11kV network or 380V. The system voltage at the HV side is 11kV +10%, 2.5% 3-phase. A number of transformers have been installed to step down
the voltage for the AAHK equipment and internal electrical distribution system
within the periphery of the airport. The nominal power supply for the internal
electrical distribution network is from 380V 6%, 3-phase 4-wire, unless
otherwise specified.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The control supply shall be 24V, 1-phase, 2-wire, 50Hz. Control voltages less
than 24V shall be permitted wherever such voltages are design features of
factory-wired equipment that form part of the supplied equipment.
(h)
Interlocking between motor control center shall be carried out at 24V, 1-phase,
2-wire, 50Hz through interposing relays. Voltage transformers shall be
provided as applicable.
Power supply from CLP Power Hong Kong Co. Ltd. will be at 11kV or 380V,
50 Hz, 3-phase.
(b)
(c)
(d)
1/2
January 2011
(e)
(f)
Wherever circuit protection devices are installed without any earth leakage
detection capability, the devices shall be so arranged to trip on earth leakage
with the over-current protection by ensuring low earth loop impedance in
accordance with the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations of
EMSD.
(g)
The set levels of all adjustable tripping devices shall be clearly marked on
equipment. Records of set levels shall be submitted to the Project Manager for
record.
(h)
2/2
January 2011
GENERAL
(a)
The LV switchboards shall be self-contained floor standing extensible multicubicle type assembled from compartments housing the circuit breakers,
fused switchgear, relays, busbars, controls etc. suitable for services condition
as specified hereinafter and complying with British and International Standards
and Codes of Practice.
(b)
LV switchboard shall comply with the general power supply conditions referred
to in Section 45.2 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification,
unless otherwise specified.
(c)
(d)
:
:
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
All bolts, studs, nuts and washers shall be high tensile stainless steel or
cadmium plated the same as those used in type testing. When tolerance
limitations preclude plating, corrosion-resistant steel shall be used.
(i)
Washers shall be of lock type and provided under all nuts and bolt heads
unless otherwise specified. Bolts and studs shall protrude by at least one
thread pitch but not more than five thread pitches beyond the outside face of
nuts.
(j)
Where circuit protection devices are not provided with earth leakage detection,
the circuits shall trip on earth leakage by means of the over-current protection
by ensuring low earth loop impedance in accordance with the EMSD Code of
Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.
1/28
January 2011
(k)
46.2
The Contractor shall arrange all components, including but not limited to, the
ACBs, MCCBs, fused switches, switches and busbars, in a simple manner to
facilitate subsequent operation and maintenance of the LV switchboard.
Cable access and connection shall be provided for both top / bottom entry of
main incoming cables and top exit for outgoing cables unless otherwise shown
on the Employers Drawings. The LV switchboard shall be assembled and
factory tested in Hong Kong prior to delivery to the site.
BS 88 : Part 2
BS EN 60051-1/IEC 60051-1
BS 159
BS 1432
BS 1433
BS 2757/IEC 60085
BS 5685
Electricity meters
BS 6004
BS 6231
BS 7264
BS 7430
BS 7671
BS 9564
2/28
cables
for
IEE
January 2011
BS EN 55014
BS EN 60044
Instrument transformers
BS EN 60269/IEC 60269
Low-voltage fuses
BS EN 60439/IEC 60439
BS EN 60439-1/IEC 60439-1
BS EN 60622
BS EN 60831
BS EN 60871
BS EN 60898/IEC 60898
BS EN 60947/IEC 60947
Specification
controlgear
low-voltage
switchgear
and
BS EN 60947-2/IEC 60947-2
switchgear
and
BS EN 60947-6-1
IEC 60189
IEC 60227
IEC 60255
Electrical relays
IEC 60364
IEC 60521
3/28
for
switchgear
wires
with
and
PVC
January 2011
46.3
MATERIALS
46.3.1
Switchboards
(a)
(b)
(c)
The complete LV switchboard shall comply with Form 3b for the non-essential
Section and Form 4 for the essential Section according to BS EN 60439-1.
(d)
For Form 4 segregation, the busbars, risers and droppers, and cable
terminations including cable lugs, bolts and nuts shall be fully insulated. This
shall be achieved by applying heat shrinkable materials to the busbars and
shrouds at the busbar joints and cable terminations.
(e)
(f)
(g)
All doors shall have concealed hinges and shall be interlocked with the switch
mechanism. Dust-excluding gasket of neoprene or materials with the same
function and performance shall be provided for all doors. Doors shall not be
operable without switching off of the corresponding switchgear, including
ACBs, MCCBs, fuse switches and switch fuses, etc.
(h)
Proper arrangement for air circulation shall be made within each compartment
of the LV switchboard and equipment shall be adequately sized to ensure that
the internal temperature of the LV switchboard shall be within the operating
ranges of all electrical and electronic components including switchgear,
controlgear, busbars, relays, and timers inside the LV switchboard. Ventilating
louvers with internal screen shall be provided at the side or back of the
switchboard but not in the front. No forced ventilation to any components of
the switchboard is allowed.
(i)
(j)
4/28
January 2011
(k)
Each switchboard shall be provided with one or more metal plates, marked in
a durable manner and located in a place such that they are visible and legible
when the switchboard is installed. The following information shall be given on
the nameplates:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
BS EN 60439-1;
(iv)
type of current;
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
short-circuit strength;
(viii)
(ix)
(l)
(m)
All steelwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, oil, grease, dirt, scale,
rust and other contaminants by an approved method, such as chemical
pickling, and shall be epoxy powder coated immediately at the manufacturers
works. The epoxy powder coating shall be not less than 50 microns thick.
(n)
The final colours for the equipment shall be the manufacturers standard
colours, unless otherwise specified.
(o)
(p)
The gland plates and supporting steelwork shall have sufficient strength to
limit deflection of the gland plates to not greater than 20mm after cable
installation.
(q)
Where the main power circuits incorporate plug and socket connectors,
interlocks shall be provided to ensure that plugs are fully engaged before the
circuit can be switched on. The circuit shall be switched off before the plug
can be withdrawn.
(r)
Cable terminations and space for future terminations shall be appropriate for
the sizes of cable shown on the Employers Drawings and shall not be limited
to compliance with BS EN 60439.
5/28
January 2011
46.3.2
(s)
(t)
(u)
(v)
(w)
Busbar
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
6/28
January 2011
46.3.3
(b)
Performance and
requirements:
electrical
Number of poles
characteristic
shall
meet
the
following
: 415V AC minimum
Rated frequency
: 50 Hz
Utilization category
: B
: 100% of Icu
Tripping mechanism
(c)
ACBs shall be provided with hand charged and motorised spring charger
closing mechanism using AC system voltage power source and push button.
(d)
(e)
ACBs shall be of the horizontal withdrawable pattern with three positions for
CONNECTED/TEST/ISOLATED. ACBs can only be closed fully when in the
CONNECTED position. In the TEST position, it shall be possible to operate
the ACB (for ACB with motorised charging spring only) to close and test the
secondary and auxiliary contacts, but not the main isolating contacts.
In addition, ACBs shall also meet the following requirements:
(i)
electrical connection between the ACB and the busbar system of the
LV switchboard shall be of plug and socket type with automatic
screening shutters to shield the fixed terminals in the LV switchboard
when the ACB is withdrawn. The shutters shall be properly labelled to
indicate whether they are for incoming or outgoing terminals and
provided with padlock facilities;
7/28
January 2011
(f)
(iii)
live parts of the ACB shall not be accessible from the front of the LV
switchboard unless the ACB is drawn out; and
(iv)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
it shall not be possible to initiate the closing action of the energy stored
spring mechanism until the spring has been fully charged; and
(v)
(g)
A 30V DC shunt trip coil shall be provided for tripping of the ACBs. A trip
circuit healthy lamp shall be provided for each circuit breaker. 30V DC closing
coil shall be provided for automatic closing.
(h)
The shunt trip coil shall be capable of tripping ACBs under all conditions.
Power supply to the shunt trip and closing coils shall be fed from battery
equipment.
(i)
(j)
46.3.4
(ii)
(i)
(ii)
one single element induction type relay for earth fault protection where
indicated on the Employers Drawings; and
(iii)
Fused Switchgear
Fused switchgear shall be suitable for use in LV switchboard assembly. Refer
Section 47 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
8/28
January 2011
46.3.5
46.3.6
46.3.7
(b)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
the changeover system between the normal and standby sources shall
be as follows:
-
9/28
January 2011
46.3.8
46.3.9
(vii)
(viii)
All CTs shall be conformed and tested to BS EN 60044 and be rated for Class
B temperature rise and a primary voltage of 660V.
(b)
(c)
The secondary circuit of each CT shall be earthed at one point only. Means
shall be provided for disconnection of these earth connections at readily
accessible positions for testing.
(d)
(e)
Measurement CTs shall have rated secondary current of 5A and rated output
suitably matched with the burden of the measuring instrument. The accuracy
shall be Class 1 or better.
(f)
Current transformer provided in plastic castings and of the split core type will
not be accepted. Protective current transformer shall have a short-time rating
of 50 kA for 3 seconds.
(g)
Type test certificate for magnetizing current and rated accuracy factor shall be
supplied for each type and ratio of current transformer.
Protective Relays
(a)
(b)
(ii)
Very Inverse
(iii)
The digital relay shall have self supervision function through a fail-safe relay. It
shall be capable of recording fault data once there is fault detection or
tripping. Trip test, parameter settings and output relay assignments shall be
protected by password. Trip test shall be done on the front panel while
parameter settings and output relay assignments shall be done either on the
front panel or by PC software. The digital relay shall have the ability to display
measuring values as primary quantities.
10/28
January 2011
(c)
The digital relay shall have remote monitoring and parameters setting features
and shall be able to link up with PC-based Building Management System via a
communication port RS485.
(d)
(e)
11/28
(f)
The digital protection relay shall comply with the following requirements:
(i)
Overcurrent Setting
Power Consumption
- Standby
3W
- Operating
5W
AC Burden (Maximum)
- 0.2VA at In = 1A
- 0.1VA at In = 5A
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
The digital relay shall be suitable for operating on D.C. power supply at
16V - 360V;
(vii)
(viii)
The digital relay shall be capable of resetting the fault either on the
relay front panel, by external voltage supply or by PC software; and
(ix)
The digital relay shall have circuit breaker failure protection supervision
of phase currents during tripping. Trip indicators shall be provided for
identification of the type of fault condition.
12/28
January 2011
Relays shall be plug-in type, rack mounted, provided with cable connection
sockets and anchored by quick fastening vibration-proof devices.
(b)
All contacts shall be double breaking type. Relay coils shall be suitable for AC
or DC operation as required.
(c)
(d)
Each relay shall have a minimum of two pairs of normally open and two pairs
of normally closed spare contacts.
(e)
(b)
Ammeters shall be capable of carrying their full load current without undue
heating and shall not be damaged passage of fault current at the maximum
fault levels of the switchgear.
(c)
All ammeters shall have a continuous overload capability of 120% of the upper
limit of the scale for two hours. They shall be 10 mm diameter and have 90
scale dial, with external zero adjustment.
(d)
46.3.13 Voltmeter
(a)
(b)
The range shall be suitable for line voltage and phase voltage measurements.
They shall be 100 mm in diameter and have 90 scale dial, with external zero
adjustment.
(c)
13/28
January 2011
The ammeter selector switch shall be mounted on the front of the panel and
shall be of the rotary type with make-before-break contacts for selection to
read Brown-Black-Grey-neutral currents with L1-L2-L3-N marked clearly on
the switch.
(b)
(c)
The voltmeter selector switch shall be mounted on the front of the panel and
shall be of the rotary type with break-before-make contacts for selection to
measure Brown-Black, Black-Grey, Grey-Brown and Brown, Black and Grey
phase voltages with L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1, L1-L2-L3 marked clearly on the
switch.
(b)
All digital multifunction power meters shall provide true RMS values.
Information provided by each digital multifunction power meter shall include
frequency, current, demand current, voltage, real power, reactive power,
apparent power, demand power, power factor, accumulated energy,
accumulated reactive energy, and total harmonic distortion (THD) of each
current and voltage, all updated at the same rate. Digital multifunction power
meters shall be microprocessor-based.
The meter shall be able to
communicate with the GBMS / SCADA System by means of plugging in a
communication module and without further modification of the basic unit.
(b)
(c)
Replacement of meter shall not require the switching off of the respective
switchgear. All wiring shall be routed to allow easy removal of the cable
connectors for maintenance. Current transformers shorting block shall be
provided such that current inputs can be disconnected without open circuiting
the current transformers. The shorting block shall be wired so as not to affect
the operation of protective relays.
(d)
The maximum and minimum values of the each parameter measured by the
unit shall be stored in memory. The values in memory shall be recalled and
displayed upon pressing a switch on the meter. Lithium battery, with a battery
life not less than 7 years, shall power the memory.
14/28
January 2011
(e)
Digital multifunction power meters shall comply with the following technical
requirements:
Maximum direct voltage input
: On current
(secondary);
Measurement
transformers,
In
5A
: Voltage
: 0.5%;
Current
: 0.5%;
Power
: 1%;
Service condition
Frequency
: 1%;
Energy
: 1%;
Communication
(f)
The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a rate high
enough to provide valid data for waveform analysis and true-RMS metering
accurate beyond the 30th harmonic (fundamental of 50Hz).
(g)
(h)
All setup parameters required by the digital multifunction power meters shall
be stored in non-volatile memory and retained in the event of a auxiliary
power supply interruption. Any battery or other device used to provide nonvolatile memory shall be serviceable from the front of the digital
multifunction power meter and servicing shall not require removing the
circuit monitor from the equipment in which it is mounted.
15/28
January 2011
(i)
The auxiliary power supply shall be provided from the AC power within the
LV switchboard.
(j)
The digital multifunction power meter shall accept inputs from industry
standard instrument transformers (5A secondary CTs).
(k)
The digital multifunction power meter shall meet the following requirements:
(l)
(i)
(ii)
(m) The digital multifunction power meter shall be applied in three-phase, four
wired systems. A fourth CT input shall be available to measure neutral or
ground current. In four-wire connection, the digital multifunction power meter
shall utilise the circuit neutral common reference and not earth ground to
provide metering accuracy.
(n)
(o)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) Frequency
(viii) Demand current, per phase and three-phase average
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
16/28
January 2011
(p)
Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed from the
from the front of the digital multifunction power meter:
(i)
(ii)
Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent power (kVA)
(iii)
(q)
The digital multifunction power meter shall be equipped with all the
necessary equipment and devices to enable all of the above monitoring and
control signals to be transmitted to and from the GBMS / SCADA system.
(r)
The digital multifunction power meter shall have a 25 year life. The
microprocessor-base shall be designed to have allowable replacement with
the latest model without a complete change of the power meter.
The push-button switches shall comply with and be tested and certified to BS
9564. The electrical ratings shall be 500V AC or 250V DC as appropriate.
Push buttons for alarm duty shall be minimum of 2A rated and that for control
duty 10A rated.
(b)
Push buttons shall be individually flush mounted units with metallic chromium
plated and polished solid brass body and ring, circular tri shape and
approximately 20 mm in diameter. All push buttons used shall be identical in
shape and size, unless otherwise specified.
Indicating lamps shall be individual flush mounted units. Lamps shall have
chromium plated and polished solid brass body and ring, with metallic
threaded section, and shall be circular in shape of approximately 20 mm in
diameter. All indicating lamps used shall be identical in size and shape unless
otherwise specified.
(b)
All indicating lamps, luminous push buttons, selector and control switches
shall be of the heavy duty switchboard type, suitably insulated and rated for
the voltage level and current rating intended.
(c)
The indicating lamps shall be designed to permit removal of lamp lenses and
bulb from the front of the units without the need of any special tool and
opening of the panel doors.
17/28
January 2011
(d)
(e)
(b)
Delay trip devices shall only operate in the event of the mains failing to supply
a voltage of sufficient magnitude to keep the contactor closed and/or to
prevent the no volt trip from operating The delay shall be to 5 seconds
(adjustable) and shall be charged capacitor latch devices.
(c)
Switches for circuit breaker control shall be of the pistol grip type, with spring
return to the neutral position, and with an interlock to prevent repetitive closing
without moving first to the trip position.
The power factor correction capacitors in each set of automatic power factor
correction equipment shall comply with the following:
Rated voltage
Rated Frequency
Rated output
Step output
Standard
(b)
:
:
:
:
:
380V, 3 phase;
50 Hz;
As specified on Employers Drawings;
50 kVAr; and
BS 7264, BS EN 60831, BS EN 60871, BS
EN 60931.
18/28
January 2011
Harmonics
C/K value
PF reversal point
No-voltage release
Connection
Mounting
Temperature range
Power consumption
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
The capacitors shall comply with the requirement of IEC 60831 and IEC
60070. Each unit shall be fitted with an internal discharge device which shall
reduce the residual voltage to 50V or less after the capacitor is disconnected
form the supply within 1 min. The total capacitor losses shall not exceed 0.5
Watt per kVAr.
19/28
January 2011
(g)
(b)
Panel heaters shall include a fuse and rotary ON/OFF selector switch,
thermostatic controls and a lamp to indicate the energization of the heaters at
the front.
(c)
Panel heaters shall operate from the mains supply derived from the LV
switchboard.
(b)
The battery charger shall be dual rectifier charger of constant potential type,
complete with the following as a minimum. All alarms and protection modules
shall be in printed circuit card with solid state chassis, easily dismounted and
replaced.
(i)
(ii)
surge suppressor;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
When under the boost charge selection, the battery shall be fully charged from
the fully discharged condition within 8 hours.
20/28
January 2011
(c)
The storage battery bank shall be of heavy-duty industrial type design for the
purpose intended. Battery cells shall be maintenance free, rechargeable, high
performance nickel cadmium type having a proven service life of at least 7
years.
(d)
Under fully charged condition, the battery shall be capable of tripping the
associated ACBs and controlgear consecutively at least 20 times without
being discharged to a level where damage may be caused to the battery. The
battery shall be sized to operate under the specified range of ambient
temperatures.
(e)
The output voltage of the battery bank shall be monitored by a control circuit
which shall raise a local and remote alarm when the battery/charger fails.
(f)
46.4
SUBMISSIONS
46.4.1
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
21/28
January 2011
(vi)
equipment weight;
(b)
(ix)
(x)
proposal for testing procedures and report format for testing of the LV
switchboard at the manufacturer's works and on Site.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(x)
(xi)
22/28
January 2011
indicating lamps;
(ii)
control relays;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
46.5
WORKMANSHIP
46.5.1
Busbar
46.5.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
Jointing of sections of busbars shall be made by stainless steel bolts and nuts
or clamps, silver plated or tin-plated at joints whenever applicable. Washers
and locknuts to all bolts shall be provided. The length of overlap at joints shall
not be less than the width of busbars to be jointed.
Cable Arrangement
(a)
All the necessary cable lugs etc. shall be provided and fixed in positions on
mounting plates and straps, to suit the types and directions of entry of the
cables.
(b)
Cable conductors shall be arranged for all circuits within the LV switchboard in
a tidy manner and all conductors shall be secured mechanically at regular
intervals to restrain any movement of the conductors, either under operation
conditions (e.g. thermal expansion, vibration, etc.) or due to short circuit in any
one of the circuits, that may cause any damage or short circuit to any healthy
bare live parts in the LV switchboard.
23/28
January 2011
(c)
46.5.3
46.5.4
Cable Terminations
(a)
Insulated conductors shall not rest against bare live parts or sharp edges.
(b)
All LV terminals shall be shrouded and any other terminals which may remain
live with the mains isolated by heat shrinkable insulation.
Adequate
cautionary signs shall be provided.
(c)
When the external cables are designated as being either XLPE or PVC
insulated multi-core cables, armoured or un-armoured, the appropriate units of
the switchboard shall be supplied with suitable brass compression glands of
the correct sizes.
(d)
Compression glands for XLPE or PVC insulated and sheathed twin and
multi-core cables shall comply with BS 6121. All component parts of a cable
gland shall be from the same manufacturer.
(e)
Where cables are single core, the gland plates shall be of a non-ferrous metal.
(f)
When plug and socket connections are used in the main circuits, interlocks
shall be incorporated to ensure that plugs are fully engaged before the
associated circuit can be put into service.
(g)
Cable connections and small wiring shall comply with BS 5472 and BS 6231.
(h)
Each connection shall have separate incoming and outgoing terminals and no
more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal.
All wiring shall be bunched neatly by nylon type cable ties and installed in PVC
trunkings or flexible PVC tubing. Colour coded cable shall be used for
identification.
(b)
Wiring across door hinges shall be enclosed by a flexible PVC tubing and loop
wiring to permit the opening of doors and removal of components for
inspection without disconnecting and over-flexing of the cables.
(c)
Supplies for control circuits shall be taken from within the compartment of the
related item of switchgear and protected by a HRC cartridge fuse unit. The
control fuse and the wiring shall be completed with labels and wire numbers
for circuit tracing and trouble shooting purposes.
(d)
Small wiring shall be neatly bunched and cleated in harness form, using
purpose-made plastic cable ties, or shall be enclosed in purpose made plastic
small wiring trunking. Metal 'buckle clips' shall not be used. Wiring cleated to
metal surfaces shall be spaced off or insulated from the metal. Wiring to
swing doors or other moveable items shall be flexible cables neatly bunched
and constrained by a flexible harness or loom.
24/28
January 2011
46.5.5
46.5.6
46.5.7
(e)
All small wiring shall be of stranded copper with a cross sectional area of not
less than 1.5 sq. mm with PVC insulation in accordance with BS 6231, Type B
or fire rated cables for the low voltage switchboard / motor control centre
serving the fire sevices equipment.
(f)
Wiring Terminations
(a)
Cables having the same number shall be terminated at adjacent terminals and
interconnected by means of cable jumpers at the terminal block.
(b)
Terminals which may remain live when the equipment is isolated from the
mains supply shall be shielded and labeled adequately from accidental
contact.
(c)
(b)
Fuses and links shall be mounted in a readily accessible position within the LV
switchboard. Fuses and links, functionally associated with the same circuit
shall be grouped.
(c)
At least 10% of the total number of fuses and links and not less than 2 spare
fuses and links shall be provided for each rating of fuses and links to be
provided for the LV switchboard. Spare fuses and links shall be fitted in clips
within a dedicated compartment of the LV switchboard.
Terminal Blocks
(a)
(b)
Terminal blocks shall be grouped according to the function and voltage of the
control circuit., Each group shall be segregated from every other groups.
(c)
(d)
At least 10% of the total number of terminal blocks and not less than 2 spare
terminals for each terminal block, shall be provided.
25/28
January 2011
46.5.8
46.5.9
(e)
The incoming cable cores shall be terminated at the lower or outer side of the
block, the outgoing cable cores at the upper or inner side of the terminal block,
and cable links on any free side.
(f)
(g)
All spare contacts shall be wired to terminal blocks suitably positioned for
external wiring.
Earthing
(a)
Equipotential bonding shall be provided for all doors, cover plates, etc., to
ensure earth continuity. The circuit protective conductor shall be sized
according to the maximum cross-Section of supply lead to the equipment
attached to the doors, cover plates, etc., and in any case not less than 2.5
mm2.
(b)
(c)
An external earth terminal shall be provided on the outside of both ends of the
LV switchboard for earthing connection to the electrical earth.
(d)
For each switch room, and generator room, a purpose made earthing device
shall be supplied by the Contractor to replace the air circuit breaker for
earthing the outgoing busbars when the latter is removed from the housing.
The device shall be provided with padlocks to secure it in the connected
position. Portable earthing leads shall not be accepted as an alternative to
the purpose made earthing device. A wooden box shall be provided for
storage of the earthing equipment.
Label
(a)
(b)
The wording of the labels shall describe the type of unit, the designation, the
current rating and the circuit identification in a clear and concise manner. A
schedule of labels shall be submitted for review without objection by the
Project Manager before engraving is carried out.
(c)
Warning labels shall be provided on the rear panels with white lettering on a
red background in both English and Chinese characters denoting DANGER
380V. Similar warning labels shall be provided for all live parts, including test
terminal blocks.
26/28
January 2011
(d)
Warning labels at the front and in the cabling compartment shall be provided
for each automatic/remote closing or changeover switch denoting BEWARE AUTOMATIC CLOSING.
(e)
Warning labels shall be provided for the terminals of the DC supply control
circuit which may remain live when the main equipment is isolated from the
mains supply to reduce the risk of accidental contact.
46.5.10 Finishes
The finished coating of the LV switchboard shall be made good any damage and
painted by hand to its original finish color on completion of the installation as
specified in Section 46.3.1 (m) and (n).
46.5.11 Wiring Diagrams
A LV switchboard wiring diagram showing the compartment layout with busbar and
circuit arrangement shall be provided as if viewed from the point of access to the
enclosure. The wiring diagram shall be suitably treated to prevent deterioration from
dirt and age, and shall be securely fastened to the inside of the access door of that
compartment.
46.5.12 Internal and Control Wiring
(a)
All cables shall be adequately rated single core multi-strand conductors of not
less than 1.5 mm2, run on PVC cleats or trunkings.
(b)
Sleeve type cable markers shall be fitted to both ends of each length of cable
to denote its function. The function letter shall be followed by a number
identifying the individual wire. Each branch of any connection shall bear the
same identification mark. Where it is necessary to identify branches which are
common, different identification marks for the branches shall be employed
only if there are common through links or are connected to separate terminals
which are then common by removable connections. Numbering shall read
from the terminal outwards on all wire. Circuit function letters and wire
numbers shall be in accordance with the following table:
Circuit Function Letters
Wire Number
J D.C. supply
1-69
H A.C. supply
1-69
27/28
January 2011
46.6
(a)
The Contractor shall provide one complete set of spare fuses for each rating
of fuse switch installed for each LV switchboard. The Contractor shall install
on the wall inside the Switch Rooms, a wooden board with brass hooks for
hanging the spare fuses. The board shall be smooth on both front and edges,
and shall be painted subject to the review without objection the Project
Manager. All fuses shall be supplied by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
frame and post the as-fitted control circuit diagrams and schematic wiring
diagrams (at least A2 size) inside each switch room.
(b)
The Contractor shall confirm that the overall size of each LV switchboard can
be installed in the respective switch room in compliance with the Specification,
Power Supply Companys and EMSDs requirements.
(c)
The Contractor shall allow adequate spacing and make provision inside the
switchboard for the installation and connection of the Power Supply
Companys meters and other equipment including the metering panels,
marshalling boxes, current transformers and link boxes etc. in accordance
with the Power Supply Companys requirements.
(d)
The Contractor shall provide the generator fault remote alarm and the remote
lamp indication of Generator Fault, Generator Running, and Essential
Power On from the generator to the corresponding LV switchboards.
28/28
January 2011
47.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
All switch panel boards and distribution panel boards shall be factory
assembled.
(g)
(h)
(i)
1/13
January 2011
47.2
BS 88 : Part 2
BS 91
BS 1432
BS 1433
BS 4293
BS 5486 : Part 11
Low-voltage
switchgear
and
assemblies.
Specification
for
requirements of fuseboards
BS 5486 : Part 12
Low-voltage
switchgear
and
controlgear
assemblies.
Specification
for
particular
requirements of type-tested miniature circuitbreaker boards
BS 7671
BS EN 60269/IEC 60269
Low-voltage fuses
BS EN 60439/IEC 60439
BS EN 60439-1
BS EN 60529/IEC 60529
BS EN 60898/IEC 60898
BS EN 60947-2/IEC 60947-2
2/13
controlgear
particular
switchgear
switchgear
and
and
January 2011
IEC 60755
BS EN 61008
BS EN 61009
47.3
MATERIALS
47.3.1
residual
current
(a)
All fused switchgear and isolating switches shall comply with and be type
tested to BS EN 60947-3 for uninterrupted duty and all live parts shall be fully
screened from the front.
(b)
All fused switchgear and isolating switches shall have the following electrical
characteristics:
rated operation voltage
: 380/220V;
rated frequency
: 50Hz;
: 415V;
: 40 kA;
utilization category
(c)
Fused switchgear and switches shall be triple pole with neutral link, triple pole
with switched neutral, double pole or single pole with neutral link, as specified.
The neutral link shall be accessible and detachable from the front of the fused
switchgear panel.
(d)
Fused switchgear and switches shall be totally enclosed type and suitable for
surface mounting or installation in a switchboard cubicle as specified. The
cases and doors shall be manufactured from at least 1.6 mm thick galvanized
sheet steel finished and rust proofed. The doors shall be gasketed and fitted
with ball catch lock or equal reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager.
3/13
January 2011
47.3.2
(e)
Fused switchgear and switches shall have mechanical interlocks between the
door and the switch operating mechanism and shall be so arranged that the
door cannot be opened with the switch in the ON position. Similarly, it shall
not be possible to close the switch with the cubicle door open, except that
provision shall be made within the cubicle to defeat the mechanical inter-lock
and close the switch with the door in the open position for test purposes.
(f)
(g)
(h)
An earth terminal shall be provided for every fused switchgear and isolator.
MCCBs shall comply with and be type tested to BS EN 60947-2 or IEC 609472.
(b)
: 380/220V;
rated frequency
: 50Hz;
: 415V;
: IEC 60947-2
(ii)
4/13
January 2011
47.3.3
(d)
(e)
(f)
Where shunt release is specified, this shall operate correctly at all values of
supply voltage between 70% and 120% of the nominal supply voltage under
all conditions of the MCCB up to the short-circuit breaking capacity of this
circuit breaker. MCCBs incorporating shunt release shall be provided with
block terminals and shunt release lead cables.
(g)
(h)
(i)
All MCCBs rated at 200A and above shall be completed with built-in earth fault
protection.
(j)
(k)
MCBs shall comply with and be type tested to BS EN 60898 or IEC 60898.
(b)
(c)
Cable terminals of the MCBs shall be at top and bottom of the units with
access from front, and suitable for terminating the size of solid or stranded
conductor in accordance with BS EN 60898.
(d)
Unless otherwise specified, lighting and power circuits fed from MCB boards
shall be protected by Type B MCBs. Motor circuits shall be protected by Type
C MCBs. Transformers, charging equipment and X-ray machines shall be
protected by type D MCBs. The type, thermal and magnetic characteristic
shall be of an equivalent technical performance to those detailed in BS EN
60898 and BS 7671. Energy limit class of MCB shall be class 3 according to
BS EN 60898.
5/13
January 2011
47.3.4
(e)
(f)
(g)
MCBs shall be provided with facility for locking the operating toggle on either
ON or OFF positions.
(h)
(b)
RCCBs shall be designed to the rail mounting method inside the distribution
board.
(c)
RCCBs shall have minimum short circuit making and breaking capacity of 3 kA
with rated residual making and breaking capacity to be ten (10) times the rated
current of RCCBs or 500A, whichever is the greater.
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Unless otherwise specified, the rated residual operated current shall be 30mA.
(h)
6/13
January 2011
47.3.5
47.3.6
Residual Current-operated
Protection (RCBOs)
Circuit
Breakers
with
Integral
Overcurrent
(a)
(b)
RCBOs shall be designed to the rail mounting method inside the distribution
board.
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(b)
The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link carrier shall be shrouded so
that accidental contact with live parts cannot be made when the cartridge is
removed. It shall be possible to change fuses with the circuit alive without
danger of contact with live parts.
(c)
(d)
For power factor correction capacitors, fuse links shall have fusing factor not
less than 1.5.
(e)
Fuse and link bases and carriers shall be of plastic moulded insulating
material of a make reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
Ceramic materials will not be accepted. Fuse bases and carriers shall have a
construction different from those for links for the neutral as to prevent wrong
fitting of fuses and links.
(f)
Fuse bases and carriers shall be colour coded, white for isolating link, light
green for control and black for all other fuses, with phase indication.
7/13
January 2011
47.3.7
47.3.8
(g)
Fuses and links in the same circuit shall be mounted in adjacent positions in
the same row Fuses for controls and voltmeters shall be mounted on the front
of the panel by back-connected fuse holders.
(h)
(i)
Distribution Fuseboard
(a)
Distribution fuseboards shall comply with BS EN 60439-3 and shall be factorybuilt assemblies, type tested and certified to have a fused short circuit of not
less than 16.5kA at a power factor of not exceeding 0.3 lagging.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Phase and neutral busbars shall be tinned copper and shall be adequately
supported and secured with the necessary strength to withstand through faults
of a rating equal to that of the fuse fault rating and of continuous current
carrying capacity equal to the incoming switchgear or fuses. The current
rating of the neutral busbar shall be not less than that of the phase busbars.
(e)
(f)
(b)
The configuration of the busbars, busbar supports and the busbar mounting
arrangement shall be type tested and certified to a short-time withstanding
current of not less than 22 kA in the case of boards with busbar rating less
than 400A or 40 kA in the case of boards with busbar rating 400A or above, or
the prospective short circuit current which can occur at the point of installation
whichever is the largest for 0.2 second at a voltage of not less than 380V.
(c)
8/13
January 2011
47.3.9
(d)
(e)
MCCB distribution boards shall be provided with triple-pole and neutral copper
busbars of rating not less than that of the supply side protective device. All
busbars shall be of hard drawn copper and shall be electro-tinned. Neutral
busbars shall be of the same cross section area as the phase busbars, and
shall have adequate number of terminals for all outgoing circuits including
spare ways.
(f)
(g)
MCCB distribution boards shall be provided with live, neutral and earthing
terminals for the incoming cables. There shall be one neutral and one
earthing terminal for each outgoing MCCB way.
MCB distribution boards shall be factory-built assemblies for indoor use and
fully comply with and type tested to BS EN 60439-1. All MCB boards shall be
capable of withstanding through faults of not less than the MCB rated fault
breaking capacity as specified without sustaining permanent damage.
(b)
MCB distribution boards shall be totally enclosed type and suitable for surface
mounting. The enclosures shall be manufactured from galvanized sheet steel
of not less than 1.2 mm and rust proof. The doors shall be gasketed and fitted
with ball catch lock or equal reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager.
(c)
(d)
(e)
The metal front plate assembly shall be of sheet steel and shall be finished to
the same colour as the distribution board enclosure. The front plate shall be
screwed on the enclosure, making the assembly suitable for both surface and
flush mounting. The front plate shall be affixed with labels for circuit and
phase identification.
(f)
9/13
January 2011
(g)
All current carrying parts of the MCB distribution boards such as busbars,
neutral and earthing terminals, incoming cable terminals etc. shall be of
electro-tinned copper. The phase and neutral bars shall be of the same size.
(h)
MCB distribution boards shall be provided with live, neutral and earthing
terminals for the incoming cables. There shall be one neutral and one earthing
terminal for each outgoing MCB way.
(i)
(j)
MCB distribution boards shall be supplied with all necessary components and
accessories to form a complete assembly. All MCB distribution boards shall be
of robust construction, dust proof to at least IP42, surface mounted and fitted
with identification labels. Conduit knockouts shall be provided on top, bottom,
and both sides.
(k)
All MCB distribution boards shall be provided with an integral incoming switchdisconnector (isolating switch) where called for in the Schedules. They shall
be of the same manufacturer as the MCB boards.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Busbar chambers shall be totally enclosed type and suitable for surface
mounting. The cases and doors shall be manufactured from galvanized sheet
steel finished and rust proofed. The thickness of the sheet steel shall not be
less than 1.5 mm for current ratings not exceeding 500 A, and not less than 2
mm for current ratings of 500 A or above.
(e)
The front cover and end plate shall be removable and normally held in position
by non-ferrous metal screws.
(f)
(g)
10/13
January 2011
Meter chambers shall be made from galvanized steel of not less than 1.6 mm
thick and shall be of ample size to accommodate the required number of
meters. Provision shall be made to enable the meters to be fixed inside the
chamber without removing the chamber from the wall.
(b)
Meter chambers shall be fitted with a hinged metal front cover with a glass
window provided for each meter. The size of the window shall allow the meter
dials and the serial numbers of the meters to be easily read.
(c)
Watt-hour meter shall comply with EN 60521. The register shall be of drum
type and the principal unit in which the register records shall be in kilowatthours (kWh). The casing shall be of black phenolic moulding with an
inspection glass window at the front.
(d)
Watt-hour meter shall have Class 2 accuracy calibrated at the normal working
voltage and frequency.
47.4
SUBMISSIONS
47.4.1
(b)
(ii)
the maximum let through energy and the peak cut-off current of the
protective device such as fuseswitch, MCCB, MCB and RCBO etc.
against the prospective short circuit current;
(iii)
(iv)
MCBs;
(ii)
RCCBs; and
(iii)
RCBOs.
11/13
January 2011
47.4.2
47.4.3
Busducts
The Contractor shall submit catalogues, drawings, sectional and installation details
of the busducts to the Project Manager for review without objection prior to
manufacture and installation. The busduct layout and installation details drawings
shall be prepared by the busducts specialist supplier / manufacturer.
47.5
WORKMANSHIP
47.5.1
47.5.2
(a)
(b)
All fused switchgear and isolators shall be clearly labelled and marked with
phase and neutral identification with Brown, Black, Grey and Blue colour
respectively.
47.5.3
47.5.4
MCBs, RCCBs and RCBOs shall be fitted to the MCB board securely by nonferrous metal screws fixed securely. They shall be mounted on the standard
rails at the back of the MCB distribution board.
The distribution boards shall be fixed on wall or metal frame securely by nonferrous metal screws and bolts.
(b)
All distribution boards shall be clearly labelled, and marked with phase and
neutral identification with Brown, Black, Grey and Blue colour respectively.
(c)
Inside each distribution board door, a circuit record card shall be provided.
The card shall be renewable and protected by transparent material for
recording the title, cable size and actual current rating of each outgoing circuit,
the rated current of the distribution board, the designation of the outgoing
circuits served by each protective device.
(d)
Gaskets with necessary insulation board shall be provided to all openings for
connection to trunkings or metal cable change boxes.
12/13
January 2011
47.5.5
47.5.6
Busbar Chamber
(a)
The busbar chambers shall be fixed on wall or metal frame securely by nonferrous metal screws and bolts.
(b)
(c)
Each busbar shall be marked with the appropriate phase colour at intervals of
not more than 600mm. Busbar chambers shall be marked with phase and
neutral identification with brown, black, grey and blue colour respectively, and
clearly labelled to indicate the ratings and functions.
(b)
Meter boards, labels and all necessary accessories shall be provided to the
satisfaction of the power supply company to facilitate the installation of kWh
meters. In case metering current transformer (CT) is required for metering,
cable termination block shall be provided to facilitate the future installation of
CT.
13/13
January 2011
48.1
48.2
GENERAL
(a)
Cable and wiring shall comply with the requirement of the Code of Practice for
the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued by EMSD and BS 7671.
(b)
Power cables are mainly for electric power supply and distribution. They shall
be manufactured under BASEC license or under equivalent quality
surveillance scheme (e.g. CENELEC Harmonization Scheme) bearing BASEC
marking or the appropriate marking of equivalent quality surveillance schemes
(e.g. CENELEC Harmonization Scheme).
(c)
(d)
Sheathed copper cables shall be used for wiring on cable trays, on cable
ladders or surface mounted as specified on the Employers Drawings. For
three phase circuits, the cables shall be 450/750V grade or above.
(e)
Armoured copper cable shall be used for wiring on cable trays, on cable
ladders, surface mounted, in cable trench, in cable ducts or directly buried in
ground as specified on the Employers Drawings. For three phase circuits, the
cables shall be 600/1,000V grade or above.
(f)
XLPE/SWA/PVC cables shall be used for main feeders from the main
electrical low voltage cubicle switchboard/main distribution boards in main
switch room to sub-main distribution board.
(g)
PVC non-sheathed cables shall be used for final sub-circuits except for fire
services equipment. Whenever specified on the Employers Drawings, the
final circuit wiring shall have the property of low smoke zero halogen to BS
7211.
(h)
Cables for fire services equipment such as smoke extraction fans and smoke
curtains etc shall be of fire resistant cables on cable trays, on cable ladders or
surface mounted or as specified on the Employers Drawings.
BS 5467
BS 6004
1/16
January 2011
BS 6207
BS 6346
BS 6360
BS 6469
BS 6724
BS EN 10257-1
BS EN 50265-1
BS EN 50265-2-1
IEC 227
IEC 228
IEC 502
IEC 702
IEC 811
48.3
MATERIALS
48.3.1
Cables of this type shall be 450/750V grade complying with BS 6004, copper
core and PVC insulated.
(b)
(c)
2/16
January 2011
(d)
48.3.2
48.3.3
The phase of the cables shall be identified by the colour as specified below
throughout the whole of the insulation:
Phase
Neutral
: Blue
Earth
: Green or Yellow
(e)
(f)
: 1.5 mm2;
Small Power
Control Wiring
: 1.5 mm2.
Cables of this type shall be 600/1000V grade complying with BS 7889, copper
core and XLPE insulated.
(b)
(c)
Cables of this type shall be 600/1000V grade complying with BS 6346, copper
core, PVC insulated, extruded PVC bedded, steel wire armoured and PVC
sheathed (PVC/SWA/PVC).
(b)
(c)
(d)
Wire armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wires of the size
in the appropriate table in BS 6346 and comply with BS EN 10257-1.
(e)
Single-core cables shall have aluminum armour when used for AC supplies.
(f)
3/16
January 2011
48.3.4
48.3.5
Cables of this type shall be 600/1000V grade complying with BS 5467, copper
core, cross-linked polyethylene insulated, extruded PVC bedded, steel wire
armoured and PVC sheathed (XLPE/SWA/PVC).
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Wire armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wires of the size
in the appropriate table in BS 6346 and comply with BS EN 10257-1.
(f)
Single-core cables shall have aluminum armour when used for AC supplies.
(g)
(b)
The length of the tee-off cable shall be at least 1.5m per phase for connection
to the electrical equipment. The tee-off cable shall be connected to the main
cable with a purpose design connector by compression and the connected
part shall be covered with PVC injection molding completely. All cable ends,
including the tee-off cables, shall be factory sealed before delivery to Site.
(c)
(d)
The core of the cable shall be identified by the appropriate colour as specified
in BS 6346 throughout the whole of the insulation.
(e)
The oversheath of the cables shall be extruded layer of black PVC complying
with the requirements of BS EN 50265-1 or BS EN 50265-2-1 for flame
retardance.
4/16
January 2011
48.3.6
48.3.7
48.3.8
Cables of this type shall be 750V heavy duty grade complying with BS 6207 or
IEC 702, copper core, magnesium oxide insulated, seamless copper sheathed
and PVC oversheathed.
(b)
(c)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Wire armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wires of the size
in the appropriate table in BS 6346 and comply with BS EN 10257-1.
(e)
Single-core cables shall have aluminum armour when used for AC supplies.
(f)
Flexible Cords
Flexible cords shall be 300/500V grade, PVC insulated and sheathed flexible copper
cable with conductor operating temperature not exceeding 70C to BS 6500. With
reference to Section 48.5.1 (i), these shall not be used under normal circumstances
except for particular situations such as a final connection to equipment from a spur
unit. They shall not be used for normal cable installations in conduit and trunking.
48.3.9
For armoured cables, it shall be 600/100V grade, low smoke; low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases cross-linked thermosetting (XLPE) insulated and
sheathed copper cable with armour, single or multi-core with conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 90C complying with BS 6724.
(b)
For PVC cables without armour, it shall be 450V/750V grade, low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases thermosetting insulated, sheathed or nonsheathed, single or multi-core copper cable with solid or stranded conductor
with conductor operating temperature not exceeding 90C complying to BS
7211.
5/16
January 2011
(c)
(d)
(e)
Wire armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wires of the size
in the appropriate table in BS 6346 and comply with BS EN 10257-1.
(f)
Single-core cables shall have aluminum armour when used for AC supplies.
48.3.10 Busducts
(a)
All the busducts shall be of low impedance all insulated type with copper
conductors housed in a totally enclosed non-ventilated galvanised steel housing,
protected against mechanical damages and dust accumulation.
(b)
All fittings such as elbows, flanges and connection accessories shall be from
the same proprietary manufacturer compatible with each other and having the
required current ratings. Hangers and brackets shall be supplied together with
busducts. Flange end units shall be provided as required.
(c)
(d)
The busducts shall be fitted with earthing studs suitable for connection to an
external earth bar/tape. The Contractor shall provide and install earthing
system for each busduct by independent copper tape.
(e)
(f)
The Contractor shall use the tools as recommended by the manufacturer for
busduct erection. All the contacts shall be securely fixed, electrically and
mechanically sound of the best quality. All the contacts shall be checked and
tested to be securely fixed by the Contractor, and results shall be submitted to
the Project Manager for his acceptance before energising the installation.
(g)
The Contractor shall note that the long-term reliability of a busduct system
relies a great deal on the method and conditions under which the busducts
are erected, and the conditions under which the busducts are stored before
erection.
6/16
January 2011
48.4
SUBMISSIONS
48.4.1
48.4.2
The following particulars of the wiring and cable system shall be submitted to
the Project Manager for review without objection :
(i)
and
(ii)
Samples
(a)
The following samples of the wiring and cable system shall be submitted to the
Project Manager together with the particulars referred to in Section 48.4.1
above:
(i)
48.5
WORKMANSHIP
48.5.1
General
(a)
Cables shall be delivered on robust cable drums with cable ends treated to
form an effective seal. When a cable is cut from a drum, all cable ends shall
be sealed immediately in an effective manner to prevent the ingress of
moisture.
(b)
Cables shall be laid by means of normal hand running off the cable drum. The
cable drum shall be mounted on a spindle and allowed to turn freely as the
cable is pulled. Roller guides shall be used throughout and draw cables
through by hands. Cable winches shall not be used for cable laying.
(c)
Single core cables where three phase power shall be run , arrange and tie the
cables in a single layer and separate from cables of other circuits by at least
two times the cable diameter of the largest cable in the adjacent group of
cables. Not more than one circuit of single core cables shall be grouped
together.
(d)
The spacing between groups of single core cables or multi-core cables shall
be at least two times the diameter of the largest cable in the adjacent group of
cables.
(e)
Where cables pass through any fire rated element, appropriate pipe sleeves
shall be provided and the opening shall be sealed with approved fire-resistant
material to maintain the same fire rating as the element penetrated. Section 41
of this GMWS shall be referred.
(f)
7/16
January 2011
48.5.2
(g)
Where cables pass through expansion joints, a cable loop shall be formed in
adequate size to allow any movement in the joint without imposing any stress
to the cables.
(h)
Cable joints in a run of cable is not allowed unless reviewed without objection
by the Project Manager.
(i)
(j)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply and installation of cable
changing boxes to facilitate the cable termination at all switches, circuit
breakers, and isolators etc.
(k)
The Contractor shall supply and install the cables according to the New Cable
Colour Code for Fixed Electrical Installations published by the EMSD.
(l)
Unless otherwise specified, all final circuit distribution wiring shall be single
core LSOH insulated copper cable and run in steel trunkings or conduits. All
final circuit distribution wiring for essential circuits shall be single core
FR/LSOH insulated copper cable and run in steel trunkings or conduits.
(m)
All cables for essential circuits shall be run in separate trunking or conduits for
segregation.
The number of cables drawn into a conduit shall be in the way that no damage
will be caused to the cables or to the conduits during installation.
(b)
Cables shall be drawn into the conduits by using approved draw-in tape or
steel wire of appropriate size. Under no circumstances shall the use of
lubricants such as grease, graphite, talc powder etc. be permitted to assist in
drawing the cables.
(c)
(d)
Each cable in a run shall be of one continuous length and wired on the
looping-in system without any joints in cable run.
(e)
For conduits serving final circuits direct from a distribution board or from an
adaptable box used as a final distribution point, all live cables of one final
circuit shall be installed in one conduit, except lighting final circuit. For conduits
serving lighting final circuits, two circuits with 1.5mm2 cables will be permitted
in a 20mm diameter conduit.
(f)
The neutral cable of a lighting final circuit using single core cables may be
routed in the conduit direct to the lighting point without passing through the
switch box.
(g)
8/16
January 2011
(h)
Cables shall be fed into the conduit in such a manner as to prevent any cables
crossing, and also to avoid them being pulled against the sides of the opening
of the draw-in box.
(i)
The sum of all cable factors in a conduit shall not be greater than the conduit
factor as stipulated in Code 14 of Code Of Practice For The Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations issued by EMSD.
For sizes and types of cables and sizes of conduit other than those given in
Code 14 of Code Of Practice For The Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued
by EMSD, the number of cables installed shall be such that the resulting
space factor does not exceed 40%. The space factor is expressed as the ratio
(expressed as percentage) of the sum of the overall cross-sectional areas of
cables to the internal cross-sectional area of the trunking in which the cables
are installed. The effective overall cross-sectional area of a non-circular cable
is taken as that of a circle of diameter equal to the major axis of the cable.
(j)
48.5.3
Cables for each final, sub-main or control circuit in trunking system shall be
individually bunched and tied or clipped together. Precautions shall be taken
in the case where high temperature cables may be touched or where they may
touch other materials.
(b)
Where more than one circuit of single-core cables or more than one multi-core
cables are enclosed in a common trunking, suitable correction factor for
grouping, as recommended by Code Of Practice For The Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations issued by EMSD and BS 7671, shall be applied in determining the
size of the cables to be installed.
(c)
(d)
The number of cables put into a trunking shall be such that no damage is
caused to the cables or the trunking during their installation.
(e)
The sum of all cable factors in a trunking shall not be greater than the trunking
factor as stipulated in Code 14 of Code Of Practice For The Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations issued by EMSD.
(f)
For sizes and types of cables and sizes of trunking other than those given in
Code 14 of Code Of Practice For The Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued
by EMSD, the number of cables installed shall be such that the resulting space
factor does not exceed 40%. The space factor is expressed as the ratio
(expressed as percentage) of the sum of the overall cross-sectional areas of
cables to the internal cross-sectional area of the trunking in which the cables
are installed. The effective overall cross-sectional area of a non-circular cable
is taken as that of a circle of diameter equal to the major axis of the cable.
9/16
January 2011
48.5.4
48.5.5
48.5.6
(b)
For vertical cable runs exceeding 100m, tension releasing sections shall be
provided in accordance with the recommendation of the cable manufacturer,
failing which, a tension releasing section shall be provided for every 100m
vertical run.
(c)
Generally the power cables on surface shall run at least 150mm clear of all
non-electrical services unless otherwise specified.
Saddles shall be used for securing multi-core cables to the cable tray or cable
ladder. The saddles shall be made from PVC covered metal strip, and shall
be shaped to the form of the cables to be secured. Cable cleats and tie
warps are also acceptable subject to the approval of the Project Manager.
(b)
The saddles shall be fixed to the cable tray or cable ladder by means of
corrosion resistant cheese-headed screws and nuts. The shanks of the
screws shall not protrude beyond the nuts by more than three threads. Where
saddles exceed 150mm in length, intermediate fixings shall be provided such
that the maximum spacing between screws shall not exceed 150mm.
(c)
(d)
Cable saddles or cable clamps shall be provided along the entire cable route
with their spacings in accordance with the manufacturers recommendation.
(e)
Where cables turn down to motor control panels or switchboard, drop out
accessories shall be used with cable ladder to support the cables. The
accessories shall comprise of 125mm radius curved plate with a 60mm return
flanged and stop, which shall hook on to a rung at the cable exit points.
(f)
For cable trays or cable ladders across any expansion joint, the cable trays or
cable ladders shall be truncated at the joint and fixed on each side of the joint.
Tension releasing sections of cable passing through the joint shall be provided
to allow for the movement of joint. A separate bonding conductor shall be
provided to connect the cable trays or cable ladders for electrical continuity.
When more than one power cable shall be laid in an enclosed cable trench,
the cables shall be installed in accordance with the recommendation in Code
Of Practice For The Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued by EMSD and BS
7671.
10/16
January 2011
48.5.7
In general the cables in ducts shall be free laid. Where the ducts are formed
from wood, cables shall be fixed in position by clips, saddles or approved
fixing methods.
(b)
Prior to the drawing-in of the cables, the cylindrical ducts shall be cleaned with
a cylindrical brush of appropriate size.
(c)
(d)
When pulling power cables into small ducts, an emulsion of graphite powder
and soft soap in water may be used for brushing onto the cable surfaces
where they enter the duct to reduce friction during pulling. The use of French
Chalk or other methods shall not be precluded provided that such materials or
methods shall not damage the cables and reviewed without objection by the
Project Manager.
(e)
(f)
48.5.8
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Armoured cables shall be buried at a depth of not less than 450mm for LV
cables and 900mm for HV cables and shall be protected by means of
approved cable cover tiles. The bottom of the excavated cable trench shall be
covered, to a depth not less than the diameter of the largest cable, with a
bedding layer of sand or fine soil. On top of the cables, an after layer of sand
or fine soil, to a depth of 100mm, shall again be provided. The sand or fine
soil shall not be larger than 13mm sieve.
(b)
Particular care shall be taken to make sure there shall be no pebbles or small
stones in the bedding layer or after layer of the fine sand or soil.
(c)
The cables shall then be covered, throughout the entire route, by approved
type cable cover tiles which shall be laid on top of the after layer. Cable
marker tapes shall be used to cover the cables tiles with wordings : "DANGER
- HKAA LV ELECTRIC CABLES BELOW" for LV cables and DANGER
HKAA HV ELECTRIC CABLES BELOW.
11/16
January 2011
48.5.9
(d)
The route of all power cables buried direct in ground shall be clearly indicated
by cable markers laid on the ground. The cable markers shall be made of
durable materials such as stainless steel to the approval by the Project
Manager and engraved with the following wording : "DANGER - HKAA LV
ELECTRIC CABLES BELOW" for LV cables and DANGER HKAA HV
ELECTRIC CABLES BELOW.
(e)
Cable markers shall be placed at regular intervals not exceeding 60m apart
and also at positions where the cable route changes direction.
(f)
At the position of each underground junction box, a cable marker shall also be
installed. Such markers shall be engraved, in addition to the wordings
mentioned above, the appropriate information on the top, such as "3 way Joint
Box".
Cable Joints
(a)
Joints of all power cables shall be made by skilled cable jointers and reviewed
without objection by the Project Manager before work commences.
(b)
Joints shall be appropriate to the size and type of cables with which they are
to be used. No reduction in the number of strands of a cable core shall be
allowed at a cable joint.
(c)
(d)
Every compression joint shall be of a type which has been the subject of a test
certificate as described in BS 4579. When a compression joint is made, the
appropriate tools specified by the manufacturer of the joint connectors shall be
used.
(e)
Plastic shells fitted with suitably sized armour bond and filled with approved
type cold pouring encapsulating compound may be used as alternative for
jointing all types of insulated power cables. The complete jointing kit,
including plastic shell, compound, insulating tape, etc. shall be from the same
proprietary manufacturer who is specialized in manufacturing products for this
purpose. The jointing method and procedure as laid down by manufacturer
shall be followed strictly.
(f)
(g)
(h)
12/16
January 2011
(i)
(j)
At each joint, a non-ferrous metallic label shall be fixed to the cable giving the
size and identification of the cable.
(k)
Other methods for jointing a power cables apart from the above will not be
precluded provided that the method used are proven to be capable of
affording the degree of safety and efficiency not less than that achieved by the
above-mentioned methods. The methods shall satisfy the requirements of BS
7671 and prior agreement of the Project Manager must be obtained.
(b)
(c)
(d)
For mineral insulated cables, cable terminations shall generally comply with
BS 6207.
The cable to be terminated shall be cut, screwed, sealed with cold compound
and fitted with brass terminating glands, nuts, compression ring, gland body,
sealing pot, disc and sleeves. The conductors shall be carried unbroken
through the sealing pot to the terminal sockets or clamping screws.
13/16
January 2011
Sealing shall be properly carried out to protect the cable ends from moisture
and the insulation shall be thoroughly dry before the sealant is applied. The
sealing material and material used to insulate the conductors when they
emerge from the insulation shall have adequate insulating and moistureproofing properties which shall be retained throughout the range of
temperature they may be subjected to in service.
Where a mineral insulated cable is terminated at an insulating casing or rust
proof metal casing, the sealing pot shall be provided with a copper circuit
protective conductor, complying with the requirements of BS 6360, and of an
appropriate size in accordance with BS 6207.
Where more than one cable terminate at a galvanized or zinc coated
enclosure, the gland plate shall be of brass or insulating materials.
PVC shrouded terminating glands shall be used when the cables are fitted
with PVC outer covering.
Only tools recommended by the manufacturer of the cables shall be used and
the manufacturer's recommended methods of cable termination shall be
adopted in all cases.
(e)
(f)
Cable Identification
(i)
(ii)
(ii)
(iii)
14/16
January 2011
Overall Diameter
(D)
Minimum internal
bending radius
10mm to 25mm
4D
above 25mm
6D
conductor,
Any
6D
Shaped
copper
conductor,
armoured or non-armoured
Any
8D
copper
At every location where the busduct passes through floor or wall, the
Contractor shall supply and install a feeder section in such a way that the
busduct can be removed from either side of the floor/wall opening without
affecting the remaining installation.
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall closely liaise with all parties on the timing of delivery and
erection of the busduct system. A busduct system shall only be installed after
the building works related either directly or indirectly to the busduct installation
has been completed and the corresponding building works is ready for
busduct installation in a dry and clean condition complete with all necessary
provisions such as doors, locks, kerbs, and with walls finished. Stored and
erected busducts shall be protected against water ingress, especially that of
cement water and corrosive fluid ingress. All wetted and / or damaged
busducts must be replaced.
(d)
The Contractor shall use the tools as recommended by the manufacturer for
busduct erection. All the contacts shall be securely fixed, electrically and
mechanically sound of the best quality. All the contacts shall be checked and
tested to be securely fixed by the Contractor, and results shall be submitted to
the Project Manager for his acceptance before energising the installation.
15/16
January 2011
(e)
To prevent any problems on the installed busduct system, the Contractor shall
strictly observe the following points. Failure of the Contractor to observe
and/or comply with any of the followings shall render the whole busduct
installation to be rejected and the Contractor shall be liable of all the possible
consequences: (i)
All the busducts shall be so installed that any one section can be easily
removed for repair or maintenance.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
The Contractor shall use proper sealing compound for through wall or
floor sealing.
(f)
The Contractor shall construct the waterproof concrete curb around the
locations where busducts pass through floor slabs. The waterproof concrete
curb shall be of not less than 200mm high (minimum) or at least 100 mm
higher than that of any other curbs in the same room, whichever is the higher.
(g)
(h)
Expansion fittings of the busducts shall be supplied and installed across the
building expansion joints.
48.5.13 The Contractor shall comply with the minimum bending radius of the cables that are
to be laid and clearly indicate in the Contractors drawings how this will be achieved.
16/16
January 2011
49.1
49.2
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
In general the cable management systems include cable tray, cable ladder,
trunking, conduit and accessories, and cable duct and draw-in pit.
(c)
(d)
(e)
In general PVC conduits and accessories shall not be used unless otherwise
specified in the Employers Drawings and reviewed without objection by the
Project Manager.
BS 1449-1.1
BS 3505
BS 3382 : Part 2
BS 4568
BS 4607 : Part 1
BS 4662
1/16
January 2011
BS 4678 : Part 1
BS 4678 : Part 2
BS 7671
BS EN 50086-2-1
BS EN 50086-1
BS EN ISO 1461
ISO 683/13
49.3
MATERIALS
49.3.1
installations.
IEE
Wiring
(a)
Metal cable trays shall be perforated, formed from plain steel sheet complying
with BS 1449 : Part 1, and shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1460 and
BS EN ISO 1461 after perforation.
(b)
Cable trays shall be corrosion-resistant not less than Class 2 to BS 4678 : Part
1.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Nominal
Width
Minimum Height
Thickness of
Minimum Height
of Returned
Flange
of Upstand
Steel Sheet
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
100
12
1.2
150
12
1.2
225
12
1.5
300
20
1.5
12
450
20
2.0
12
600
20
2.0
12
800
20
2.0
12
1,000
20
2.0
12
1,200
20
2.0
12
(mm)
Bend pieces shall be standard fittings of the same material, thickness and
finish as the main body of the cable tray and shall have an inner radius of
50mm and a straight length of 100mm at each end.
2/16
January 2011
(f)
No perforation shall be made in the circular portion of all bend pieces having a
nominal width of 150 mm or 100 mm. Perforation may be allowed in bend
pieces having a nominal width of 225 mm or above provided that the
perforation is made along a line passing through the centre of curvature of the
bend pieces and set at an angle as stated belowto the normal of the axis of
the cable tray.
For cable tray with nominal width of 225 mm and 300 mm, the angle shall
be 45.
For cable tray with nominal width of 450 mm or above, the angle shall be
30 and 60.
49.3.2
(g)
Tee pieces shall be standard fittings of the same material, thickness and finish
as the main body of the cable tray. The distance measured between the point
of inter-section and the end of the tee piece shall not be less than 100 mm.
(h)
(i)
All the steel cable tray used shall be heavy duty return flange type and hot
dipped galvanised.
(j)
All support system, screws and nuts for cable trays at external area shall be
made of stainless steel.
Cable ladder and cable ladder fittings and accessories shall be manufactured
from 2mm thick mild steel with horizontal slotted struts and shall be hot-dip
galvanized to BS EN ISO 1460 and, BS EN ISO 1461 after perforation.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
The rungs shall be suitable for various cable fixing methods including nylon
tiles, saddles and perforated strips, cable clamps and cleats.
(f)
The complete cable ladder system shall be designed so that drilling shall not
be necessary on Site and cutting shall be kept to a minimum.
3/16
January 2011
49.3.3
(g)
All fittings and accessories applied to the same cable ladder system shall be
supplied by the same manufacturer to the same finish. Factory standard rightangle bends, tee junctions, off-set reducers, straight reducers shall be used for
horizontal bends, vertical bends, branching out and reduction of cable ladder
width. Factory standard expansion splice plate shall also be provided to allow
for expansion and contraction of the cable ladders.
(h)
All the cable ladder used shall be heavy duty return flange type and hot
dipped galvanised.
Steel surface trunking and fittings shall be compatible to the requirements laid
down in BS 4678 : Part 1 and shall be fabricated with sheet steel having a
nominal thickness as indicated below:
Nominal
Size
(mm)
Nominal
Thickness of
Body Material
with returned
flange (mm)
Nominal Thickness of
Nominal
Body Material without Thickness of
Cover
returned flange
Material
(mm)
(mm)
50 50
1.0
1.0
1.0
75 50
1.2
1.2
1.2
75 75
1.2
1.2
1.2
100 75
1.2
1.2
1.2
100 100
1.2
1.4
1.2
150 100
1.2
1.4
1.2
150 150
1.4
1.6
1.2
37.5
50
75
100
150
200
Tolerance (mm)
+5
+5
+5
+6
+7
+8
For size not listed above, the sizes and the corresponding body material
thickness shall be reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
4/16
January 2011
(b)
25 1.2
1.2
1.0
75 4 x
37.5 2
1.2
1.0
100 5 x
25 1.2
1 or 2
1.2
1.0
100 5 x
37.5 2
1 or 2
1.2
1.0
2 or 3
1.2
1.6
1.0
2 or 3
1.2
1.6
1.0
1.6
1.0
1.6
1.0
1.2
1.6
1.0
1.2
1.6
1.0
1.2
1.6
1.0
1.0
Notes:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(c)
Steel surface trunking and steel underfloor trunking and associated fittings
shall have Class 3 protection against corrosion in accordance with BS 4678:
Part 1.
(d)
(e)
5/16
January 2011
49.3.4
(f)
(g)
Trunking and fittings shall have removable or hinged covers extending over
the entire length. The covers shall be of the same material and finish as those
of the trunking body.
(h)
Screws used for securing a cover or connector and for fixing a trunking shall
have ISO metric threads. They shall be of brass or steel. Steel screws shall be
protected against corrosion by a finish at least equal to the zinc coating
specified in BS 3382: Part 2. Electro-brass plated screws or self tapping
screws shall not be used. Projection of screws inside a trunking or a trunking
fitting will not be allowed.
(i)
Whenever floor boxes are used in underfloor trunking system, the lids of the
floor box, including those under floor tiles or under carpet, must be capable of
withstanding the weight of normal passage of pedestrian traffic and trolleys
without buckling.
(j)
All support system, screws and nuts for cable trunkings at external area shall
be made of stainless steel.
(k)
All the three compartments steel skirting trunkings (for power, data and
communication cables) shall be completed with busbars, base units, covers,
bends, tees, end caps, socket outlets, data outlets, telephone socket outlets,
and the associated accessories.
(b)
Steel flexible conduits and solid type brass adaptors shall comply with BS 731 :
Part 1. The flexible conduits shall be of the metallic water tight pattern and
PVC oversheathed. PVC oversheath shall not be required for installations
within ventilated ceiling void.
(c)
The flexible conduit adaptor shall comprise two parts, an inner core and an
outer ferrule. The inner core shall be screwed into the bore of the conduit
together with an outer ferrule which caps off the end of the conduit to provide
an extremely strong joint by the adaptor. The outer ferrule shall be locked
against the core to isolate any sharp cut edges in the conduit.
(d)
All steel conduit fittings and components shall comply with BS 4568 : Part 2
with Class 4 protection against corrosion.
(e)
Adaptable boxes complete with covers shall be of cast iron or galvanized steel.
Boxes of the preferred sizes as given in BS 4662 shall be used. Bushes and
tube ends shall be of brass.
(f)
Circular boxes, dome covers and hook covers shall be of galvanized malleable
cast iron. Ceiling mounted boxes shall be of deep pattern type having an
internal depth of not less than 60 mm.
6/16
January 2011
49.3.5
49.3.6
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
Screws used for fixing boxes and spacing saddle, and for tightening covers
and spacing saddles shall have ISO metric threads. They shall be of brass or
steel and if of steel they shall be protected against corrosion by a finish at
least equal to the zinc coating specified in BS 3382: Part 2. Electro-brass
plated screws or self tapping screws shall not be used.
(k)
(l)
All flexible conduits shall be steel flexible conduit with Low Smoke Zero
Halogen (LSOH) sheath except the flexible conduits to be used in the MOE
corridors and ventilated ceiling/elevated floors as a means for conveying air,
bare steel conduit should be used to comply with FSD regulations.
Cable ducts shall be formed from concrete, PVC, metal, or such other
materials as shown on the Employers Drawings or specified in the Contract.
(b)
Ducts cast in-situ in concrete shall be so formed that the radial thickness of
the concrete or screed surrounding the cross-section of the complete ducting
shall not be less than 15 mm at every point.
(c)
Metallic ducting shall comply with the same requirement as metal trunking.
(d)
PVC ducting shall comply with BS 3505 Class E unless otherwise specified.
(e)
Draw-in pit for armoured cables shall be concrete or brick lined and shall be
fitted with a waterproof heavy cast iron lid with materials and pattern matching
the surrounding surface. Draw-in pits shall not be filled with sand or other
materials.
All underfloor trunkings shall be three compartments (for power, data and
communication cables). For size refer to the Employers Drawings.
(b)
(c)
7/16
January 2011
(d)
The box base frame, trap and frame, and outlet panel are made of hot
dipped galvanized steel sheets which conform to BS 2898. The trap, frame
and outlet panel are powder coated to provide a good finish and protection
to visible parts. The side plates of the box base are designed to be used for
trunking and conduit entries, recessed 6mm and 9mm to enable it to accept
carpet or vinyl tile floor finishes.
49.4
SUBMISSIONS
49.4.1
49.4.2
of
equipment
(ii)
and
Samples
(a)
cable tray, cable ladder, cable trunking, conduits and accessories; and
(ii)
49.5
WORKMANSHIP
49.5.1
(b)
Cable trays shall be cut along a line of plain metal only, i.e. they shall not be
cut through the perforation. All cut edges of the galvanized cable tray shall be
prepared and treated with a cold galvanized paint.
(c)
Holes cut in a cable tray for the passage of cable shall be provided with
grommets. Alternatively, they shall be bushed or lined.
(d)
Cable trays shall be fixed securely to the walls, ceiling or other structure by
means of hot-dip galvanized mild steel hangers or brackets of adequate
mechanical strength. Hanger rods shall not be less than 6mm.
(e)
8/16
January 2011
49.5.2
49.5.3
(f)
Cable tray shall not be bent for change in direction of run. Manufacturer's
standard fittings such as tees, 90 degree bends, reducers, etc. shall be used
throughout.
(g)
Bends and tee pieces etc. in cable tray installation shall be such that the
bending radius of the largest cables to be clipped to the tray shall not exceed
the bending radius limit as specified in accordance with BS 7671.
(h)
Cable ladder shall be fixed securely to the walls, ceiling or other structure by
means of hot-dip galvanized mild steel hangers or brackets of adequate
mechanical strength. Hanger rods shall not be less than 8 mm.
(b)
(c)
Cable ladder shall not be bent for change in direction of run. Manufacturer's
standard fittings such as tees, 90 degree bends, reducers, etc. shall be used
throughout.
(d)
Bends and tee pieces etc. used in cable tray installation shall be such that the
bending radius of the largest cables to be fixed to the ladder shall not exceed
the bending radius limit as specified in accordance with BS 7671.
(e)
Dropout plate of width same as the cable ladder shall be provided to support
the cables locally as they exit a ladder down between the rungs.
(f)
The cable ladders shall be jointed by flexible (expansion) couplers across the
expansion joints of the building structure. The selection and installation details
of such flexible couplers shall be in accordance with the recommendation by
the manufacturer and reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
Rigid fitting across the expansion joints shall not be allowed.
(g)
(h)
The end of a run of cable ladder shall be fixed to the wall or slab with
proprietary end connectors. If it is far from the wall or slab, a proprietary stop
end connector shall be fixed to the end of a cable ladder run to give a neater
appearance.
Trunking Installation
(a)
9/16
January 2011
(b)
(c)
(d)
Trunkings shall be installed neatly on the surface of the walls, columns, beams
or flushed with floor screeding and shall be installed along a vertical or a
horizontal plane.
(e)
Surface trunking, which is installed in such a position that the cables might fall
out when the cover is removed, shall be fitted with cable retaining bars or
other suitable devices to prevent the cables from falling out.
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
10/16
January 2011
(k)
Vertical
1.25 m
1.5 m
1.75 m
2.0 m
2.3 m
2.5 m
3.0 m
3.0 m
A 2,500 mm
A > 10,000 mm
Notes:
(i)
The spacing tabulated above assume that the trunking is not exposed
to mechanical stress other than that due to the weight of the enclosed
cables, and the trunking and fittings.
(ii)
The above figures do not apply to trunking which is used for supporting
luminaires or other equipment.
(l)
All frayed and sharp edges shall be removed from trunking before installation
to prevent abrasion of cables. The exposed edges shall be painted with two
coats of anti-rust paint such as cold galvanized paint or reviewed without
objection by the Project Manager while the work proceeds.
(m)
(n)
Ends of trunking runs shall be fitted with removable end caps to permit future
extension.
(o)
Where trunking crosses expansion joints, the trunking system shall allow for
expansion while maintaining earth continuity.
(p)
(q)
(r)
(s)
Where the protective coating on a steel trunking has been damaged after
installation, such surface shall be effectively restored by at least two coats of
anti-rust paint or other suitable coating reviewed without objection by the
Project Manager to prevent corrosion.
11/16
January 2011
49.5.4
Conduit system within false ceiling void, electrical and mechanical plant rooms
shall be surface mounted on wall or ceiling slab. They shall be fixed by
distance (spacing) saddles, and shall run in a vertical or horizontal direction.
Conduit boxes, adaptable boxes and metal boxes for accessories shall be
securely fixed to walls, ceilings or other substantial parts of a structure by
means of suitable brass screws correctly spaced. The fixing of these boxes
shall be independent of the fixing of the associated conduits.
(b)
In any other areas shall conduits shall be concealed in walls, columns, beams,
floor slabs, screedings, partitions etc., unless otherwise specified and
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager. Chase for conduit to be
concealed shall be vertical or horizontal.
(c)
(d)
Where conduits are laid direct on the shuttering of the reinforced concrete slab,
deep pattern circular conduit boxes shall be used to raise the run of conduit to
between the top and bottom reinforcement. Attendance shall be provided
whilst the concrete pouring or screeding operation is being carried out in order
to avoid damage being caused to the conduits and also to ensure that the
conduit work is in sound condition, properly and efficiently maintained during
this installation period.
(e)
(f)
A complete set of conduit routing drawings for each of the door mullions
requiring for Airport Systems showing all power and data concealed conduits,
adaptable boxes and all necessary holes, recesses and openings for interface
with Airport Systems to be submitted for review without objection by the
Project Manager.
(g)
Steel conduits laid direct in ground or buried in soil shall be painted with two
coats of bituminous paint and wrapped with self-amalgamating tapes or other
wrapping materials for protection against corrosion reviewed without objection
by the Project Manager.
(h)
Joint in steel conduits shall be made by means of a solid coupler into which
the adjacent ends of the two conduits shall be inserted to approximately half
into it and screwed up tightly in order to make the conduit run mechanically
and electrically continuous. No threads on either conduit shall be exposed.
12/16
January 2011
(i)
Running couplings shall not be used. In case where such a coupling cannot be
avoided, it shall be reviewed without objection by the Project Manager before
it is adopted. In this case, the coupler shall be screwed up tightly onto the
short threaded portion of one conduit, the threaded portion of which shall
project approximately half way into the length of the coupler. The threaded
portion of the mating conduit shall also project approximately half way into the
coupler. Electrical continuity shall be ensured by tightening up a hexagon
locknut against the coupler. Any exposed threads on either conduit shall be
painted with at least two coats of anti-rust paint.
(j)
(k)
An extension ring shall be fitted to a conduit box where the plaster wall finish
(including plaster) is more than 35 mm from the conduit box. Only extension
rings of the correct depth shall be used. Under no circumstances shall
multiple extension rings be permitted.
(l)
(m)
In the case of flexible steel conduit, a brass adaptor together with a brass
male bush shall be used. The brass adaptor shall comprise two parts, an
inner core and an outer ferrule. The inner core shall screw into the bore of the
conduit together with an outer ferrule which caps off the end of the conduit, so
that the adaptor can provide an extremely strong joint. The core shall lock
against the outer ferrule and isolate any sharp cut edges in the conduit.
(n)
Where conduits terminate at boxes, trunkings and accessories not fitted with
spout entries, they shall be terminated by means of smooth bore male brass
bushes, compression washers and sockets to obviate damage to the cables.
All conduit entries to adaptable boxes, outlet boxes and switchgear shall be
made with coupling and hexagon male bush.
(o)
(p)
13/16
January 2011
(q)
Saddles, for the support of surface conduits, shall be provided throughout the
entire route at regular intervals. The spacing between adjacent saddles for
steel conduits shall not be more than the values listed in the table below:
Conduit Size
(mm)
20
25
32
(r)
(s)
Saddles shall be fixed with brass screws in expanding plugs or other purposedesigned fixing devices reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
(t)
Flexible conduit shall be used as short as possible and in any case shall not
exceed a conduit run of 2 m.
(u)
Where steel conduits are installed outdoors or in damp situations, all conduit
fittings and conduit accessories shall not be placed in contact with other
metals with which they are liable to set up electrolytic action. In addition,
where the conduit installation is subject to weather, the conduit fittings and
conduit accessories shall be provided with weatherproof sealant or other
materials to ensure that the installation is completely weatherproof.
(v)
During the building construction, all open ends of the conduit termination,
which are liable to be filled with water, moisture or other foreign matters, shall
be plugged with approved conduit stopping plug. Paper, rag or similar
materials shall not be used for this purpose. Steel conduit boxes in similar
circumstances shall also be similarly plugged to prevent concrete aggregate or
plaster from entering into the boxes during building construction.
(w)
(x)
(y)
(z)
Conduit system shall be completely erected before cable is drawn in and there
shall be adequate means of access for drawing cables in and out. The number
of cables drawn into a conduit shall be such that no damage will be caused to
the cables or to the conduits during their installation.
14/16
January 2011
(aa) Conduits shall be swabbed out and free from moisture before wiring work is to
commence. Suitable draw-in tape or steel wire of appropriate size and
absorbent cloth reviewed without objection by the Project Manager shall be
used.
(ab) Where the protective coating on a steel conduit has been damaged after
installation, such surface shall be effectively restored by at least two coats of
anti-rust paint or other suitable coating to prevent corrosion.
(ac) Conduit bends shall be formed on a suitable bending machine, and the
conduits shall not be flattened or with protective coating damaged at the
bends. Conduit shall not be bent with an acute angle. The internal radius of
the bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the outside diameter of the conduit.
(ad) Holes in metal work for the termination of conduits shall be drilled on site with
a twist drill of the correct size or by means of a suitable hole cutting device.
(ae) All frayed and sharp edges shall be removed from conduit before installation.
(af)
Particular care shall be taken when setting out conduit runs to outlet points
which are to be fitted to furniture and equipment.
(ag) Where empty conduits are provided for other services, draw wires shall be
provided. Where a break line between contracts occurs along the conduit
system, conduits shall be terminated by means of coupler and brass bush,
and shall be provided with draw wires.
(ah) Conduits, where required to be distinguished from pipelines or other services,
shall use orange (BS colour reference No. 06 E 51 to BS 4800) as the basic
identification colour in compliance with BS 1710 or to be reviewed without
objection by the Project Manager.
49.5.5
(b)
(c)
15/16
January 2011
49.5.6
(d)
Where cables in a duct are inaccessible for the greater part of their length,
adequate number of draw-in pits shall be provided at every turning point and
at regular intervals of not greater than 60 m in general, or reviewed without
objection by the Project Manager. Sufficient room shall be available in the
draw-in pits to enable the cables to be maneuvered without damage.
(e)
Duct joints shall not be permitted within the thickness of walls or floors.
(f)
(g)
After the cable has been installed, both the cables and the exposed duct end
shall be sealed to form a gas, water and fire barrier. Open ends of spare ducts
shall be closed with tapered hardwood plugs and then sealed similarly.
(h)
(i)
Steel cable ducts shall be jointed using screwed galvanized sockets and spun
yarn. Internal rags and burrs shall be removed to provide a smooth bore
through joints in the cable duct system.
(j)
(k)
Where cable ducts are to be mounted on surface, the cable ducts shall be
secured by galvanized steel clamps or saddles at spacing not exceeding 3 m.
(b)
Crossovers, tees, bridges, lids, conduit brackets and mounting brackets shall
be supplied with any additional components required for a completely
segregated installation.
(c)
16/16
January 2011
50.1
50.2
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The front plate of each switch socket or control switch feeding an essential
circuit or a fixed electrical appliance, such as water heater, hand dryer and
exhaust fan etc., shall be engraved according to the appliance being
controlled.
(e)
All accessories with their boxes and front plates shall provide a minimum
degree of protection of IP 41 when used inside buildings, and IP 54 when
used external to the building.
(f)
(g)
Where pilot lamps are detailed they shall comprise a neon lamp and resistor
with a red coloured lens.
BS 546
BS 1362
BS 1363 : Part 2
January 2011
BS 3535 : Part 2
BS 3676 : Part 1
BS 4662
BS 5733
Specification
accessories
BS 7671
BS EN 55014
Electromagnetic compatibility
BS EN 60309-2
BS EN 60529
BS EN 60947
BS EN 60947-3
BS EN 60947-4-1
IEC 60947-3
IEC 60947-4-1
50.3
MATERIALS
50.3.1
for
general
requirements
of
protection
for
electrical
provided
by
(a)
Socket outlets and plugs rated at 13A and 15A for general application shall
comply with Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued by
EMSD.
(b)
Socket outlets and plugs rated at 13A and 15A shall comply with BS 1363 :
Part 1 & 2 and BS 546.
(c)
(d)
Socket outlets shall be of 3 pin shuttered type and shall be type-tested for
complete compliance with BS 1363 : Part 2 by an Independent Accredited
Laboratory or an Independent Short-Circuit Testing Organisation
(e)
January 2011
50.3.2
50.3.3
50.3.4
50.3.5
Industrial socket outlets shall be rated at 6A, 32A, 63A or 125A as specified on
the Employers Drawings and shall comply with BS EN 60309-2.
(b)
(c)
Socket outlet and plug shall have pilot pins and sleeves shorter than other
sleeves and pins of the unit such that pilot circuit makes last and breaks first.
(d)
(e)
Electric shaver supply units shall comply with BS 3535 : Part 1 and BS 3535 :
Part 2 and shall be insulated, suitable for both flush and surface mounting.
(b)
Each unit shall comprise two outlets one for 110V and the other for 220V
obtained from a double wound transformer.
(c)
Each unit shall be provided complete with reversible 2 pin shuttered socket
outlet and isolating transformer restricted to 200 mA.
(b)
(c)
The unit shall be clearly marked with the word FUSE or FUSED in a
conspicuous position on the front plate.
(d)
(e)
Where fused connection units are flush mounted final connection to fixed
equipment shall be flush via back entry.
(f)
(g)
January 2011
50.3.6
50.3.7
Double pole switches shall be 20A or 45A, as indicated, with red neon
indicator complying with BS 3676.
(b)
Isolating Switches
(a)
50.3.8
Lighting Switches
(a)
Lighting switches for general purposes shall comply with BS 3676 : Part 1.
(b)
(c)
Lighting switches shall be of the microgap type suitable for use on AC circuits,
and shall be of quick make-and-break type when used in DC circuits.
(d)
(e)
(f)
Each switch plate shall have a maximum of 3 gang switches unless otherwise
specified.
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
All lighting switches inside the plant rooms shall have local control with an
integral timers and by-pass switches.
January 2011
50.3.9
Dimmer units shall be of modular design and shall comprise of thyristors and
associated control and wiring circuitry. Hard firing circuitry shall also be
provided for control of fluorescent lamps to eliminate the need for load
resistors. When a fluorescent dimmer is in the OFF position, the lamp heater
circuit shall be disconnected.
(b)
Dimmer units shall be designed for local or remote control as indicated on the
Employers Drawings. For the latter case, remote control stations shall be
provided. The control voltage shall be extra low voltage generated from the
dimmer units.
(c)
The time switch shall be 24 hours dial type suitable for use on an AC supply of
220V 6%, 50 Hz, or 24V, 50 Hz single-phase supply as specified.
(b)
Each time switch shall be supplied in a complete set including the time switch
itself, metal or strong molded box and other accessories as specified.
(c)
(d)
Time switches shall be single pole, single throw, and current rating of not less
than 16 amperes, unless otherwise specified.
(e)
A reserve with a carry over period of at least 100 hours shall be included
(f)
(g)
(h)
The metal or moulded box shall be suitable for wall mounting. An inspection
glass window and quick action fastener shall be fitted on the front lid. The box
shall be suitable for 20mm conduit entry.
(i)
(j)
(k)
January 2011
50.3.11 Contactors
(a)
Contactors for lighting control, either locally, remotely or through timers, shall
comply with BS EN 60947-4-1 or IEC 60947-4-1, utilization category AC-2,
Class 3 intermittent duty, and shall have a current rating of not less than that
of the outgoing switchgear to which they are connected, and in any case not
less than 20A.
(b)
(c)
Fireman's switches shall have its ON and OFF positions clearly indicated
by lettering legible to person standing on the ground, and the OFF position
shall be at the top.
(d)
Fireman's switches shall be of quick make and break type with a pole
operated ring handle which shall automatically lock in the OFF position.
The photo sensors shall be adjustable according to the site conditions in order
to achieve the required lighting levels.
(b)
The photo sensor shall be complete with photocell sensing element and
measurement and output circuit boards all be housed in a weather proof base
unit suitable for outdoor use. The complete unit shall be mounted with holder
bracket at a position free from sky obstruction.
(c)
(d)
January 2011
50.4
SUBMISSIONS
50.4.1
50.4.2
of
equipment
and
(ii)
(iii)
the intended control and details of remote control stations for approval
prior to ordering; and
(iv)
Samples
(a)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
50.5
WORKMANSHIP
50.5.1
in public areas, all electrical outlets and devices other than those
specified below up to a height of 3,000 mm shall be flush mounted
complete with 316 satin grade stainless steel cover plate with 320 grit
finish, and all other outlets in these areas shall have mould plastic type
covers;
(ii)
in plant rooms, services corridors and the like, all outlets shall be
surface or flush mounted, industrial, high impact mould polycarbonate
type, or, alternatively, subjected to review by the Project Manager,
shall have metal clad type finish with polyester paint coating; and
(iii)
in non public areas, all outlets shall be flush mounted complete with
mould plastic covers.
January 2011
50.5.2
50.5.3
(b)
(c)
Socket outlets and plugs for one voltage system shall not be interchangeable
with those for use at other voltage and/or frequency systems in the same
installation.
(d)
(e)
(f)
Lighting Switches
(a)
(b)
(c)
When lighting switches are mounted adjacent to one another, they shall be
grouped in a single enclosure and shall share a common switch plate, subject
to a maximum of three lighting switches per plate.
(d)
(e)
Lighting switch for switch or plant rooms shall complete with an adjustable
electronic timer with time adjustment range from 30 minutes to 2 hours. The
timer shall turn the load on when the push button is initially pressed once. A
dual colour, red and green, LED shall show green to indicate the timer is in
operation. This situation shall remain until the preset time delay has elapsed
at which time the load turns off automatically and LED shall change to red to
indicate the timer is now returned to standby state.
(f)
Subsequently, if the push button is pressed once more before the time delay
has completely elapsed. The timer shall reset and again go into the standby
state. The timer shall also work like an ON-OFF switch when the push button
is successively operated.
(g)
January 2011
50.5.4
50.5.5
The mounting level of fused connection units for exhaust fans, fan coil units
and A/C units shall be at the levels specified and within 500 mm of the
equipment to be connected.
(b)
Isolating Switches
(a)
Single pole and neutral or triple pole and neutral isolating switch with
appropriate rating shall be provided for shutter and equipment as indicated.
Unless otherwise specified, all isolators for shutters units shall be at high level.
(b)
The Contractor shall also provide phase indication colour labels and engraved
labelling for the double pole switch to indicate the function of the switch.
(c)
January 2011
51.1
51.2
GENERAL
(a)
The luminaires, including the control gear, shall be suitable for operation at
220V 6%, 50 Hz 2%, single phase, AC supply.
(b)
The overall power factor of the luminaire shall not be less than 0.85 lagging.
Better power factor shall be provided whenever specified.
(c)
(d)
Internal wiring shall be appropriately colour coded, neatly wired and properly
terminated. The luminaires excluding the fluorescent lamp shall be supplied in
complete set comprising control gear, lampholders, cable terminal block, etc.
(e)
The general operation condition shall refer to Section 44.7 of this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification.
BS 1075
BS 1362
BS 1449
Steel plate, sheet and strip. Carbon and carbonmanganese plate, sheet and strip
BS 1853
BS 4533
Luminaires
BS 4683 : Part 1
1/21
January 2011
BS 4683 : Part 2
BS 5225 : Part 1
BS 5266 : Part 1
BS 5499 : Part 1
BS 5499 : Part 3
BS 5750
Quality systems
BS 6201
BS 6231
BS 6345
BS EN 55015
BS EN 60061-1
BS EN 60061-3
BS EN 60079-14
Electrical
apparatus
for
explosive
gas
atmospheres. Electrical installations in hazardous
areas (other than mines)
BS EN 60081
BS EN 60155
BS EN 60188
High-pressure
mercury
Performance specifications
BS EN 60400/IEC 60400
BS EN 60432-1
BS EN 60432-2
2/21
Photometric
cables
for
Performance
vapour
lamps.
tubular
January 2011
BS EN 60529
BS EN 60598-1
BS EN 60598-2-22
BS EN 60662
BS EN 60920
BS EN 60921
BS EN 60927
BS EN 61047
BS EN 61048
BS EN 61049
BS EN 61347
Lamp controlgear
BS EN 61347-1
Lamp
controlgear.
requirements
BS EN 61347-2-2
BS EN 61347-2-3
BS EN 61558
BS EN 62035
ICEL 1001
Scheme
of
Product
and
Authenticated
Photometric Data Registration for Emergency
Luminaires and Conversion Modules
IEC 60926
IEC 60927
ISO 9000
Quality assurance
3/21
General
and
General
safety
January 2011
51.3
MATERIALS
51.3.1
Tubular fluorescent lamps with preheated cathode, for general lighting service,
shall be manufactured and tested to BS EN 60081 and BS 1853. Lamps shall
start satisfactory with switch-start control gears operated on 220V 50 Hz
single-phase supply.
(b)
Fluorescent lamps shall be of T5 high efficient energy saving type with bi-pin
end caps to BS EN 60400, BS EN 60061-1 and BS EN 60061-3.
(c)
Fluorescent lamps shall have the colour appearance of warm white with a
colour rendering index of 85 unless otherwise specified. Initial lumen output
shall not be less than that shown in the table below:
26 mm tubular fluorescent lamps
Rated
power of
lamp
Lumen output
3,000K
3,800K
5,400K
2,700K
(Warm
white)
18
1,350
1,350
1,350
1,300
1,000
36
3,350
3,350
3,350
3,250
2,300
58
5,200
5,200
5,200
5,000
3,700
(W)
6,500K
Lumen output
3,000K
3,800K
5,400K
2,700K
(Warm
white)
22
1,350
1,000
1,050
32
2,050
2,000
2,000
1,750
40
2,900
2,800
2,300
2,500
(W)
6,500K
Rated power
of lamp
(W)
2,700K
3,000K
3,800K
(Warm white)
(Cool white)
20
1,150
950
40
2,700
2,400
65
4,500
3,900
4/21
January 2011
(d)
Rated power
of lamp
3,000K
(W)
(Warm white)
14
4,000K
6,000K
1,350
1,350
1,300
21
2,100
2,100
2,000
24
2,000
2,000
1,900
28
2,900
2,900
2,750
35
3,650
3,650
3,500
39
3,500
3,500
3,325
49
4,900
4,900
4,650
54
5,000
5,000
4,750
80
7,000
7,000
6,650
All fluorescent lamps shall have average rated life not less than those listed
below at 50% failure:
Average Rate Life for Fluorescent Lamp
51.3.2
26 mm fluorescent lamp
12,000
16 mm fluorescent lamp
20,000
12,000
8,000
(b)
The lamp base shall from an integral housing for the integrated starter to
provide almost instant starting characteristics and radio interference
suppressor.
(c)
Compact fluorescent lamps shall have the colour appearance of warm white
with a colour rendering index of 85 unless otherwise specified. Initial lumen
output shall not be less than that shown in the table below:
5/21
January 2011
(W)
3,000K
3,800K
5,400K
(Warm white)
(Cool white)
(Day light)
250
250
400
400
400
600
600
600
11
900
900
900
18
1,200
1,200
1,200
750
24
1,800
1,800
1,800
1,200
36
2,900
2,900
2,900
2,400
40
3,500
3,500
3,500
2,200
55
4,800
4,800
4,800
3,000
(W)
3,000K
3,800K
5,400K
(Warm white)
(Cool white)
(Day light)
250
250
250
400
400
400
375
600
600
600
565
11
900
900
900
850
2,700K
3,000K
3,800K
(Warm white)
(Cool white)
10
600
600
600
13
900
900
900
18
1,200
1,200
1,200
26
1,800
1,800
1,800
6/21
January 2011
(W)
3,000K
3,800K
(Warm white)
(Cool white)
13
900
900
900
18
1,200
1,200
1,200
26
1,800
1,800
1,800
(W)
3,000K
3,800K
(Warm white)
(Cool white)
13
900
900
900
18
1,200
1,200
1,200
26
1,800
1,800
1,800
32
2,400
2,400
2,400
42
3,200
3,200
3,200
2,700K
3,000K
3,800K
(Warm white)
(Cool white)
350
10
600
600
13
900
900
900
18
1,200
1,200
1,200
26
1,800
1,800
1,800
(d)
(e)
All compact fluorescent lamps shall have average rated life not less than
8,000 hours at 50% failure
7/21
January 2011
51.3.3
Discharge Lamps
(a)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(b)
(c)
The manufacturing process of the lamps shall comply with the quality standard
BS EN ISO 9000-4 or BS 5750.
(d)
Tubular and elliptical high pressure sodium vapour discharge lamps shall
consist of a high pressure sodium discharge operating within a sintered
alumina arc tube. The arc tube shall be mounted in a clear glass bulb
complete with an E40 cap. Linear high pressure sodium vapour discharge
lamps shall be double-ended and shall consist of an arc tube made of sintered
aluminium oxide and mounted in a clear tubular quartz outer bulb having a
single contact ceramic cap of Rx7s at each end.
(e)
MBF lamp shall consist of a high pressure mercury discharge operating within
a quartz arc tube. The arc tube shall be mounted in an elliptical glass bulb
coated with a fluorescent phosphor and complete with a cap of the type
compatible with the respective lamp wattage type.
(f)
(g)
The correlated colour temperature and colour rendering index of the lamp
shall be following unless otherwise specified:
(h)
Colour Temperature
2,000 K to 2,100 K
25 to 35
MBF
3,400 K to 4,000 K
50 to 57
MBIL
5,200 K
65
The discharge lamps shall have a universal operating position and shall be
suitable for use with external ignitor when appropriates.
8/21
January 2011
(i)
The light output of the lamp shall be constant and shall not be less than the
following figures for the respective wattage type in the initial 2,000 hours:
Nominal Lamp Wattage Initial Light Output (lumens)
(W)
High pressure
sodium
150
16,000
250
28,000
400
48,000
50
1,800
80
3,700
125
6,500
250
13,000
400
22,000
750
67,000
1,500
120,000
High pressure
mercury
(j)
The rated average life of the lamps shall no be less than the figures in the
following table with respect to the selected nominal lamp wattage at 50%
failure:
Rated Average Lift (Hours)
SON-T, SON-E, SON-TD
(k)
51.3.4
24,000
MBF
16,000 to 24,000
MBIL
6,000
Where standby auxiliary lamp is used for the emergency illumination of the
gas discharge luminaire, an adjustable time delay relay circuit shall be
provided for the auxiliary lamp for illumination. When the mains power fails,
the auxiliary lamp shall operate instantaneously for emergency illumination.
Upon restoration of mains power, the auxiliary lamp shall be maintained to be
ON until the gas discharge lamp on the normal mains circuit has run to 90%
of full brightness.
General
(i)
(ii)
The colour temperature of the lamp shall be within the range between
2,800K and 3,200K. The colour rendering index shall not be less
than 90.
(iii)
The rated average life of the lamp shall not be less than 2,000 hours at
10% failure. The light output of the lamp shall not be diminished by more
than 5% throughout the guaranteed life.
9/21
January 2011
(b)
(c)
51.3.5
(ii)
(ii)
The transformer:
-
The transformer shall be suitable for use with dimmers so that the
luminance of the lamp can be adjusted if required. In addition, the
transformer shall be able to be used with DC supplies for
emergency lighting purpose.
(iii)
The overall size of the lamp bulb shall be about 50 mm in diameter and
the height shall be about 45 mm, with bi-pin end cap.
(iv)
The design lumen output of the lamp bulb shall not be less than the
schedule under:
Rated
Wattage
Beam
Beam Angle
Peak Candelas
50
narrow
10
12,000
50
medium
21
3,700
50
wide
38
1,550
Fluorescent Luminaire
(a)
(b)
(c)
10/21
January 2011
51.3.6
(d)
Each luminaire shall be supplied as a complete set comprising the main part,
end plates, cover plate/reflector/diffuser, ballast, starter and starter-holder,
power factor correction capacitor, bi-pin lampholder, fused terminal block,
integral earthing terminal and internal wiring. Electronic ballast shall be used
unless otherwise specified.
(e)
A fused terminal block, fitted with a suitably rated fuse to BS 1362, shall be
properly fixed to the body in such a way as to be easily accessible for fuse
replacement.
(f)
The main part of the luminaire shall be made of substantive sheet steel of
minimum thickness 0.5 mm, cold rolled general grade to BS 1449, pretreated
to prohibit corrosion on both sides and finish coated in gloss white stoved
enamel or colour as specified to BS EN 60598-1 or epoxy powder on the
outside surface. It shall be formed and suitably shaped into one continuous Uchannel piece to give a fairly rigid structure on its own, but can be further
strengthened by ribs where necessary.
(g)
(h)
For back entry installation, if the basic batten cannot fully cover the circular
conduit box, a pattress block cover made of 0.5 mm thick mild steel, finished
in white stoved enamel shall be supplied with each basic batten to shield the
conduit box outlet. The basic batten shall be capable to accept the metal cover
plate and different reflectors or diffusers.
(i)
Electrical control gear shall be totally built into the luminaire assembly and
shall provide for switch start and/or dimming operation. Ballasts shall be
designed to suit nominal supply of voltage and frequency. Power factor
correction capacitors shall be provided to correct the power factor for each
luminaire to not less than 0.95 lagging after it has operated continuously. The
capacitors shall be metallized polypropylene strips would onto cylindrical
formers. The capacitors shall be rated to operate at not less than 85C and
shall be mounted not less than 75 mm from any ballast. Capacitors shall be
connected in parallel with ballasts and tubes.
A type-test certificate together with the associated test report(s) issued by BSI
or an Independent Accredited Laboratory shall be submitted as evidence of
compliance with the required standard.
(b)
(c)
The luminaire shall be supplied as a complete set comprising the main part,
reflector/gear tray, diffuser, ballast, starter and starter-holder, power factor
correction capacitor, bi-pin lampholder, fused terminal block, integral earthing
terminal and internal wiring.
11/21
January 2011
51.3.7
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The reflector/gear tray shall be securely mounted to the main part by screws,
or other suitable means, which shall remain captive with the main part, or the
tray, when the tray is detached from the main part. In the detached position,
the tray shall be securely strapped or hinged to the main part.
(h)
The diffuser shall be of one piece injection moulded, internally pattern clear
polycarbonate material and fixed to the housing against a gasket by hinged
polycarbonate toggles held captive to the housing. The diffuser shall be
vandal proof and have a service temperature limit of at least 1,100C and shall
have negligible yellowish tendency with UV radiation.
(i)
A neoprene or silicone gasket shall be provided between the main part and
the diffuser and shall be retained firmly in the purposely formed groove in the
main part.
(j)
(k)
The starting circuit shall be either of switch start or electronic start as specified.
(b)
(c)
The starting circuit of the luminaire shall be of electronic start and the control
gear components shall be installed on a removable metal tray enclosed in a
separate housing which shall be provided with at least 20 mm E.T. entries for
through connections.
12/21
January 2011
51.3.8
(d)
The body casting, control gear housing and end covers shall be constructed
with cast aluminium at least to ISO 3522 Al-Si5Cu3 and with suitable coating
for increased protection against corrosion. The fluorescent lamp shall be
housed in a cylinder of borosilicate glass and flamesealed at the end of the
casing.
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
The incoming terminal chamber shall be an integral part of the body casting
complete with who phase and earth terminal block. The cover of chamber
shall be provided with weatherproof gasket and with at least 20 mm entries
fitted with hexagonal headed flameproof plug.
(b)
A type test certificate together with the associated test report(s) issued by BSI
or an approved internationally recognized testing authority shall be submitted
to verify compliance with the required standards.
(c)
(d)
The luminaire shall be supplied as a complete set comprising the main part,
battery supply system, end plates, cover plate, ballast, starter and starterholder, power factor correction capacitor, bi-pin lampholder, fused terminal
block, integral earth terminal, internal wiring etc. housed within the main body
but easily accessible for servicing, and the respective fluorescent tubes.
13/21
January 2011
(e)
An independent circuit including a separate set of starter and ballast etc. shall
be provided for each fluorescent lamp.
(f)
The main part of each luminaire shall be constructed from substantive mild
steel sheet of minimum thickness of 1 mm, cold rolled general grade to BS
1449. It shall be pretreated to prohibit corrosion on both sides, with hot alkali
degreasing, and with a layer of iron or zinc phosphate, two coats of primer and
a finish paint of gloss white stove enamel or epoxy polyester powder. It shall
be formed and suitably shaped into one continuous U-channel piece to give a
rigid structure on its own, further strengthened by ribs where necessary.
(g)
(h)
(i)
The charger shall be fully automatic, solid state constant voltage type, with
electronic circuitry to protect the batteries against over-charge and overdischarge. The charging system shall be capable of recharging the battery to
full capacity in not more than 24 hours after a total discharge of the battery.
(j)
Test switch and indication lamps shall be provided externally on the housing
for the purpose of testing the proper functioning of the battery supply system
and indicating the discharge of battery. These shall be positioned to be visible
and accessible when the luminaire is installed.
(k)
The control circuits shall be suitable for mains operation and shall be designed
to enable the luminaires to operate exactly like normal conventional luminaires.
(l)
A fused terminal block fitted with cartridge fuses of appropriate rating shall be
provided separately for both the charge and the maintained circuit.
(m)
Light output throughout the average mid-tube life when using daylight
4,500K tube shall be throughout the 2-hour discharging period when mains
fails. Light output shall not be less than 50% of the nominal light output under
the maintained mode.
(n)
The battery shall be protected against over-discharge by a low voltage cutout device which shall disconnect the battery from the load once the
discharging voltage of the nickel cadmium cell drops below 1V.
14/21
January 2011
51.3.9
EXIT signs shall meet the requirements of circular letters of Fire Services
Department, HKSAR.
(b)
(c)
The complete EXIT signs shall, where applicable, meet the requirements of
BS 5499 : Part 1, BS 5499 : Part 3 and BS EN 60598-2-22.
(d)
Self-contained exit signs which are either licensed with ICEL Approval scheme
of BSI Kitemark scheme are deemed to have satisfied the requirements of the
preceding paragraph. Alternatively, exit signs may be accepted whose
illuminants are assembled from either ICEL Approved self-contained
emergency batten fluorescent fitting with its battery set and transistorized
ballast placing outside the casing of the batten fitting but contained within the
exit sign enclosure, or ICEL approved self-contained emergency lighting
conversation module/kit installed in conditions as approved by ICEL.
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
The following accessories shall be provided on the surface of the EXIT sign
box:
(i)
(i)
(ii)
(ii)
15/21
January 2011
(iii)
(iv)
51.3.10 Ballast
(a)
All electronic ballasts shall be preheat start design. They shall be of the high
frequency (>25 kHz) electronic type comply with the performance and safety
requirements of BS EN 60929 or BS EN 61347-1 & BS EN 61347-2-3, the
EMC immunity and emission requirements of BS EN 61000-6-1 & BS EN
50082-1, and BS 6100 : Part 2 or BS EN 55015. They shall be suitable for
operation on a 220V, 50 Hz supply and mainly used in tubular fluorescent
luminaires unless otherwise specified.
(b)
Ballasts for discharge lamps shall be of the auto-stabilized type with lead
peaked circuiting, with a power factor not less than 0.9 lagging. A 10%
variation in line voltage shall vary the lamp wattage by no more than +10%.
Ballasts shall provide an adequate voltage at the lamp with a source voltage
drop voltage drop of up to 20% below nominal to prevent the lamp from being
extinguished.
(c)
The overall sound pressure levels in dB(A) at 1m position of ballasts shall not
exceed values of the room noise rating criterion NC minus 10 dB, where the
relevant or equivalent standards on Noise Criterion (NC) values shall be taken
latest issues from ASHRAE, CIBSE or AS/NZS 2107 publications.
(d)
All electronic ballasts shall comply with the general and safety requirements of
BS EN 60928. The electronic ballasts shall be suitable to operate at an
ambient temperature range from 0oC to 50oC and at a maximum relative
humidity of 95%.
(e)
(f)
(g)
The electronic ballasts shall be rapid or instant start and the lamp operating
frequency shall be above 30kHz.
(h)
(i)
The rated life of the electronic ballasts shall not be less than 50,000 hours at
the test point of 70oC.
16/21
January 2011
1 mA; and
1 mA
The Contractor shall supply and install luminaires in the Luminaire Schedule.
Luminaires shall comply with the requirements of BS 4533. Lighting circuits
shall be connected on the loop-in principle unless otherwise specified.
(b)
All luminaires shall be installed complete with lamps and all the necessary
control gears. Multiple lamp fluorescent luminaires shall be fitted with separate
control gear for each lamp.
(c)
For fluorescent luminaire, high frequency electronic control gear shall be used.
Fluorescent lamp shall be 4000k colour temperature and Ra 85 colour
rendering index unless otherwise specified.
(d)
For high pressure discharge luminaire, a power factor greater than 0.9 shall
be achieved. Control gear shall be housed in the control gear enclosure.
(e)
All lamps shall be suitable for use on 220 volt 50 Hz single phase supply.
(f)
(g)
(b)
17/21
January 2011
(c)
The Outgoing circuits from MCB boards shall be connected to lighting points
through normally closed contacts of contactors located next to the respective
MCB boards as shown on the Employers Drawings. All contactors shall be
completed with all necessary auxiliary contacts required.
(b)
The current rating of the main contacts shall not be less than the up-stream
protective device.
(c)
All the relay contacts provided shall be suitable for 220V ac and 2A inductive
currents. All the contactors auxiliary contacts, relay, terminals etc shall be
housed in dust proof metal boxes located next to the respective MCB board.
All the boxes shall be made of steel sheet not less than 1.5mm in thickness
and complete with finish to be reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager. Plastic labels engraved with the lighting zones being controlled shall
be provided on the metal boxes adjacent to each remote on/off switches.
(d)
Photo sensors shall be supplied and installed to control the lighting systems at
the Departures Concourse and above the driveway.
(e)
18/21
January 2011
51.4
SUBMISSIONS
51.4.1
(ii)
the wiring diagram, scale plans, and details showing the method of
installation of lampholders, lamps, reflectors, transformers, control
gear and secondary feeds mounting bracket and support assembly
detailing leveling adjustment facilities as well as a complete bill of
materials; and
(iii)
(iv)
coefficients of utilization;
overall efficiency.
(b)
(c)
19/21
January 2011
51.4.2
Samples
(a)
(b)
(ii)
51.5
WORKMANSHIP
51.5.1
General
(a)
(b)
All recessed luminaires inside false ceiling shall be installed matching with the
adjacent grids and panels, air conditioning ductwork, pipeworks, other
services and ceiling support brackets but independent of them. The luminaries
shall be adequately supported from the structural ceiling but not on the false
ceiling, or other services, and in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. They shall
only be allowed to be supported from the ceiling systems where these are
specifically designed to provide such support and reviewed without objection
by the Project Manager.
(c)
(d)
For luminaires suspended or hanged at high level without false ceiling (e.g.
high bay lighting) or mounted on high level on beams or brackets (e.g. outdoor
floodlight), safety chains, reviewed without objection by the Project Manager,
of sufficient strength shall be provided to prevent accidentally falling during
servicing.
(e)
Adjustment bolts and nuts of a luminaire which is mounted on high level shall
be captive to prevent accidental loss during servicing.
(f)
(g)
(h)
All luminaires and lighting equipment, except self-finished (e.g. stainless steel
or anodized aluminium) shall have factory-finish unless otherwise specified.
20/21
January 2011
51.5.2
(i)
(j)
(k)
All other conduits for the lighting installation shall be concealed or cast-in
concrete.
(l)
Labelling of Luminaires
(a)
Each luminaire shall be provided with a durable self-adhesive label which shall
clearly detail the unique no. with bar code and the manufacturers type. The
text on the labels shall be 10 mm high, coloured black on a white background.
The labels shall be located to the exterior of the luminaires in positions hidden
from normal view.
21/21
January 2011
52.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
Protection
(i)
(ii)
(c)
(ii)
380V AC 10%;
wiring
frequency
50 Hz 5%;
1/9
January 2011
(iii)
system efficiency:
the efficiency of the UPS shall be at least 90% from half load to full load
with the battery fully charged; and 70% minimum for rated load while
recharging the battery;
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
noise level:
the noise level shall not exceed 60 dB(A) measured.
(d)
The UPS shall be designed for continuous reliable operation such that the
Mean-Time-Between-Failures (MTBF) for individual modules of the UPS viz.
rectifier/charger unit, inverter unit and static switch etc. shall be more than
8,760 hours.
(e)
The Mean-Time-To-Repair (MTTR) of the UPS shall not exceed 1 hour. The
MTTR shall be the time excluding travelling time required to diagnose the fault
and restore the UPS to normal working condition by means of module
replacement at Site.
(f)
2/9
January 2011
52.2
BS EN 60076/IEC76
Power Transformers
BS 727
BS 800
BS 5372
Specification for dimensions of cable terminations for multicore extruded solid dielectric insulated distribution cables of
rated voltages 600/1000V and 1900/3300V having copper or
aluminium conductors
BS EN 61558-2
BS 6290 : Part 4
BS EN 61000-4-1/IEC Electromagnetic
Compatibility
61000-4-1
Measurement and Control
for
Industrial-Process
BS 60146-1-1/IEC
60146-1-1
Semi-conductor Converters
BS 60529/IEC529
BS EN 60896
BS EN ISO 3746
BS EN 55014
BS 7430
52.3
MATERIALS
52.3.1
General
(a)
(b)
All active electronic devices shall be solid state. All semiconductor devices
shall be hermetically sealed. All relays shall be dust tight.
3/9
January 2011
52.3.2
(c)
The maximum working voltage, current and di / dt of all solid state power
components and electronic devices shall not exceed 75% of the ratings
established by their manufacturer. The operating temperature of solid state
component cases shall not be greater than 75% of their ratings. Electrolytic
capacitors shall be computer grade and be operated at no more than 75% of
their voltage rating.
(d)
The UPS solid-state power switching circuits and control systems shall be
modular in construction for ease of maintenance and to minimize down time.
All solid-state power switching modules shall be draw-out type removable from
the front of the UPS.
(e)
Inverter
(a)
The inverter unit shall be a solid state device capable of accepting the output
of the rectifiers/ chargers or battery and providing rated output within specified
limits.
(b)
(c)
The inverter shall be sized to supply the load in accordance with the following
requirements:
(i)
output voltage:
- rated voltage = 380V, 3-phases, 4-wire and earth; and
- steady state voltage regulation = 1% for a load between 0 and 100%
of full rated value irrespective of normal mains supply and DC voltage
levels within the limits specified;
(ii)
(iii)
in all cases, the voltage shall return to within steady state tolerance in
less than 20 milliseconds;
(iv)
(v)
4/9
January 2011
(vi)
(vii) phase displacement: 1201/2 for balanced load; 1203 for 50%
unbalanced loads; and
(viii) output frequency:
- rated frequency = 50 Hz;
- in normal operation, the output frequency of the inverter shall be
synchronized to that of the bypass power supply (mains 2) within the
limits of 0.5 Hz;
- for mains 2 frequency variations exceeding these limits, the inverter
shall switch over to free running mode, with regulation providing an
output frequency to within: 0.1% of the rated value; and
- frequency slew rate = 1 Hz/second minimum.
52.3.3
Rectifier/Charger
(a)
(b)
Output voltages from rectifiers/chargers shall not deviate by more than plus or
minus 1% due to primary input voltage and frequency variations and ambient
temperature variations.
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Modules shall be provided with input circuit breakers and fuses for
disconnecting the rectifier/charger and overload protection.
(g)
(h)
5/9
January 2011
52.3.4
(b)
(c)
Static switch and bypass shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS.
Bypass switches shall include transfer control logic which shall automatically
transfer the load to bypass upon the following conditions:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
overtemperature; and
(iv)
inverter failure.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
be all the same height and depth, suitable for bolting together in a suite;
(v)
(vi)
6/9
January 2011
(x)
(d)
Module control panels shall be furnished for modules equipped with the
following meters, controls, and indicators.
(i)
(ii)
controls:
- AC input breaker;
- DC battery breaker;
- AC output breaker;
- UPS module on;
- UPS module off;
- lamp test;
- horn silence;
- audible alarm volume control; and
- manual restart;
(iii)
alarm monitoring:
- system normal;
- alarm;
- low battery;
- battery discharge;
7/9
January 2011
- output overload;
- synchronous loss;
- AC input failure;
- overtemperature;
- shutdown imminent; and
- on bypass;
(e)
(iv)
a horn which shall be activated upon any UPS alarm or when the
inverter is on and the battery breaker is open; and
(v)
fully automatic operation of the UPS shall be provided through the use of
microprocessor controlled logic. Operating and protection parameters
shall be computer controlled, to eliminate the need for manual
adjustments to compensate for component tolerances. The logic shall
include system and battery test capability to facilitate maintenance and
troubleshooting. Start-up, transfers, and battery recharge shall be all
automatic functions.
Storage Batteries
(i)
(ii)
all battery cells shall be equipped with safety vent caps to prevent
internal cell explosions caused by internal pressure developed during
battery discharge or recharge. All terminal pillars, connectors and bolt
sets of the battery bank shall be coated with petroleum jelly; and
(iii)
8/9
January 2011
52.4
INSTALLATION
52.4.1
General
52.4.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
Equipment Earthing
All cabinet(s) shall be solidly bonded to a good earth in accordance with BS 7430
using adequate section of cable or busbar. The earth connection at the cabinet(s)
shall be made to the frame earth terminal provided l.
9/9
January 2011
SECTION 53 MOTORS
53.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
(c)
All electric motors shall be of the high efficiency squirrel-cage induction type
and used for the application to the following areas or as specified:
(i)
Fans;
(ii)
Compressor; and
(iii)
Pumps
all motor rotors shall be dynamically balanced. The vibration and noise
level generated by the motors shall not exceed the recommended
limits; and
(ii)
0.75
4.0
7.5
15.0
37.0
75.0
150.0
Sound
Power (dBA)
64
69
74
79
86
91
94
1.1
1.5
2.2
Minimum Efficiency 74.9 77.0 79.2 81.3 82.8 84.6 85.9 87.4
(%)
Output Power (kW) 3.0
4.0
5.5
7.5
Minimum Efficiency 88.5 89.4 90.4 91.3 92.2 93.0 93.4 93.8
(%)
Output Power (kW) 30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
Minimum Efficiency 94.3 94.7 95.0 95.3 95.8 96.0 96.3 96.5
(%)
1/10
January 2011
53.2
BS 88 : Part 2
BS 3790
Specification for endless wedge belt drives and endless Vbelt drives
BS 4941
BS 5420
BS 5512
BS EN 60034-5
BS EN 60947-1
IEC 60034
IEC 60085
53.3
MATERIALS
53.3.1
Motor Starters
(a)
General Requirements
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
inside the enclosure, protection against ingress of dust and liquid and
protection against mechanical damage shall be in accordance with BS
4941 and BS 5420;
2/10
January 2011
(b)
(iv)
star/ delta starters shall have timers for automatic transition, calibrated
and adjustable; and
(v)
Type
(i)
(ii)
ON/OFF switch or
Direct-on-line starter
Direct-on-line starter
Star-delta starter
Over 55 kW
Auto-transformer starter
where otherwise specified or shown on the Employers Drawings, softstart motor starter can be used in lieu of the starters mentioned above
to start motors over 2 kW;
(iii)
3/10
January 2011
(c)
(iv)
all starters shall be of the electrically held-on pattern and shall not
release until the voltage falls below 75% of nominal value;
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(ii)
fused switchgear;
4/10
January 2011
(d)
(e)
Star-delta Starters
(i)
(ii)
Auto-transformer Starters
(i)
(ii)
calibrated and adjustable solid state timers for switching over from
reduced voltage to full voltage connection.
5/10
January 2011
(f)
53.3.2
softstarter shall provide auxiliary contacts for end of starting (bypass) and fault condition. The output relay contact shall be suitable
for 220V AC operation in category AC11 and DC operation in
category DC11;
(b)
(c)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(d)
All motors rated above 15 kW and variable speed motors rated above 2.2 kW
shall also incorporate thermistors monitoring all phase windings of motors;
(e)
(f)
6/10
January 2011
(g)
53.3.3
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
overcurrent indication;
(vii)
(viii)
the power supply to the motor protection relay shall be from a source
which is not interrupted by normal stop-start operations; and
(ix)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
All electric motors shall comply with the relevant parts of IEC 60034.
(f)
The motors shall be insulated IEC 60085 with Class F as the minimum
insulation.
(g)
(h)
Motors of 2.2 kW output or above shall be suitable for operation from threephase supply. Single-phase motors could be used for output power under
2.2kW and whenever in appropriate applications.
(i)
Unless otherwise specified, the synchronous speed of the motor shall be 1450
rpm or 2900 rpm.
7/10
January 2011
(j)
(k)
(ii)
Tachometers
(i)
(l)
(m)
Terminal Box
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Anti-condensation Heater
(i)
(n)
(ii)
Slide rails shall be provided for all motors driving through belts.
Purpose-made adjusting devices shall be provided to enable belt
tension to be altered and motors to be secured.
8/10
January 2011
(iii)
(o)
53.3.4
53.3.5
Belt driven fans shall be fitted with pulleys suitable for the belt drive
used. Pulleys shall use split taper bushings for drives up to 30 kW. For
drives rated at above 30 kW, pulleys shall be secured to the fan and
motor shafts by keys fitted into machined keyways. Keys shall be
easily accessible so that they can be withdrawn or tightened.
Protective Guards
(i)
(ii)
For belt drives, the guards shall be of galvanized steel wire of not less
than 2.5 mm diameter attached to a rigid galvanized steel rod or angle
framework. The mesh size and the location of the guard shall prevent
finger contact with any enclosed danger point. Removable access
panels shall be provided in guards to allow tachometer readings to be
taken on both driving and driven shafts and also belt tension to be
tested. The sizes of guards including the dimensions and locations of
access panels shall allow for the limits of motor position.
Motor Bearings
(a)
Motors up to and including 4 kW shall be fitted with ball bearings at both ends.
Motors over 4 kW shall be fitted with roller or deep groove ball bearings at the
driving end and deep groove ball bearings at the non driving end. Motors
driving equipment that develops end thrust and motors operating with shafts in
a vertical position, shall be equipped with bearings designed to counter
unbalanced end thrust.
(b)
Bearings shall have a minimum L10 life of 100,000 hours at design conditions.
Rolling bearings shall be selected in accordance with BS 5512.
(c)
All Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be purpose built for fans and
pumps, individually factory tested packaged units and shall include but shall
not be limited to the following:
(i)
Power rectifier;
(ii)
9/10
January 2011
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(b)
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager, for review without
objection, full technical details of the VFD proposed demonstrating the
suitability of the proposed connected loads before the VFD are ordered.
(c)
(d)
Function of the blower motor shall be driven by variable frequency drive (VFD)
for maximum efficiency.
(e)
The VFD shall vary the output frequency based on the demand imposed by
the programmable controller to adjust the speed of the blower motor.
(f)
The VFD shall intercept the inrush of staring current from reaching the blower
motor and bring the blower up to operating speed gradually thus reducing
inrush current.
(g)
The VFD shall be completed with a cooling fan to provide heat dissipation for
the internal components.
(h)
VFD shall be constructed to conform with IP42 (or IP55 in exposed locations)
in accordance with IEC 529.
(i)
VFD for the unit shall be suitable for mounting internally inside the unit and
shall withstand the vibration whilst in service.
53.4
SUBMISSIONS
53.4.1
Particulars of Motors
(a)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
10/10
January 2011
54.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
54.2
HV switchgear;
(ii)
(iii)
HV cable
High voltage shall refer to voltage above 1kV and up to 11kV. All equipment
specified here shall be capable of operating continuously, in normal situation
at voltage of 11 kV.
BS 171
BS 171 : Part 5
BS 923
BS 2692-2
BS 3941
BS 5311
BS 5691 : Part 2
BS 6121
BS 6360
BS 6436
Specification
for
ground
mounted
distribution
transformers for cable box or unit substation connection
BS 6622
BS 6724
1/22
January 2011
BS 7655
BS 7671
BS 7806
BS 7844-2
BS 7888
BS EN 50267
BS EN 60044
Instrument transformers
IEC 726
54.3
HV SWITCHGEAR
54.3.1
All VCBs shall comply with BS 5311 and shall be of trip-free, totally enclosed,
metal clad, vertical isolation and horizontal draw-out type and shall meet the
following requirement:
Characteristics of circuit-breaker
Number of poles:
Class:
Indoor
Rated voltage:
12kV
75kV (peak)
28kV
Rated frequency:
50Hz
20kA (3 second)
50kA
3 seconds
as per BS 5311
2/22
January 2011
Characteristics of circuit-breaker
Power supply characteristics
Operating voltage:
Operating frequency:
50Hz 2.0%
motor-charging spring-powered
stored energy type/solenoid
closing
(b)
The moving portion of each circuit breaker, in the form of a four wheeled truck
which carries the circuit breaking system, operating mechanism, moving
isolating contacts, controls, indicators and all the necessary control wiring,
shall have 3 distinct positions; disconnect, test and service. Connection
to the trip and close coils, motor circuits and control/indication devices on the
moving portion shall be via auxiliary contacts which shall automatically engage
when the truck is in the service and test positions.
(c)
The moving portion of each circuit breaker shall be earthed in an effective way
which shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.
Apart from the current carrying parts, the carriage and all metal parts of the
circuit breaker truck shall be solidly earthed via the fixed portion.
(d)
(e)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
3/22
January 2011
54.3.2
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
Each circuit breaker shall include a mechanical counter to register the number
of breaker operations. The counter shall be non-reversible with the indication
of 4 digits or above.
Protective Relays
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The housing of all relays shall be dustproof cases. All metal bases and
frames of the relays shall be earthed except where the latter must be insulated
for special requirements. All principle protection relays shall be of a draw-out
pattern, and flush mounted on the front of the relay compartment. A filter
shall be fitted which shall equalize the pressure inside and outside the case
without admitting dust. For over-current relays, three single-phase units in
one horizontal plane shall be housed in a common casing. Auxiliary relays
accommodated internally shall be mounted so as to be easily accessible for
inspection and wiring.
4/22
January 2011
(e)
(f)
Operation indicators shall be provided for all relays that are designed to trip
the circuit breakers to identify the type or phase of the fault condition. The
relays shall preferably be of the electro-mechanical type, capable of being
reset by hand without opening the relay case.
(g)
All relay contacts shall be capable of making and breaking the maximum
current that may occur under fault conditions in the circuits in which they are
connected.
(h)
One set of test plug, universal test block and sufficient plugs and flying leads
shall be provided to facilitate testing of the principle relays in draw-out cases.
(i)
Furnish all the necessary protective relays, control and auxiliary relays to
provide for local and remote indications and/or control of the circuit breakers.
(j)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(k)
5/22
January 2011
(ii)
(iii)
(l)
54.3.3
Particular requirements for trip circuit supervision relay shall detect the failure
of trip supply, trip coil and trip circuit wiring open circuit and failure of circuitbreaker tripping mechanism. It shall be able to detect trip circuit abnormalities
with circuit-breaker in either opened or closed states except for earthing
positions. The relay shall have 2 pairs of normally closed and 1 pair of
normally open contacts.
All CTs shall be designed to operate at a system voltage of 11kV and comply
with BS EN 60044.
(b)
CTs shall be suitable for the operation of protective relays, instruments and
metering equipment and the characteristics shall be of a type reviewed without
objection by the Project Manager.
(c)
All CTs shall be of low reactance type and bar-primary design, epoxy resin
moulded type, and shall be able to withstand the anticipated short circuit
current for the associated circuit breaker as well as a 1 minute open circuit on
the secondary with the primary carrying the rated current.
(d)
CTs shall have an output rating adequate to cater for all the loads connected
to them. They shall have sufficient rating, terminal voltage, accuracy and
overcurrent performance for the satisfactory operation of their associated
equipment.
(e)
All connections from the secondary windings shall be brought out and taken
by means of separate insulated leads to a terminal board mounted in an easily
accessible position. All current transformers shall be adequately labeled to
indicate the polarity, ratio, class and duty of each transformer. For multi-ratio
secondary windings CTs, the Contractor shall provide labels to indicate the
connections required for each ratio.
(f)
The secondary windings of each set of CTs shall be earthed. The earth
connection shall be made via a removable link.
6/22
January 2011
(g)
(h)
54.3.4
Notwithstanding the above, the CTs shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
Class of insulation:
Class B
28 kV
75 kV (peak)
5A
Primary current of 20 kA
for 3 seconds
Primary current of 50 kA
(peak)
Class 1
The product of the rated output and rated accuracy limit factor of the CT shall
be not less than 150.
(b)
(c)
All VTs shall be of epoxy resin moulded type and shall be able to carry 50%
load above their rated load indefinitely without damage.
(d)
VTs and their associated primary fuses shall be of withdrawable type, and
shall be provided with an automatically operated safety shutter in an
independent compartment. VTs shall have the service and disconnected
positions with a mechanical indicator visible from the outside. Facilities for
padlocking in the primary fuses, a mechanical interlock shall be provided so
that the access lid can be opened only when VTs are in the disconnected
position.
(e)
All connections from the primary and secondary windings shall be brought out
and taken by means of separate insulated leads to separate terminal boards
mounted in an easily accessible position. All terminals shall be adequately
labeled to indicate their function, phase, ratio, class and duty of each
transformer.
(f)
Each phase end of the secondary winding shall be brought out to fuses, and
the neutral end shall be brought out to insulated links. Each of the neutral
leads shall be connected together at a single point and earthed through a link
which can be removed for insulation testing.
7/22
January 2011
(g)
VTs for measurement shall be connected star-star with the neutral points
earthed. The earthing of VTs shall be of a design reviewed without objection
by the Project Manager.
(h)
Class B
28 kV
75 kV (peak)
Accuracy Class:
Class 1
54.4
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
54.4.1
General
54.4.2
(a)
The requirements for the resin encapsulated, dry type power transformers are
as detailed herein.
(b)
(c)
The transformers shall be designed and suitable for a 25 years life. The
transformer manufacturer shall provide a 5 year warranty from initial
energisation. The form of the warranty shall be reviewed without objection by
the Project Manager.
(d)
(e)
(f)
The bearing surface of all bolt heads and nuts shall be parallel to the surface
onto which they tighten. Where necessary, angled washers shall be provided
to meet this requirement.
(g)
All metal parts, except core laminations shall be hot dipped galvanised.
Operating Conditions
(a)
(b)
8/22
January 2011
54.4.3
(c)
(d)
The transformers shall be entirely suitable for continuous operation under the
conditions specified herein at full rated output and shall include all equipment
necessary for the safe and convenient installation, operation and maintenance
of the plant.
54.4.4
54.4.5
The transformers shall be capable, when the primary windings are energized
at 50 Hz with three phase 11,000 voltage, of giving 380 volts between phases
and 220 volts between each phase and neutral, at no load, at the secondary
terminals.
Insulation Level
(a)
(b)
The impulse voltage withstand and the power frequency voltage withstand of
the HV windings and connected parts for each transformer shall be 75 kV
peak and 28 kV rms respectively.
(c)
(d)
Cooling
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The Contractor shall include with their submission, all technical information
and modifications required to the proposed transformers for incorporation of
the forced ventilation system. Details shall be submitted assuming the
modifications will be carried out during the service life of the transformer, i.e.
subsequent to commissioning.
9/22
January 2011
54.4.6
Noise
(a)
54.4.7
The design and construction of each transformer shall be such that its noise
level is kept as low as possible. In any case it shall not exceed an audible
sound level of 59db(A) at one metre from the surface of the transformer
enclosure, measured in accordance with IEC 551.
Tappings
(a)
(b)
(c)
Each tapping position shall be clearly identified to show which tapping of the
transformer is in use. Tapping position no. 1 shall correspond to the full
winding in circuit, that is, the maximum plus tapping.
(d)
(e)
54.4.8
Impedance
(a)
(b)
54.4.9
(ii)
10% for the 2500 kVA transformers; except where otherwise noted on
the Employer's Drawings.
The above impedance values shall be guaranteed and shall be subject to the
allowable tolerances as set out in BS 17l. Details shall be submitted to the
Project Manager.
Flux Density
(a)
The maximum flux density at any point in the core shall be such that with
normal primary voltage of sinusoidal waveform applied to the primary
terminals with the transformer on maximum negative tapping, the magnitudes
of the 5th and 7th harmonic currents shall not exceed 15% and 5%
respectively of the fundamental value of the magnetising current.
10/22
January 2011
(b)
The core and all metalwork shall be electrically bonded to the transformer
frame. A bolted connection shall be provided in the core earthing strap to
enable disconnection and testing of the core insulation.
(c)
(d)
(e)
The core and coils of each transformer shall be substantially supported and
mechanically braced, to prevent distortion and to withstand the effect of
vibration, transportation and all mechanical shocks which may occur under
working conditions, including those produced by short circuits.
(f)
The core and winding assembly shall be readily removable from the
transformer enclosure for inspection and shall be secure from movement
inside the enclosure during normal handling or transport.
(g)
(h)
(i)
The maximum temperature rise limit for the HV/LV windings shall be the same
as the temperature rise limits given in BS 171: Part 2 : 1978 but reduced by
10C to compensate for the higher average annual temperature in Hong Kong.
The maximum temperature rise will be the value at peak ambient of 45C
inside the substation when the transformer delivering full load.
(j)
11/22
January 2011
(b)
These relays shall provide facilities for alarm and tripping and shall include
relays with one pair of N/C contacts for alarm purposes and one pair of N/O
contacts for tripping purposes.
(c)
(d)
(e)
The setting of the various temperatures for the alarm, tripping and control
contacts shall be to the manufacturers recommendations. Details of proposed
settings shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.
54.4.13 Losses
(a)
(b)
kVA rating
2500 kVA
1500 kVA
(ii)
maximum allowable
no load losses
4.5 kW
3.0kw
(iii)
maximum allowable
load losses
20kW
11.1kw
(iv)
12/22
January 2011
L=2400 mm max;
(ii)
(iii)
H = 2500 mm max.
(b)
The rating and terminal marking plates shall be located on the transformers
remote from the high voltage termination in such a position that they can be
easily and safely read with the transformers in service.
(c)
(d)
The rating and diagram plates shall be manufactured from either non-ferrous
metal or stainless steel with the lettering etched or otherwise formed in relief.
(e)
(f)
The rating plates shall show the measured value of impedance voltage at the
principal tap as obtained by test on each transformer.
Lugs shall be provided suitable for lifting the transformer when fully fitted out
and ready for service. They shall be positioned so that any slings attached
thereto do not foul with any part of the transformer and when suspended by
them, the transformer shall hang without tilting.
(b)
All parts of the transformer, which must be removed for inspection or repair,
shall be fitted with lifting facilities suitable for use with slings and shackles.
(b)
13/22
January 2011
(b)
Jacking lugs shall be provided at a height of 250 mm from the underside of the
base. A channel iron base shall be provided and fitted under the clamping
frame, with a set of 150 mm diameter wheels suitable for forwards and
sideways movement. It shall be possible to fit and remove the wheels without
entering the enclosure.
(c)
Noise reduction anti vibration bearing blocks shall be built into the base to
provide effective isolation of vibration from the building structure. Blocks
designed for use under the wheels are not required, because wheels will
normally be removed.
(b)
(c)
Lifting lugs for whole transformer and towing lugs shall be made available
outside the protective housing.
(d)
The protective housing should incorporate all the necessary provisions for
future forced air (AF) operation such as louvers/grilles for intake and exhaust
air, space and mounting provisions for fans etc.
(e)
Cable gland plate for HV cables and duct flange for LV bus duct connection
shall be included on the protective housing based on the following positions:
(i)
(ii)
LV - top.
14/22
January 2011
54.4.20 Painting
(a)
(ii)
(iii)
the spacing of all adjacent pans, shall allow sufficient room for their
proper inspection, cleaning and painting;
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
all paint and varnish shall be non-corrosive, heat and oil resistant. It
shall be made by a reputable paint manufacturer and shall be applied
in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations for this
particular application;
(viii)
each coat shall cover completely and evenly the surface to which it is
applied; and
(ix)
54.4.21 HV Terminations
(a)
The transformers are to be supplied fitted with terminal palms rigidly bolted to
the core frame within the transformer enclosure and suitable for use with a
proprietary brand of withdrawable "Load Break Elbow" facilitating
disconnection of HV cables and utilising proprietary heat shrink terminations.
A cable way and support structure shall be provided suitable for
accommodating a 3 core XLPE insulated, copper tape screened, LSF
sheathed and nylon jacketed cable.
15/22
January 2011
(b)
The terminal shall preferably be in the form of a 50mm wide flat bar with single
l4mm diameter hole for connection of the cable load break elbow assembly.
The HV cable shall be made off in front of the HV terminals and substantially
completed before the termination including gland is moved into the final
position where it will be mounted on a gland plate within the protective housing.
(c)
Each cable box shall be fitted with a detachable and undrilled split gland plate.
The cable gland plate shall be designed for easy withdrawal of a trifurcated
cable complete with gland to facilitate transformer changes. The gland plate
shall be supplied complete with bolts, spring washers, nuts and lock nuts for
mounting of the gland. The position of the gland plate shall be at 900mm
distance from a horizontal line drawn through the MV terminals and at not less
than 600mm distance above the floor in the case of bottom entry units. The
Contractor shall also provide a 100 mm2 tinned dropper earthing tape from the
armour clamps which fit over the cable gland to the transformer unit earthing
terminal.
(d)
A cable support bracket shall firmly clamp the incoming cable at a suitable
distance from the terminations.
(e)
Minimum phase to phase and phase to earth clearances within the cable box
shall be 184 mm and 160 mm minimum respectively.
(f)
The minimum horizontal distance between the centre line of each phase
termination shall be 260 mm.
(g)
The minimum vertical distance between the centre line of the phase
termination and the top of the gland plate shall be 800 mm.
(h)
The cable box shall be fitted on a side of the transformer frame parallel to the
plane of the core and shall be opposite the LV bushings.
54.4.22 LV Terminations
(a)
(b)
The cable boxes shall be suitable for the termination of busduct up to 3,000
Amp rating. The connection shall be either top or bottom entry. The details
shall be subject to review without objection by the Project Manager prior to
manufacture.
(c)
All cable boxes shall be supplied complete with expansion joints suitable for
use with the bus duct listed above to allow the movement of the transformer to
be accommodated.
(d)
Each cable box shall be fitted with a detachable and undrilled split brass gland
plate.
(e)
A link chamber or neutral bushing external to the cable box is not required.
16/22
January 2011
(b)
(c)
54.5
54.5.1
General
(a)
54.5.2
This section specifies the requirements for 6.35/ 11 kV high voltage AC power
cables.
Construction requirements
(a)
(b)
(c)
The insulation shall be extruded XLPE in accordance with BS 6622 and water
free retardant. The nominal thickness of the insulation shall be as specified in
BS 6622.
(d)
(ii)
(iii)
the resistivity of the extruded insulation screen shall not exceed 500
ohm-m at 90C as specified in BS 6622;
(iv)
(v)
the metallic portion of the insulation screen applied over each core
shall be helically applied cover tape.
17/22
January 2011
(e)
The bedding of the cable shall consist of an extruded layer with flame
retardant characteristic tested to BS 4066. It shall be water resistant and
compatible with the operating temperature of the cable.
(f)
Armour for three core cables shall consist of a single layer of round galvanised
steel wires. Armour for single core cables shall consist of a single layer of
round aluminium wires. The armouring dimensions shall be in accordance with
BS 6622. The armour of the cable shall be rated to carry the maximum earth
fault current that may flow under fault conditions. Armour shall be applied
helically in a single layer with a left-hand lay.
(g)
(h)
Cables shall not be bent during installation to a radius smaller than the table
below:
(D = Overall diameter of cable)
During installation
- Unarmoured
20D
15D
- Armoured
15D
12D
- Unarmoured
15D
12D
- Armoured
12D
10D
Single core
Three core
54.5.3
The physical properties of the cable sheathing materials shall include the
following when tested in accordance with BS 6469:
Property
- Tensile strength at break
- Elongation at break
Requirement
10 Nmm-2
100%
8 Nmm-2
80C
50%
10 Nmm-2
100%
40%
40%
-15C
20%
18/22
January 2011
54.5.4
54.5.5
The bedding and oversheath of the cable shall have a minimum oxygen index
of 35 when tested in accordance with BS 2782.
(b)
The temperature index of the bedding and overhseath of the cable shall not
less than 280C when tested in accordance with BS 2782.
54.5.6
Smoke Emission
(a)
54.5.7
The level of hydrochloric acid of the insulation, fillers, binder tapes, bedding
and oversheath of the cable shall not be greater than 0.5% by weight of
material when tested in accordance with BS EN 50267.
The value of the smoke generated shall meet the requirements of BS 6724
when a sample of the complete cable is tested in accordance with BS 6724
Appendix F (3m cube test chamber).
Cable Termination
(a)
Cable termination shall be designed to allow for top or bottom cable entry.
Where top cable entry for any equipment is used, particular attention shall be
given to the possibility of water ingress to the equipment and only designs that
completely eliminate the possibility of water ingress shall be adopted.
(b)
(c)
The terminations within the cable box shall be suitable for compression typed
terminal lugs, and terminations using heat shrink proprietary kit type reviewed
without objection by the Project Manager.
(d)
11 kV termination: 75 kV
(e)
The minimum distance between lug termination and cable gland plate shall be
600mm.
(f)
Where more than one cable enters a terminal box, the clearance between
adjacent glands shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory cable installation.
(g)
All terminal boxes shall be fitted with screwed or tapered glands which shall be
insulated to withstand DC voltage test for extruded anti-corrosion reduced
flame propagation sheaths, and for leakage to frame protection.
(h)
19/22
January 2011
(i)
54.5.8
54.5.9
Cable Gland
(a)
(b)
Cable gland shall be of a type that seals the cable against the ingress of dirt
and moisture, and provides adequate mechanical support.
Cable Cleat
(a)
Cable cleats shall be single way cleats or trefoil cleats depending on the type
of cables being installed.
(b)
Cable cleats shall be made from materials that have no deleterious effect on
the cable, and shall be compatible with the cable supports.
The joint boxes shall be watertight, free from sharp points or ridges,
thoroughly clean internally, and designed to retain the filling medium and/or
cable compound at all times without leakage. The metallic screen(s) and the
armouring wires of the cable shall be efficiently bonded to the box. The joint,
insulation of cores and method of jointing shall be designed to prevent
migration of compound and interchange of compound between cable and joint.
(b)
(c)
For compound filled joints, the design of the box and the composition of the
filling compound shall provide an effective seal to prevent moisture gaining
access to the conductor connector and armour and screen(s) connections.
The filling compound shall be compatible with the materials of the cable
components with which it comes into contact. Account shall be taken of the
pouring temperatures or the temperature resulting from exothermic reaction.
(d)
The semi-conducting insulation screen shall be removed from the core(s) and
any remaining semi-conducting coating or semi-conducting particles shall be
thoroughly removed before application of the stress control components.
(e)
20/22
January 2011
54.6
(f)
For normally-bonded circuits, the metallic screen of all single core cables shall
be bonded across each joint by means of a copper bond, and an additional
copper bond shall be installed to connect together the bonds on each three
phase circuit.
(g)
(h)
Copper bonds shall have a cross sectional area of not less than 120 mm2.
Aluminium bonds shall be of aluminium stranded conductor sheathed with
flame retardant and low smoke halogen free material, and shall have a cross
sectional area of not less than 185 mm2.
(i)
All joint sleeves and any bonding leads associated therewith shall be
externally insulated.
(j)
All cable conductor connectors shall be of the compression type, crimped with
the aid of the hydraulic compression tool and appropriate die set.
(k)
(l)
All joints shall be capable of carrying the rated load and fault currents without
overheating and with mechanical strength to prevent movement.
(m)
All joints installed shall have flame retardant, low smoke halogen free
characteristics when affected by fire.
(n)
The positions of all cable joints along the cable routes shall be submitted to
the Project Manager for review without objection. All joints shall not exceed
300mm wide. No joint shall be made in the cable route of a trench at platform
level, and no joint shall be made within 4m of a bend. No joint shall be made
on a vertical cable.
PILOT CABLES
All pilot cables shall be stranded plain copper conductors with XLPE insulated, LSOH
bedded, steel wire armoured and LSOH oversheath to BS 6724. Each cable shall
have not less than 38-cores and the cross-sectional area of copper conductor per
each core shall be not less than 2.5 mm2.
21/22
January 2011
54.7
SUBMISSIONS
54.7.1
The following particulars of the proposed high voltage electrical services shall
be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
22/22
January 2011
SECTION 55
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 56
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
57.1
57.2
GENERAL
(a)
Earthing and bonding system shall comply with the requirement of Code Of
Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued by EMSD.
(b)
All metal works associated with an electrical installation but not forming part of
a live conductor, including exposed conductive parts and extraneous
conductive parts shall be solidly and effectively bonded and earthed.
(c)
(d)
BS 4662
BS 7430
BS 7671
BS EN 12165
BS EN 12420
IEEE 1100
1/10
IEE Wiring
January 2011
57.3
MATERIALS
57.3.1
57.3.2
(a)
A solid copper main earthing terminal of ample size shall be provided for every
electrical installation at a position near the main incoming switch or
switchboard for the connection of the circuit protective conductors, the main
equipotential bonding conductors and the earthing conductors to create the
equipotential zone. The main earthing terminal shall be connected to earth via
an earthing conductor to an earth electrode or a group of electrodes.
(b)
Earth Electrode
(a)
The following types of earth electrode shall be used unless otherwise specified
in the Employers Drawings:
(i)
Rod electrode
- rod electrode shall be mild steel inner core with a bonded hard drawn
copper sleeve of an approved type. The overall diameter of the rod
shall not be less than 15 mm and the thickness of the copper sleeve
shall not be less than 0.25 mm. The minimum length shall be 2.4m.
Additional lengths, whenever required, shall each be of 1.2m; and
- in the event that one rod does not produce a low earthing resistance,
additional lengths or rods shall be installed. For the latter application,
additional rods shall be driven into the ground outside the resistance
area of the previously installed rod(s). Under normal circumstances,
a mutual separation of 3.5m is considered adequate.
(ii)
Tape Electrode
- tape electrode shall be untinned copper strip of not less than 25 3
mm in cross section. Tape electrode shall be used only if specified by
the Project Manager; and
- in case where several tapes are required for connection in parallel to
achieve a low earthing resistance, they may be installed in parallel
lines or they may radiate from a point.
(iii)
Plate Electrode
- plate electrode shall be of copper not less than 3 mm in thickness,
having dimensions as indicated on the Employers Drawings or
subject to a maximum of 1200 1200 mm.
57.3.3
Earth Conductor
(a)
2/10
January 2011
57.3.4
57.3.5
(b)
The cross sectional area of a main equipotential bonding conductor shall not
be less than half of the cross-sectional area of the associated earthing
conductor of the installation subject to a minimum of 6 mm2 and a maximum of
25 mm2.
(c)
(d)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
57.3.6
(i)
General
(i)
(ii)
3/10
January 2011
(b)
(iii)
Where a protective conductor shall not form part of a cable and shall not
formed by, or not contained in, steel conduit, trunking, ducting or other
metallic enclosure of a wiring system, the cross sectional area shall not
be less than 2.5 mm2 or equivalent if protection against mechanical
protection is provided (e.g. sheathed cable) and 4 mm2 copper or
equivalent if mechanical protection is not provided (e.g. non-sheathed
cable). When a separate cable is used as a CPC, the cable shall be
insulated to BS 6004 or better.
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(c)
(d)
(ii)
4/10
January 2011
(e)
57.4
EARTHING RESISTANCE
(a)
57.5
For wiring system using PVC insulated, the circuit protective conductor
of every ring final circuit shall also be run in the form of a ring having
both ends connected to the earth terminal at the origin of the circuit.
(b)
(ii)
For installation other than socket outlet circuits where protection against
indirect contact is afforded by an overcurrent protective device, the earth
fault loop impedance of a final circuit and the characteristic of the
protective device shall be co-ordinated that the automatic disconnection
of supply shall occur within 5 seconds in case of an earth fault of
negligible impedance.
For installation other than the socket outlet circuits where protection
against indirect contact is afforded by overcurrent protective device, the
earth fault loop impedance of any final circuit shall not exceed the
maximum values given in the relevant tables in the Code Of Practice For
The Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued by EMSD for automatic
disconnection time of 5 seconds.
(ii)
For circuits using residual current devices, the following formula shall be
fulfilled:
RAIa < 50V
where:
RA is the sum of the resistances of the earth electrode and the protective
conductor(s) connecting it to the exposed conductive part; and
Ia is the current causing the automatic operation of the protective device
within 5 seconds. When the protective device is a residual current
device, Ia is the rated residual operating current.
5/10
January 2011
57.6
SUBMISSIONS
57.6.1
57.6.2
(ii)
(iii)
Samples
(a)
The following samples of the earthing and bonding system shall be submitted
to the Project Manager together with the particulars referred to in 57.6.1
above:
(i)
copper strip, copper tape, copper connector clamps, earth rods and
other accessories.
57.7
WORKMANSHIP
57.7.1
Earthing Equipment
(a)
(b)
(ii)
6/10
January 2011
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(c)
(d)
At the earthing terminal, a permanent copper label marked with the words
SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH DO NOT REMOVE in English and
Chinese shall be permanently attached to the final earthing lead connection.
Lettering shall be 5 mm high and fixing details shall be referred to the
Employers Drawings.
(e)
The main earth terminal in the form of earth electrodes shall be driven into
solid ground at earth pits. A test clamp shall be provided for earth resistance
testing.
(f)
Joints in the earthing system shall have a resistance not exceeding that of an
equivalent length of conductor.
(g)
(h)
(i)
All contact faces of each terminal shall be cleaned and free from nonconducting materials, such as grease or paint, before connections are made to
the earthing system.
7/10
January 2011
57.7.2
(j)
(k)
For each earth electrode, the clamping arrangements shall be contained within
a small concrete lined pit complete with an easily removable lid to enable
inspection.
LV Electrical Earthing
(a)
For earthing system provided for LV electrical earthing shall have the resulting
earth resistance not greater than 0.3 ohm unless otherwise specified.
(b)
The electrical earthing system shall be installed both vertically and horizontally
along the routes as shown on the Employers Drawings and shall form a
network bonding all switchboards, control panels, distribution boards, all
exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive parts to the building's
main earth bar.
(c)
(d)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Earthing conductor between the earthing bed and the main earth bar at
LV Switchroom: 50 6 mm.
(ii)
(iii)
by
(iv)
by
8/10
January 2011
(v)
57.7.3
57.7.4
(e)
All armoured cables shall be terminated with purpose made cable gland and
earthing lugs.
Busbar plug-in units shall be provided with earthing
connections to earthing conductors of the busbar risers which shall be
engaged before the live contacts are made.
(f)
Cable link boxes shall be provided with earthing connections between the
incoming and outgoing connections.
(g)
Cable trays and cable ladders shall have a tinned copper earth conductor of
not less than 25 3 mm installed along their entire length, fixed to the tray at
2m intervals by means of bronze clamps. The intervals of fixing shall be
decreased as necessary to ensure that individual section of tray is fixed to the
earth conductor. Individual sections of any trunking, whether it is ceiling or
underfloor/flushfloor or other types, shall be electrically bonded together with
tinned copper earth conductors of not less than 25 3 mm and of sufficient
lengths.
(h)
(b)
(b)
9/10
January 2011
57.7.5
(c)
The earthing system shall provide a conductive path for spurious commonmode currents and minimize interference and other electromagnetic
anomalies.
(d)
(e)
All equipment racks and/or sub-racks mounted within outdoor enclosures shall
be properly earthed to the metallic enclosure via internal braided copper
straps of minimum practical length or to the earthing terminal inside the nonmetallic enclosure via internal braided copper straps of minimum practical
length.
(f)
For metal moving parts such as metal doors and metal cabinet openings,
braided copper straps with proper labels used for earth connections shall
comply with BS 1433, and shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of 16
mm2.
(g)
(h)
The contact faces between earthing lugs, enclosure frames and earthed items
shall be cleaned and free of paint, and shall exhibit a maximum resistance of
less than 0.3.
(i)
(b)
Colour Identification
(i)
(ii)
10/10
January 2011
58.2
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
(c)
Any protrusion from the sides of a structure, which may obstruct the vertical
path of the down conductor, shall be sleeved to allow the down conductor to
pass through.
(d)
BS 6651
BS 7430
BS 7671
58.3
MATERIALS
58.3.1
Air Termination
(a)
(b)
Vertical conductors shall have overall length not less than 450 mm and 12
mm rods made of hard drawn or annealed copper;
(c)
1/5
January 2011
(d)
58.3.2
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Down Conductor
(a)
58.3.3
(ii)
(iii)
Test Joint
Test joints shall be of phosphor bronze, gunmetal or copper. They shall comprise a
heavy circular base, to which a heavy circular cover of the same material shall be
bolted. The flat copper conductor shall be overlapped and placed so that they are
clamped between the cover and the base by means of at least four screws or studs.
(a)
Earth Termination
An earthing system shall be provided for the lightning protection system. The
Contractor shall investigate the site conditions and submit installation details
for Project Managers review without objection.
(b)
Spacer Saddle
(i)
(ii)
2/5
January 2011
58.3.4
Submissions
(a)
(b)
detailed schedule of
manufacturer's data; and
equipment
and
components
and
Samples
(i)
58.3.5
copper tape;
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
(b)
Air Termination
(i)
For a roof of larger horizontal dimensions, the outer perimeter and the
flat roof shall be covered by an air termination network mesh of
approximately 10 x 20m, so that no part of the roof shall be more than
5m from the nearest horizontal conductor. All salient points of the roof
structure shall be incorporated in the air termination network. All
metallic projections, ducts, vent pipes, railings, gutters, etc., on or
above the main surface of the roof of the structure, shall be fixed to,
and form part of, the air termination network. Horizontal conductors
shall be fixed to the roof structure at regular intervals of not more than
1m by means of suitable spacer saddles.
(ii)
Down Conductor
(i)
(ii)
Where the steel work of the structure is used as down conductor, the
Contractor is required to ensure the continuity of the steel work. In this
connection the ends of the steel work shall be connected to the lighting
protection system by Thermoweld jointing method or other methods
agreed with the Project Manager. A test joint shall be provided at each
connection.
3/5
January 2011
(c)
(iii)
(iv)
Each down conductor shall be complete with test joint and connecting
to an earth termination.
(v)
PVC sleeve from 2 m above ground to the earth pit shall be provided
for the down conductor.
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
Test Joint
The test joints shall be positioned so that they shall not be tampered with by
unauthorised persons. In cases where this is not possible, the earth tape/rod
connector clamp shall be used as an alternative test point in place of the test
joint.
(d)
Earth Termination
Each earth termination shall have a resistance to earth not exceeding the
product given by 10 times the number of earth termination to be provided.
The whole of the lightning protective system shall have a combined resistance
to earth not exceeding 10. Where it is difficult, due to local conditions to
obtain a value of less than 10 by the sole use of rod electrodes, alternative
or additional methods, e.g. the installation of tape of plate electrodes may be
used subject to review without objection by the Project Manager.
(e)
4/5
January 2011
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
The air termination shall be fixed on the mounting base on the top of
the high mast lighting pole and on the roof of the plant deck. No part
of the air termination shall extend above the air port height restrictions
for the given location.
(ii)
5/5
January 2011
59.1
59.2
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
BS EN 61000-6-4
BS EN 55011
BS EN 55022
BS EN 55014
BS EN 55015
IEC 61000-4-2
59.3
59.3.1
Electromagnetic compatibility
All electrical and electronic apparatus, including such items as thyristor controlled
propulsion equipment, sensors, contactors, starters etc., shall be fitted with means
for suppressing the radio interference frequencies caused by it, shall be immune to
interference fields and comply with the relevant National Standards of any of the
EEC Member States, the reference numbers of which have been published in
accordance with the provisions of Council Directive 89/336/EEC.
1/2
January 2011
59.3.2
59.3.3
Radio frequency noise generated by the operation of the system shall not
result in any improper functioning of the system and the system shall not be
susceptible to the normal electromagnetic emission by other airport equipment
provided in the building.
(b)
The system shall not interfere with nor be affected by RF systems on the
airport.
(c)
(d)
59.3.4
Electromagnetic Interference
(a)
The Plant shall not interfere with aviation navigation systems or aircraft
maneuvering operations in any way.
(b)
(c)
The design and/or selection of all equipment shall take into account the effects
of possible electromagnetic interference from nearby high voltage and current
supplies, automatic people mover (APM), Airport Express train (AEL), heavy
current plant and machinery, discharge and other lighting equipment, direct
current signaling and control systems, radio transmitters and radar which are
likely to be installed within the Project Site.
2/2
January 2011
60.1
60.2
GENERAL
(a)
The Plant shall be inspected, tested and commissioned to confirm that Plant
performance complies with the requirements of the Contract.
(b)
All such Inspection, Testing and Commissioning shall, in particular but without
limitation, be planned, carried out and documented in accordance with:
(i)
(ii)
the construction quality plans and inspection and test plans prepared by
the Contractor in accordance with the relevant ISO standard and
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager; and
(iii)
General Specification.
TERMINOLOGY
(a)
In this Contract, and in all programmes, quality plans, reports and other
documents produced in the course of this Contract, the following terms shall
be used:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) Phase - one or other of the phases identified in (i) - (vi) above;
1/17
January 2011
(x)
Site Tests - tests on static items of Plant and systems (e.g. inspection
and testing of welds and hydraulic testing of pipeworks) to ensure
correct and safe installation before Setting to Work;
(xi)
2/17
January 2011
60.3
(b)
(c)
The term Performance Tests as defined and used in the General Conditions
of Contract refers to the Confidence Trials and such further tests, if any,
identified as such in the Specification.
(ii)
Manufacturing Phase:
-
Type Tests.
Installation Phase:
-
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Pre-Commissioning Phase:
-
Commissioning; and
Reliability Tests.
(vi)
(b)
Site Tests.
Any Deferred Seasonal Tests shall also be clearly identified in all plans and
programmes.
3/17
January 2011
60.4
60.5
(c)
For the duration of the Defects Liability Period operational and safety controls
shall be sealed if adjustment beyond defined limits could result in malfunction
and give rise to a defect.
(d)
The Contractor shall provide attendance and technical support during the
Confidence Trials Period in accordance with Section 60.16 of this General
Materials & Workmanship Specification Confidence Trials Phase.
QUALITY PLANS
(a)
The Contractor shall identify in his construction quality plans and division of
the Plant into discrete elements to facilitate the preparation and service of
Phase Notices as called for in this General Materials & Workmanship
Specification Section 60.5.
(b)
The Project Manager, in reviewing any inspection and test plan, may require
additional inspection, testing and commissioning documentation as may be
considered reasonably necessary to record these processes.
PHASE NOTICES
(a)
For each element of the Plant identified in the Contractor's construction quality
plans or, as the case may be, for the Plant as a whole:
(i)
the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager for
review a Phase Notice at the end of the Manufacturing Phase, the
Installation Phase and the Pre-Commissioning Phase;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the Phase Notice relating to an Installation Phase shall confirm that the
Contractor is satisfied that the equipment or system or part of a system
is ready for starting the pre-commissioning tests; and
(v)
4/17
January 2011
(b)
60.6
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the tolerances;
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
pass /fail;
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit his proposed test Results Forms as
part of his submission of the relevant Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
Plan.
5/17
January 2011
60.7
60.8
PHASE REPORTS
(a)
(b)
workmanship;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
(d)
Any modifications to circuitry, instrumentation, etc. carried out at any time shall
be recorded in detail in the Phase Reports and shown on the Contractors
Drawings.
(e)
(f)
(ii)
(iii)
6/17
January 2011
60.9
60.10
60.11
(iv)
(v)
(b)
The Contractor shall provide all necessary skilled labour and assistance for
testing, operating, adjusting, commissioning and verifying the performance of
all Plant.
(c)
The Contractor's testing and commissioning staff shall have had previous
experience with testing and commissioning similar Plant of comparable duty.
(d)
(b)
Testing and commissioning instrumentation shall be designed for field use and
to minimize field measurement errors through the use of electronic sensors,
digital displays and similar devices.
(c)
(d)
NOTIFICATIONS
(a)
7/17
January 2011
60.12
60.13
Prior to any inspection and testing by the Project Manager, the Contractor
shall inspect and test the Plant himself to ensure that equipment and facilities
are clean and complete and can reasonably be expected to meet successfully
all inspection and/or testing criteria.
(b)
(c)
In the event that the Contractor considers that any testing is not appropriate or
required, the Contractor may submit alternative proposals to the Project
Manager for his review without objection.
60.13.1 General
(a)
General electrical Site Tests and Commissioning shall include but not be
limited to the following:
(i)
(ii)
all interlocks, isolators and door and cover securing mechanisms are
properly fitted and adjusted;
(iii)
(iv)
all cables, cores and terminations are properly made off, secure,
properly supported and correctly identified and coloured;
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
all contacts are properly aligned and not subject to excessive wear or
erosion;
(viii)
all protective covers are properly fitted, all warning and designating
labels are correct and in position and the inside of all boxes and
cubicles are clean and free of swarf and cable strippings;
(ix)
8/17
January 2011
(x)
all instruments and meters are energised with correct polarity and
working properly;
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
(xiv)
60.13.2 LV Switchboard
(a)
Visual Checks
-
(ii)
Dielectric Test
-
(iii)
this shall be carried out using AC and shall check that protection
relays or devices function in accordance with their performance
curves by a test at the lowest setting and two further tests of
current and timing;
(vi)
(v)
Insulation Test
-
(iv)
this shall be carried out to ensure that all CTs are correctly
connected
9/17
January 2011
(vii)
Functional Test
-
(viii)
(ix)
(b)
On site test shall be carried out including visual check and as following above
tests ii) to viii) in Section 60.13.2 (a) of this General Materials & Workmanship
Specification.
(c)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
for initial set-up, charge the batteries at the manual highest rate until
the charging current remains constant. Record the starting and
finishing time. Check the capacity of charger is capable of recharging
the batteries from fully discharged to fully charge within the specified
duration;
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
interrupt mains input to the charger and check that proper operation of
connected devices continues on standby batteries. In the case of
switch tripping in Switchboard, interrupt mains input to check whether
the capacity of the batteries is adequate to trip the associated air
circuit breaker consecutively at least 20 times or up to twenty air circuit
breakers simultaneously, whichever the greater;
(viii)
(ix)
restore mains supply and check that charger fail/mains fail indications
are off and that mains on indication is restored.
10/17
fail/battery
January 2011
60.13.3 UPS
(a)
(b)
The assembly shall undergo factory test prior to installation. Carry out
a 72 hours continuous burn-in test for the total system, including
functional and full load tests prior to shipment.
overload performance;
instruments calibration;
60.13.4 Lighting
(a)
(ii)
(b)
11/17
January 2011
(b)
(ii)
insulation resistance;
polarity;
including
main
and
The details of above tests shall be accordance with Code 21B in Code
of practice for Electricity (Wiring) Regulation by EMSD.
60.14
HV DISTRIBUTION CABLES
(a)
(b)
construction test;
(ii)
dielectric test;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
12/17
January 2011
(c)
(d)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
immersion test;
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
(xiv)
(xv)
(xvi)
(xvii)
(xviii)
Site Tests:
(i)
(ii)
pressure test;
(iii)
(iv)
polarity test.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
pressure test.
13/17
January 2011
60.15
HV DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
(a)
The contractor shall carry out tests of transformers of the same type and rating
as the transformer being offered as per BS EN 60076 and BS IEC 60076-8 (or
other equivalent international standard). Type test certificates for each type
test complete with reports and drawings shall be submitted.
(b)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
no load test;
(vi)
impedance test;
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
harmonic measurements;
(xiv)
(xv)
(xvi)
(xvii)
(xviii)
(xix)
14/17
January 2011
(c)
(d)
60.16
(i)
(ii)
(ii)
60.17
Site Tests
EMERGENCY GENERATORS
(a)
(b)
Performance tests shall be carried out for all equipment and systems installed.
This shall include the necessary adjustment and setting of all controls,
checking the operation of all overload protection and safety devices and the
commissioning of the completed installation.
(c)
All apparatus, fuels, tools and instruments necessary for testing the
installation shall be supplied. The accuracy of the instruments shall be proved.
Calibration certificates of all instruments shall be submitted before carry out
the test. Test methods and measurements shall be in accordance with
BS5514, Part 2 and Part 3.
15/17
January 2011
60.18
(d)
(e)
Full load test in the first instance shall use dummy load which shall be carried
out. This shall be followed by the actual full load tests. Transportation shall be
arranged to deliver the dummy loads to the Site and temporary power
connection from the generator to the dummy load shall be provided.
(f)
The engine shall be run consecutively at no load, 25% load, 50% load, 100%
load, 110% load and 80% load each for at least one hour under worst ambient
condition. The following data shall be recorded for every 15 minutes:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Fuel level at every half hour by manual sounding and gauge reading
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
Voltage regulation
(g)
The engine speed control shall be tested by applying consecutively step load
of 25% and 50% of rated capacity and the transient speed drop recorded.
(h)
Four copies of certified results of the tests shall then be submitted to the
Project Manager.
(i)
All the fuel tanks shall be topped up after satisfactory completion of all the
above tests.
(b)
Hydraulic testes for the daily fuel tanks, underground storage tanks and the
completed pipework for a period of time not less than 2 hours without undue
deformation and leaking. The following test pressure shall be used :
(i)
70 kPa for the daily service tanks and the underground fuel storage tanks.
(ii)
The pressure gauges employed for the test shall be tested and calibrated by
approved laboratory before use. Pressure gauges with full scale deflection
readings more than 3 times the test pressures shall not be used.
16/17
January 2011
60.19
(c)
Immediately after the hydraulic testing, the daily service tanks and underground
fuel storage tanks must be drained and dried out and a thick coat of linseed oil or
equivalent coating shall be applied on the interior surfaces of the tanks to
prevent rusting. All pipework, fittings and valves after tests shall be drained dried
and flushed out with linseed oil to remove all traces of water to prevent rusting.
(d)
Contractor's name
(ii)
(iii)
PILOT CABLES
All the cable type tests and routine tests for pilot cables shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 6387, BS 4066, BS 6425, and BS 6724.
17/17
January 2011
61.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
(c)
Mounting and fixing details shall include details and dimensions of air handling
unit bases, fixing bolts, flexible connections, vibration isolators and any
installation requirements.
(d)
Air handling units (AHU's) shall include, but not be limited to, the following
components.
(e)
(i)
sheet metal housing including fan, cooling coil, filter and air mixing
sections;
(ii)
fans;
(iii)
(iv)
cooling coils;
(v)
(vi)
air filters;
(vii)
(viii)
access doors;
(ix)
thermal insulation;
(x)
(xi)
flexible connections.
The Contractor shall comply with other relevant sections of this General
Materials & Workmanship Specification including, but not limited to the
sections which specify:
(i)
Section 63 Fans;
(ii)
(iii)
1/8
January 2011
(f)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
Air handling units and associated components shall be factory fabricated and
assembled, factory tested and pre-commissioned prior to shipment. Work to
be undertaken at the factory prior to delivery to Site shall include, but not be
limited to:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(h)
All air handling units and/or primary air handling units shall incorporate a
600mm long empty section to allow the future installation of air treatment
plant.
2/8
January 2011
61.2
BS EN ISO 9001
ARI 430
DW/144
All air handling units and/or primary air handling units shall be constructed in
accordance with BS EN 1886:1998 - Ventilation for buildings.
Each AHU shall be provided with a factory assembled air mixing plenum at the air
intake as shown on the Employers Drawings. Each opening on the mixing plenum
shall be provided with an integral factory assembled volume control damper.
61.3
SELECTION
(a)
Static pressure of the fan performance shall meet the total system
requirements, including but not limited to, pressure drops across wet cooling
coils, dirty filters, sound attenuators, dampers, plenums, ductwork, door grilles
and the like.
(b)
Scheduled external fan static pressures affecting the final selection of fans,
motors and associated plant are approximate. Fans shall be selected based
on the Contractors static pressure calculations to ensure the duties are
compatible with the installed plant, materials used and the final ductwork
layout.
(c)
Units shall be tested and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 430.
61.4
MATERIALS
61.4.1
General
(a)
(b)
3/8
January 2011
(c)
The unit housing shall be fabricated from heavy gauge, hot dipped galvanised
structural members and heavy gauge galvanised folded sheet steel panels.
Base frame shall not be less than the height of 100mm. Casing materials
shall not be less than the thickness as shown in the table below and methods
of strengthening and fastening shall ensure that air-handling assemblies are
not less but preferably more rigid in operation than the distribution duct to
which they connect.
Component
61.4.2
Minimum material
thickness (mm)
Steel framework
2.0
1.6
0.8
Other
1.2
(d)
(e)
All metal surfaces shall be properly treated and suitably painted. Galvanised
sheet metal finish is not acceptable. External wall shall be galvanised steel,
chemically treated, pre-coated with primer and plastisol topcoat in accordance
with the manufactures recommendations.
(f)
The channel and/ or angle framework sections shall be of galvanised steel and
be easily bolted/ welded together on site. All bolts and nuts etc. shall be
stainless steel metal or bright metal cadmium coated steel.
(g)
Each air handling units and/or primary air handling units shall be supplied to
site as a complete factory assembled unit direct from the original
manufacturers works. Each unit shall include, but not be limited to, motors,
bearings, pulley drives, eliminators, filters, cooling coil, ducted mounted
electric heater, and other components and accessories. All components shall
be arranged such that they are readily accessible for repair, maintenance and
replacement.
(h)
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager, for review without
objection, Contractors drawings detailing the proposed delivery routes and
access requirements to allow the future replacement of the complete air
handling units and/or primary air handling units, of part thereof.
4/8
January 2011
(b)
61.4.3
61.4.4
The unit shall be cold bridge free without sweating even under ambient
conditions of 40C and 98% RH. Thermal insulation shall be 50mm thick 48
kg/m3 fibreglass having a thermal conductivity not greater than 0.02 W/mC
rated at the operating temperature and reviewed without objection by the
Project Manager. The insulation shall provide a high degree of noise
attenuation. Insertion loss through the panels shall be sufficient to achieve a
25 dB and 27 dB reduction at 63 Hz and 125 Hz octave bands respectively.
The unit shall be provided with rigid, insulated, gasketted, non-leaking doors
and panels to provide access to items which may require inspection,
adjustment, maintenance and/or removal.
(b)
Hinged doors of cool room construction or similar shall be used for access on
all air handling units with an internal height exceeding 0.6 m. Doors shall be
operable from inside and outside the AHU.
(c)
For smaller air handling units, access panels shall be provided with sash
clamps or similar fasteners for ease of panel removal. Panels screwed in
position will not be accepted.
(d)
Doors and access panels shall be a minimum 600 mm wide and shall be the
full height of the air-handling unit up to a maximum of 1500 mm.
(e)
(f)
(g)
Fan chamber access doors shall be key locked and interlocked with fan motor
to automatically stop the fan if the door is opened.
Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on a common framework inside the
fan section.
(b)
The fan discharge shall be isolated from the casing by a flexible connection.
(c)
(d)
Selection of the fan and motor shall be such that they are operating at their
peak efficiency. Fan and motor shall be supplied together by the AHU
manufacturer, unless otherwise specified.
5/8
January 2011
61.4.5
61.4.6
Flexible connections shall be fitted between the fan discharge and the main air
supply ductwork. Flexible connections shall be constructed of two layers of
fire resistant glass cloth with aluminum foil interleaf or equivalent to provide a
pressure seal. Both the internal and external faces of the connection shall be
moisture proof. Exposed flanged joints shall be sealed with vapour barrier
mastic and capped all around with a 0.8 mm galvanised sheet metal painted to
match the air handling unit colour.
(b)
Anti-Corrosion Treatment
(a)
Where units incorporate humidifying plant and/or cooler batteries, the internal
surfaces of the units liable to be affected by moisture shall be of non- ferrous
materials or galvanized mild steel sheet. The GI metal sheets shall be
protected by at least two coats of anti-corrosion epoxy resin paint, colour coat,
or other finish reviewed by the Project Manager and applied in the factory.
Field painting after the installation is not accepted.
61.5
SUBMISSIONS
61.5.1
Particulars of AHU
61.6
(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall submit the make and type of each fan giving values of
sound power levels and fan efficiency at the selected duty together with the
'type' test certificate for review without objection by the Project Manager.
(c)
(d)
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
(b)
6/8
January 2011
(c)
Bolts, screws, fixings and the like shall not penetrate or contact both interior
and exterior panels or form a "thermal bridge".
(d)
Wherever possible, all plant including fans, coils, valves, dampers, filters,
heaters, motors and the like shall be accessible for inspection, adjustment,
maintenance and removal from the one side of the air handling unit. The units
shall be designed and arranged so that the location of access doors, coil
connections, fans, drives, motors and support points are compatible with the
unit locations shown on the Employer's Drawings.
(e)
Units over 1.0 m high or 1.0 m wide shall be walk in and have floors and floor
mounted condensate trays designed to carry the weight of a maintenance
person.
(f)
A structural steel channel or rolled steel joist base shall be provided to support
the unit. The base shall be of sufficient depth to allow installation of the entire
condensate trap within the depth of the base. The AHU shall not directly rest
on the concrete plinth and shall be supported with steel channel of not less
than 100mm height.
(g)
Capped test holes and other facilities shall be provided to suit testing and
commissioning.
(h)
Unless otherwise specified, air handling unit shall be mounted on a hot dipped
galvanised I beam or U channel mounting frame which is either fixed on a
concrete plinth of 150mm height with not less than 15mm thickness neoprene
pads or ceiling mounted by suspension galvanised steel hangers. Sufficient
space shall be allowed for installation of drain trap and fall of condensate
drainpipe.
(i)
For ceiling mounted air handling unit, the mounting frame and hanging rods
shall be designed to account for the operation loading of the air handling unit
and the associated ducting and piping. Hanging rods shall be threaded and
complete with locking nuts for level adjustment. All AHU supports and
supporting accessories shall be hot dip galvanised steel.
(j)
(k)
(l)
All gauges and meters other than insertion type shall not be mounted on the
casing of the air handling unit but shall be purpose designed and installed
within the AHU at the manufacturers works.
(m)
The Contractor shall adequately protect the surface of the coil fins with
wooden covers which shall remain on the coil until system balancing
commences.
7/8
January 2011
(n)
Each AHU shall have a specification plate which shall show full details of the
fan size, r.p.m., amperes, impeller diameter, fan characteristics, lubricants, air
flows at specified duty, pulley and belt sizes, coil duties, filter media, water
flow rates, design flow temperatures and any other information as may be
required by the Project Manager. This plate shall be labeled in English and
securely fixed to the air handling unit casing.
(o)
The air handling units shall bear the manufacturers nameplate giving
manufacturers name, serial and model number and date of manufacture.
8/8
January 2011
62.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
The Permanent Works and materials specified below shall comply with the
sections stated, unless otherwise stated in this section:
(i)
Section 63 Fans;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
Fan coil units shall comply with the requirements for air handling units and
cooling coil specified in this General Materials and Workmanship Specification
except that:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(c)
(d)
FCU shall be controlled either locally or by MBMS and the proposed control
methodology shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without
objection. If it is controlled by MBMS, local mechanical BMS (MBMS)
controllers shall be mounted on the side of the FCU.
(e)
Exposed fan coil units visible to the public shall be finished with a decorative
casing and provided with an adjustable discharge grille.
1/6
January 2011
62.2
Methods for testing and rating fan coil units, unit heaters and
unit coolers
BS EN 779
ANSI/ASHRAE 79
Room fan-coils
62.3
MATERIALS
62.3.1
General
62.3.2
(a)
The capacity of fan coil units and air flow rate shall be selected based on the
performance of the units at medium fan speed.
(b)
In selecting the fan coil units, allowance shall be made for the actual
resistance imposed on the air flow of the units due to ducts and grilles. The
added resistance shall be applied to all fan coil units whether shown to have
ducts connected or not, and shall be taken as not less than 50Pa external to
the unit.
(c)
Fan coil units (FCU's) up to 700 L/s shall be tested in accordance with
ASHRAE 79 and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 440. All other fan coil
units shall be tested and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 430.
(d)
The thermal, volumetric and acoustic performance of fan coil units shall
comply with the testing and rating criteria in accordance with BS 4856.
Fans
(a)
62.3.3
Fans shall be of the DIDW forward curved centrifugal or tangential flow types
and shall be of mild steel, aluminium, reinforced glass fibres or rigid plastics
material.
Air Filters
(a)
2/6
January 2011
62.3.4
Motors
(a)
62.3.5
Casings
(a)
62.3.6
Drain pans shall be made of one piece stamped stainless sheet steel with no
weld and protected against corrosion, or, review without objection by the
Project Manager, made of plastics or reinforced glass fibre materials insulated
with a minimum of 13 mm thick flexible closed cell elastomeric insulation in
compliance with relevant FSD codes.
62.3.9
All units shall include an easily removable filter capable of treating the total air
volume. Filters shall be washable.
Drain Pans
(a)
62.3.8
Casings shall be of G.I. sheet metal with thickness not less than 0.8 mm.
Casings shall not drum (that is produce noise) or vibration and shall be
protected against corrosion and finished inside and outside with stoved primer.
All corners shall be rounded off without sharp edges. Casings shall be lined
with material to act as both thermal and acoustic insulation.
Components
(a)
62.3.7
Motors shall be quiet running and have sleeve bearings factory lubricated for
life. Motor windings and electrical components shall be protected from
condensation. The fan motor shall be of the single phase permanent split
capacitor type provided with three speed tapped windings.
Fan coil units shall have a combined room temperature sensor complete with
3-speed controller and cooling mode selector as specified. Where indicated
they shall have connections for both fresh and re-circulated air and shall
include a damper which shall be adjustable to give up to 25% of the fan
capacity drawing from the fresh air source. Outlet grilles shall be capable of
adjusting the direction of airflow without adversely affecting pressure drop. On
floor mounted units, supply grilles shall be on the top of the unit.
All FCUs which are exposed shall be of proprietary ceiling mounted type,
combining the supply air grille, return air grille, fan, cooling coils, filters,
acoustic treatments and the like. The unit shall be complete with a GI sheet
metal casing with minimum thickness 1mm suitably stiffened to minimise
drumming and vibration. No connection of ductwork shall be allowed except
for outside air.
(b)
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager details of the exposed
type FCU for review without objection prior to procuring the units.
(c)
The casing shall be protected against corrosion and finished inside and
outside with stoved primer. All corners shall be rounded off without sharp
edges. The air supply direction shall be horizontally discharged.
(d)
Fan coil units shall be selected to provide the required design duty with the
fan running at medium speed.
3/6
January 2011
(e)
Each fan coil unit shall be provided with a stainless steel drain pan situated
beneath the cooling coil. The drain pan shall be arranged so that all moisture
can be collected and drained from the pan. Each drain pan shall be fitted with
a drain pipe which shall be connected via suitable runs (correctly laid to fall) to
the drainage system.
(a)
Condensate pumps shall be provided for removal of condensate from all fan
coil units where it is not possible to achieve a natural fall (of at least 1:100) to
the nearest gravity condensate stack. A sensing system, complete with low
and high water warning limits, shall be provided to control the operation of the
condensate pump.
(b)
An additional high water limit switch shall be included to set off an alarm to
warn the user of a system failure. When the water level reaches the warning
limit, the sensing system shall cut off the chilled water supply to the FCU to
prevent further cooling. Audio and visual alarm signals shall be provided
locally and relayed to the MBMS.
(c)
Condensate pumps shall be designed to run continuously once the high water
level signal is activated. The power source for condensate pumps and the
associated control systems shall be independent from the associated fan coil
unit such that the pump can still be operated after the unit has been switched
off. The power supply for the condensate drain pump shall be completed with
a switched fuse-spur unit and changeover switches.
(d)
A wall mounted monitoring panel shall be provided complete with pump fault
common alarm, buzzer, indicating lamp and reset switch for each pump set.
The panel shall be mounted on wall (inside plant room) or ceiling void with
easy access.
(e)
The pump set shall be completed with integral float switch, pump and motor
assembly all housed in a thermally insulated PVC pit/tank. The pumps shall be
in-line centrifugal type or equivalent to be submitted to the Project Manager
for review without objection.
(f)
The Contractor shall submit calculations to the Project Manager for review
without objection, to confirm the condensate pump flow rate and pressure
head. The condensate pump shall be completed with PVC casing and
impeller, stainless steel shaft. The pump speed shall not be greater than
1000rpm. If the pump set is located in any area other than a plant room, the
noise level limit shall be NC35. The minimum vibration isolation efficiency
shall be 95%
4/6
January 2011
62.4
SUBMISSIONS
62.4.1
62.5
(a)
contractors drawings detailing the location, position and fixing details of all fan
coil unit and access panels;
(b)
(c)
noise data based on the tests in accordance with this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification, and full details of the testing technique and
procedure. The data shall include an octave band analysis of the sound
power level of each unit when operating at its full or the stated design speed.
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
Threaded suspension rods with lock nut and washer shall be used for ceiling
mounted fan coil units for level adjustment.
(b)
Sufficient access panels shall be provided at the supply air duct and the return
air plenum for servicing the blower and duct heater. Demountable return air
grille of minimum dimensions 600 mm 600 mm shall be considered as an
access panel subject to review without objection by the Project Manager.
(c)
The location of the control box shall be within 600 mm from the terminal box of
the fan coil unit and the duct heater.
(d)
All units shall be selected to suit the limited space within the false ceiling, with
due consideration to access for maintenance and servicing.
(e)
All blowers and motors of fan coil units shall be demountable from the ceiling
void for maintenance purposes without causing damage to the associated
ductwork and insulation. The motor and fan shall be mounted on a detachable
mounting chassis that is able to be removed from the fan coil enclosure as
one assembly (with extended cables) to facilitate fan and motor cleaning. It
shall then also be possible to remove the fan impeller scroll casing in order to
properly clean the fan blades. Fan and motor assemblies shall be complete
with neoprene rubber anti-vibration mountings.
(f)
The condensation drain pan shall have insulation of a class approved by FSD.
(g)
(ii)
5/6
January 2011
(h)
Casings shall include space for pipework connections and valves, and there
shall be ready access to the fan and motor, filter, damper, drain pan, pipework
connections and valves, for maintenance purposes.
(i)
6/6
January 2011
SECTION 63 FANS
63.1
GENERAL
(a)
Unless otherwise indicated, the requirements of this Section shall not apply to
individual fans having a duty air flow rate of 1.0 m3/s or less.
(b)
Hot smoke extraction fans, motors and associated plant shall comply with
Relevant Authority requirements for dynamic smoke extraction systems
including the requirement that plant shall be suitable for continuous operation
at 250C for at least 1 hour.
(c)
Kitchen exhaust fans, whilst not part of dynamic smoke extraction system,
shall also be suitable for continuous operation to 250C for at least 1 hour.
(d)
Belt driven fans shall use a V-belt drive rated at not less than 150% of actual
full load and shall have a minimum of two belts. Provision shall be made for
belt adjustment.
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
drive couplings.
1/8
January 2011
63.2
(i)
Bearings shall be located in dust tight housings with efficient shaft seals to
prevent the entry of impurities and the escape of grease. All housings shall be
fitted with accessible grease nipples and relief plugs to enable bearings to be
lubricated without the removal of end caps and without the risk of pressure
build up. Fans shall be delivered with bearings lubricated using a lithium
based grease suitable for minimum bearing temperatures of 120C. Sealed for
life housings may be fitted on fans with a duty up to 1.0 m3/s.
(j)
(k)
(l)
(m)
Ventilation fans, and associated fan motors, serving rooms which contain lead
acid batteries and which are operated in extraction mode, shall be of the
totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) type in accordance with FSD
requirements. All components shall be made of corrosion resistant material.
(n)
Where the room served is used for battery charging, the fan motors shall be
electrically interlocked with the battery charger so that the charger cannot be
operate when, for whatever reason, the ventilation fan is not running. The
power supply for the ventilation fan(s) shall be taken from an independent
circuit other than that of the battery charger. The interlock control relay shall
be protected by an independent fuse.
(o)
The ventilation fans serving the fuel pipe duct shall be of the explosion proof
type complying with BS EN 60079.
2/8
January 2011
63.3
MATERIALS
63.3.1
General
63.3.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
Fans shall comply with quality standard ISO9000-1 to 9000-4 and be type
tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 848.
(d)
Motor insulation for hot smoke extraction fans, kitchen exhaust fans and fans
running 24 hours non stop operation shall be Class H to BS 2757 minimum.
(e)
Fan V-belt drives shall comply with BS 3790 and shall be capable of
transmitting at least the rated output with one belt removed. Unless otherwise
indicated, not less than two belts per drive shall be used.
Axial flow fans shall be either the single-stage type or the multi-stage contrarotating type with each impeller mounted on an independent motor.
(b)
Fan casings shall be of galvanized steel and braced to obviate drumming and
vibration. Cast iron or fabricated steel feet shall be provided where necessary
for bolting to the base or supports.
(c)
(d)
Axial flow fans shall be factory assembled and flanged for duct mounting or
attachment to inlet and discharge cones.
(e)
The length of duct casing shall be sufficient for housing the fan(s) & motor(s)
and it shall be removable without disturbing adjacent ductwork for
maintenance.
(f)
Fans shall have variable pitch blades capable of being re-adjusted on Site but
factory set for the design duty. Blades shall have aerofoil sections and shall
be suitable for horizontal or vertical spindle operation as installed.
(g)
Blades shall be secured to the hub or the blades and the hub shall be formed
in one piece. The hub shall be keyed to a substantial mild steel shaft carried
on two bearings and the whole shaft, hub & blades shall be statically
balanced.
(h)
3/8
January 2011
63.3.3
(i)
(j)
Reversible axial fans shall provide at least 60% of the specified air quantity in
reverse mode.
Centrifugal Fans
(a)
Centrifugal fans for air handling units or for high-velocity high pressure
systems as defined within HVCA Specification DW/144, shall be of the
backward bladed type.
(b)
Centrifugal fans consuming 7.5 kW or more at the fan shaft shall be of the
backward bladed type having a fan total efficiency of at least 75%.
(c)
Forward curved or backward inclined blades shall only be used for fan coil
units and packaged air conditioning units where it is demonstrated and
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager that the developed fan
static and selection point on the fan performance curve is suitable for the
application under all operating conditions.
(d)
Fan casings and fan wheels shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Fan
casings shall be constructed to allow withdrawal of the fan impeller after fan
installation.
(e)
Fans, except those in factory constructed air handling units, shall be provided
with flanged outlet connections and spigoted inlet connections. Spigoted inlet
connections shall be suitable for flexible joint connections except those for use
with negative pressures greater than 500 Pa in which case the inlet
connection shall be flanged.
(f)
(g)
Kitchen extract ventilation fans shall have a removable access panel of width
equal to the diameter of the impeller. The access panels shall be fitted to the
scroll casing in an easily accessible position for inspection and cleaning. A
plugged drain point shall be fitted at the lowest point in the fan casings.
(h)
(i)
Fan shafts shall allow pulleys to be mounted at both ends. Shaft bearings of
belt driven single inlet fans shall be truly aligned and rigidly mounted on a
pedestal common to both bearings. Double inlet, double width fans shall have
a pedestal mounted bearing at each side of the fan. Fan bearings shall be
ring oiling sleeve type or the ball or roller type. Where silence is important the
bearing pedestal shall not be attached to the fan casing and ring oiling sleeve
type bearings shall be supplied.
4/8
January 2011
63.3.4
63.3.5
(j)
(k)
(l)
Single phase powered variable flow centrifugal fans where specified shall be
fitted with variable inlet vanes which shall be matched to the fan performance
to give stable control. Vanes shall be closely interlocked to ensure movement
in unison. Operation shall be manual or automatic as indicated. Where manual
control is indicated, the operating device shall be facilitate positive locking in at
least five different positions. Vane blades shall not vibrate or flutter throughout
their operational range.
(m)
Three phase powered variable flow centrifugal fans where specified shall be
variable speed driven.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Inspection doors of adequate size, with purpose made air seals to facilitate
inspection and cleaning shall be provided on the fan casing.
Propeller Fans
(a)
Mounting plates shall be of galvanized steel and impellers shall be of die cast
aluminium.
(b)
The blades shall be fastened to the hub, or the blades and hub shall be
formed in one piece.
(c)
(d)
Propeller fans shall be mounted in a suitable housing complete with wire mesh
guards, automatic shutters and decorative finish.
(e)
5/8
January 2011
63.3.6
63.3.7
63.3.8
The unit shall be driven by a totally enclosed, single phase, indicator motor.
(b)
The unit casing, outlet grille, fan blade and shutters shall be moulded in rigid
flame-retardant plastic. This shall also apply to the motor casing if not
manufactured in metal.
(c)
The unit shall be complete with in-built draught excluding shutters suitable for
remote control through an on/off switch.
(d)
(e)
The fan shall be of single speed and be capable of being switched on and off
by a remote 5A switch.
(f)
The fan shall be provided with two meters of 0.75 mm2, 3 core, PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cable.
(b)
Kitchen exhaust air fan shall be of the centrifugal type. The fan motor shall be
installed outside the air stream in all cases.
(c)
The fan shall be listed for grease removal in accordance with UL/cUL 762 or
equivalent standard submitted to the Project Manager for review without
objection.
(d)
Machined cast iron motor pulleys shall be factory set to the required RPM and
adjustable on site for final system balancing. Drives shall be sized for a
minimum of 150% of horsepower.
(e)
Heavy duty ball bearing motors shall be carefully matched to the fan load.
Open drip proof, total enclosed and explosion proof enclosures shall be used.
(f)
Shafts and bearings shall be precision tuned, ground and polished solid steel
shafts. The shafts shall be sized so that the first critical speed is at least 25%
above the maximum operating speed. Heavy duty, self aligning pillow block
ball bearings shall be selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000
hours at the maximum catalogued operating conditions.
Smoke Extraction Fans shall comply with Section 5.23 of the FSD COP. Fans,
motors, drives, etc. handling smoke shall be suitable for continuous operation
at 250 deg. C for not less than 1 hour.
6/8
January 2011
63.3.9
Air Curtain
(a)
Air curtains shall have a pleasant appearance, silent in operation and shall be
operated on single phase supply.
(b)
Exact length of air curtains shall be decided on site to suit the actual door
dimension. The total length of any air curtain set shall extend minimum 300
mm beyond each side of the doorway or as far as practicable.
(c)
Air curtains provided shall be capable of creating an effective air barrier at the
door. The air speed achieved on the floor of the doorway shall not be less
than 4 m/s.
(d)
Air curtain casings shall be of galvanized steel construction with spigots for
duct connections. Fan scrolls of cross-flow design together with fan motors
mounted on a common drive shaft shall be housed within the casing. Fan
motors and bearings shall be accessible for maintenance.
(e)
Air curtains shall be equipped with two-speed ("HI" and "LO") plus "OFF"
selector switches.
(f)
Support beams, support legs, platforms, hangers and anchor bolts shall be
provided as required for the proper installation of equipment. Vibration
isolators shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer. Equipment
shall be operated without noticeable vibration after installation.
(g)
Access doors shall be provided for inspection and cleaning. Access doors
shall be hinged and shall be provided with air tight seals which allow quick
opening.
(h)
Epoxy type protective coatings suitable for grease resistance shall be used
throughout.
(i)
(j)
63.4
SUBMISSIONS
63.4.1
Particulars of Fan
The following particulars of the proposed fan shall be submitted to the Project
Manager for review without objection :
(a)
manufacturers information for each make and type of fan together with the
type test certificate;
(b)
calculations of actual external static pressure for the total distribution system
based on the actual equipment offered and installed;
7/8
January 2011
(c)
fan performance curve giving values of sound power levels and fan efficiency
at the selected duty; and
(d)
63.5
WORKMANSHIP
63.5.1
63.5.2
63.5.3
63.5.4
63.5.5
Centrifugal Fans
(a)
For fans mounted on the floor, the fan shall be mounted on a concrete plinth
with anti-vibration mountings.
(b)
For fans mounted from the ceiling, the fan shall be mounted on anti-vibration
mountings fixed on a steel mounting frame. Threaded suspension rods with
locking nuts shall be used for level adjustment.
(c)
Galvanised steel support shall be used to mount in-line centrifugal and mixed
flow fans.
(b)
Threaded steel rods with locking nuts shall be used for ceiling mounted fans.
(c)
Propeller Fans
(a)
Propeller fan casings shall be longer than the length of the fan and motor.
The casing shall be of galvanized steel or aluminium sheet or stainless steel
as specified, and shall have flanged ends and an inspection door.
(b)
The unit shall be suitable for mounting on window glass and partitions.
(b)
(c)
The fan shall be fitted with silent running, self-aligning, self-coil bearings.
(d)
All exposed metal parts of the fan shall be earthed via a 3-pin plug.
8/8
January 2011
GENERAL
64.1.1
General
(a)
64.1.2
The Permanent Works and materials specified below shall comply with the
sections stated, unless otherwise stated in this section:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(b)
Split type air conditioning units shall be factory fabricated and assembled.
The equipment shall be rated and tested in the same country of manufacture
and meet with the requirements of the American Air-conditioning and
Refrigeration (ARI) Standards 210 or other international recognized quality
assurance standards reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
(c)
All air conditioners shall be selected with dimensions suitable for maintenance
within the spaces provided as indicated on the Employers Drawings.
(d)
(e)
(f)
Packaged unit chilled water split type air conditioning unit for Computer
Rooms; Communication Rooms, etc. or any other locations as indicated on
the Employers Drawings.
Basic Units
(a)
Split type air conditioning units shall be direct expansion type comprising an
outdoor unit (condensing unit), an indoor unit (evaporator), pre-charged
refrigerant pipework and fittings, insulated drain pan, and complete control
device.
(b)
1/8
January 2011
(c)
64.1.3
64.1.4
The indoor unit shall be concealed type or exposed type, complete with
remote control panel. The remote control panel shall comprise cool-fan
selector switch and 3-speed fan switch. The indoor unit shall include factory
wired controls and factory assembled components; one/two rotary, scroll or
reciprocating compressors of either the hermetically sealed or semihermetically sealed type; direct expansion cooling coil; blower; air filters; drier
of the renewable cartridge type complete with isolating valve; expansion valve;
and safety devices, all housed in sturdy painted G.I. metal casing arranged for
vertical or horizontal mounting inside the building.
Duties
(a)
In selecting the air conditioners, the Contractor shall allow for the resistance
imposed on the air flow of the units due to filters, air grilles and air ducts. The
added resistance applied to all air conditioners shall be taken as 4 mm water
gauge or unless otherwise specified.
(b)
Generally all air conditioners shall be rated at high fan speed with noise level
less than NC 45.
(c)
The proposed air conditioning units shall be capable of handling the lengthy
refrigerant pipe as required to provide the right cooling capacity. Documentary
substantiation shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without
objection.
Service Conditions
(a)
(ii)
Ambient temperature:
Peak -5C to +40C (continuously 4 hours)
Average 0C to +35C (over 24 hours)
64.1.5
(iii)
(iv)
7kW 14kW
Over 14kW
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2/8
January 2011
Associated Components /
Facilities
7kW 14kW
Over 14kW
Yes
Yes
Anti-recycling device
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Crankcase Heater
Yes
Yes
Yes
R407C
R407C
R407C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Refrigerant
Mechanical Protection to
thermal insulation which
exposed to view
64.2
BS 476 : Part 7
BS 1387
BS EN 1057
BS EN ISO 1461
ARI 210
Unitary air-conditioning
equipment
ARI 260
Gravimetric and dust-spot procedures for testing aircleaning devices used in general ventilation for removing
particulate matter
3/8
and
air-source
heat
pump
January 2011
64.3
MATERIALS
64.3.1
Casing
64.3.2
64.3.3
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Removable panel for casings shall be provided to give access to all working
components, parts, and connections for installation and servicing. The
compartment housing for the direct-expansion coil and blower shall be
adequately insulated to prevent sweating and shall contain a suitable drip pan
with a drain connection. The compartment housing for the compressor shall
be treated for effective sound insulation to ensure that the noise emitted is
within the limits as specified in Section 75 of this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
Compressors
(a)
(b)
Each compressor shall form a separate refrigerant circuit with its own
condenser, evaporator and controls.
(b)
Condenser fans shall be propeller type installed for either horizontal or vertical
discharge as specified on the Employers Drawings.
4/8
January 2011
64.3.4
64.3.5
64.3.6
(b)
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be equipped
with self-aligning bearings suitable for the installed altitude of the fan. Motors
shall be installed in accordance with Sections 76 of this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
All cooling coils shall be of direct expansion type and constructed with copper
tubes and aluminum fins to give high heat transfer performance. The coils
shall have sufficient number of rows of tubes to provide efficient
dehumidification and cooling of the air.
(b)
Heating coils shall be constructed with copper tubes and aluminum fins to give
high heat transfer performance.
(c)
All tubes shall be arranged horizontally and shall be stiffened. All coils shall
be encased in substantial galvanized frames. Fins shall have smooth-drawn
collars of length equal to fin spacing and mechanically bonded to tubes. Fins
shall be of plate type, corrugated to ensure maximum air contact.
(d)
All coils shall be arranged within the coil section in a vertical position with the
air passing horizontally through the coil and shall be completely enclosed
within the insulated casing with only connections extended through the cabinet.
All coils shall be selected for a suitable face velocity without moisture carryover.
(e)
External refrigerant piping connecting the indoor air conditioners and the
outdoor air-cooled condensing units shall include all necessary accessories
such as stop valves, filter dryer, sight glass, pressure gauges at high and low
pressure side, fitting, and insulation; and of copper or steel pipe. All insulation
shall be properly protected with mechanical means such as metallic cladding
or cement plastering and painting. Copper pipe shall be of refrigeration quality
(i.e. material to BS EN 1057), and internally degreased and cleaned.
(b)
Refrigerant piping shall be sized to avoid excessive pressure drop of the fluids
or gases they carry. The recommendations of the Chartered Institution of
Building Services Engineers (UK) and/or the American Society of Heating,
Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers on the sizing of refrigerant piping
shall be complied with.
5/8
January 2011
64.3.7
64.3.8
(c)
Filter dryer with stop valves shall be duplicated for each air cooled condenser.
The pressure gauges and the filter dryers (including stand-by) shall be
installed on a 4 mm thick hot dipped galvanized mild steel plate mounted on
the plinth adjacent to the respective condenser. All pressure gauges and
accessories installed outdoor shall be stainless steel and water-proof to IP55
and suitable for outdoor installation.
(d)
Pipework shall be designed and run so that any oil in the compressor
discharge is carried through the system and returned. Oil traps and oil
separators where necessary shall be provided according to the position of the
outdoor and the indoor units to facilitate oil return to the compressors.
(e)
All fittings shall be suitable quality copper with all joints being made either by
brazing or soldered capillary fittings.
(f)
All finished joints shall be cleaned of flux. The refrigerant pipework shall be
pressurized and tested for leaks after erection.
Thermal Insulation
(a)
All thermal insulation and vapour barrier (where required) shall be approved
by the Fire Services Department for the application intended. Unless
otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used when tested in
accordance with BS 476 : Part 7 shall comply Surface Spread of Flame Class
1 and the thermal insulation requirement shall be referred to Section 73 of this
General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
(b)
(c)
All thermal insulation for refrigerant pipes installed outdoors shall be painted
with paint supplied by the manufacturer of the thermal insulation. The paint
shall form a ultra-violet protection film on the insulation materials such as to
protect the insulation from UV deterioration.
(d)
The colour of the paint shall be reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager. The overall paint application on the surface of insulation shall be a
minimum three layers.
Air Filter
(a)
25mm thick filters of washable, permanent panel type shall be provided for
each indoor unit of concealed ceiling type air conditioning units. The filters
shall be composed of at least six cross-plated layers of crimped and expanded
aluminum foil with larger openings at the outer layers and small openings in
the inner layers all housed in an aluminum holding frame. Panel filters shall
be mounted behind the return air louvre for ease of removal. The air velocity
through the filters shall not exceed 1.3 m/s.
(b)
Air filters shall unless otherwise specified be of the washable panel type and
of an average weight arrestence efficiency not less than 85% according to
ASHARE 52-76. Higher filter efficiency shall be adopted to meet with the IAQ
objective designed and the requirement shall be referred to Section 69 of this
General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
6/8
January 2011
64.3.9
Insulated drain pans shall be provided to collect condensate from the cooling
coil including water headers and return bends where necessary. Drain pans
shall be of stainless steel construction.
(b)
(c)
The condensate drain pan shall have insulation of a class approved by FSD.
64.3.10 Control
(a)
(b)
Safety protection shall include low lubricating oil pressure cut-out, low
evaporating pressure cut-out, high condensing pressure cut-out, low
refrigerant temperature cut-out, high motor coil temperature cut-out, and other
protection necessary for the proper and safe operation of the unit. Overload
and motor burn-out protection shall be provided as well.
(c)
The control of the ceiling concealed type air conditioning unit shall be effected
by duct mounted or wall mounted thermostat with a narrow operating
temperature range and solenoid valve/thermal expansion valve. A 3-speed
controller with ON/OFF switch and fan/cool selector shall also be provided.
(d)
Remote controller shall be provided for wall mounted and ceiling mounted
indoor unit and shall be of proprietary design with the features stated in
64.3.10 (c) above as minimum.
(e)
Regarding the split type air conditioning unit installed within computer rooms
communication rooms, etc, the control on those units, either chilled water type
or refrigerant type, should be interlocked with each other so that the standby
unit could be on when the room condition does not fall within the acceptable
range. The interlock control logic should be submitted to Project Manager for
review without objection.
64.3.11 Refrigerant
The refrigerant used for all split-type air conditioning units and computer room air
conditioning units shall be R407c. Alternative refrigerants should be submitted to
the Project Manager for review without objection prior to selection of the units.
7/8
January 2011
64.4
SUBMISSIONS
64.4.1
the location, position and fixing details of all split type air conditioning
unit; and
(ii)
(b)
details of each proposed split type air conditioning unit including design
information, manufacturers published information and all manufacturers
drawings; and
(c)
noise level emissions data of indoor units in terms of dB re 10-12 watts (dB
PWL) from 125 Hz to 4,000 Hz inclusive for all available fan speeds.
64.5
WORKMANSHIP
64.5.1
General
(a)
64.5.2
64.5.3
Installation and servicing of split type air-conditioners shall comply with the
practice set out in the ARI Standard 260 and the manufacturers
recommendation. Vibration mounting shall be installed in accordance with
Section 75 of this GMSW.
All supports, hangers brackets etc. shall be of hot-dipped galvanised mild steel
construction to BS EN ISO 1461 with minimum coating thickness of 85 m and
210 m for indoor and outdoor installation respectively.
(b)
All bolts, nuts and washers shall be electro-plated with zinc or cadium to
BS3382: Parts 1 and 2 with minimum plating thickness of 25 m.
(c)
Where split-type air conditioning units are installed on side walls of building at
levels that are normally inaccessible from ground, these shall be provided with
an adequately sized service platform complete with railings and steel cat
ladder with safety wings. Such platforms shall be of reasonable substantial
rigid metal construction and shall be well protected against corrosion. The
design shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.
(b)
The Contractor shall comply with Labour Department Ordinance, and shall
provide working platforms for any activity carried out at a height of over 3
metres above finished floor level. This maintenance servicing platform
requirement shall apply to all equipment and installation.
8/8
January 2011
65.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
On/off control
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
4-way air deflection system (adjustable front louvers with horizontal and
vertical register)
(vi)
(d)
The wireless remote controller of the unit shall be able to perform the following
function:
(i)
On/off control
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Temperature control
(v)
1/3
January 2011
65.2
65.3
65.3.1
General
(a)
65.3.2
Casings
(a)
65.3.3
65.3.4
65.3.5
The unit shall be rated and tested in the same country of manufacturing and
meet the requirements of the American Air-conditioning and Refrigeration (ARI)
Standards 210.
Compressor
(a)
(b)
Cooling Coils
(a)
Cooling coils shall be of the direct expansion type and constructed with copper
tubes and aluminum fins to give high heat transfer performance.
(b)
The cooling coils shall have sufficient number of rows of tubes to provide
dehumidification of the air and its cooling.
Air Filter
(a)
Air filters shall be washable panel type and of an average weight arrestance
efficiency not less than 85% according to ASHRAE 52.1.
2/3
January 2011
65.4
SUBMISSIONS
65.4.1
65.5
(a)
(b)
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
Installation and servicing of window type air conditioners shall comply with the
practice set out in the ARI Standard 260 and the manufacturers
recommendation.
(b)
(c)
The unit shall be of size capable of fixing into the Air-Conditioning hood and
window frame which is available for installation and maintenance.
(d)
All bolts, nuts and washers shall be electro-plated with zinc or cadium to BS
3382: Part 1 and 2 with minimum plating thickness of 25 m.
3/3
January 2011
66.1
GENERAL
(a)
The Contractor shall comply with other relevant sections of this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification including but not limited to the
sections which specify:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(c)
Coils shall be selected to totally avoid moisture carryover without the use of an
eliminator. Water shall not be carried over from a cooling coil into the
remainder of the system.
(d)
(e)
Chilled water coils shall be selected so that flow remains turbulent at 40% of
the design flow rate.
(f)
The resistance to airflow through a cooler battery shall not exceed 125 Pa
taking into account the wet air condition. The face velocity of airflow shall not
exceed 2.5 m/s.
1/4
January 2011
66.2
ASHRAE Standard 33 Method of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Air
Heating Coils
BS 970 : Part 1
66.3
MATERIALS
66.3.1
Coils
(a)
(b)
The cooling medium shall be designed to enter the coil on the air leaving side.
(c)
(d)
Unless otherwise specified in the Specification, coils shall be copper tube with
copper fins electroplated with tin. Re-circulating FCUs with no outside air
scheduled on the Employers Drawings and packaged air conditioning units
may have cooling coils incorporating copper tubes with aluminium fins.
(e)
Cooling coils shall utilize the full unit available cross sectional area. Unless
otherwise indicated, coils shall be constructed from the following
combinations:(i)
copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins for fan coil units;
(ii)
copper tubes expanded into tinned copper fins with epoxy coating for
fresh air primary air handling units;
(iii)
copper tubes expanded into tinned copper fins for air handling units and
other cooling equipment other than fresh air primary air handling unit;
(f)
Tube thickness shall not be less than 0.45 mm. Fin thickness shall not be less
than 0.24 mm with maximum fin spacing of 25.4 mm. Unless otherwise
specified, cooling coils shall be constructed from copper tubes with aluminium
fins sprayed with zinc rich anti-corrosion coating of at least 0.08mm thick.
(g)
The coil row for primary air handling units shall not be less than eight rows and
for other air-handling units shall not be less than six rows. For fan coil units,
cooling coils shall be a minimum of 3 rows.
2/4
January 2011
66.3.2
Casing
(a)
66.3.3
Coil support frames shall be constructed from brass, or steel hot dip
galvanized and shall be of galvanized sheet steel not less than 1.60 mm thick
with flanged ends drilled and corrosion treated to receive counter flanges on
connecting ductwork or other associated equipment. The bottom of casings
shall be made in the form of a watertight drip tray from BS970 grade 316
stainless steel, or otherwise be manufactured of equal (or superior) corrosion
resistant materials submitted to the Project Manager and reviewed without
objection.
Condensate drain pans shall be located beneath each coil and shall be
constructed of minimum 1.6 mm copper, stainless steel or epoxy coated
galvanised sheet steel. Unless otherwise reviewed without objection by the
Project Manager, drain pans shall not be integral with the unit casing. Drain
pans shall be separated from contact with the unit casing by a minimum of 25
mm rigid, non-hygroscopic thermal insulation.
(b)
Drain pans shall extend beyond all sides of the cooling coil including headers
and shall be of sufficient dimensions to collect all condensate. Drain pans
shall be integral with cooling coils or designed and installed to allow removal
of the cooling coil without the need to dismantle or damage the drain pan.
(c)
In multiple coil units, drain pans shall be inter-connected. Down pipes shall
terminate a minimum of 50 mm below the rim of the lower pan and at least 25
mm above its base. Down pipes shall be a minimum of 38 mm diameter
copper pipe.
(d)
Drain pipework shall connect into the bottom of the drain pan and shall be
extended through a sealed trap to the exterior of the unit housing. The trap
shall be configured and sized to maintain a seal under full load with a dirty
filter and wet coil conditions.
(e)
(f)
Any insulation materials for condensate pans and drains shall be of FSD.
approved class of insulation. Please refer to the section 73 of this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification.
(g)
The drain pipework shall include a water seal of adequate depth to prevent
entry or exit of air to or from the system. On stacked coils, intermediate drain
troughs shall be provided. Sealing devices shall be provided at tops and
bottoms of coils to minimize air by-pass and water carry over.
66.4
SUBMISSIONS
66.4.1
The make and type of the air cooling coil shall be reviewed without objection
by the Project Manager. Test reports/certificates shall be submitted to the
Project Manager for review prior to placing the order.
3/4
January 2011
66.5
WORKMANSHIP
66.5.1
General
66.5.2
(a)
Coils shall be mounted on non-corrosive aluminum slide rails and arranged for
connection into an air handling and/or fan coil unit casing. Additional supports
shall be installed as required to suit coils. Coil sections shall be arranged to
provide removal of coils from the access side of the section.
(b)
Air-cooling coils shall be supported such that their weight is not transmitted to
ductwork and they can be removed without disturbing adjacent ductwork.
Access doors with air seals shall be provided on both the upstream and
downstream of the cooling coils and shall be sized for the full height of the
connecting ductwork but need not exceed 1800 mm.
(c)
Pipework shall be arranged so that coils can be easily removed, and with all
connections on the same side.
(d)
Access for inspection shall be provided to both faces of all cooling coils.
(e)
Coil support frames shall be constructed from brass, or steel hot dip
galvanised after fabrication.
(f)
Coil connections 50mm and below shall be terminated with screwed female
connections with ground in spherical seated unions. Larger connections shall
be flanged. Coil connections shall be fitted with sealing rings and plates
where penetration of the end sandwiches panel occurs.
(g)
The flow and return connections and headers shall be made of heavy gauge
seamless flanged copper tube. Provision shall be made for thermal expansion
of the tubes, for effective venting of the coils and their connections and for the
draining of the headers and tubes.
(b)
(c)
(d)
For rigidity, the short pipe length connecting the copper coil header and the
external GI or black steel pipe work shall be stainless steel pipe having the
same bore size as the copper header.
4/4
January 2011
67.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
Dampers and air volume control devices shall be accessible for testing,
commissioning, inspection and maintenance. Access panel size shall not less
than 300 mm 300 mm.
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Multi-leaf and single leaf dampers shall have the following features:
(i)
damper blades shall be of the double skin airfoil design when located in
air streams with a design flow rate equal to or larger than 10 m3/s;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
1/5
January 2011
(vii) the damper assembly shall be self supporting without external supports
or bracing; and
(viii) multi-leaf damper blades shall lock against each other when closed.
(h)
The motorized on/off dampers for smoke extraction make-up at ground floor
shall have the following minimum dynamic insertion loss in the closed position:
Description
67.2
125 250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
13
19
17
27
26
27
17
BS EN 1751
67.3
MATERIALS
67.3.1
(b)
(c)
(d)
Manual volume control dampers shall be at least two metal gauges heavier
than the duct. Dampers shall have extended shafts and mounted lugs on the
quadrant so that damper controls can be located on the external surface of the
insulation.
2/5
January 2011
(e)
67.3.2
67.3.3
: opposed blade
(ii)
: parallel blade;
(iii)
(iv)
: streamsplitter; and
(v)
: rotating butterfly.
(f)
(g)
Volume control dampers shall be labelled to externally indicate the open and
closed positions.
(b)
Where AHU(s), FCU(s) and ventilation fans are operating in pairs with the
same supply air ductwork, non-return dampers shall be provided at each AHU,
FCU or ventilation fan discharge ductwork.
(c)
Bearing shall be accessible for cleaning and lubrication and shall be mounted
in a rigid galvanised steel frame. The maximum length of each blade without a
central bearing shall be 1,000 mm.
Fire Dampers
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fire dampers shall be spring assisted and shall incorporate automatic locking
devices.
3/5
January 2011
67.3.4
(e)
(f)
Motorized fire and smoke dampers shall be provided with the associated
proprietary mounting frames and shall be factory manufactured, constructed
and tested to comply with Relevant Authority requirements.
(b)
(c)
Limit switches shall be provided for monitoring both the open and the closed
positions of motorized fire and smoke dampers by the mechanical BMS
(MBMS).
(d)
Fusible links shall be provided on motorized fire and smoke dampers to suit
Relevant Authority requirements.
(e)
Motorized smoke and fire dampers shall be installed with an electric motor
actuator mounted externally to the damper. The actuator shall be suitable for
operation with 220V/1 phase/50Hz power supply. The actuator shall be fully
enclosed, thermally protected and positioned out of the air stream. It shall
generate sufficient torque to ensure efficient movement of the blades against
the prevailing airflow and to allow tight closure of the damper. The actuator
shall be capable of being detached from the damper to allow manual operation.
(f)
(g)
The damper shall be capable of reserve operation. In the closed position the
fire damper shall provide protection to the associated fire compartments
commensurate with the specified fire resistance period.
(h)
Power cables serving the dampers shall be of fire rated type to meet the
specified fire resistance period. The whole smoke and fire damper assembly
shall be endorsed by the FSD.
(i)
Motorized smoke and fire dampers located at Fuel Tank Room shall be
explosion proof complying FSD requirements. These dampers shall be
activated by the detector installed inside the fuel tank room.
4/5
January 2011
67.3.5
Barometric Damper
(a)
Barometric pressure relief dampers shall be designed to maintain a preselected pressure (site adjustable) within a designated area. The damper shall
be selected to suit the pressure and the flow to be handled.
(b)
67.4
SUBMISSIONS
67.4.1
67.4.2
(a)
(b)
Samples
The following samples of proposed materials shall be submitted to the Project
Manager together with the particulars referred to in 67.4.1 above:
(a)
67.5
fire damper.
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
(b)
Where fire dampers, motorized fire and smoke dampers are installed in dry
wall construction they shall be supported independently of the wall and
ductwork to ensure no distortion during fire condition to maintain the integrity
of the fire barrier. Manufacturer recommended installation detail should be
strictly followed.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Dampers shall be arranged and installed so that there is access for testing
and resetting the damper, including the fusible link, without dismantling any
Plant.
5/5
January 2011
68.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
68.2
The Permanent Works and materials specified below shall comply with the
sections stated, unless otherwise stated in this section:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Fire tests on building materials and structures. Noncombustibility test for materials
BS 476 : Part 6
BS 476 : Part 7
BS 476 : Part 12
BS 1322
BS 6399 : Part 1
ADC 1062 : GRD-84 Test code for grilles, registers and diffusers
UL-181
NFPA 90A
1/7
installation
of
air-conditioning
and
January 2011
68.3
rated in accordance with ASHRAE standard 36-72 and Air Diffusion Council
(ADC) standard 1062 : GRD-84 or equivalent;
(b)
air throws to suit the dimensions of the space being served, so that air
movement in areas below 1800 mm above the floor, and more than 300 mm
from walls does not exceed 0.25 m/s;
(c)
provide an air pattern which shall not 'dump' at minimum design flow when
supply air is 10C and room air is 22C;
(d)
(e)
shall have concealed fixing system and shall have quick release frame to
facilitate cleaning;
(f)
(g)
(h)
volume control dampers shall be installed for all grilles, diffusers and registers.
Diffusers shall be provided with volume control dampers of the iris, flap or
sleeve type which shall be adjustable from the front of the diffuser. Where the
length of a vertical duct to a diffuser is less than twice the diameter of the
diffuser an equalizing deflector shall be fitted;
(i)
(j)
68.4
MATERIALS
68.4.1
General
(a)
(b)
Sections of diffusers, grilles, louvres, nozzles and the like supplied and
installed but not connected to plenums or ductwork shall be fitted with a matt
black sight tight air boot, blanking plate or similar.
(c)
The inside of all components and surfaces associated with registers, diffusers,
grilles, louvres, nozzles, boots, and the like shall be painted matt black.
2/7
January 2011
68.4.2
Diffusers
(a)
(b)
Square and rectangular diffuser shall be flush mounted and have a removable
core.
(c)
The square face diffuser for VAV system shall be constructed of aluminum
and with large turn down ratios. Each ceiling mounted square face diffuser
shall have a factory assembled diffuser and an air plenum. The air plenum
shall be provided with dividing plates such that the diffuser back is divided into
an annulus area and a square central area. In the entry to the diffuser plenum,
the flow cross section shall also be divided into two parts, one part serving as
a bypass and the other equipped with a self contained, weight balance
damper. The damper shall be balanced with a weight in such a way that the
horizontal outlet jet velocity remains nearly constant over a flow rate range of
100 to 20% of maximum in order to prevent stagnant area.
(d)
The design of the supply air diffuser shall be capable to induce adequate air
movement and provide the throw to cover the entire air-conditioning space
without causing air turbulence and cold draft.
(e)
(f)
(g)
(i)
(ii)
be flush face and concealed modular cores for adjusting the discharge
pattern;
(ii)
(iii)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
3/7
January 2011
(v)
(h)
68.4.3
68.4.4
68.4.5
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
incorporate twin 20 mm slots and where used for supply air shall
include integral facilities for full 180 discharge pattern control.
Jet Nozzles
(a)
(b)
Nozzles shall be designed to allow for rotation of at least 30. The axis of
rotation shall be adjustable through at least 180 so that each nozzle is fully
directional.
Drum Louvres
(a)
Drum louvres shall incorporate a truncated cylindrical core that allows rotation
about a horizontal plan of at least 30 and individually adjustable vertical
blades at 75 mm to 125 mm spacing.
(b)
A felt seal or similar shall be provided between the drum and the frame to
prevent air leakage.
(c)
Drum louvre guide vanes shall be capable of being adjusted laterally to allow
full directional adjustment of the air jets. Volume control dampers shall be
mounted away from the drum louvre outlet at a distance of not less than 3
times of the drum louvre outlet diameter. The colour of the whole assembly
shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.
Punkah Louvres
(a)
(b)
(c)
A felt seal or similar shall be provided between the core and the frame to
prevent air leakage.
4/7
January 2011
68.4.6
Grilles
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
shave removable cores that can be rotated within the frame without
affecting blade settings for long throw application.
(ii)
be arranged such that the central core of the grille is hinged and
demountable for access to the filter for cleaning where return air grilles
are fitted for fan coil unit. Mounting frames for these grilles shall
include provision for fixing the filter in position.
(ii)
(ii)
(iii)
have frames flush with the floor or cambered to minimize the effect of a
raised surface;
(iv)
(v)
5/7
January 2011
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(vi)
(vii)
(ii)
(ii)
Grid Mesh
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Security Bar
(i)
68.5
SUBMISSIONS
68.5.1
Contractors drawings detailing the location, position and fixing details of all
registers, diffusers and grilles;
(b)
(c)
6/7
January 2011
68.5.2
Samples
The following samples of proposed materials shall be submitted to the Project
Manager together with the particulars referred to in 68.5.1 above. Each sample
shall be mounted on a panel of the material upon which the proposed register,
diffuser or grille are to be installed.
(a)
68.6
WORKMANSHIP
68.6.1
General
68.6.2
(a)
(b)
Where grilles and diffusers are to be incorporated into false ceilings before
any grilles or diffusers are installed into ductwork or fan coils, the Contractor
shall mark out the ceiling line on the adjacent plastered walls or columns and
also indicate where ceiling tee bars line up or the ceiling joints occur in order
to provide a clear datum for installation works.
(c)
Bar grilles, linear slot diffusers and similar shall be continuous with precision
butt joints at centres to match building modules. Suitable fasteners shall be
provided to align separate sections of bar grille and linear slot. When installed,
bar grilles and linear slots shall present a continuous straight appearance
without misalignment or distortion.
(d)
(e)
For up to ten grilles, one set of tools required for adjusting the louver and
dampers or air controllers shall be provided. From eleven to twenty four grilles,
two sets and above twenty five grilles, three sets of tools shall be provided.
Tolerances
(a)
(b)
All grilles and diffusers which are smaller than the ceiling tile into which they
will be installed, shall be positioned in the centre of the ceiling tile unless
otherwise specified or reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
The exact location of the ceiling grilles and diffusers shall be co-ordinated on
Site.
7/7
January 2011
69.1
GENERAL
(a)
69.2
The Contractor shall comply with other relevant sections of this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification including, but not limited to the
sections which specify:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
UL 586
EN-779
Eurovent 4/5
Eurovent 4/4
BS 476 : Part 4
BS 476 : Part 6
UL 900
UL-710
Standard for
Equipment
UL-867
COP (2005)
Exhaust
Hoods
for
Commercial
Cooking
1/13
January 2011
69.3
69.3.1
General
(a)
(b)
Filters shall be tested and rated in accordance with the following one of the
following standards:
(i)
(ii)
UL 586;
(iii)
EN-779;
(iv)
(v)
Eurovent 4/5.
The fire property of air filters shall comply with the following standards and the
latest requirement of Fire Services Department:
(i)
(ii)
BS 476 : Part 4
(iii)
BS 476 : Part 6
(iv)
(v)
(c)
(d)
Space shall be allowed for the future installation of carbon filters at all fresh air
intakes to fans and air handling units.
(e)
The filters for all outside air intakes shall have a dust spot efficiency of not less
than 80%. In addition, pre-filters with dust spot efficiency of not less than 35%
shall be fitted to all AHUs and PAUs.
(f)
The filters on at the air intakes to FCUs shall have a dust spot efficiency of
not less than 35%,
(g)
(h)
The Contractor shall demonstrate that the installed filtration system shall be
capable of maintaining the indoor repairable suspended particulate level
below 180 g/m for a 24 hour time weighted average.
(i)
2/13
January 2011
69.3.2
Bag Filters
(a)
(b)
69.3.3
69.3.4
Bag filters shall be rated in accordance with ASHRAE 52.1-1992 and conform
with the following:
(i)
: 75 Pa;
(ii)
: 65 %; and
(iii)
: 250 Pa.
The bag or packer shall inflate fully, shall not sag or flutter or be obstructed by
contact with other filter faces or ductwork surfaces when operating between
60-110 % of design air volume flow rate for fixed volume system.
(b)
: 20 Pa;
(ii)
: 80 %;
(iii)
: 20 %; and
(iv)
: 400 g/m2.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
3/13
January 2011
69.3.5
Electrostatic Precipitators
(a)
:
:
80%; and
50%.
(b)
Ozone generation level of the electrostatic precipitator shall be below 0.1 PPM
as recommended by the American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienists.
(c)
: 95 %;
(ii)
: 65 %;
(iii)
(iv)
power supply
: 220V/1-phase/50Hz
(d)
Electrostatic precipitators for treating kitchen exhaust shall be modular twostage design.
(e)
(f)
Each module shall have a pilot light to indicate that the power pack is
functional.
(g)
Each power pack shall generate a minimum of 12kV for the ionizer and 6kV
for the collecting cell for effective precipitation of the oily or odour particles.
Current limiting devices shall be provided to limit the maximum current flow to
5mA.
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
The unit shall comply with the latest requirements of the Environmental
Protection Department and Fire Services Department on the treatment of
kitchen exhaust air systems.
4/13
January 2011
69.3.6
69.3.7
(m)
(n)
(o)
The air velocity across the electrostatic precipitator cell shall not exceed 2.5
m/s.
(p)
(b)
All components of the bio-oxygen generator, which are located within the air
stream, shall comply with the latest requirement of Fire Services Department.
(c)
The bio- oxygen generator shall have a minimum removal efficiency of not
less than 95% of Total Bacteria Count (TBC) Test, 95% of cigarette smoke
particles and 80% of odours. The ozone level generated in the indoor
environment shall be less than 0.05 ppm and the background ozone level
shall not exceed the levels of the safety standards specified by Occupational
Safety and Hygienic Association (OSHA), USA.
(b)
The UV light emitted shall be of a high output germinal ultra violet device and
shall consist of UV lamp tube, tube fitting set, electrical supply unit and
monitoring unit. All components of the UV system shall comply with ENEC, CE,
UL, requirements or equivalent, submitted to the Project Manager for review
without objection.
(c)
The UV sterilizers shall have one pass bacterial removal efficiency at least
90%. Equipment shall be selected on basis of UV lethal dosage requirement,
not less than 5000W-s/cm. The Contractor shall liaise with the UV sterilizer
system supplier to ensure the correct data area used for UV system design
(e.g. air temperature, humidity, flow rate, velocity, size and material of
irradiation chamber etc.).
(d)
The UV air sterilizer shall not generate ozone substances in excess of the
safety standards specified by the World Health Organization (WHO);
Occupational, Safety and Hygienic Association (OSHA), USA, Food & Drug
Association (FDA), USA, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), USA or equivalent and statutory
requirements.
5/13
January 2011
69.4
MATERIALS
69.4.1
Bag Filters
69.4.2
69.4.3
(a)
Bag filters shall be of the high efficiency, as specified in 69.3.2 (a) (ii),
extended area, deep pleated, disposable type.
(b)
(c)
The filter package shall be factory assembled ready for Site installation. The
filter package shall consist of a holding frame, sealer frame, media retainer,
and the disposable element (the media, as described above).
(d)
(e)
The holding frame shall be provided with at least four heavy duty spring type
positive sealing latches for each filter cell to ensure a positive seal against
leakage of unfiltered air.
(f)
For filter cells installed inside air handling unit, separate filter housing is not
required.
Disposal panel filter shall be of the disposable glass fibers media panel type.
(b)
For the filter cells installed inside air handling units, separate housing is not
required.
(b)
Washable panel filters of 50mm thick shall be provided behind all fresh air
intake louvres or on ductwork forming the paths through which fresh air is
admitted into the building.
(c)
For the filter cells installed inside air handling units, separate housing is not
required.
6/13
January 2011
69.4.4
Electrostatic Precipitators
(a)
(b)
The cabinet shall be a galvanized steel structure with an epoxy enamel coated
exterior. Each module shall have its own components access door and power
pack. Other modules shall not be effected when inspection of other modules is
undertaken. Each access door shall have a mechanical interlock that
deactivates the power pack when the door is opened.
(c)
Each module tier shall have an independent drain pan to physically isolate that
tier from others and prevent runoff of contaminant onto components below.
(d)
(e)
The ionizer, collecting cell and filter components shall be positioned in slide
tracks and removable without the need to dismantle any equipment, from the
side for maintenance.
(f)
(g)
Each collecting cell shall have a centrally located handle and weigh no more
than 14 kg. Each collecting cell shall have a 250 mm minimum airflow depth to
maximize retention time of contaminated air. The collecting cell shall be of
aluminum construction.
(h)
The ionizer and collecting cell shall be separate and independent of each
other in a single unit for cleaning and replacement.
(i)
(j)
All parts shall be factory assembled into a sectioned housing having an overall
depth not greater than 1,000 mm in the direction of the airflow.
(k)
Each section of the galvanized steel housing assembly shall incorporate a pair
of hinged air tight access doors providing easy access for servicing of all
internal components. A watertight, all welded, galvanized steel, drain pan
having drain connections shall be provided where appropriate.
(l)
7/13
January 2011
(m)
Cells shall be designed so that high voltage input terminals and their high volt
rated insulators are located completely out of the moving air-stream to avoid
build up of dirt and reduce air cleaning efficiency. The high voltage bus bars
and contactors shall be inherent to the design of each cell and shall permit cell
removal without disconnecting any high voltage wiring. Insulators shall be
fully exposed, for ease of cleaning, when cells are removed for service. Cells
shall be designed for full-face ionization and shall have completely flat
collector plates to prevent build-up of residual, inaccessible dirt accumulations.
(n)
Dual voltage power packs shall be designed to provide a high voltage supply
to the ionizer circuit. The plate circuit respectively shall be connected to each
ionizer-collector section. The power packs shall be of solid state design,
having multiple steps of output voltage adjustment and shall include, but not
be limited to, relays to provide remote indication of primary input and
secondary output and fail-safe low voltage relays to interrupt power to the
ionizer circuit in the event of a malfunction in the plate circuit.
(o)
High voltage connections between the high voltage output terminals and the
bus bar terminals shall be installed. Power pack covers shall include, but not
be limited to, primary and secondary neon glow lamps, a circuit breaker, and a
manual reset button. Two time delay safety type door interlock switches, with
a suitable length of safety chain shall be provided, wired in a series circuit with
the power pack, to cut-off the power supply whenever the door is opened.
(p)
(q)
The cleansing water system shall include but not be limited to, a non-return
valve, a ball valve, a y-strainer with mesh screen, a water pressure regulator,
a solenoid valve, an injector tee assembly, a detergent pipe and a detergent
pressure gauge.
(r)
Detergent shall flow from the detergent tank and through the compact
detergent dispenser at discharge pressure, toward the water line. Detergent
shall passes through injector tee assembly which shall adjust the detergent
flow at the point where detergent is mixed with the plant water line. A
drainage pipe shall be connected from the electrostatic precipitator to the
dedicated drainage pipe.
(s)
The auto-wash system shall have: a hand valve in the water line for
maintenance; a pressure gauge in the water line for pressure monitoring; and
a strainer in the water line to keep plant line debris from fouling the valve seats
in the supply lines at the precipitator.
(t)
The auto-wash system shall have an individual control panel. Each cleaning
cycle shall be push-button initiated and automatically sequenced by a built-in
control accessory.
(u)
The auto-wash system shall include a selector for on/off power, an On button
for overall starting of the auto-wash operation and a Stop button for
emergency stop both located in the control panel; and an operating light
signalling cleaning is in process.
8/13
January 2011
69.4.5
(v)
The washer supply water solenoid valve, the manifold drive motor, and the
manifold limit switch shall be pre-wired to an accessible, internally mounted
terminal box. The washer control enclosure access door shall incorporate a
status light to indicate when the reconditioning cycle is energized. An internal
panel shall be equipped with a combination of LED status lights and a digital
readout to indicate which part of the reconditioning cycle is in operation. The
digital readout shall be visible through a window in the control cover. The
complete automatic cleaning by reversing the polarity of the filter element, wet
washing by water spray and adhesive application shall be initiated manually or
automatically through a push button actuated, internally fused, all solid state,
program timer control, with adjustable timer to control drip and fan dry cycles.
(w)
Each bio-oxygen generator unit shall be of the ductwork mounted type and
shall consist of electrode tubes and power generator with built in output
regulator:
(i) The electrode tube shall consist of electrodes, glass tube and a threaded
connector at the base of the tube for connection with the tube socket
provided at the power generator. Each tube shall be covered with stainless
steel mesh and earthed by via the grounding leaf spring connected to the
power generator. No high voltage part shall be exposed and accessible.
(ii) All parts in contact with air shall be corrosion resistant. The output of the
electrode tubes for each air handling plant shall be in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations. The output shall be sufficient to handle
the design air flow rate and the volume of the room served.
(iii) The power generator shall be able to operate on 220V/50 Hz single
phase supply and shall generate appropriate supply to match with the
operational requirements of the electrode tubes.
(iv) Each unit shall be equipped with built-in regulator for output adjustment
and shall consist of on/off indicator lamp, overload protection device, tube
sockets, control knob for regulator setting and on/off switch.
9/13
January 2011
69.4.6
(b)
(c)
The complete assembly shall be mounted onto the wall of the ductwork by the
manufacturers mounting flange provided by the manufacturer with the power
generator outside the air stream and the electrode tubes within the air stream.
The glass tube electrodes shall be mounted perpendicular to the direction of
air flow and installed at a minimum distance of 150 mm away from any air
distribution accessories within the ductwork. The power generator shall be
installed with all necessary support brackets and ductwork stiffeners onto the
ductwork without damaging the thermal insulation.
(d)
The mounting shall be designed and installed in a manner that prevents air
leaks and avoids condensation at any surface in contact with the ductwork.
The unit shall be capable of being completely withdrawn for routine inspection
and maintenance.
(e)
The bio-oxygen generator shall be installed in the return air duct and
interlocked with the fan or air handling unit so that the generator is in
operation whenever the fan or air handling unit is in operation.
Filters shall comprise a removable steel cell and steel frame, sourced
from a single source supply. The steelwork shall be corrosion resistant.
(ii)
(iii)
At the design air flow rate the filter resistance shall not exceed 125Pa.
(iv)
The cells shall be arranged so that the air stream passes uniformly and
proportionally through the activated carbon beds. Provision shall be
made to retain granules in position and prevent migration and settlement.
(v)
(vi)
Each filter bank shall be provided with a detachable test unit for
prediction of service life.
(vii) Activated carbon filters shall be preceded by a dry fabric panel filter.
10/13
January 2011
69.4.7
The UV sterilizer shall be composite unit assembled and tested in the factory
prior to delivery to site. The Contractor shall install and commission the unit in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. The Contractor shall
include all necessary electrical and control cable/accessories for proper
operation of the complete installation.
(b)
The UV lamp tube shall consist of electrodes and high quartz glass tube with
ceramic bases. Each tube shall consume not more than 40W but emit pure
UV-C irradiation not less than 120W/cm measured at 1m from the source
after 100hr under 25C. The total UV light intensity shall be not less than
360W/cm per 1 m/s air flow measured at 1m from the source.
(c)
When the UV exposure level exceeds 0.2W/cm after 8 hours, baffle filters
shall be installed for those air discharge louver to reduce UB light intensity
level. Safety precaution shall be taken in the installation and maintenance of
the air sterilizer to leakage of UV lighting. Operating life shall be at least
10,000 hours.
(d)
The operation of UV system shall be interlocked with the respective fan such
that the disinfection only occurs when the mechanical ventilation system is in
operation. The sterilizer shall be automatically switched off with an indicator
light on when the maintenance access is opened.
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
The Contractor shall also provide safety measurements to confirm the system
does not create direct exposure to operators. The supply unit shall include a
safety switch-off function to prevent operation after lamp breakdown. The
working range of the electronic ballast shall be linear throughout the expected
range of temperatures. The UV system shall start and continue to operate
under all unexposed and unfavourable working temperatures. The electronic
ballast shall have an over voltage cut-out to improve safety and material
protection. The surface temperature of any exposed elements shall exceed
40C during normal operation.
11/13
January 2011
69.5
(i)
The monitoring unit shall be in the form of an independent wall mounted unit
installed in the vicinity of the sterilization section. The monitoring unit shall be
enclosed within a casing constructed to at least IP54. The monitoring unit
shall consist of an easy to reach circuit breaker, an on/off 3 way switch
(auto/off/manual), a leakage current protective switch, hour run meter, a
visible general malfunctioning alarm lamp and an indication display with at
least two coloured functioning LEDs for each connected ultraviolet system.
The monitoring unit shall provide information about used lifespan and lamp
replacements.
(j)
(k)
(l)
(ii)
(iii)
SUBMISSIONS
(a)
The Contractor shall submit a reference to the Project Manager for the
electrostatic precipitators for kitchen exhaust air treatment. The reference shall
include details of the installations (restaurants in Hong Kong) where the
proposed electrostatic precipitator has been in service for at least 4 years.
(b)
(c)
12/13
January 2011
69.6
WORKMANSHIP
69.6.1
Bag Filters
(a)
69.6.2
69.6.3
69.6.4
69.7
Bag filters installed in air handling units (AHU) the holding frame shall be
factory mounted in the AHU casing shall provide access for maintenance from
the air side.
The holding frames shall be provided with fixtures for easy removal of the filter
cells without the use of any special tools.
(b)
Disposable panel filters installed in AHU, the holding frames shall be factory
mounted in the AHU casing and shall provide access for maintenance from
the air side .
The holding frames shall be provided with fixtures for easy removal of the filter
cells without the use of any special tools.
(b)
Holding frames installed in AHU shall be factory mounted in the AHU casing
and shall provide access for maintenance from the air side.
Electrostatic Precipitators
(a)
The complete electrostatic filter set including filter cells, holding frames and
housing shall be factory fabricated and assembled.
(b)
All necessary safety measures including automatic cut-off switch and high
voltage warning label at each access panel for the electrostatic precipitators
shall be provided to ensure the safety of personnel during operation,
inspection and maintenance.
Air conditioning and general ventilation filters shall be tested and rated in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.
(b)
Electrostatic precipitators shall comply with the fire and Burnout Test type
tests. The Burnout Test shall have been conducted in accordance with the
Standard for Grease Extractors for Exhaust Systems (UL-710), 3rd Edition.
13/13
January 2011
70.1
GENERAL
(a)
The Permanent Works and materials specified below shall comply with the
sections stated, unless otherwise specified in this section:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(b)
Ductwork shall include all ducts, casings, drain pans, dampers, sound
attenuators, plenum chambers and similar for air handling plant and ducted
systems. All ducts shall be complete with all necessary supports, access
doors, cleaning point and test holes.
(c)
Volume dampers and/or splitters necessary for complete balancing of all air
handling systems shall be installed.
(d)
Cross breaking shall be permitted on low velocity only and in no case where
rigid external insulation will be applied.
(e)
Unless otherwise specified, duct sizes given on the Employers Drawings are
all clear internal dimensions and allowance shall be made for both internal and
external insulation on the ducts where applicable.
(f)
The Contractor shall also supply a set of proprietary type compressed air
lance, disinfection application lance and sampling probe that shall be suitable
for use with the cleaning points. All operating and servicing instruction
manuals shall be supplied with each set of equipment.
1/13
January 2011
70.2
BS 476 : Part 7
BS 476 : Part 12
BS EN 10142
BS 4127
BS 5315
DW/143
DW/144
DW/151
DW/191
ISO 9692
Metal-arc welding with covered electrode, gas-shielded metalarc welding and gas welding -- Joint preparations for steel
NFPA 90A
COP
installation
of
air-conditioning
and
70.3
70.3.1
General
(a)
(ii)
2/13
January 2011
(b)
70.3.2
Transfer Ductwork
(a)
70.3.3
70.3.5
70.3.6
Hz
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
0.20
0.40
0.65
0.55
0.70
0.70
(b)
Flexible Ductwork
(a)
The frictional resistance to air flow per unit length of flexible duct shall not
exceed 150% of the frictional resistance per unit length of galvanised steel
duct of similar diameter.
(b)
The radius ratio R/D for bends shall be not less than 2, where R is the centre
line radius and D is the diameter of the flexible duct.
Cleaning Points
(a)
70.3.7
70.3.4
Air leakage for cleaning points shall comply with DW/143 and all Fire Services
Department requirements.
3/13
January 2011
70.4
MATERIALS
70.4.1
General
(a)
70.4.2
Ductwork shall comply with the latest edition of the following HVAC
publications with additions or amendments as required by this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification:
(i)
DW/144;
(ii)
DW/151; and
(iii)
DW/191.
(b)
If any part of the installation is not covered by (a) above, then the
recommendations of the latest edition of "Low Pressure Ductwork
Construction Standards" and "High Pressure Ductwork Construction
Standards," issued by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association (SMACNA) Inc. USA, shall apply.
(c)
Flanges shall be of a proprietary type, tested and certified for air leakage and
deflection to DW/144.
(d)
All ductwork shall be off Site pre-fabricated from best quality full sized zinc
coated hot dipped galvanised flat steel sheet to BS EN 10142, Grade
DX51D+Z, coating type Z275 unless otherwise specified in the Specification or
on the Employers Drawings.
(e)
Sheetmetal and ductwork materials sealants, adhesives and the like shall
comply with the requirements of:
(i)
(ii)
NFPA 90A.
(f)
All ductwork and fittings delivered to site shall be clearly and indelibly stamped
to identify different grades, materials and manufacturers.
(g)
Bends and branch vanes, dampers etc. shall be of the same material as used
for the ductwork and/or of heavier gauge, securely mounted.
Flexible Ductwork
(a)
Flexible ductwork shall comply with FSD Circular Letter Part 11 (Vent)/96.
(b)
Flexible supply air ducts shall have 25 mm thick fibreglass insulation with a
reinforced aluminium foil bonded to the internal face. The internal face shall
be bonded to and supported with spring-steel wires.
4/13
January 2011
70.4.3
70.4.4
70.4.5
Flexible Connections
(a)
Flexible joints shall consist of, or be externally protected by, material having a
fire penetration time of at least 15 minutes and shall comply with BS 476 : Part
7, Class 1 (surface of very low flame spread).
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fire rated ductwork and cladding, including access panels, shall comply with
FSD requirements including but not limited to FSD Circular Letter No. 4/96
and COP (2005).
(b)
Fire rated ductwork used to convey air-conditioned supply air, return air,
make-up air and similar shall be constructed from sheet metal and clad with a
2 hours fire rated material.
(c)
Fire rated ductwork used to convey only hot smoke extraction air may be
constructed from a calcium silicate, GRP reinforced monolithic cement
material or similar, subject to the installation being in accordance with the
Relevant Authority requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations.
Each edge shall be protected by a minimum 40 mm 20 mm 0.7 mm angle
iron externally fixed to the cladding. Joints between lengths of ductwork shall
be protected by a second strip of minimum 100 mm wide fire rated board or
similar.
(d)
(e)
(b)
Kitchen exhaust ductwork shall have access panels every 3 m and on both
sides of every change of direction.
(c)
Kitchen exhaust ductwork required to be fire rated shall be clad with a suitable
fire rated material in accordance with the manufacturer's and Relevant
Authority requirements.
5/13
January 2011
70.4.6
70.4.7
(d)
Kitchen exhaust ductwork shall be provided with drains at all low points. Each
horizontal section of kitchen exhaust ductwork shall slope towards drainage
points located in accessible locations adjacent to access panels at a maximum
of 18 m centres. A 15 mm diameter stainless steel drain shall be run from
each low point to the nearest convenient floor gully. Drain holes shall be
minimum 25mm diameter and shall be sealed water tight with a suitable
screwed plug. The drains shall be complete with a 150 mm running rap and
the pipework shall be to BS 4127, with stainless steel compression fittings.
The drain connection to the duct shall be made by means of a trapped socket
with adaptor welded to the outside of the duct.
(e)
Construction of kitchen exhaust air ducts shall comply with the HVCA DW171.
Hoods shall be of stainless steel. The hoods shall be rigidly formed and shall
be supported independent of the ductwork. Unless otherwise indicated, they
shall be supported either from above or from a side wall. The type and size of
hood shall be as indicated but the Contractor shall submit his proposal for its
exact position in relation to the associated item of kitchen equipment to be
covered on Site to the Project Manager for review without objection.
(b)
Hoods for kitchen equipment and for the extraction of condensable vapours
shall have all joints in sheets vertical and shall have a drip gutter all round with
a drain connection plugged, to run a drain to a suitable point. Hoods in high
fire risk situations such as for working ranges in kitchen shall overlap the
equipment by a minimum of 500 mm.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Lighting fittings shall be provided within the hoods and fittings shall be
bulkhead design with die cast aluminium base and glass diffuser. The fittings
as well as the wiring for the fittings shall be suitable for continuous use in
ambient conditions of 100C temperature and 100% RH.
(f)
Hoods positioned over cooking appliances shall be fitted with grease filters.
Transfer Ductwork
(a)
6/13
January 2011
70.4.8
70.4.9
(b)
Access panels shall be 600 600mm minimum, or where the duct width is
smaller than 600 mm, it shall be the full width of the duct and 600 mm long.
(c)
Removable access doors shall be no larger than 350 mm 300 mm, unless
necessary for access to equipment, in which case the size shall be agreed
with the Project Manager.
(d)
Access panels in sheet metal work shall be secured in the closed position by
means of wedge type catches. Panels screwed in position will not be
accepted.
(e)
(f)
Flanges shall be a
(b)
(c)
All supports and hangers for air duct installed shall be hot dip galvanized Uchannel construction.
Brackets, hangers, nuts, bolt and any other metallic components shall be fully
galvanised.
(b)
7/13
January 2011
70.5
SUBMISSIONS
70.5.1
70.5.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(ii)
Samples
The following samples of proposed materials shall be submitted to the Project
Manager together with the particulars referred to in 70.5.1 above:
(a)
sheet metal;
(b)
flexible ductwork;
(c)
flanges; and
(d)
70.6
WORKMANSHIP
70.6.1
General
(a)
(b)
8/13
January 2011
70.6.2
(c)
Ductwork shall be inspected internally prior to erection and all dirt, dust and
other foreign matter shall be removed. During construction, open ends of
ductwork stored or installed on Site shall be covered with polythene sheeting
or similar to prevent damage from moisture or debris. Any ductwork or
insulation damaged by moisture or similar shall be replaced.
(d)
(e)
(f)
Dampers, doors, casings and ductwork shall be internally free of raw edges
and projections and shall be installed to minimize the generation of noise due
to vibration or leakage.
(g)
Joints in air chambers and plenums shall be airtight. Bottoms of all such air
chambers resting on a masonry floor or similar shall be gasketed or caulked to
prevent air leakage.
(h)
At each point where a duct passes through a roof or external wall, a weather
'cravat' or other purpose made arrangement shall ensure a waterproof and
weatherproof fixing.
(i)
All intake and discharge openings to the building shall be fitted with 10 mm
mesh bird wires which is additional to any grilles or louvers indicated for these
locations.
(j)
Where floor slabs are of waterproof construction, the Contractor shall not
pierce waterproofing with retaining bolts or inserts but shall use an alternative
method of securing plenums, chambers and casings.
(k)
Sheet metal plenum boxes shall be provided for all ceiling mounted diffusers
and where shown on the Employer's Drawings. Plenums shall be supported
from soffits with suitable hangers. Supports shall have adjustment facilities to
allow for final positioning of registers, diffusers, and grilles.
Fabrication
(a)
Snaplock joints shall only be used for longitudinal seams on sheetmetal with a
thickness of 0.9 mm and above subject to a maximum duct pressure
classification of 1,000 Pa.
(b)
(c)
Exhaust systems shall use flanged connections. Drive cleat construction shall
not be used.
9/13
January 2011
70.6.3
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Flanged transverse joints shall be sealed with a neoprene gasket around the
entire perimeter.
(i)
Internally lined ductwork shall have flanged transverse joints only and shall not
be cross-broken.
(j)
(k)
(l)
(b)
(c)
Noise and vibration shall not be transferred to the structure or any other
element through hangers and brackets.
10/13
January 2011
70.6.4
70.6.5
Flexible Ductwork
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Flexible Connection
(a)
Flexible joints shall be provided on all in-line fan inlet and outlet connections,
at expansion joints in the building and elsewhere on ductwork where indicated.
Flexible joints shall be of the same cross-sectional area as the mating fan
inlet/outlet or duct section. The centre lines of flexible joint connections shall
be coaxial.
(b)
11/13
January 2011
70.6.6
Exposed Ductwork
(a)
70.6.7
70.6.8
External Ductwork
(a)
Transverse joints on external ductwork shall have recessed flanges with hat
sections to provide a continuous surface. Ductwork joints shall be sealed with
a suitable caulking compound to provide an airtight, waterproof connection.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Round/Oval Ductwork
(a)
70.6.9
Low-pressure circular duct shall have helical locked seams and shall be rigid
in construction. Where such ductwork is exposed to public view, joints shall
be neat and flush pop riveted. Bends shall be lobster back type.
(b)
Where the cleaning sleeve penetrates the air duct, the gap shall be sealed by
an expanded foam sealing ring held in position by secure flanges. Where the
sleeve penetrates the insulation, the vapour barrier shall be maintained.
Where the sleeve penetrates the false ceilings, the sleeve shall be secured by
matching flanges.
(c)
The cleaning sleeve shall be kept straight and shall terminate at a readily
accessible position. The termination flange shall bear an instruction plate
indicating an air conditioning and ventilation access point in both Chinese and
English. It shall incorporate a threaded port and a screw cap which when
removed shall allow the coupling of air duct inspection and cleaning probes.
12/13
January 2011
(d)
Ceiling access panels shall also be provided after the confirmation of service
panels and air duct cleaning points.
(e)
(f)
(g)
Cladding associated with access panels shall be fixed to the panel or secured
in a manner that allows ease of removal and refitting without the use of tools.
(b)
Access doors shall be supplied and fitted with retaining chain tied back to the
frame.
(c)
(d)
Test holes shall be provided wherever necessary for effective balancing and
testing, except where air balancing and testing or air testing stations have
been called for else where in this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification. Test holes shall be 25 mm diameter and fitted with an effective
removable seal. Test points shall be provided to all dampers and items of
equipment to enable fan duties and items to be assessed and for
commissioning of the system.
13/13
January 2011
71.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall comply with other relevant sections of this General
Material & Workmanship Specification including but not limited to the sections
which specify:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(ii)
(iii)
Pumps and their drives shall be segregated such that failure of pump
seals shall not result in damage to the drive motors.
(iv)
The Contractor shall select all pumps suitable for the scheduled duties.
Pumps shall be capable of at least 5% head increase at rated
conditions by installing a new impeller.
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
1/14
January 2011
71.2
(ii)
iii)
iv)
The Contractor shall supply all the necessary labour, testing equipment
and chemicals for the pre-cleaning, commissioning and testing of the
water systems, including but not limited to the chilled water supply, make
up water supply, etc. The Contractor shall also allow for continuing the
treatment during the defects liability period.
(v)
During the defects liability period, the Contractor shall employ the same
water treatment specialist to carry out, at a minimum of once per month,
on-site water treatment services and water analysis to demonstrate that
the performance of the treatment system is satisfactory and conforming
with the specified treatment strategy. Test reports, related treatment,
consumption of chemicals etc. shall be forwarded each month for to the
Project Manager for review without objection.
BS 417 : Part 2
BS 970 : Part 1
BS 1564
2/14
January 2011
BS 4213
BS EN 1092
BS EN 1561
BS EN 1982
BS EN 4504 : Part Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN designated).
3.3
Specification for copper alloy and composite flanges
BS EN 13835
BS EN ISO 9906
71.3
SELECTION
71.3.1
(ii)
(b)
(c)
Pumps for chilled water circulation or other fresh water pumping duties
unless otherwise specified, shall be of one of the following types:
-
end suction type, the pump set shall be installed with spacer type
coupling so that the pump impeller can be dismantled from the
motor side for servicing without disruption of the pipe-work nor
dismounting the motor; or
(ii)
Chilled water pumps shall be suitable for continuous 24 hour per day 7 day
per week operation when handling water having a temperature in the range of
3C to 30C.
3/14
January 2011
71.3.2
(d)
(e)
(f)
At design conditions, pump efficiency shall not be less than 0.8. The
Contractor shall select the pump to provide, maximum available flow at break
off and the maximum available pressure at shut off exceed design flow and
pressure respectively by approximately 30%, for the proposed impeller.
(g)
(h)
Pumps shall be selected for a casing pressure of not less than 1.6 MPa.
(i)
(j)
Chilled water pumps shall be mounted either horizontal or vertical to suit the
chiller plant. Delivery flanges shall be cast on to the fixed half to allow full
accessibility to all internal parts without disturbing the alignment of the pump
set or breaking the pipe joints.
(k)
Basic Requirements
(i)
(ii)
The specifications of the biocidal and dispersing agents for chilled water,
and fresh cooling water systems shall have the following properties:- pH value:
approximate 6.8;
below 20 units;
4/14
January 2011
- iron:
- copper:
- bacterial count:
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Such metering pumps shall be controlled from the individual pump circuit
such that they only operate when their respective pump is operated.
(vi)
Sets of pumps can also be supplied with a single source variable duty
metering pump controlled from a flow metering device placed after the
main header outlet. In such cases the chemical injection shall be
distributed to all pump inlets via solenoid valves with each controlled to
open when their respective main water pump is switched on.
5/14
January 2011
(c)
(d)
(ii)
The unit shall be inserted through and across the centre of the pipe in
which the fluid flow shall be measured. It shall be inserted with watertight
glands not less than length of 12 pipe diameters downstream from any
bend or other turbulence-creating feature.
Biocide Storage
(i)
71.3.3
Apart from the necessity to periodically replenish the biocide supply, the
installation shall otherwise be capable of catering for a minimum of 4
weeks unmanned automatic operation. Where the use of the biocide
manufacturers container is considered by the Project Manager as
inappropriate for the purpose, duplicate chemical tanks shall be provided
to the following specification.
Unless otherwise specified, the water testing equipment used shall include
monitoring facilities to verify the performance of the water treatment system
offered. The monitoring facilities shall be handed over to the Project Manager
prior to the expiry of the Defects Liability Period.
(b)
The equipment shall be suitable for operation with both fresh and seawater.
Plain DPD tablets and colour disc shall be provided for chlorine residual
concentration testing. A pH meter and phenol red solution and colour disc
shall be provided for pH value testing. Other relevant test kits shall include
total dissolved solid and corrosion inhibitor level tester.
71.4
MATERIALS
71.4.1
Construction
Unless otherwise specified, the materials of construction of the pumps
shall be as follows:
- casing:
- impeller:
- shaft:
stainless steel;
- sleeves:
stainless steel;
- casing rings:
- shaft nuts:
bronze;
6/14
January 2011
cast iron;
- glands:
- lantern rings:
bronze.
Standards
- Casing Material
Unless otherwise specified for the above types of pumps, cast iron
shall comply with BS EN 1561.
- Impellers & Guide Rings
The impeller shall be of the enclosed type and be of leaded gunmetal
to BS EN 1982, keyed to the shaft. Renewable guide rings shall be
bronze and shall be provided in the casing, keyed to prevent rotation.
- Shaft, Sleeves and Glands
Stainless steel shall be to BS 970: Part 1 Grade 431S29, grade
316S31, ground and polished. Bronze sleeves shall comply with BS
EN 1982and shall be provided through the sealing glands to protect
the shaft from wear. The sleeves shall be keyed to prevent rotation
and secured against axial movement.
- Stuffing Boxes and Drain Piping
Cast iron stuffing boxes housing shall comply with BS EN 1561 and
shall be of ample length with bronze lined gland and neck bush, fitted
with packing reviewed by the Project Manager and lantern ring water
seal. Drain piping to remove gland leakage shall be provided.
- Mechanical Seal
Carbon rotary, ceramic stationing, Teflon packing, and stainless steel
spring and casing to BS 970 Grade SS 316.
(b)
Construction
Unless otherwise specified, the materials of construction of the pumps
shall be as follows:
- casing:
- impeller:
- shaft:
stainless steel;
- sleeves:
stainless steel;
- casing rings:
stainless steel;
7/14
January 2011
- shaft nuts:
bronze;
carbon steel;
- lantern rings:
bronze;
#Note 1 Stainless steel shall be used for water with temperature >28C
(ii)
Standards
- Casing
Unless otherwise indicated, the casing shall be of cast iron to BS EN
1561 or ISO 185 or better and approved.
Pump Base-Plate
(i)
The base plate shall be made of cast iron or fabricated mild steel.
Couplings shall be flexible of the steel pin and synthetic rubber bushing
type, and fitted with steel guards.
(ii)
(iii)
The length and width of the inertia base shall be at least 20% greater
than the length and width of the supported equipment, and the weight of
the inertia base shall be at least twice the operating weight of the
equipment supported.
8/14
January 2011
(d)
Flanged Connections
(i)
(e)
Water Filters
(i)
(f)
The materials used in water filters shall not corrode or cause corrosion in
the water and shall generally be as specified for water-cooled
condensers and water chillers.
General
For the purpose of this General Material & Workmanship Specification,
the following definitions shall apply:
(ii)
(iii)
Pressed steel tanks shall be of the externally flanged type and complete
with all necessary tie rods. Galvanized mild steel cisterns and pressed
steel tanks shall be cleaned and painted internally with two coats of an
approved bituminous or epoxy solution or shall receive other such
internal treatment as indicated.
(iv)
Covers to Cisterns
Each cistern shall be provided with a loose cover formed in sections not
exceeding 2 m long and 1 m wide. Covers for plastic or fibre-glass
cisterns shall be of the same material as the cistern body.
(v)
Connections
Connections to mild steel cisterns and tanks shall be made by means of
bossed, screwed flanges or pads and studs. Connections on mild steel
cisterns shall be welded before galvanizing. Flanges shall comply with
BS EN 1092 and BS EN 4504 : Part 3.3 PN6 to PN40 as appropriate.
9/14
January 2011
71.4.2
(b)
Chemical Tanks
(i)
(ii)
The tanks shall be suitable for the mixing the chemicals specified and
though normally operated at ambient plantroom temperatures, they shall
nevertheless be suitable for solutions at temperatures of up to 400oC.
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Each tank shall have a strong flat bottom providing adequate support
when full. The outer perimeter of the tank shall not be forced up by
water pressure causing the bottom to bulge.
(c)
(d)
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall allow for drilling and
tapping into the delivery pipe at points near to the water intake and
installing a suitable sized PVC valve complete with connectors for
attachment of the chemical tubes from the metering pumps.
(ii)
The pumps shall be suitable for 100:1 output range facilitated by means
of independently variable stroke length and stroke frequency.
(iii)
10/14
January 2011
(e)
(f)
(g)
(iv)
(v)
The pump suctions shall be mounted into the tank using a PVC suction
tube assembly that shall prevent the suction tube becoming wrapped
around the agitator shaft. The end of the pump suction tube shall not
extend beyond the bottom of the PVC tube shield.
(ii)
The Contractor shall supply and install into the chemical mixing tank
cover one agitator assembly per mixing tank. This shall consist of a
fractional HP motor driving a stainless steel shaft and neoprene with
bronze hub impeller. The shaft shall be of suitable length to suit the
depth of the solution in the mixing tank.
In order to prevent the metering pump and agitator from running if the
mixing tank is empty, the Contractor shall supply and install into each
tank cover a suitable liquid level switch and control system. A visual and
audio alarm shall also be provided at the control/indication panel.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
In order to prevent the metering pump and agitator from running if the
mixing tank is empty, the Contractor shall supply and install into each
tank cover a suitable liquid level switch and control system. A visual and
audio alarm shall also be provided at the control/indication panel.
Electricity Supply
(i)
11/14
January 2011
(h)
Automatic Operation
(i)
(i)
(ii)
The unit shall be inserted through and across the centre of the pipe in
which the fluid flow is to be measured. It shall be inserted with water
tight glands not less than 12 diameters downstream from any bend or
other turbulence creating feature.
71.5
SUBMISSIONS
71.5.1
(ii)
test certificates with performance curves giving values of pump flow rate
and pump efficiency;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
12/14
January 2011
71.6
WORKMANSHIP
71.6.1
Driving Arrangement The pump and motor shall be direct coupled and
mounted on a substantial machined bed plate of cast iron or of fabricated mild
steel. Couplings shall be flexible of steel pin and synthetic rubber bushing
type, accurately aligned, and fitted with guards. The whole assembly including
the bed plate shall be designed and supplied by the pump manufacturer.
Couplings with spacers shall be used for end suction pumps so that the
impeller can be dismantled from the motor side for servicing without disrupting
the pipework nor dismounting the motor.
(b)
Valves Each pump shall be provided with suction and delivery isolation
valves and where connected in parallel with other pumps, non-return check
valves.
(c)
71.6.2
(d)
(e)
Gauges Each pump shall be provided with two pressure gauges, one
connected to the suction side and one to the discharge side.
The Contractor shall appoint a specialist firm to provide water treatment for
chilled water systems.
(b) The chilled water distribution system shall be completely flushed out, pre
cleaned and the water treatment systems fully commissioned prior to the initial
start-up of the chiller plant.
(c)
Chemicals used for water conditioning, and the methods to store and feed the
chemicals into the system, shall comply with local by-laws and relevant
regulations.
(d)
(e)
Chemicals used for the water conditioning shall have no detrimental effect on
non-metallic materials, such as elastomeric or plastics products used in the
system.
(f)
Dosing and metering pumps shall inject the chemicals into the system by
means of flexible plastics piping and an injector fitting.
13/14
January 2011
(g)
The water treatment programme shall provide corrosion control for the water
circuit(s) by use of suitable corrosion inhibitors and pH control.
(h)
Overall corrosion rate shall not exceed 5 micro-metres per year for steel
components of the circuit in continuous contact with the conditioned water.
(i)
(j)
14/14
January 2011
72.1
GENERAL
(a)
(b)
72.2
The Permanent Works and materials specified below shall comply with the
sections stated, unless otherwise stated in this section:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Pipework, fittings, valves, vents, expansion devices and the like, associated
with all water services in this project shall be suitable for a minimum operating
pressure of 1.6 MPa.
ISO 65
ISO 7005
Metallic flanges
ISO 9328
ISO 9329
ISO 9330
BS 476
BS 2779
BS 2879
BS 3100
BS 3974
1/17
January 2011
BS 4504
BS 5150
BS 5152
Specification for cast iron globe and globe stop and check valves
for general purposes
BS 5154
Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check
and gate valves
BS 6129
BS 6755
Testing of valves
BS 5351
BS 7350
BS EN 593
BS EN 970
BS EN 1057
BS EN 1092-2
Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings
and accessories, PN designated. Cast iron flanges
BS EN 1561
BS EN 1563
BS EN 1982
BS EN 10028
BS EN 10029
BS EN 10051
BS EN 10213
BS EN 10216
BS EN 10217
BS EN 10259
BS EN 12163
BS EN 12164
2/17
for
the
petroleum,
January 2011
BS EN 12165
BS EN 12167
BS EN 12334
BS EN 12420
BS EN 12449
72.3
MATERIALS
72.3.1
Fabrication
(a)
Valves, vents, unions, pipework accessories and the like shall comply with the
requirements of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification and
the Employer's Drawings and where otherwise required for the proper layout,
valving and operating of the entire installation.
(b)
Chilled water pipework up to 125 mm diameter shall be black mild steel to ISO
65 medium grade.
(c)
(d)
Chilled water pipework above 300mm diameter shall be black mild steel to BS
EN 10216 and BS EN 10217 ERW Grade 320.
(e)
(f)
Chilled water pipework above 300mm diameter shall have the following
minimum wall thickness for the nominated pipework sizes:
(g)
(i)
350mm to 400 mm
8.0mm
(ii)
450mm to 500 mm
8.8mm
(iii)
600mm to 700 mm
10.0mm
(iv)
800mm to 900 mm
11.0mm
(v)
1000mm
12.5mm
(vi)
1200mm
14.0mm
3/17
January 2011
72.3.2
Joints
(a)
72.3.3
72.3.4
72.3.5
Bellows type expansion joints shall be provided for all pipework passing
through building expansion joints.
(b)
Joints shall comprise thin wall multi-plied omega formed convoluted bellows of
stainless steel material to BS EN 10029, 10051 and 10259 of appropriate
type.
(c)
Bellow expansion joints shall be provided with a close fitting stainless steel
internal liner to reduce turbulent flow.
(d)
End terminations shall be carbon steel threaded male to ISO 7-1 or carbon
steel flanges to ISO 7005 Standard to suit the line pressure.
(e)
(f)
Design working pressure shall not be less than 2,000 kPa unless otherwise
specified.
(g)
(h)
The lateral and axial movements of the expansion joints shall not be less than
6 mm, and shall be capable of accommodating the thermal expansion and
contraction of the system.
(b)
Hangers for pipework up to and including 100 mm shall be split ring with
provision for vertical adjustment. Hangers for pipework sized 125 mm and
larger shall be of the clevis type.
(b)
(c)
Anchors & guides and metallic bellows shall comply with BS 3974 : Part 2 and
BS 6129 : Part 1 respectively.
(d)
4/17
January 2011
72.3.6
72.3.7
72.3.8
72.3.9
All automatic air vents shall also act as automatic vacuum breakers during
drain down.
(b)
Strainers
(a)
Strainers shall be fitted on the suction side of each pump and where specified
or shown on the Employer's Drawings. Strainers shall be of the basket or Y
type as shown on the Employer's Drawings having grade 316 stainless steel
body and cage with a perforation size of 1.5 mm woven mesh for chilled water
and a size of less than 1.5mm mesh for seawater. The straining cage area
shall be not less than 5 times the cross-sectional area of the pipe.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Strainers for size DN 32 and DN 40 shall be bronze body, screwed ends, with
stainless steel screen, brass cap, neoprene based and suitably reinforced cap
gasket.
(e)
(f)
Strainers DN 250 and above shall be cast steel flanged pot-type with scantling
as for DN 200.
Valves
(a)
General
(i)
The Contractor shall supply and install all control, drain, vent, check,
pressure relief, throttling, isolation, bypass and other valves to suit the
Works.
(ii)
All chilled water valves shall be suitable for a minimum working pressure
of 1.2 MPa. Compressed air valves shall be suitable for a minimum
working pressure of 1.7 MPa.
5/17
January 2011
(iii)
(iv)
BS 5150, BS 5154;
- globe valves
BS 5152, BS 5154;
- butterfly valves
BS EN 593; and
BS EN 12334, BS 5154.
BS EN 1982;
BS EN 1982 LG2;
BS EN 12165,
BS EN 12420;
BS EN 12163,
BS EN 12164,
BS EN 12167;
BS EN 1561;
BS EN 1561 Grade 220;
- stainless steel
BS EN 970 SS316;
BS EN 1563;
:
:
BS EN 10028, BS EN 10029
- pressure purposes
BS EN 10213;
BS 3100.
non-pressure purposes
(v)
(vi)
6/17
January 2011
(b)
(ix)
Valve handles shall be cast iron, die cast aluminium alloy or suitable
equivalent except that valves up to 50 mm may be fitted with moulded
polymer handles. The finish of handles shall be smooth.
(x)
Valve handles shall clearly marked with "open" and "close" direction
arrows and labelling.
(xi)
Up to 50 mm
body
wedge
seat
stem
Gunmetal
gunmetal
gunmetal
brass
65 mm and
above
grey cast iron
bronze trim
bronze trim
brass
- configuration:
Configuration
Up to 50 mm
ends
spindle
bonnet
screwed
inside
screwed
65 mm and
above
flanged
inside
bolted
Up to 50 mm
bronze
chrome plated bronze
teflon
stainless steel
- configuration:
Configuration
ends
7/17
Up to 50 mm
screwed
January 2011
(iii)
Globe valves, including oblique pattern globe valves, shall comply with
the following:
- usage : isolation or throttling:
- minimum construction standard:
Construction
body
disc
seat
stem
Up to 50
mm
gunmetal
gunmetal
gunmetal
brass
65 - 100
mm
cast iron
gunmetal
gunmetal ring
brass
125 mm
and above
cast iron
cast iron
gunmetal ring
brass
Up to 50
mm
screwed
inside
screwed
65 - 100
mm
flanged
inside
bolted
125 mm
and above
flanged
inside
bolted
- configuration:
Configuration
ends
spindle
bonnet
200 - 900 mm
grey cast iron
grey cast iron
EDPM/Nitrile
stainless steel
Configuration
Up to 50 mm
shaft
body
actuator
stainless steel
wafer
10 position lever
65 mm and
above
stainless steel
wafer
worm gear
Construction
body
disc
seat
shaft
- configuration:
- butterfly valves with lugged, flanged and roll grooved ends are
acceptable except that butterfly valves used for dead end service
shall be double flanged.
8/17
January 2011
(v)
65 - 300
mm
grey cast iron
EDPM/nitrile
epoxy
SG iron
350 - 500
mm
grey cast iron
EDPM/nitrile
nickel
SG iron
600 mm
and above
grey cast iron
EDPM/nitrile
nickel
grey cast iron
65 - 300
mm
flanged
worm gear
bolted
350 - 500
mm
flanged
worm gear
bolted
600 mm
and above
flanged
worm gear
bolted
- configuration:
Configuration
ends
actuator
bonnet
(vi)
Up to 50 mm
gunmetal
gunmetal
gunmetal
gunmetal
- configuration:
Configuration
ends
cap
Up to 50 mm
screwed
screwed
9/17
65 mm and above
grey cast iron
bronze
bronze
stainless steel
January 2011
- configuration:
Configuration
Ends
65 mm and above
flanged
65 mm and above
grey cast iron
bronze
EDPM/nitrile
stainless steel
- configuration:
Configuration
ends
(c)
(d)
65 mm and above
wafer
Valves associated with the town gas installation shall comply with
Relevant Authority requirements.
(ii)
Miscellaneous Valves
(i)
Up to 50 mm
gunmetal
gunmetal
nitrile or similar
gunmetal
copper
- configuration:
Configuration
ends
bonnet
10/17
Up to 50 mm
screwed
screwed
January 2011
(ii)
Chilled Water
cast iron
polyurethane or
similar
stainless steel
stainless steel
Sea Water
zinc free bronze
316 stainless steel
316 stainless steel
316 stainless steel
Chilled Water
screwed (flanged
above 50 mm)
bolted
Sea Water
screwed (flanged
above 50 mm)
bolted
- configuration:
Configuration
end
bonnet/cover
(iii)
body
plug
gland packing
Chilled Water
(32 mm and
above)
gunmetal
gunmetal
graphite or similar
Sea Water
(32 mm and
above)
zinc free bronze
zinc free bronze
(to suit application)
Chilled Water
(32 mm and
above)
screwed
diamond
(no lockshield)
Sea Water
(32 mm and
above)
screwed
diamond
(no lockshield)
- configuration:
Configuration
End
head
- suitable UPVC valves may be used in lieu of zinc free bronze valves
for sea water subject to review without objection by the Project
Manager.
(iv)
11/17
January 2011
- suitable UPVC valves may be used in lieu of zinc free bronze valves
for sea water subject to review without objection by the Project
Manager.
(v)
Chilled water gauge cocks shall be of the bronze ground plug type with
lever handle. Sea water gauge cocks shall be similar except that they
shall be manufactured from zinc free bronze.
Flow limiters shall incorporate stainless steel springs and piston cores with
calibrated openings to maintain constant flow 5% within the pressure range
of the device.
(b)
(c)
Each flow limiter shall be fitted with pressure tapings for measuring flow rates.
Tapings shall extend beyond insulation as required.
(d)
(e)
A control valve shall be used for the chilled water tee-off for all retail areas,
CIP lounges and for the CRAC Units.
(b)
General
(i)
The Contractor shall install control valves for AHU flow control.
(ii)
(iii)
Valve actuator
(i)
(ii)
Actuator shall be driven by a 24V DC motor, and shall accept 2-10 VDC,
4-20mA, 3-point floating or pulse width modulation electric signal and
shall include resistors to facilitate any of these signals.
(iii)
12/17
January 2011
(iv)
(c)
(d)
External LED read-out of the current valve position and the maximum
valve position setting shall be standard.
Valve housing
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Flow regulator
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
72.4
SUBMISSIONS
(a)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall submit flow limiter spring ranges for review without
objection by the Project Manager.
13/17
January 2011
72.5
WORKMANSHIP
72.5.1
General
72.5.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
Pipework over passages for plant operators and services shall be 2000 mm
minimum clear from the finished floor level wherever possible.
(d)
Fixing generally shall be by metal expansion bolts for concrete and masonry.
Unless otherwise reviewed without objection by the Project Manager, power
fixings shall not be used. Applied loads shall not exceed 80% off the
manufacturer's recommended maximum applied load.
(e)
(f)
Factory fabricated large radius elbows and bends shall be used. Mitred elbows
and bends shall not be used.
(g)
(h)
Refrigeration pipes when stored or during installation whilst ends are open
shall have their ends covered with screwed metal caps, plastic caps, or
wooden plugs.
Joints
(a)
(b)
(c)
14/17
January 2011
72.5.3
(d)
Rolled groove couplings shall be self centering and of the flexible style
allowing up to 3 offset in pipework alignment.
(e)
Rolled grooved couplings shall be used on chilled water pipework in the chiller
plant areas.
The Contractor shall supply and install sufficient hangers, supports, spreaders,
beam clamps, clips, inserts and mounting devices to support all pipework
installed or modified as part of the Works, and shall be so located and
arranged as to permit free expansion and contraction of the pipework.
Supports shall be spaced in accordance with the following table:
Size of Pipe
(mm)
1.2
0.9
1.2
0.9
12
1.2
0.9
15
1.8
1.2
22
1.8
1.2
28
2.4
1.5
35
.3.0
1.8
42
3.0
1.8
(b)
(c)
Hangers shall be supported straight and true. Hangers shall not be located
near couplings, fittings or bends in pipework without provision for expansion.
(d)
(e)
For risers and other vertical pipework not subject to expansion, the Contractor
shall use galvanised riser clamps at each floor.
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
All bolts, nuts and washers shall be electro-plated with zinc or cadium to
BS3382: Part 1 and 2 with minimum plating thickness of 25 m.
15/17
January 2011
72.5.4
72.5.5
72.5.6
(j)
(k)
Provision shall be made for structural movement and thermal expansion and
contraction.
(b)
(c)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall caulk with flexible caulking compound between pipe and
sleeve. Where sleeves are installed through fire-rated walls, infill material shall
provide the same FRP as the wall and shall be applied full length of the
sleeve. Caulking shall be retained by clamping rings and cover plates.
(d)
All drain points, manual and automatic vents, drip lines and the like shall be
piped by means of suitable copper tubing or similar to physically accessible
termination points in locations reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager.
(b)
At each separate high point of the pipework and wherever air is likely to
become entrapped and adversely affect Plant performance, the Contractor
shall provide a manual valve with an automatic 6.5 mm minimum ball float
type air relief vent incorporating a stainless steel float and stainless steel seat.
(c)
All vents on risers shall be fitted with a drain run to discharge 25 mm above
the nearest floor drain, funnel drain or drip pan as appropriate.
16/17
January 2011
72.5.7
(d)
The Contractor shall supply and install manual vents at the flow and return of
each coil.
(e)
(f)
25 mm diameter drip lines shall be provided from pump beds or pump bodies
expanded immediately after bedplates or pumps bodies if the drain holes are
less than 25 mm. At changes of direction, the Contractor shall install plugged
tees and unions for ease of cleaning and disconnection.
Strainers
(a)
72.5.8
The strainers shall be easily accessible and designed to allow blowing out of
accumulated dirt without discontinuity of service and to permit removal of the
basket without the necessity to dismantle any pipework.
Valves
(a)
(b)
(c)
17/17
January 2011
73.1
GENERAL
73.1.1
General Requirement
(a)
Thermal insulation and vapour barriers shall be applied to all Plant with an
external surface temperature less than the surrounding ambient air to ensure
that condensation does not occur.
(b)
(c)
(i)
(ii)
NFPA 90A.
BS 5422; and
(ii)
BS 5970.
(d)
In general, all ductwork and equipment shall be insulated if the air conveyed
within the ductwork and the air external to it have a temperature difference
which may cause an unwanted condensation either on the duct surface or
within the ductwork or result in unwanted thermal exchange between the
external and inside air of the ductwork.
(e)
(f)
All insulation shall fit tightly to surfaces to be covered, and all slabs and
sections shall be built up close, butting edges being mitred, chamfered or
shaped as necessary. Any minor interstices left in insulation shall be filled and
sealed with granules embedded in approved adhesive compound reviewed
without objection by the Project Manager.
(g)
All materials delivered to Site shall be where appropriate, colour coded and
labelled at the factory to identify different grades, sizes and types. Insulation
shall be protected from damage after fixing.
(h)
Immediately before applying insulation, clean all surfaces until these are free
of rust, scale and grease, and are thoroughly dry. Under no circumstances
should the insulation be applied to wet surfaces.
1/9
January 2011
73.1.2
Standards
Reference in this General Materials & Workmanship Specification to British
Standards, British Standard Codes of Practice and other standards shall be to the
latest edition of the document, including all amendments issued by the relevant
authority, as the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
BS 476 : Part 6
BS 476 : Part 7
BS 476 : Part 12
BS 1710
BS 4370 : Part 1
BS 4370 : Part 2
BS 5422
BS 5970
DW/144
73.2
MATERIALS
73.2.1
General
(a)
Each category of material being used throughout the installation shall be the
product of the same manufacturer and the same brand.
(b)
(c)
Unless otherwise indicated, all thermal insulating materials used within any
building shall, when tested in accordance with BS 476 comply with the
following:(i)
(ii)
(iii)
2/9
January 2011
(d)
Or comply with (c)(i) above and conform to Class 'O' to UK Building Regulation
1991 certified by the Warrington Fire Test Laboratory or approving
organizations and standards recognised by the Hong Kong Fire Services
Department.
(e)
density:
compressive strength:
maximum conductivity:
maximum permeability:
external facing:
Fire rating shall have class O fire rating and test certificate from
independent laboratory.
(ii)
Rigid fiberglass
minimum density range:
maximum conductivity:
0.033 W/mK;
external facing:
minimum length:
All fibreglass insulation shall be completely sealed at all joints. All holes,
tears, punctures, etc. made in the vapour barrier shall be completely
sealed with the same specified foil tape.
3/9
January 2011
(iii)
32 - 48 kg/m3;
minimum thickness:
maximum conductivity:
external facing:
65 kg/m3 5 %
maximum conductivity:
0.035 W/mK;
maximum permeability:
> 80C
Polystyrene Insulation
Preformed of slab polystyrene shall only be used where specified.
Polystyrene insulation shall be of the required thickness to meet with the
thermal insulation values stated in Table 73.4.
The material shall be of the type which is defined as non-self
combustible. Fire rating shall have Class O fire rating and test
certificate from independent laboratory.
4/9
January 2011
(vi)
48 kg/m;
temperature range:
compressive strength:
maximum conductivity:
The insulation panel shall be laminated at factory with a minimum of 60micron thick aluminium foils on both sides. The aluminium foil shall be
embossed and coupled with a 2g/m2 layer of polyester paint. The
aluminium foil shall comply with the following requirement:
aluminum with pureness
thickness
60m
> 60N/m2
> 8%
73.3
SUBMISSIONS
73.3.1
General
(a)
The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of insulation for review
without objection by the Project Manager, prior to placing any order for
insulation.
(b)
Fire Certificate from FSD shall be submitted for Project Manager review
without objection.
(c)
73.4
WORKMANSHIP
73.4.1
General Requirement
(a)
The Contractor shall allow sufficient clearance around Plant to enable the
installation of external thermal insulation.
(b)
Insulation shall not be applied when the surface being lagged is wet or damp.
(c)
5/9
January 2011
73.4.2
(d)
Lap joints are preferred for joining sections of insulation together. Butt joints
may be provided if all joints are vapour sealed with a vapour barrier mastic
coating.
(e)
(f)
(g)
Insulation of pipes and ducts passing through fire barriers shall be fire
resistant and all gaps around shall be caulked with fire resistant material.
(h)
Where sheathing is applied to insulation, the seams shall be angled away from
view whenever practical.
(i)
Immediately before applying insulation, clean all surfaces until these are free
of rust, scale and grease, and are thoroughly dry. Under no circumstances
should the insulation be applied to wet surfaces.
(j)
Ductwork
(a)
(b)
In air conditioned areas, including sealed risers and concealed spaces within
such areas, external insulation shall be a minimum 25 mm thick 32 kg/m semi
rigid fiberglass. In non-airconditioned or partially air conditioned areas,
external insulation shall be a minimum 50 mm thick 48 kg/m semi rigid
fiberglass. External insulation shall be complete with a bonded facing of
aluminum backed reinforced kraft paper.
(c)
(d)
(e)
The Contractor shall ensure that cold bridging via fixings shall not occur.
(f)
The Contractor shall secure insulation to ducts with adhesive applied with 150
mm brush widths at 300 mm intervals. Insulation shall be fixed with pins and
clips to prevent sagging. Perforations caused by fixing pins and clips or similar
shall be vapour sealed.
6/9
January 2011
73.4.3
(g)
(h)
73.4.4
Where acoustic insulation is not required, the entire unit housing shall be
internally insulated with 25 mm of 32 kg/m density fiberglass blanket or 25
mm of 50 kg/m mineral wool blanket. Insulation shall be covered with
perforated aluminum foil bonded to reinforced kraft paper.
Pipework
(a)
The Contractor shall insulate all supply and return mains, headers, branches,
risers, drips, runouts, pump suction and discharge, pipework fittings, flanges,
valves, expansion and movement devices, flexible connections and similar
Plant associated with the chilled water system.
(b)
Hangers, supports, anchors, drains, vents and similar shall be insulated to suit
the thermal insulation criteria specified in this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification or as shown in the Employer's Drawings.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Insulated pipework shall have a continuous unbroken vapour barrier over the
entire outside surface of the insulation. The vapour barrier shall form a
durable, abrasion resistant coating in a dry state and shall have a minimum
film thickness of 5 mm. The vapour barrier shall comply with BS 476 : Part 7.
Insulation materials and minimum thickness shall be as follows:
Table 73.4
Type
CHW below
50 dia.
Insulation
Type
Phenolic
Foam
Thickness
material
25mm
CHW from
50 250 dia.
Phenolic
Foam
40mm
CHW above
250 dia.
Phenolic
Foam
50mm
Condensate
Nitrile
Rubber
19mm
7/9
Sheathing
Finish
Aluminium
foil and
vapour
barrier paint
Aluminium
foil and
vapour
barrier paint
Aluminium
foil and
vapour
barrier paint
nil
Dull matt
Dull matt
Dull matt
Dull matt
January 2011
Type
Refrigerant
pipe below 40
dia.
Refrigerant
pipe 40 dia.
and above
73.4.5
73.4.6
Insulation
Type
Nitrile
Rubber
Thickness
material
32mm
Sheathing
Finish
Nil, except
on chiller
Dull matt
Nitrile
Rubber
50mm
Nil, except
on chiller
Dull matt
Insulation shall have an insulating value equal to that of the insulation on the
connected pipework. The Contractor shall vapour seal the Plant with two
brush coats of vapour barrier cement using 220 g canvas, or spiral wrap glass
fabric between coats.
(b)
Valves, strainers, expansion and movement devices and other Plant requiring
inspection and/or maintenance shall have split sections of insulation complete
with 0.5 mm zinc anneal or aluminum split type boxes incorporating toggle
clips for ease of removal. Neoprene rubber gaskets shall be fitted at mating
surfaces of removable sections.
(c)
All insulated flanges and fittings in plant rooms or exposed to weather shall be
finished with a 0.5 mm zinc anneal or aluminum sheathing jacket.
(d)
Metal sheaths shall be designed and installed so that raw edges do not
impede or inconvenience access to or operation of valve handles or
instrument connection facilities.
(e)
(b)
A minimum 50mm of phenolic foam with aluminium foil and vapour barrier
shall be provided and cut to fit contours of pumps.
(c)
Insulation shall be split where pumps are split. Insulation shall be reinforced
with 15 kg/m2 copper sheets at the split.
(d)
Pump shall be sheathed with a 0.5 mm zinc anneal or aluminium jacket, split
for ease of removal. Toggle clips shall be used for holding sections in position.
Neoprene rubber gaskets shall be fitted at mating surfaces of the removable
sections.
8/9
January 2011
73.4.7
Thermal insulation exposed to view (including that within plant rooms) shall be
painted the colour specified or directed by the Project Manager. Insulation
protected by aluminum foil or self coloured sheet, plastics film or a weatherproof finish and is in concealed space, shall not require painting.
An undercoat and not less than two finishing coats shall be applied. Absorbent
surfaces shall also receive an initial coat of priming paint. All paints shall be
compatible with the surfaces to which they are applied.
(b)
All distribution services shall be colour coded and provided with symbols for
identification purposes. Identification coding for ductwork, including thermal
insulation, shall be in accordance with HVAC Specification DW/144. For
pipework, including thermal insulation, the basic colour and colour coding shall
be in accordance with BS 1710.
9/9
January 2011
74.1
GENERAL
(a)
The Permanent Works and materials specified below shall comply with the
sections stated, unless otherwise stated in this section:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The direction of air flow, agreed reference number and supplier's type number
shall be clearly marked on each attenuator.
(h)
1/5
January 2011
74.2
NFPA 90A
COP
ASTM E-84
UL No. 723
Surface
Burning
74.3
MATERIALS
(a)
(b)
(c)
Sound absorbent materials used within attenuators shall be inert, nonhygroscopic, incombustible, rot and vermin proof, and shall be capable of
carrying passage velocities of at least 25 m/s without surface erosion or other
forms of material migration. The infill shall be of a density not less than 48
kg/m3 to obtain the specified performance and packed under not less than
10% compression to eliminate voids due to settling. Material shall be inert,
vermin and moisture proof.
(d)
(ii)
NFPA 90A.
2/5
January 2011
(e)
Combustion rating for the attenuator acoustic in-fill shall not exceed the
following when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84, NFPA Standard 255 or
UL No. 723:
(i)
Flame Spread
25
(ii)
Smoke Developed
15
(iii)
Fuel Contributed
20
(ii)
125
5
8
12
4k
10
14
18
(iv)
4k
14
20
26
(iii)
125
7
10
14
4k
18
23
31
125
10
16
17
3/5
4k
28
41
45
January 2011
(v)
(g)
(h)
(i)
The Contractor shall select the final attenuation requirements for the individual
systems to achieve the minimum back ground noise levels. The Contractor
shall submit calculations for the required dynamic insertion losses to the
Project Manager, for review without objection.
(j)
The geometry of selected attenuators shall not result in requirements for sharp
transformation in adjacent ductwork connecting to the attenuator and, shall not
interfere with adjacent services or with reasonable access to services and
shall not affect adversely the aerodynamic performance of the system or
encourage regeneration of noise.
(k)
Evidence of performance of attenuators intended for use for the project shall
be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.
Submissions shall be based on test work carried out to BS4718: 1971 diffuse
field method or equivalent. Acoustic data shall include insertion loss and regenerated noise levels at the relevant range of face velocities.
(l)
Type testing on the pressure loss and insertion loss of the selected sound
attenuators shall be carried out by the Contractor to demonstrate that the
performance will comply with this Specification.
74.4
SUBMISSIONS
74.4.1
contractors drawings detailing the position and installation details of the sound
attenuator;
(b)
acoustical calculation for the sound insertion loss required for each system in
accordance with the as-built drawing; and
4/5
January 2011
(c)
74.4.2
(ii)
certification data for pressure drop and net insertion loss; based on tests
of same attenuator; and
(iii)
Samples
The following samples of proposed materials shall be submitted to the Project
Manager together with the particulars referred to in 74.5.1 above:
(a)
74.5
acoustic lining.
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
All internal components shall be spot welded in place with welds on centres
not exceeding 100 mm. All spot welds shall be treated after with anticorrosive epoxy resin or other approved coating. Manifolded silencers shall be
provided with continuous metallic nosing crimped in place. Nosing pieces and
tails shall be as per the manufacturer's design.
(b)
The attenuators shall be located at least three ductwork diameters from fans,
coils, elbows, branch takeoffs, or other ductwork elements.
5/5
January 2011
75.1
GENERAL
The Contractor shall install sufficient noise and vibration control measures on the
plant/equipment, the interconnected piping, ductwork and conduit so that when the
installed plant/equipment are put into operation, the resulting noise and vibration
levels at locations within the building and at adjacent or nearby buildings shall not
exceed the acceptable limits.
All isolator selections shall be subject to review without objection by the Project
Manager; and isolating elements, bonding materials, casings and the like shall be
suitable for all expected ambient conditions and shall be resistant to oil, water and
chemicals likely to be present.
The manufacturers for the noise and vibration control equipment shall be ISO 9000
accredited.
75.2
MATERIALS
75.2.1
Vibration Isolators
(a)
(b)
(c)
Spring Mounts
(i)
(ii)
1/20
January 2011
(iii)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Inertia Base
(i)
(ii)
The length and width of the inertia base shall be at least 20% greater
than the length and width of the supported equipment, and the weight of
the inertia base shall be at least twice the operating weight of the
equipment supported.
(ii)
The minimum internal bore shall not be less than the actual pipe internal
diameter.
(iii)
(g)
Live Length
230mm
340mm
455mm
570mm
690mm
The wall linerboard shall be secured by 1.5 mm thick galvanized steel 'z'
or channel sections of 50 mm deep which shall be firmly fixed to the wall
surfaces at 600 mm intervals.
2/20
January 2011
(h)
The minimum static deflection requirements for the equipment types are
given in the table below
Requirements for vibration isolators:
Equipment
Location
Minimum
Deflectio
n
AHUs & PAUs
Located above 50mm
areas of NC35 internal
or below
2-3mm
external
AHUs & PAUs
Others
25mm
internal
Packaged
air All
conditioning units
Axial fans
All
75.2.2
2-3mm
external
25mm
25mm
Propeller fans
Not wall
mounted-any
location
25mm
Pumps-base
mounted
Any location
35-50mm
Pipework
CRACs
FCUs
25mm
25mm
25mm
Centrifugal fans
Plant rooms
All
Shops, Office,
retails
All
25-50mm
Transformer
Generator
Any
Plant room
25mm
50mm
Air-cooled Chiller
Chiller plant
65mm
Isolation Type
Springs, free
standing
Neoprene
Springs, free
standing
Neoprene
Springs +
neoprene pad
Springs, free
standing or
hung
Springs, free
standing or
hung
Springs, free
standing c/w
inertia base
Springs
Springs
Springs
Springs, free
standing or
hung
Spring
Springs,
restrained
Springs,
restrained
Acoustic Louvres
(a) The Contractor shall select the final attenuation requirements for the individual
systems to achieve the minimum back ground noise levels. The Contractor
shall submit calculations for the required dynamic insertion losses to the
Project Manager, for review without objection.
3/20
January 2011
75.2.3
(b)
The geometry of selected louvres shall not result in requirements for sharp
transformation in adjacent ductwork connections and, shall not interfere with
adjacent services or with reasonable access to services and shall not affect
adversely the aerodynamic performance of the system or encourage
regeneration of noise.
(c)
Evidence of performance of louvres intended for use for the project shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.
75.2.4
(ii)
(b)
The duct lagging shall be fixed to the duct wall using 100% coverage of fire
retardant adhesive. The lagging shall be fixed using GI steel bands at not
less than 600mm centres. No pin type fasteners linking the external layer of
the lagging to the duct wall shall be used. No fixings which pierce the duct
wall.
(c)
The fire rating of the lagging shall comply with BS5588 and BS8313, or
equivalent. The lagging inside A/C plant rooms and that exposed indoors
shall have BS476 class 1 surface spread of flame rating or equivalent.
Hangers shall consist of a mild steel welded cage containing a helical spring,
or neoprene /rubber /glass fibre isolator, (or both) and be suitable for
suspension from drop rods. Where both types of isolating elements are used
together, the spring shall be at the pipe or duct end of the hanger. The spring
or active materials shall be used in compression.
(b)
Steel springs shall be stable at all loadings up to full compression and full
compression shall not occur before 150% of the rated maximum loading. No
permanent deformation shall result from full compression. The load shall be
transmitted to the spring through a neoprene washer bushed into the moving
end to prevent metal to metal contact.
(c)
4/20
January 2011
(d)
The hanger cage shall be capable of carrying five times the maximum rated
normal service load without permanent distortion. The drop rod arrangement
shall allow 30 degrees movement without metal to metal contact.
(e)
Stainless steel (minimum grade SS316) shall be used for external used spring
mounts, and for all isolators supporting condenser water pipe work.
75.3
SUBMISSIONS
75.3.1
Vibration isolators
(a)
The Contractor shall submit calculations to the Project Manager for review
without objection taking into account the weight distribution of the Plant under
normal operating conditions, weight of unsupported pipework and ductwork
and any dynamic forces due to fluid movement, torque reaction and starting
and stopping. The calculations shall support his selection of vibration isolator.
(b)
(c)
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Silencer calculation sheets, one for each side of each fan or AHU
(iv)
(v)
Static deflection calculations for plant and equipment vibration isolation shall
be submitted. The submitted information shall include:
(i)
Schedules for rotary plant (e.g. chillers, fans, pumps, generators etc)
and catalogues
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
5/20
January 2011
(d)
Special noise control treatments for major plant such as chillers and generator
sets shall be submitted. The submission document should include:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
75.4
WORKMANSHIP
75.4.1
Vibration Isolators
(a)
(b)
(c)
(ii)
Pads used as part of cast in situ machine and inertia bases shall be
protected to ensure that internal voids are kept free of concrete material.
When holding-down bolts are used, they shall only be tightened a half
turn more than hand tight. If levelling is necessary this shall be done
with galvanised shims which, if placed on top, shall cover the full top
surface of the mounting.
(ii)
Spring Mounts
(i)
Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable and in
series with two layers of ribbed or waffle pattern neoprene pads between
the base plate and the support. Ribbed or waffle pads shall be as
specified above.
(ii)
6/20
January 2011
(iii)
In the selection of the springs, the Contractor shall take into account the
weight distribution of the Plant under normal operating conditions, weight
of unsupported pipework and ductwork and any dynamic forces due to
fluid movement, torque reaction and starting and stopping.
(iv)
(v)
Mountings shall have leveling bolts that shall be rigidly bolted to inertia
bases or steel frames which in turn shall be rigidly attached to the Plant.
(vi)
(e)
(f)
The hanger casing shall have permanent structural integrity under the
design operating load.
(ii)
(iii)
Spring diameters and cage lower hole size shall be large enough to
permit the hanger rod to swing through 30 of arc before contacting the
case and thus short circuiting the spring.
Steel Frames
(i)
(ii)
Inertia Base
(i)
Anchor bolts shall be fixed into position, and housed in steel bolt sleeves
to allow minor bolt locations adjustments or alternatively, pockets shall
be cast into the inertia block to permit the later insertion of anchor bolts.
(ii)
7/20
January 2011
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(g)
(h)
(i)
The design of the brackets and mountings shall allow the base to be
raised from (or lowered onto) the floor by adjustment of the levelling
bolts between mountings and brackets. The design shall also allow the
insertion (or removal) of the mountings when the base is resting on the
floor.
Flexible Pipe Connections
(i)
(ii)
Pipework
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
The above isolators shall be provided for both hung and propped
pipework.
8/20
January 2011
(j)
The stiffness of vibration isolators shall be selected to suit the lateral isolation
efficiency required without causing instability. For rotating machines with
horizontal shafts, the horizontal stiffness perpendicular to the shaft shall not be
less than the vertical, if 'floor' mounted, and vice versa if 'side' mounted.
(k)
(l)
The tie rod systems on expansion joints used for vibration isolation shall be
designed to achieve the isolation required across the joint. The tie rod fixings
shall use rubber or neoprene bushed washers to prevent metal to metal
contact throughout the normal range of movement of the joint.
(m)
(n)
(o)
(i)
The AHU shall have internal spring mounts fitted below the fan frame to
achieve an isolation efficiency of not less than 95%
(ii)
The selection of vibration isolation systems shall allow for forces and
movement due to pressure differences at flexible connections.
Mountings shall be laid out and sized for their loadings at all operating
speeds.
(iii)
(ii)
The material used for 'pad' or 'mat' type mounting may be cellular,
ribbed, or studded. Pads and mats shall normally be bonded both to
supported and to supporting surfaces. Material and bonding agent shall
be resistant to lubricating oil and water.
(iii)
The pad materials shall comply with all relevant local fire regulations.
Commissioning Tests
(i)
9/20
January 2011
75.4.2
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
The Contractor shall submit a noise report, 10 days after each noise
commissioning test, to the Project Manager for review without objection,
to record the measured noise levels and recommend any necessary
mitigation measures. The Contractor shall, at their own cost, implement
the recommended mitigation measures and ensure that the specified
noise limits are achieved.
(vi)
The noise levels shall not be considered acceptable unless the relevant
Commissioning Test Reports have been reviewed by the Project
Manager without objection.
Fans
(a)
General
(i)
This section covers all fan installations in the supply air, the return air,
and the exhaust systems, including fans fitted in air handling units, fan
coil units, packaged air conditioning units and the like.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
10/20
January 2011
(vi)
(vii) External flexible connections shall be provided for all air handling units
irrespective of the provision of internal flexible connections.
(b)
(c)
Units mounted on ground supported slabs shall be isolated using rubberin-shear isolators with minimum static deflection of 5 mm.
(ii)
(d)
(e)
Units mounted on ground supported slabs shall be isolated using rubberin-shear isolators with minimum static deflection of 5 mm.
(ii)
(f)
All axial fans with wheel diameters over 550 mm shall be isolated using
spring isolators. The isolator minimum static deflection shall be 20 mm
for ground supported slabs and 40 mm for suspended slabs.
All centrifugal fans with wheel diameters over 550 mm shall be isolated
using spring isolators. The isolator minimum static deflection shall be 20
mm for ground supported slabs and 65 mm for suspended slabs. Fans
shall be mounted on concrete inertia bases for suspended slabs.
This section shall apply to air handling units, fan coil units, packaged air
conditioning units and the like.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
11/20
January 2011
(g)
Electrical Connections
(i)
75.4.3
Noise Levels
(a)
The Contractor shall ensure that in the selection of Plant, the lowest available
sound power levels are adopted. Sound power levels shall not exceed those
in the equipment schedule.
(b)
The Contractor shall submit for review without objection by the Project
Manager certified octave band sound power levels for all noise emitting
equipment. Where octave data is not available, selections shall be based on
an NC level 5 dB lower than that required for the space.
(c)
Maximum noise levels specified below do not include any allowance for the so
called "room effect". Any catalogue or certified data including "room effect"
allowances or the like shall be modified to show that the noise criteria has
been met.
(d)
The Contractor shall comply with other relevant sections of the Specification
including but not limited to the sections which specify:
(e)
(i)
(ii)
"insulation : acoustic";
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Plant shall be selected and installed so that the total noise levels resulting
from the simultaneous operation of all Plant (including the effects of
regenerated, breakout and structure-borne noise) do not exceed the following:
Area
Administration Offices
Airline
Ramp
Accomodation
Offices
CIP Lounges and Lounges
Commercial/Restaurants etc
Concourse and Terminal Public
Areas
Kitchens
Plant room
Public Corridors
12/20
Area
Public Toilets
Staff Areas
Staircases (normal use)
Staircases (escape only)
Transfer/Transit Lounges
75.4.4
(f)
Sound pressure levels in external areas within 3 m of air intake and discharge
points on the perimeter of the building shall be limited to 75 dB(A) except that
85 dB(A) is acceptable when fans dedicated to smoke extraction are running.
(g)
The above sound pressure levels shall not be exceeded when all Plant is
running on high speed as applicable, and when the background noise level is
at least 10 dB less than the above values. Acoustic treatment should be
provided to the plants to achieve the NC if the plants are installed at high level
of the occupied area.
(b)
All flexible duct connections shall be formed from resilient sound barrier mat of
minimum of 25 mm slack and minimum 5 kg/m2 across a 100mm gap to
ensure effective isolation, installed in such a way to avoid impeding air flow.
(c)
External flexible connections shall be provided for all AHUs irrespective of the
provision of internal flexible connectors.
(d)
All air ductwork, associated fittings and components shall be well sealed to
avoid noise from air leakage and internally free from raw edges and
projections.
(e)
Ceiling hangers and other support systems shall be kept clear of ductwork and
any ductwork insulation.
(f)
All control dampers shall be selected to maintain smooth airflow and minimum
regenerated noise. The contractor shall, where required, provide secondary
attenuation to remove regenerated noise created by dampers and/or flow
regulators.
13/20
January 2011
75.5
75.5.1
75.5.2
(i)
Any gaps between the services and the boards and between board and
the surfaces of the aperture shall be filled with acrylic mastic
(ii)
The sound insulation provided by the boards in the specified areas shall
not be less than the STC 35 when installed as shown on the Employers
Drawings.
(iii)
(iv)
The acoustic mineral boards shall comply with Hong Kong Fire
Regulations
(v)
75.5.3
Noise limits in terms of sound power levels are specified in this specification.
Noise levels testing of the FCU shall comply with BS 4196 : Part 3 Determination of Sound Power Levels in a Reverberant Chamber. The tested
sound power levels shall not exceed the following values:
Description
250
500
1k
2k
4k
60
55
51
49
48
14/20
January 2011
75.5.4
(b)
All flexible duct connections to the FCUs shall be formed from resilient sound
barrier mat with a minimum of 25mm slack and minimum 5kg/m2 across a
100mm gap to ensure effective isolation, installed in such a way to avoid
impeding air flow.
(c)
The Contractor shall allow additional noise control measures for casing
breakout when the above sound power levels cannot be achieved. Sound
power levels or alternative breakout noise control measures shall be
submitted for the Project Managers review without objection.
The maximum sound power levels (SWLs) of the AHUs, when tested in
accordance with ISO 3746 : 1995E or equivalent, shall not be higher than the
specified noise limits below:
(b)
Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
Supply
98
95
94
90
86
83
Inlet
88
83
79
76
74
72
Casing Breakout
83
78
74
71
69
67
Note: Sound power levels given in dB re 10-12W
75.5.5
4k
79
71
66
8k
74
70
65
(c)
The Contractor shall, at their own cost, conduct any necessary acoustic tests
and submit test certificates to demonstrate compliance with the specified
noise limits for the acoustic air handling units. All acoustic tests shall be
conducted by an independent acoustic laboratory or a qualified acoustician
such as a member of the Institute of Acoustics or an equivalent, the details of
whom shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.
(d)
The minimum length of the sound attenuators for PAUs/AHUs shall not be
less than 900 mm long.
(b)
Factory acoustic tests for AHUs shall be conducted. The Contractor shall
submit a Method Statement to the Project Manager for review without
objection prior to the actual test. The test proposal shall include, but not be
limited to, the following
(i)
Instrumentation to be used;
(ii)
Measurement procedures;
(iii)
Measurement locations;
(iv)
(v)
Noise measurements shall be made using a sound level meter complying with
'Type 1' requirements of IEC651 standard, or equivalent. The meter shall be
calibrated using an acoustic calibrator, before and after all sets of
measurements.
15/20
January 2011
75.5.6
(c)
(d)
(e)
A type test certificates shall be submitted within 7 working days to the Project
Manager to certify that the factory test has complied with the specified sound
power levels.
Acoustic Panels For AHU and/or Fan Rooms & G/F Air Plenum Rooms
(a)
(b)
The acoustic panels shall be minimum 100 mm thick and shall have an outer
skin of galvanised steel of minimum 1.5 mm thick appropriate reinforced and
internally lined with inert, non-hygroscopic, non-flammable glass or mineral
fibre (40 kg/m fibreglass or 120kg/m rockwool), stabilised by bonding with
resin or equivalent. The surface of the fibres shall be protected with a smooth
layer of woven or tissue faced fibreglass or mineral wool and a layer of
perforated galvanised mild steel having a thickness of not less than 1 mm,
and an open area of at least 23%.
(c)
The acoustic panels shall have sound transmission losses of not less than the
following values when tested in accordance with ASTM E90-61T:
Min. Transmission Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
Loss (dB)
63
125 250 500 1k
2k
Acoustic Panel
15
20
28
38
45
50
4k
50
8k
50
(d)
The acoustic panels shall have no holes or other defects which would allow
noise leakage.
(e)
(f)
(g)
All access panels shall be fitted with airtight seals and a latching mechanism
that ensures that the seals are correctly compressed when the access panels
are closed.
(h)
The acoustic panels shall be demountable and capable of being used for
installation in other locations.
16/20
January 2011
75.5.7
The Contractor shall submit proposals to the Project Manager for review
without objection in treating the noise and vibration generated by generators.
During routine testing of the generators, the total noise level generated from
the exhaust pipes and intake and discharge louvres shall comply with the
requirements given in the relevant Technical Memorandum under Noise
Control Ordinance and the nearfield noise levels (i.e. at 1m) as specified in
other parts of this Specification.
(b)
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary noise and vibration treatments
to comply with the requirements stipulated in the Contract Documents. These
treatments shall, include, but not be limited to, the following:
(c)
75.5.8
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Submissions from the Contractor shall include the details of all the proposed
noise and vibration control measures, and supporting documentation
(including noise test certificates, catalogue and calculation sheets). All test
certificates shall be prepared by an independent acoustic laboratory to be
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
Vibration isolation systems shall reduce the vibration and structure borne
noise in all occupied areas, with the exception of plant rooms and services
areas, such that:
(i)
resulting noise re-radiation will not exceed the Noise Criteria set out in
this specification.
(ii)
(b)
The Contractor shall submit details of the vibration isolation system type and
performance to the Project Manager for review without objection prior to
installation.
(c)
Where the vibration isolator type is not specified, the method of mounting
machinery and the size, type and active material of the mountings shall
comply with this vibration isolator specification.
(d)
Services in any basement plant room shall be supported directly off the floor
wherever reasonably possible
17/20
January 2011
75.5.9
(b)
The vibration isolation system shall allow each mounting to be adjusted to the
design value at the operating condition of the supported equipment.
75.5.11 Static and Dynamic Forces due to Fluid Pressure at Flexible Connections to
Fans and Pumps
(a)
The selection of vibration isolation systems for fans and pumps shall allow for
forces and movement due to pressure differences at flexible connections.
Mountings shall be laid out and sized for their loadings at all operating
speeds.
(b)
(c)
Isolated sway braces, buffers and similar devices may be used to limit
movement during start up and run down. Such devices shall be installed so
that they are not in contact with the vibrating device under normal conditions.
Sway braces and buffers shall not be used to control constant thrusts created
during normal operation.
(b)
These restraints may be omitted only from vibration isolation systems which
cannot be overloaded by pipe or ductwork during erection and are unlikely to
be used as hand or footholds subsequently.
(c)
18/20
January 2011
75.5.13 Pipe & Duct Supports Adjacent to Fans, Pumps and Other Equipment
(a)
The weight of pipes, ducts, and their contents, or other services connected to
the equipment shall be supported independently of the equipment and shall
not impose any additional load on the equipment.
(b)
(c)
The vibration isolators supporting the pipes shall provide the same static
deflection as the equipment supports for the length of service relating to the
first type of pipe support isolation specification.
(d)
Flexible pipe work connections may be used in place of pipe work resilient
hangers only when the connectors comply with the requirements of the
section below.
(e)
Flexible connections used for the vibration isolation of pipe work shall be
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
(f)
75.5.14 Pipe isolation inside plant rooms and adjacent to noise sensitive areas
(a)
All pipes inside chiller plant rooms and chilled water pump rooms shall be
vibration isolated with minimum 25 mm static deflection springs in series with
neoprene vibration hangers.
(b)
An additional 10m length of pipe from the plant room boundary walls shall be
vibration isolated with 25 mm static deflection spring in series with neoprene
vibration hangers.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Vibration isolation supporting points shall not interfere with any other services.
No support shall come into contact with any other service which may result in
vibration transmission.
19/20
January 2011
(b)
The width of air gap between the underside of solid machine bases
(supported on vibration isolation mountings) and the floor shall be selected to
avoid resonance of the air gap.
The acoustic panels shall be a minimum 100mm thick and shall have an outer
skin of galvanised steel of minimum 1.5mm thick. The panels shall be
reinforced and internally lined with inert, non-hygroscopic, non-flammable
glass or mineral fibre (40 kg/m fibreglass or 120kg/m Rockwool), stabilised
by bonding with resin. The surface of the fibres shall be protected with a
smooth layer of tissue faced mineral wool and a layer of perforated galvanised
mild steel having a thickness of not less than 1mm, and an open area of at
least 23%.
(b)
The acoustic panels shall have sound transmission loss not less than the
following values when tested in accordance with ASTM E90-61T:
Min. Transmission Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)
Loss (dB)
63
125 250 500 1k
2k
Acoustic Panel
15
20
28
38
45
50
4k
50
8k
50
(c)
The acoustic panels shall have no holes or other defects which would degrade
the acoustic performance
(d)
(e)
All access panels shall be fitted with airtight seals complete with a latching
mechanism to ensure that the seals are fully compressed when the access
panels are closed.
(f)
20/20
January 2011
76.1
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the specific requirements for electrical equipment and
installation for mechanical services system. The general requirements for the
same shall be referred to Section 44.6.
(b)
The Works and materials described herein shall comply with sections 46, 48,
49, 53, 57, and 59 of the General Materials and Workmanship Specification for
general requirements and details regarding the electrical installation including
the following:
(i)
the Works and materials described herein shall comply with other
relevant sections of this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification including the sections which specify:
- Section 77 Automatic Controls;
- Section 78 Instruments; and
- Section 79 Testing, Inspection and Commissioning Mechanical
Services.
76.2
IEC 60034
BS 88 : Part 2
BS 2757
BS 5486
BS EN 50081
BS EN 50082
BS EN 60529
1/12
of
protection
provided
by
January 2011
76.3
MATERIALS
76.3.1
General
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
All MCC's shall be fitted with volt, ampere and kilowatt hour meters on
the incoming supply.
(vi)
(b)
Motor control centers for FSI plant, i.e. smoke extract fans etc., shall be
located within a separate 2 hours fire rated enclosure, in accordance
with FSD COP. All power supply and control cables for the hot smoke
extraction systems shall be rated to withstand 250C for one hour.
General Arrangement
(i)
2/12
January 2011
(ii)
Each circuit shall be complete with the following facilities mounted on the
compartment door:
- isolation switch;
- remote-off-local, "auto-off-manual" and other rotary control switches
specified in this General Materials and Workmanship Specification or
shown on the Employer's Drawings; and
- on, off, fault, alarm, timer initiated, local-remote-manual-auto
and other indicators specified in this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification or shown on the Employer's Drawings;
- reset, lamp test and other push button specified in this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification or shown on the
Employers Drawings.
(c)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Spare contacts for MBMS interface shall be provided for all plant under
MBMS monitoring and control.
Construction
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
MCC's shall be constructed with all matching and setting up done using
suitable jigs so that similar parts shall be readily interchangeable.
Where withdrawable switchgear is used, it shall be possible to fully draw
out a truck from the MCC without having to open the doors of adjacent
panels.
(iv)
3/12
January 2011
- control switches;
- indicators;
- pushbuttons; and
- labels.
(v)
Doors or lift-off panels as applicable shall be fitted to the front and rear
of cubicles.
(vi)
Doors shall be hung on lift off hinges and shall open through a minimum
of 120. Panels shall be complete with lifting handles and means of
support to retain the panels in place after the removal of fixing screws
and bolts.
(vii) Doors and panels shall be stiffened to prevent distortion and shall be
fitted with lockable chrome plated handles or other suitable means of
fastening. Doors shall be fitted all around with soft closed cell neoprene
compression gaskets.
(viii) A steel channel frame shall be incorporated in the base of the MCC to
provide rigidity and support for lifting. MCC's shall be fixed to the floor or
plinth using expansion bolts or equivalent. MCC's shall be fully closed off
at the bottom. The Contractor shall provide levelling rails as required.
(ix)
MCC's shall be designed to ensure that they can be delivered to the final
locations with plant room doors and access ways into plant rooms built
and complete.
(x)
(xi)
4/12
January 2011
(d)
(e)
Cable Terminations
(i)
(ii)
Provision for the entry of supply mains shall be made in the form of
suitable panel plates or cable entries.
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) Terminal groups shall be segregated from each other by 25 mm, and a
minimum of 25% spare terminals for each group of control circuits shall
be provided.
(viii) Terminal blocks shall be provided in each cubicle between shipping
breaks of MCC's to facilitate ease of terminating control cabling when
the sections are installed on Site. The required interconnecting cabling
and terminal blocks shall be clearly marked to facilitate ease of
connection on Site.
(f)
Control Wiring
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Control wiring shall be laced and formed into looms supported on wiring
cleats.
(iv)
(v)
5/12
January 2011
(vi)
Each wire shall be separately terminated with tinned (but not soldered)
crimped lugs suitable for the terminal and wire used.
(g)
(ix)
(x)
(h)
(i)
Metering Instruments
(i)
(ii)
Isolating links and fuses shall be provided in all instrument current and
potential circuits to enable testing and maintenance.
76.3.2
A spare fuse rack shall be provided for each motor control centre
utilizing fuses. The rack shall accommodate in separate racks or clips a
total of 6 fuses for each rating used in the motor control centre and shall
be labelled with the corresponding rating and voltage. Sufficient spare
fuses to fill the rack shall be provided. Fuses used during testing and
commissioning and the Defects Liability Period shall be replaced.
The input and output (I/O) panels shall be used for direct interfaction with
equipment under the MBMS monitoring and control functions. These I/O
panels are located in the communication services drawings, along with an
equipment list and point schedule.
(b)
The contractor shall comply with other relevant sections of this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification including but not limited to:
(i)
automatic controls;
(ii)
6/12
January 2011
76.3.3
76.3.5
instrument;
(iv)
(v)
(c)
The existing MBMS installation shall be extended to include the items of plant
and sensors included in the modification works. The extensions to the existing
system shall provide the same functions as required for the original system.
The standard quality and performance of the extended system shall be
equivalent to the original system already provided.
(d)
(ii)
the effect of isolating the I/O panel and /or motor control center on
remote Plant performance
76.3.4
(iii)
General
(i)
The degree of protection for pump control panels (PCPs), control panels
and similar enclosures shall be to IP 54 as specified in BS EN 60529.
(ii)
Panel construction shall comply with Section 76.3.1 (c) of the General
Materials and Workmanship Specification.
Cable shall comply with Section 48 of the General Materials and Workmanship
Specification.
(b)
Cable shall comply with Section 48 of the General Materials and Workmanship
Specification.
(b)
Cables shall be sized for the rated current of the connected load.
(c)
(d)
Colour codes of the cables shall comply with the New Cable Colour Code for
Fixed Electrical Installations published by the EMSD and the amendments.
7/12
January 2011
76.3.6
76.3.7
(b)
Smoke extraction fans, motors and associated Plant shall comply with
Relevant Authority requirements for dynamic smoke extraction systems
including the requirement that Plant shall be suitable for continuous operation
at 250C for at least 1 hour. Motor insulation shall be Class H to BS 2757
minimum.
(c)
Kitchen exhaust fans, motors and associated Plant whilst not part of the
dynamic smoke extraction system, shall also be suitable for continuous
operation at 250C for at least 1 hour. Motor insulation shall be Class H to BS
2757 minimum.
(d)
When a variable frequency drives (VFD) is specified for a fan or a pump with
throughput power up to 150 kVA, it shall be a solid-state converter to convert
three phase mains supply to an adjustable voltage and frequency output at its
rated throughput power. VFD shall conform to BS EN 50081 and BS EN
50082 or other similar recognized international standards on Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) compliance for industrial or commercial applications and
shall be manufactured to ISO 9001.
(b)
(c)
The VFD shall be capable of continuously delivering rated output voltage even
when the mains supply voltage is down to 6% of its nominal value and shall be
able to control a standard IEC 60034 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor
over a speed range of 20% to 100% continuously and smoothly without the
need to de-rate the motor kW rating and to provide total power factor of not
less than 0.9 lagging, without external chokes or power factor correction
capacitors, at all loads within the speed range. The inrush current shall be
zero and during starting, the current shall start from zero and rise as the load
accelerates and shall not exceed the full load current.
8/12
January 2011
(d)
The VFD shall allow unlimited switching of the motor circuit, at any load and
within the controlled speed range without damage and without the need of
auxiliary control switching. The VFD shall be capable of automatically
reconnecting to a spinning fan and running without tripping, following mains
interruption and on transfer from backup source. The VFD shall be capable of
running with no motor connected during functional testing. The VFD shall have
voltage/frequency (V/f) ratio suitable for centrifugal pumps and fans control.
Selectable V/f ratios shall be provided and it shall not be possible to set a
constant V/f ratio, to prevent damage to connected equipment and to optimize
energy usage.
(e)
(f)
(g)
(i)
minimum efficiency of 95% at 100% load and not less than 90%
efficiency at any other operating loads;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(ii)
9/12
January 2011
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
An integral full 3-term PID control to provide close loop control direct from
signal transmitter without need for external signal conditioning;
(i)
10/12
January 2011
Construction
Each motor controller shall house the specified motor starter(s), control
switches and push-buttons, indications, alarms and accessories. The
enclosure for the motor controller shall be of standard mass produced product
by an approved manufacturer suitable for wall mounting and shall be of fine
coated sheet steel, not less than 2mm thick, with stoved enamel paint finish,
light grey in colour. For motor controller / LCP greater than 400A and/or with
more than six starters or feeder units, the panel/enclosure construction shall
be suitable for floor mounting.
(b)
(c)
Internal Components
Relevant controller components including contactors, starters, mains and
motor protective devices, main supply isolator, etc shall comply with GMWS
Section 76.3. Control relays and accessories shall be provided for the
specified controls, indications and alarms.
(d)
Mains isolator complete with voltmeter and selector switch for the
controller supply.
(ii)
(iii)
76.4
SUBMISSIONS
76.4.1
General
The Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Project Manager for
review without objection:
(a)
(b)
details of control panels showing all indication signal, control, function and
component arrangement.
11/12
January 2011
76.5
WORKMANSHIP
76.5.1
76.5.2
(a)
Cabling and wiring shall comply with Section 48 of the General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
(b)
The minimum conductor size shall be 2.5 mm2 for phase, neutral conductors
and earth conductors. Control circuit cabling conductor size shall be 1.5 mm2
minimum subject to voltage drop limitations.
76.5.3
Conduits and fittings shall comply with Section 49 of the General Materials
and Workmanship Specification.
12/12
January 2011
77.1
GENERAL
(a)
The Contractor shall comply with other relevant sections of the Specification
including but not limited to the sections which specify:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
(c)
All sensors shall be arranged to give convenient access for servicing the
sensor.
(d)
The power supply for all automatic control facilities including PLCs, MBMS
panels controllers, field devices and similar shall be derived from the
associated motor control center (MCC).
(e)
(ii)
(iii)
(f)
(g)
Motorized, solenoid and control valves shall be capable of being driven closed
by the associated actuator against a pressure drop across the valve
equivalent to that of at least the corresponding pump shut off head.
(h)
Cooling coil control valves shall be interlocked with the air handling units and
fan coil units. When the air handling unit/fan coil unit control is de-energized,
the cooling coil control valve and motorized dampers shall close.
(i)
Sensors, controllers, relays and the like shall be provided with identifying
nameplates or stencils. Labelling for devices in public areas shall be located
at the underside of the corresponding cover plate.
1/36
January 2011
(j)
Fans capable of starting up under fire mode control and the MCC cubicle door
of the circuit that feeds those fans shall be provided with a suitable warning
label indicating that the plant may start up under fire mode regardless of
control switch status.
(k)
Air handling units and supply air fans shall be interlocked with the
corresponding exhaust air systems that serve the same area, adjacent toilets,
kitchens or the like. Interlocks shall be through the MBMS unless specified as
being hardwired through the MCC.
(l)
As duty and standby operation of the system is used, the following function
shall be provided unless otherwise specified:
(i)
(ii)
both duty and standby plant shall be capable of operating at the same
time; and
(iii)
the MBMS shall be able to rotate plant from duty to standby status and
at the same time rotate the associated plant from standby to duty status.
(m)
Unless otherwise specified, time delays to suit the safe operation of plant and
to suit Relevant Authority requirements including reduced voltage motor
starters, high speed/low speed motor changeovers and similar shall be
provided by integral electronic timer relays mounted in the relevant motor
control center or control panel. All such timer relays shall be individually
adjustable. Time delays associated with sequencing of plant including
confirmation of long term stability of control signals shall be through the
MBMS.
(n)
Individual indicators on the front panel of MCC and control panels shall be
provided for each MCC or control panel mounted time relay except those
associated with a reduced voltage motor starter.
(o)
Sensors monitored by MBMS may be used for fire mode monitoring. Their
contacts for fire mode status indication shall be separated from those for
MBMS status indication.
(p)
All sensors used for the hot smoke extraction system shall be capable of being
operated at 250C for one hour as per FSD requirement.
(q)
All fire mode shutdown, fan initiation and damper control signals shall be
hardwired and shall be independent of the building management system.
(r)
All cables associated with the smoke control fans shall be of fire resistant to
FSD requirements.
(s)
The Specification for Motor Control Center (MCC) as described in this Section
shall be applicable for both Motor Control Center (MCC) and Local Motor
Control Panel (LCP) for Mechanical Services installations.
(t)
2/36
January 2011
77.2
77.3
77.3.1
(b)
77.3.2
Load Management
(i)
Within MCCs, the Contractor shall provide at least two relays, the
supplies of which are fed through contacts that monitor the status of load
shed signals from the relevant low voltage main switchboard (MSB).
The relays shall have both NO and NC contacts so that MSB load shed
signals being monitored can be changed from NO to NC without
significant disruption.
(ii)
The first stage of load shedding from the MSB shall de-energize all nonessential plant; and
(iii)
(ii)
(b)
The mechanical services control system shall be capable of being initiated and
operating independently when the MBMS central processor is in a fault
condition, or when the local area network cabling is disabled. To this end all
MBMS stop / start contacts shall be wired into the Auto control circuit and
shall not interfere with or override the Manual, Test, Bypass or Off
facilities located on the motor control center or elsewhere.
3/36
January 2011
(c)
(d)
(e)
Start Up Sequences
(i)
the MBMS shall incorporate a time switch and / or event initiated control
function as part of all mechanical services stop/start facilities; and
(ii)
(ii)
(iii)
(ii)
(f)
Emergency shutdown
(i)
(ii)
4/36
January 2011
(g)
77.3.3
All digital input status indication for all MBMS stop / start facilities shall
be provided for status indication.
(ii)
The status of the main contactor associated with the item of equipment
shall be monitored.
General
(i)
(ii)
In general, automatic fire mode control signal from the fire alarm control
system and manual fire mode signals from the Smoke System Control
Panel (SSCP) and the Ventilation / Air Conditioning Manual Override
Control Panel (VMOCP) shall be provided at terminal strips in relevant
MCCs. One type of signal to shutdown Plant not required for smoke
control such as air handling units and another type of signal to control
smoke extraction fans and associated Plant shall be provided.
(iii)
When more than one automatic and/or manual fire mode signal is
received at a MCC, the following shall occur:
- motorized fire and smoke dampers (MSDs) associated with those
smoke control zones for which a fire mode signal has been received
shall assume the relevant fire mode status.
Under these
circumstances, a fire mode control signal to open a MSD shall take
precedence over a fire mode signal to close a MSD;
- a fire mode control signal to initiate high speed operation of a smoke
extraction fan shall take precedence over a fire mode control signal to
initiate a slow speed operation of the same smoke extraction fan; and
- the hot smoke extract fan shall run continuously until manually reset
at the hot smoke control panel or local MCC.
(iv)
Fire mode indicators and momentary contact reset push button shall be
provided for each MCC, control panel and the like. The indicator shall
illuminate on receipt of any fire mode control signal and shall remain
illuminated until all signals have been cleared and MCCB and/or panel
has been reset.
(v)
Separate indicators shall be provided for each separate fire mode signal
connected to the MCC.
(vi)
Fire mode reset facilities shall be provided through the MBMS for each
control center, control panel and the like.
5/36
January 2011
(b)
shutdown mode:
- on receipt of signal from the fire alarm system, the following plants
shall shut down irrespective of MBMS control status. Relevant
dampers shall assume corresponding fire mode positions; and
- following receipt of a shutdown fire mode control signal, the relevant
plant shall remain shutdown until manually reset at the MCC or
through the MBMS;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Fire Interface:
- the status of the relevant equipment shall not be affected by the fire
alarm system.
(ii)
6/36
January 2011
(iii)
(c)
77.3.4
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
General
(i)
each separate primary air handling unit shall be stopped and started
through the MBMS;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
when the primary air handling unit controls are de-energized, the cooling
coil control valve shall close; and
Temperature Control
(i)
(c)
the supply air temperature shall be maintained within the range specified
by modulating valves in response to the corresponding supply air
temperature to regulate the chilled water flow through the cooling coil of
the PAU to maintain the pre-set supply air temperature; and
Fire Mode
(i)
on receipt of a fire mode signal, the corresponding air handling unit shall
shutdown and the associated outside air damper shall close; and
(ii)
when probe type smoke detector located in the supply air duct senses
smoke the fan within the respective AHU will shut down.
7/36
January 2011
77.3.5
Control of Single Zone VAV Air Handling Unit (AHU) with Variable Outside Air
(a)
(b)
General
(i)
each separate air handling unit shall be stopped and started through the
MBMS.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
when the air handling unit controls are de-energized, the cooling coil
control valve shall close.
Temperature Control:
(i)
Summer mode:
- the variable frequency drive output shall vary in response to the
corresponding space/return air temperature sensor; and
- the cooling control valve shall modulate in response to the
corresponding supply air temperature sensors.
(ii)
Winter mode:
- the air flowrate shall be set at 50% of design flowrate and the space
temperature controlled by modulating the cooling coil control valve in
response to the return air temperature sensor.
(c)
(d)
Fire Mode
(i)
on receipt of a fire mode signal, the corresponding air handling unit shall
shutdown and the associated outside air damper shall close.
(ii)
when probe type smoke detector located in the supply air duct senses
smoke the fan within the respective AHU will shut down.
8/36
January 2011
77.3.6
(b)
General
(i)
Control for fan coil units shall be similar to those provided for air
handling units. Non microprocessor based controls supplied by fan coil
unit manufacturers shall not be used.
(ii)
Each separate fan coil unit shall be stopped and started through the
MBMS.
(iii)
(iv)
When the fan coil unit controls are de-energized, the cooling coil control
valve shall close.
Temperature Control
(i)
(c)
Fire Mode
(i)
77.3.7
Fan coil units shall run continuously and the cooling coil control valve
shall be on-off in response to the corresponding space temperature
sensors.
77.3.8
(a)
each separate fan including duty and standby fans shall be individually
stopped and started through the MBMS; and
(b)
each separate fan including duty and standby fans shall be individually
stopped and started through the MBMS;
(b)
fans shall be operated in fire mode as scheduled on receipt of fire mode signal
through MBMS;
(c)
when the probe type smoke detector located in the exhaust duct senses
smoke, the fan shall shut down. The signal to operate in fire mode shall
override the signal from the probe type detector to shut down;
9/36
January 2011
77.3.9
(d)
(e)
during normal mode of operation, the MBMS system shall control the fans. In
fire mode, any fire control signals shall override the MBMS control and shall
remain so until such time as the fire control signals have been reset through
the Fire Alarm System.
Each separate fan shall be stopped and started through the MBMS.
(b)
The variable frequency drive output shall be set manually through MBMS so
that the fan runs at constant speed.
(c)
(d)
Interlocks with town gas solenoid valves shall be provided for kitchen exhaust.
each separate fan including duty and standby fans shall be individually
stopped and started through the MBMS;
(b)
(c)
(b)
Panels and associated components shall be compatible with the MBMS and
shall meet MBMS performance requirements relating to the receipt,
processing and transmission of both analogue and digital data including all
protocols and other interfacing requirements.
(c)
Each panel shall provide a local data interception point from various
monitoring sensors and control devices associated with the plant. The
connection to these devices shall not affect the safe operation of the plant.
(d)
Each panel shall be complete with enclosure, termination strips and gland
points for cable entry. The degree of protection shall be IP42 to IEC 529.
10/36
January 2011
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
Battery back-up for maintaining real time clock, buffers and point status shall
be capable of a minimum of 8 hours retention following a power failure. The
battery pack shall be automatically recharged when mains power is supplied.
A visual warning status shall be provided when battery is low, as well as
power supply status. This information shall be transmitted to the MBMS panel
as a status alarm.
(j)
The panel shall ensure the integrity of the stored data and programs in the
event of a power failure. Hardware and software diagnostic routines shall be
automatically carried out during power on reset, manual reset and periodically
during device sequencing to identify faults. A self test pushbutton shall be
included in the panel to initialize manual testing. The tests shall also include
communications link checking. Detection of internal controller faults shall be
flagged to the MBMS panel, and displayed visually at the panel itself. The test
mode shall allow for the testing of all analogue digital points and sensors
within the plant.
(b)
Where an area has two CO2 sensors, each sensor shall be deemed to monitor
approximately 50% of the area.
(c)
When a CO2 sensor records a CO2 level less than set point for longer than 30
minutes, the event shall be recorded by MBMS to alert the operator.
(d)
If, at the same time, the ambient temperature external to the building is less
than 24C then the operator shall be simultaneously alerted of this and a
message displayed advising against resetting to minimum outside air if there
is a demand for cooling and the intention is to save energy.
(e)
The operator shall then decide, if any, AHUs are to be reset to minimum
outside air.
(f)
AHUs that can be reset shall be grouped in a special menu based on the area
that CO2 sensor is deemed to monitor.
11/36
January 2011
(g)
If a CO2 sensor records a CO2 level greater than the set point for longer than
15 minutes then the operator shall be alerted. Any AHUs serving the relevant
area that is on minimum outside air shall automatically reset to maximum
outside air.
(h)
The free air cooling control system shall be energized to monitor the system
conditions when the supply air fan of the air handling unit is turned on.
(b)
Motorised control dampers shall be provided in the returned air path for
isolating the return air side and supply air side under the free air cooling
mode. This isolating damper shall be normally opened and fully closed under
the air cooling operation.
(c)
Motorised fresh air supply dampers shall have a minimum setting to provide
the minimum fresh air supply to the system and shall be fully opened under
the free air cooling operation.
(d)
(e)
(f)
The details and final configuration of free air cooling system shall comply with
the criteria specified under the Specification.
77.3.14 Control of CAV Single Zone Air Handling Unit (AHU) with Variable Outside Air
(a)
General
(i)
Each separate air handling unit shall be stopped and started through
the MBMS.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
When the air handling unit controls are de-energized, the cooling coil
control valve shall close.
12/36
January 2011
(b)
Temperature Control
(i)
(c)
(d)
On receipt of a signal from MBMS CO2 control system, the outside air
intake damper shall be modulated in response to the outside air velocity
sensor. Sufficient amount of outside air shall be achieved but not below
the minimum value stated in the Employers Drawings.
Fire Mode
(i)
On receipt of a fire mode signal, all non essential ventilation plant shall
automatically shutdown and the associated outside air dampers shall
close. The ventilation system shall be prevented from being restarted
until the fire alarm signal as been reset.
(ii)
When probe type smoke detector, located in the intake air duct, senses
smoke the associated fan shall automatically shut down. The ventilation
system shall be prevented from being restarted until the fire alarm signal
as been reset.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(x)
13/36
January 2011
(b)
Each chiller plant shall be equipped with the following control features:
(i)
(ii)
In any mode the chilled water flow through each chiller shall be provided
by a relay responding to the running condition of the duty circulating
water pump and by its corresponding flow switch before the chiller's
control shall be energised. The evaporator of the chiller shall also be
protected by a low temperature cut-out. Delay timers and recycling
relays shall be provided where necessary to prevent chillers from
cycling.
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
When the model selector switch is in the "Manual" position, the chiller
and the pumps shall be started and stopped manually at the MCC board.
(vi)
When the mode selector switch is in the "Off" position, the system shall
be switch off automatically after a predetermined period (adjustable)
according to the recommendation of chiller manufacturer. All necessary
delay timers shall be provided to protect the chiller.
(vii) When the mode selector switch is in the "Automatic" position, the
following sequence shall be energized:
(viii) An automatic 24 hours time-switch shall first energized the lead chilled
water pump, in turn shall then energized a step controller, which shall
response to an immerse type thermostat at the common return water
header line, and a delay timer (0-30 second).
(ix)
(x)
The PLC shall monitor the chilled water return temperature and control
the chiller plant to maintain the return water temperature not exceeding
12C.
(xi)
(xii) Time delay shall be allowed for chilled water pump such that the pump
shall continue to run for 15 minutes after stop operation of the
corresponding chiller.
General Materials & Workmanship Specification
Issue No. 5, Volume 3 Electrical & Mechanical Works
Section 77 Automatic Controls
14/36
January 2011
(d)
Differential By-pass
(i)
(ii)
15/36
January 2011
(e)
The chillers shall be provided with the following automatic control gears and
associated keypad for set point adjustment:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
choice
of
local/
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
16/36
January 2011
General
(i)
(ii)
The two CRAC units shall be in rotational operation to event out the
operation time.
(iii)
The operational priority of the CRAC units shall be as follows : - Master CRAC, Chilled Water
- Master CRAC, Duty DX
- Slave CRAC, Chilled Water
- Slave CRAC, DX
(b)
Temperature Control
(i)
(c)
Fire Mode
(i)
When probe type smoke detector located in the supply air duct senses
smoke the fan within the respective CRAC unit will shut down.
When a normal power supply failure signal has been received from the
GBMS/MBMS, the controls of chiller plant shall automatically set to run a
maximum of 3 nos. chillers and associated chilled water pumps. Also, signal
will be sent from GBMS/MBMS to all related air handling field equipments
(AHUs, CRAC Units, FCUs, etc.) to limit the room temperature to 26 oC.
Whenever any one or more smoke extraction system is activated, the smoke
extraction control panel shall send a signal (by means of dry contact) to the
designated sliding doors to allow air make-up from outside.
17/36
January 2011
Related fire signal (zoning based on smoke zones) will be transmitted from the
main Fire panel located at G/F FS Control Room to each miscellaneous
motorized fire and smoke damper to close it in order to seal any openings in
smoke reservoirs formed by ductwork passing through.
(ii)
(b)
The gas purge system shall consist associated ductwork, silencers, and
motorised fire/smoke dampers connecting to the nearby toilet exhaust system.
(c)
The gas purge system shall be capable of being operated locally (LOCAL
mode) and monitored by MBMS as dictated by a selector switch at the local
control panel (LCP) located in the FM200 Bottle Room. The 2 position selector
switch shall allow On/Off modes.
(d)
The system shall be provided with the following operation features in the
MBMS mode:
(i)
(ii)
Generation of warning alarm if any of the sensor input signal beyond its
operational limit
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(e)
(f)
The system shall be provided with the following operation features in the auto
mode:
(i)
(g)
The gas purge control system shall be provided for maintenance staff to
start/stop each fan(s) and to open/close each fire and smoke damper.
Indicating lights showing the status of each item of equipment are provided to
facilitate the manual mode operation.
(h)
For Communication Rooms, the LCP shall have 3 position selector switch
insists of two position to provide Auto/off/Manual selection. In auto mode, the
gas purging system is running as battery room ventilation system
automatically, and monitored and controlled by the MBMS.
18/36
January 2011
(i)
(j)
Operational requirements
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
In addition to the gas extraction function, for the gas extraction systems
serving communication rooms, the motorized control dampers shall be
open/close to achieve low level exhaust & high level intake. In addition,
the exhaust fans shall also be used periodically to ventilate the rooms
under the normal operating scenario with the motorized control dampers
shall be open/close to achieve high level exhaust and low level intake.
Timer(s) shall be provided within the local control panels such that the
fans will be switched on daily for 15 minutes (duration and frequency to
be adjustable) to periodically extract any possible hydrogen leakage. In
case of fire within the room served, the fan(s) & associated dampers
shall be shut off.
LV Switch Rooms
(b)
(c)
19/36
January 2011
(d)
The system shall be provided with the following operation features in the
MBMS mode:
(i)
(ii)
Generation of warning alarm if any of the sensor input signal beyond its
operational limit
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(e)
(f)
The system shall be provided with the following operation features in the auto
mode:
(i)
(g)
The periodic ventilation control system shall be provided for maintenance staff
to start/stop each fan(s) and to open/close each damper. Indicating lights
showing the status of each item of equipment are provided to facilitate the
manual mode operation.
(h)
Operational requirements
(i)
The exhaust fans shall be used periodically to ventilate the rooms under
the normal operating scenario with the motorized control dampers shall
be open/close to achieve high level exhaust and low level intake.
Timer(s) shall be provided within the local control panels such that the
fans will be switched on daily for 15 minutes (duration and frequency to
be adjustable) to periodically extract any possible hydrogen leakage. In
addition, a room type thermostat is provided inside for activate the
exhaust fan when the room temperature exceeds the preset limit (in
case of normal air-conditioning breakdown). In case of fire within the
room served, the fan(s) & associated dampers shall be shut off.
The fixed link bridge relief air motorized damper shall be opened and closed
through the MBMS.
(b)
The damper shall be interlocked to open when either of the pre-conditioned air
(PCA) unit mounted on the underside of corresponding loading bridges is
initiated.
(c)
When the PCA unit is not running, the damper shall close.
20/36
January 2011
77.4
MATERIALS
77.4.1
77.4.2
(a)
Unless otherwise specified, control valves shall be 2-way normally closed with
single seating and linear characteristic ports. Rangeability shall be 30:1.
(b)
(c)
Control valves shall comply with the Pipework section of the General
Materials & Workmanship Specification. Modulating control valves shall be
oblique pattern globe valves.
(d)
Control valves shall be designed and configured to close when any associated
item of plant is shutdown or de-energized.
(e)
Control valves shall be designed and configured to fully open when their
pressure drop is equal to the pressure drop of the coil under 120% of design
flow.
(f)
Unless other specified, fan coil units delivering an air quantity of 700 L/s or
less may use normally closed solenoid valves.
(g)
Electric control valve actuators shall have reversible motor drives for 24V
power supply. They shall be of proper size to provide smooth modulating
control under design temperatures and pressure conditions. Actuators shall
be site interchangeable for direct or reverse action and be suitable for on/off
control or continuous operation.
(b)
All control valve actuators for, air handling units (AHU) regardless of size, fan
coil units (FCU) and packaged chilled water units (PCW) of 50mm in diameter
or above, shall have the following features:
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
All control valve actuators for fan coil units (FCU), below 50mm in diameter
and less shall have the following features:
(i)
(ii)
21/36
January 2011
77.4.3
77.4.4
77.4.5
(d)
Control valve actuators shall be mounted directly on the control valve without
the need for a separate linkage or the need for any adjustment of the actuator
stroke.
(e)
End switches shall be furnished for all sequencing applications other than fan
coil units.
(f)
(g)
Damper Actuators
(a)
(b)
Modulating damper actuators shall have reversible motor drives and shall be
sized to provide smooth modulating control under design temperature and
pressure conditions. Actuators shall be site interchangeable for direct or
reverse action and be suitable for on/off or continuous operation.
(b)
Electromagnetic flow measuring devices shall be of the direct reading type, i.e.
in l/s, and shall be suitable for the chemical and physical properties of the
fluids to be measured and suitable for both horizontal and vertical installations.
(b)
(c)
Scale range shall be 0.3 - 5.0 m/s and accuracy shall be 1% of full scale at a
velocity of 0.3 m/s and sized to achieve a 3.0 - 3.5 m/s face velocity at design
conditions.
(d)
22/36
January 2011
77.4.6
(b)
(c)
77.4.7
(ii)
range
: 0 2000 ppm;
(iii)
accuracy
(iv)
repeatability
: 100 ppm;
(v)
drift
(vi)
calibration frequency
: 2/annum maximum.
(b)
77.4.8
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Temperature Sensors
(a)
Temperature sensors shall be either of the thermister (NTC) type with a high
linear resistance change versus temperature change or Platinum (PT 1000)
to ensure good resolution and accuracy.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Space temperature sensors and similar shall be non indicating and non
adjusting except through the MBMS control system.
23/36
January 2011
(e)
77.4.9
range
: 0C 40C; and
(ii)
accuracy
: 0.5 %.
(f)
(g)
range
(ii)
accuracy
: 0.5 %.
Humidity Sensors
(a)
Humidity sensors shall have cast aluminium housing with a stainless steel
sensing tube and have the following features:
(i)
range
(ii)
accuracy
(b)
(c)
(d)
range
(ii)
accuracy
: 5 %.
Pressure sensors monitored by MBMS may be used for fire mode monitoring,
however, contacts for fire mode status indication shall be separate from
contacts for MBMS status indication.
(b)
All pressure sensors used for the hot smoke extraction system shall be able to
operate 250 C for one hour as per FSD requirement.
77.4.11 Cabling
(a)
The Contractor shall provide all control wiring from terminal strips within the
relevant MCC and between MCC and associated remote control panels.
(b)
All cabling associated with the smoke control fans shall be fire resistant to
FSD requirement.
24/36
January 2011
(b)
Separate indicators shall be provided for each separate fire mode signal
connected to the MCC. Type 0 fire mode indicators shall be provided in a
common area of the MCC. Type 1 and Type 2 fire mode indicators shall be
provided on the cubicle door of the circuit feeding the relevant smoke control
point.
(c)
Fire mode reset facilities shall be provided through the MBMS for each MCC,
control panel and the like.
memory
RAM memory of the open processor shall be of 2 Mbytes RAM and each
controller shall have sufficient memory to support the followings:
(i)
control processes;
(ii)
(iii)
alarm management;
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
communication ports
(i)
(ii)
25/36
January 2011
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(ii)
modules shall be quickly and easily snapped into place without tools,
and without having to re-terminate wires for fast servicing;
(iii)
modules shall be snapped in and out without powering down the field
panel to minimize any system downtime; and
(iv)
expandability
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
indicating lamps
(i)
the direct digital controller shall provide local LED status indication for
each digital input and output; and
(ii)
(g)
(h)
the real time clock shall display, year, month of the year, day of the
month, hour of the day, and minutes;
the control station shall be provided with a power fail safe and restart
feature; and
(ii)
battery backup
(i)
battery shall be able to support the real time clock, programme, and all
volatile memory for a minimum of 60 days; and
26/36
January 2011
(ii)
(i)
time scheduling
(i)
(ii)
(j)
(iii)
after recovery from a power failure, the system shall determine any timescheduled commands which should have been issued during the period
that the power was off. These commands shall automatically be issued;
and
(iv)
alarm management
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
when a binary point goes into alarm, a user defined alarm message shall
be sent to the appropriate alarm printers;
27/36
January 2011
(iv)
when a point returns to normal, the event shall be recorded in the printer
output;
(v)
when a binary point goes into alarm, a user defined alarm message shall
be sent to the appropriate alarm printers; and
(vi)
SO2 and NO2 sensors shall comprise a universal transmitter which can be
easily configured via solder-less shorting links for any of a wide variety of
plug-in electrochemical sensors.
(b)
(c)
SO2 /NO2 sensors shall be prepared for use in ambient conditions of 40C air
temperature and up to 90% relative humidity.
(d)
The re-productivity shall be +/- 10%. The zero and span drifts shall be +/- 10%
F.S. over 3 months. The effect of power voltage fluctuation shall be +/- 5%
F.S. (both zero and span sensibility) at rated voltage +/- 10%.
(e)
The external concentration output signal is an insulation type 4-20 mA DC, 0-6
ppm proportional to the SO2 /NO2 concentration. The linearity error of output
signal to SO2 /NO2 shall be within +/- 10% F.S. after zero and span
adjustment. An alarm output in the form of SPDT no-voltage contact output
shall be sent when the SO2 /NO2 concentration is more than the set value.
The setting range shall be between 0 and 6 ppm with setting accuracy of +/5% F.S.
(f)
(g)
The transmitter shall be factory configured and calibrated for the sensor
selected when ordered as a complete assembly. This transmitter shall accept
any of the listed sensors into a plug-in socket on the board, or an integrally
mounted sensor assembly on the industrial enclosure. Calibration shall be
achieved through a simple zero and span adjustment using the appropriate
calibration gases for the sensor installed.
(b)
(c)
28/36
January 2011
(d)
(e)
The re-productivity shall be +/- 10% at 50 ppm CO. The zero and span drifts
shall be +/- 10% F.S. over 3 months. The effect of power voltage fluctuation
shall be +/- 5% F.S. (both zero and span sensibility) at rated voltage +/- 10%.
(f)
The external concentration output signal is an insulation type 4-20 mA DC, 0250 ppm proportional to the CO concentration. The linearity error of output
signal to CO shall be within +/- 10% F.S. after zero and span adjustment. An
alarm output in the form of SPDT no-voltage contact output shall be sent
when the CO concentration is more than the set value. The setting range shall
be between 0 and 250 ppm with a setting accuracy of +/- 5%.
(ii)
The electric motor shall be of high stalling torque low inertia design. Its
starting torque shall be not less than 185% of the unseating torque
required by the valve or penstock.
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
The following protection shall be provided for the actuator and the motor:
- over-travel of the valve or penstock in both direction as sensed by the
position and/or torque limit switches;
29/36
January 2011
(d)
Actuator enclosure
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
The actuator enclosure shall have an inner watertight and dust-proof Oring seal between the terminal compartment and internal electrical
elements of the actuator, fully protecting the motor and all other internal
electrical elements of the actuators from ingress of moisture and dust
when the terminal cover is removed on site for cabling.
(iv)
The actuator enclosure shall be suitable for temporary storage on- Site
without electrical supply connected.
(v)
Gearing
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
30/36
January 2011
(e)
Drive bushing
(i)
(f)
(g)
(ii)
(iii)
The electrical circuit diagram of the actuator shall not vary with the valve
or penstock type, and shall remain identical regardless of whether the
valve or penstock is to open or close on torque or position limit.
(h)
The actuator shall include a digital position indicator with a display from
fully open to fully closed in 1% increments.
(ii)
31/36
January 2011
(iii)
(i)
(ii)
The starter shall be suitable for 60 starts per hour, and of a rating
appropriate to motor size. The controls supply transformer shall be fed
from two of the incoming three phases. It shall have the necessary
tappings and be adequately rated to provide power for the following
functions:- 120V AC energization of the contractor coils;
- 24V DC output where required for remote controls;
- supply for all the integral electrical circuits; and
- the primary and secondary winding shall be protected by easily
replaceable fuses.
(j)
The actuator shall be provided with integral local controls for open, close
and stop, and a local/remote selector switch padlockable in any one of
the following three positions:
- local control only;
- off (no electrical operation); and
- remote control plus local stop only. It shall be allowed to select
maintained or non-maintained local control.
(ii)
(k)
The local controls shall be arranged so that the direction of valve and
penstock travel can be reversed without stopping the actuator.
Control facilities
(i)
The necessary wiring and terminals shall be provided in the actuator for
the following control functions:
- removable links for substitution by external interlocks to inhibit valve
and penstock opening and/or closing;
- connections for external remote controls fed from an internal 24V DC
supply and/or from an external supply (min. 12V, max. 120V) to be
suitable for any one or more of the following methods of control:
32/36
January 2011
Range
0 - 8m/s
(ii)
Accuracy
5%
(iii)
Rise Time
20 sec
(iv)
Time Constant
5 sec
(v)
Ambient Temperature :
-20C / +50C
(vi)
Air Temperature
-10C / +60C
77.5
The installation detail of velocity sensor should comply with the manufacturers
recommendation.
SUBMISSIONS
The Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Project Manager for
review without objection:
(a)
system description
this shall demonstrate a clear understanding of the overall fire mode concept
including provisions for plant shutdown and plant control within the area
affected, and within adjacent areas;
(b)
schedule of Plant operation under fire mode this shall list all smoke control
and shutdown zones and shall schedule:
(i)
(ii)
33/36
January 2011
(iii)
(c)
all motorized fire and smoke dampers that are required to open or close;
and
77.6
WORKMANSHIP
77.6.1
(b)
77.6.2
(i)
positioned far away from the areas with low air exchange or close to
supply air outlets, windows, doors, etc.; and
(ii)
positioned at the return air duct in a position far away from external heat
sources; and
(ii)
77.6.3
(ii)
(iii)
the pressure switch shall be mounted on a vertical surface and have two
air pressure tappings which are connected with tubing to the sensing
points in the duct;
(iv)
(v)
Temperature Sensors
(a)
(ii)
34/36
January 2011
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
located downstream from the valve, after the pump, for the control of
mixed flow temperature using mixing valves.
(ii)
far away from doors, windows, and heat sources, etc; and
(iii)
(ii)
(iii)
fitted a few meters downstream from the heating coil at supply air duct;
(iv)
fitted a few meters before the extract fan at extract air duct;
(v)
(vi)
away from the influence of direct solar radiation and local heat gains;
(ii)
far away from the warm air outlets such as window or extract;
(iii)
Temperature sensors and similar shall be non indicating and non adjusting
except through the MBMS control system.
35/36
January 2011
77.6.4
Humidity Sensors
(a)
77.6.5
77.6.6
(ii)
such that the air velocity is within the range required by the sensors; and
(iii)
(b)
(c)
Between 0.9 metres and 1.8 metres above finished floor level which will
allow samples to be fully representative of the local atmosphere;
(ii)
At least 0.1 metres clear of walls, columns and other vertical or near
vertical surfaces, and not in a position significantly influenced by either
supply air or car exhaust emissions.
NO2 & SO2 sensors shall be housed in a perforated faced stainless steel
cabinet complete with lockable access cover.
(b)
SO2 /NO2 sensors should be evenly distributed so that no part of the head of
stand road and APV parking bays are more than 25 metres horizontally from a
sampling point for monitoring. At least one sampling point should be provided
at each entrance and exit.
(c)
The sampling points for SO2 /NO2 monitoring should, whenever practicable,
be:
(i)
Between 0.9 metres and 1.5 metres above finished floor level which will
allow samples to be fully representative of the local atmosphere;
(ii)
At least 0.1 metres clear of walls, columns and other vertical or near
vertical surfaces, and not in a position significantly influenced by either
supply air or car exhaust emissions.
36/36
January 2011
SECTION 78 INSTRUMENTS
78.1
GENERAL
(a)
78.2
The Contractor shall comply with other relevant sections of this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification including but not limited to the
sections which specify:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
BS 6739
BS 7350
BS EN 837-1
1/10
gauges.
January 2011
BS EN 50081
BS EN 50082
IEC 529
ISO 1000
ISO 3966
ISO 7194
78.3
78.3.1
General
78.3.2
(a)
(b)
Power supplies required for instruments shall be fed from a separate circuit on
the MCC associated with the corresponding equipment being monitored or
controlled or if, compatible and appropriate, from the corresponding MBMS
panel into which instrument signals are fed.
(c)
(d)
Accuracy
(a)
Temperature
- air
dry bulb
wet bulb
- water
:
:
:
0.3 K;
0.5 K;
0.1 K;
2/10
January 2011
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Pressure
- air
direct
differential
:
:
2% of full scale;
2% of full scale;
Velocity
- air
- Rotational speed
:
:
2% of full scale;
1% of full scale;
Electrical
- voltage
- current
- power factor
:
:
:
1% of reading;
1% of reading;
1% of reading; and
Flow
5% of actual flow.
(b)
(c)
78.4
MATERIALS
78.4.1
General
(a)
Instruments, gauges, sensors and the like shall be calibrated and shall
indicate in SI units in accordance with ISO 1000.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The flow sensing device shall be of the annubar type, or equal reviewed
without objection by the Project Manager, in compliance with ISO 3966 and
ISO 7194.
(h)
Gauges shall have adjustable pointers that cannot be altered without the use
of tools.
(i)
3/10
January 2011
78.4.2
78.4.3
78.4.4
78.4.6
Pressure gauges shall be 100 mm diameter with a Bourdon tube element and
chromium plated steel or durable plastic case and shall be fitted with 10 mm
bronze pet cocks or ball cocks with optical sight glass.
(b)
Pressure gauges shall be calibrated in kPa from zero to not less than 1.3
times and not more than twice the operating pressure of the respective
equipment/system and shall be accurate to 1.5% of full scale reading, unless
otherwise specified.
(c)
Pressure gauges used solely to indicate the head and pressure of water shall
be provided with an adjustable red pointer set to indicate the normal working
pressure or head of the system.
(d)
(e)
78.4.7
Thermostat
(a)
78.4.5
System static pressure gauges shall be of the single limb inclined manometer
type.
(b)
4/10
January 2011
78.4.8
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Test points shall incorporate isolating valves including hand wheels and
screwed connections to suit supplementary instrumentation.
(g)
Differential pressure sensor probes and test points shall be capable of being
removed as a single assembly without dismantling pipework or other Plant.
(h)
For each of range of probe, the Contractor shall provide at least 2 sets of
portable square root extraction instrumentation including adaptors and
connections, which have been calibrated and supplied by the differential
pressure probe manufacturer. The instrumentation shall give a 4 20 mA
linear output proportional to flow rate.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
(c)
and
(i)
(ii)
5/10
January 2011
(iii)
(d)
(e)
Test points with self sealing cores equivalent to that for universal test points
may be provided for orifice plates associated with calibrated balancing valves
on chilled water pipework up to a nominal bore of 200 mm. Test points for all
other orifice plates associated with calibrated balancing valves shall be valve
controlled incorporating lockshield diamond heads or suitable equivalent.
(f)
(g)
78.4.9
The double regulating valves section shall be variable orifice type with
tappings for self sealing pressure test cock connections or built-in
double-seal pressure test valves.
(i)
the installation of the probe is remote from any valves or similar fitting;
and
(ii)
The flow sensing device shall be of the annubar type, or equal reviewed
without objection by the Project Manager, in compliance with ISO 3966 and
ISO 7194, inserted through the wall of the pipe via suitable bush supplied by
the sensing device's manufacturer.
(b)
(c)
Each pitot static sensor shall be permanently marked externally with the
direction of flow.
- ends
6/10
January 2011
(ii)
(iii)
- ends
(b)
Flow measurement tappings shall be integral with the orifice plate assembly.
(c)
The resistance across the plant orifice shall not exceed 5 kPa (0.05 bar).
(d)
The plate shall have two valved tappings for connection to manometer or
responder meter, etc.
Valve monitoring devices for chilled water expansion tanks and similar
applications shall include the following features:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
The calculator unit of an energy meter shall calculate and display digitally the
water enthalpy consumption in kWh with accuracy to a maximum error of
1.5% throughout the range of measurement. The number of digits of
accumulated enthalpy consumption display shall not be less than six. The
housing protection for the microprocessor and calculator unit shall not be less
than IP 54. The requirement for the temperature sensors and the flowmeter
shall be as specified elsewhere in this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification.
(b)
Universal test points shall be suitable for reading temperatures and pressures
using portable instrumentation.
(b)
Universal test points shall be manufactured from a suitable copper alloy, shall
be self sealing and complete with bonded ethylene propylene cores or
equivalent designed to suit pipework test pressures and to enable insertion of
sensor probes under all operating conditions.
(c)
Knurled dust caps shall be provided complete with suitable cap retainers.
(d)
7/10
January 2011
(b)
Unless otherwise specified, test points shall be valve controlled and shall
incorporate a lockshield diamond head or suitable equivalent.
(c)
Tests points shall be colour coded and shall be complete with knurled dust
caps and suitable cap retainers. Dust caps shall be capable of being removed
without the use of tools.
Thermometer pockets shall consist of 12.5 mm bore tube of the same material
as the pipework into which they are to be inserted.
(b)
(b)
78.5
SUBMISSIONS
78.5.1
Particulars of instruments
The following particulars of the proposed instruments shall be submitted to the
Project Manager for review without objection:
(a)
certified test data (from and approved laboratory) supporting the selection of
instrument; and
(b)
8/10
January 2011
78.6
WORKMANSHIP
78.6.1
General
78.6.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
the installation of the probe is remote from any valves or similar fittings;
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
For each operating temperature and pressure range, the Contractor shall
supply at least 3 sets of universal test point thermometers and pressure
gauges including adaptors, fittings and lubricant.
(c)
9/10
January 2011
78.6.3
78.6.4
78.6.5
Test Points
(a)
(b)
Test points and associated valves and shall extend beyond any insulation.
(b)
(c)
(ii)
"face and bypass" air handling units for air quantity and velocity readings
across coils and dampers; and
(iii)
all air handling units for temperature readings of mixed air, "air on" and
"air off", and pressure reading across all filters, coils, electric heaters
and the like.
(b)
Sealing plugs shall be provided and fitted to all test holes to prevent sweating
and condensation under all operating conditions. Test holes shall be
positioned so that thermometers are not affected by thermal radiation.
(c)
Permanent thermometers shall be inserted in test holes for systems with air
volume slow rate of or greater than 5 m3/s.
(d)
For systems with flow rate less than 5 m3/s, four numbers of thermometers or
in quantity equivalent to 10% of the total numbers of the test holes, whichever
is greater, shall be provided with each individual packed in protective casings
and to facilitate identification of correct location, and submitted to the Project
Manager. Each thermometer shall be complete with a pierced plug to fit the
test hole and each wet bulb thermometer shall be provided with a fabric
sleeve.
10/10
January 2011
79.1
79.2
AND
COMMISSIONING
MECHANICAL
GENERAL
(a)
The Plant shall be inspected, tested and commissioned to confirm that Plant
performance complies with the requirements of the Contract.
(b)
All such inspection, testing and commissioning shall, in particular but without
limitation, be planned, carried out and documented in accordance with:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
the construction quality plans and inspection and test plans prepared by
the Contractor in accordance with the relevant ISO standard and
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager
TERMINOLOGY
(a)
The following terms shall be used in all programmes, quality plans, reports
and other documents produced:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
1/24
January 2011
(vii) Phase - one or other of the phases identified in (i) - (iv) above;
(viii) Type Tests - tests undertaken on similar equipment or components in
lieu of individual unit tests;
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
2/24
January 2011
79.3
(b)
(c)
The term Performance Tests as defined and used in the General Conditions
of Contract refers to the Confidence Trials and such further tests, if any,
identified as such in the Specification.
Manufacturing Phase:
- Factory Tests; and
- Type Tests.
(ii)
Installation Phase:
- Site Tests.
(iii)
Pre-Commissioning Phase:
- Component Tests; and
- Commissioning of elements of the Plant.
- Setting to work
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
3/24
January 2011
79.4
79.5
(b)
Any Deferred Seasonal Tests shall also be clearly identified in all plans and
programmes.
(c)
For the duration of the Defects Liability Period, operational and safety controls
shall be sealed if adjustment beyond defined limits could result in malfunction
and give rise to a defect.
(d)
The Contractor shall provide attendance and technical support during testing
and commissioning of any work with which the Contractor has an interface
during the confidence trails period in accordance with this General Materials
and Workmanship Specification .
QUALITY PLANS
(a)
The Contractor shall identify in his construction quality plans any division of
the Plant into discrete elements to facilitate the preparation and service of
Phase Notices as called for in this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification .
(b)
(c)
The Project Manager, in reviewing any inspection and test plan, may require
further and better inspection, testing and Commissioning documentation as
may be considered reasonably necessary to record these processes.
PHASE NOTICES
(a)
For each element of the Plant identified in the Contractor's construction quality
plans or, as the case may be, for the Plant as a whole:
(i)
the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager for
review a Phase Notice at the end of the Manufacturing Phase, the
Installation Phase and the Pre-commissioning Phase:
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the Phase Notice relating to an Installation Phase shall confirm that the
Contractor is satisfied that the equipment or system or part of a system
is ready for starting the pre-commissioning tests; and
(v)
4/24
January 2011
79.6
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the tolerances;
(v)
(vi)
(vii) pass/fail;
(viii) whether a concession shall be requested under Section 14 of the
General Specification;
79.7
(ix)
(x)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit his proposed Test Results Forms as
part of his submission of the relevant Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
Plan.
PHASE REPORTS
(a)
(b)
workmanship;
(ii)
5/24
January 2011
79.8
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
(d)
Any modifications to circuitry, instrumentation, etc. carried out a any time shall
be recorded in detail in the Phase Reports and shown on the Contractors
Drawings.
(e)
(f)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
6/24
January 2011
(x)
(xi)
(xii) the relevant codes and guides published by the Building Services
Research and Information Association (BSRIA-UK).
79.9
79.10
(b)
The Contractor shall provide all necessary skilled labour and assistance for
testing, operating, adjusting, Commissioning and verifying the performance of
all Plant.
(c)
The Contractor's testing and Commissioning staff shall have had previous
experience with testing and Commissioning similar Plant of comparable duty.
(d)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
7/24
January 2011
79.11
NOTIFICATIONS
(a)
79.12
79.13
Prior to any inspection and testing by the Project Manager, the Contractor
shall inspect and test the Plant to ensure that equipment and facilities are
clean and complete and can reasonably be expected to meet successfully all
inspection and/or testing criteria.
(b)
Prior to setting to Work, testing and Commissioning, the Contractor shall clean
all Plant and shall confirm in writing to the Project Manager that all the work is
complete and satisfactory for the purpose of testing and Commissioning.
(c)
In the event that the Contractor considers that any testing is not appropriate or
required, the Contractor may submit alternative proposals to the Project
Manager for review.
FACTORY TESTING
79.13.1 General
(a)
Wherever practical, Factory Tests shall cover subsystems rather than just
individual components.
(b)
79.13.2 Pumps
(a)
(b)
Variable speed pumps shall be Factory Tested over the design operating
range.
(c)
(ii)
8/24
January 2011
(b)
(iii)
(iv)
motorized dampers
Cooling coils shall be Factory Tested at 2.6 MPa and leak tested at 1.7 MPa.
(b)
measurement accuracy;
(ii)
computer accuracy;
(iii)
software programming;
(iv)
(v)
The Contractor shall Factory Test all control algorithms. The Contractor shall
demonstrate functionality using actual Plant, electronic display panels,
computer simulation or similar.
79.13.6 Ductwork
(a)
(b)
The leakage from any section of flexible ductwork shall not exceed 1% of the
local design air flow rate at the local maximum static pressure.
(c)
9/24
January 2011
79.13.7 Chillers
(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall submit promptly to the Project Manager for review
without objection, at the time of issue, three copies of every order for bought
in material, apparatus and equipment intended for incorporation in the Works.
Each order shall clearly state that the item(s) which it covers is or are subject
to inspection and/or test by the Project Manager before despatch to site.
(c)
(d)
The Project Manager and his authorized representative shall have right of
access, at all reasonable times during normal working hours, to the premises
of the Contractor for the purpose of inspection and/or testing material,
apparatus or equipment intended for incorporation in the Works. The
Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure that the right of access
extends to the premises of his suppliers and the manufacturers of bought-in
material, apparatus and equipment.
(e)
(f)
(g)
No work shall be painted or otherwise prepared for despatch until it has been
inspected by the Project Manager and a notice and no objection issued.
10/24
January 2011
(h)
The factory test of the chillers shall include but not be limited to the following :
(i)
The scope of factory tests or type tests for each major equipment or subassembly shall be conducted in accordance with the test procedures
submitted by the Contractor and reviewed without objection by the
Project Manager.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Prior to carrying out the performance test, water tubes shall be cleaned.
Irrespective of this, all tubes shall be assumed to be fouled to give the
specified fouling factors. During the performance testing, the chilled
water temperature levels shall be adjusted to simulate the fouling
specified.
(v)
For the part load performance test, condenser air temperatures should
be lowered in accordance with ARI 550/590 Standard.
(vi)
(vii) The chillers shall be tested for balancing and leakage in the factory and
the test certificate shall include all test results for leakage, alignment,
vibration measurement and test records for balancing procedures.
(viii) The chillers shall be tested for safety control, automatic control. In
addition the microprocessor panel including wiring connection and
control operation shall be tested.
11/24
January 2011
79.14
(b)
Fans
(i)
(ii)
type test certificates for sound power levels in accordance with ISO
5136; and
(iii)
Pumps
(i)
(c)
Electric motors
(i)
(d)
Air Filters
(i)
79.15
type test certificates for starter and control panels assembly as a whole
in accordance with BS EN 60439-1.
(f)
(e)
type test certificates for head, discharge, speed and power input in
accordance with ISO 2548, ISO 3555 and BS 599 as appropriate.
79.15.1 Pipework
(a)
All pipework shall be Site Tested for leaks before any pipework is enclosed,
insulated, or concealed in any way.
(b)
(ii)
all pipework associated with the town gas installation including sheaths
and vents.
12/24
January 2011
(c)
Chilled water pipework, pressure vessels and heat exchangers shall be Site
Tested hydraulically at 1.2 MPa pressure or one and a half times the total
working pressure whichever is higher after installation on Site. The test
pressure shall be maintained for not less than 24 hours. Pipework shall remain
completely watertight during this time. Pipework shall be filled with water
sufficiently in advance of the test to allow it to come to room temperature so
that any sweating can evaporate.
(d)
(e)
All expansion and movement facilities, vibration isolators and similar shall be
restrained and/or temporarily removed during pipework pressure testing.
(b)
(ii)
Sheetmetal and ductwork pressure tests shall include all joints, dampers,
fittings, access panels and the like.
(b)
Noise measurements shall be made using a meter complying with `Type 1'
requirements of IEC 651 standard. The meter shall be calibrated using an
acoustic calibrator, before and after all sets of measurements.
(c)
(d)
Noise levels shall be measured 1.5m above the finished floor level and at a
distance of 1.5m from a wall.
(e)
(f)
All noise level readings are to be recorded and plotted on octave wave band
frequency chart.
13/24
January 2011
Prior to water balancing, strainers shall be cleaned and flow limiter cores shall
be installed.
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall confirm the flow rates using installed flow measuring
devices and pressure drops across components with known characteristics.
Results shall be cross-checked with pump performance readings.
(d)
under design conditions, the pressure drop across the flow limiter is in
the middle of the operating range of the device; and
(ii)
under all SCHW pump operating conditions, the device is still within its
operating range.
The Contractor shall balance all air diffusers and grilles by regulating the
dampers provided. Each system of ductwork shall be balanced so that every
branch duct, diffuser and grille shall carry the required quantity of air.
(b)
(c)
(d)
System and area air quantities shall be established by pitot tube readings
taken at locations determined in conjunction with the Project Manager and
shall be cross-checked with fan performance details.
(e)
Air quantities associated with registers, diffusers, grilles, louvres, nozzles and
the like shall be established using microprocessor based, calibrated, back
pressure corrected, air flow measuring hoods. The Contractor shall provide
custom built hoods to suit air inlets and outlets as installed.
All MBMS inputs and outputs shall be Site Tested and witnessed by field
observation of device operation and field confirmation of readings recorded by
the MBMS, including but not limited to:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
14/24
January 2011
(b)
(c)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
All mechanical MBMS global commands shall be Site Tested including but not
limited to:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(ii)
(b)
thoroughly flush all chilled water systems with fresh water to remove any
dirt, dross and debris from pipework;
(ii)
(iii)
refill the system with fresh water to which has been added a suitable
detergent and circulate this cleaning agent for at least 24 hours;
(iv)
drain the system, refill with fresh water and circulate for at least a further
24 hours. At regular intervals during this period, the Contractor shall
isolate and clean all strainers and open all drain points to remove any
debris arising from the cleaning agent;
(v)
drain, fill and re-flush the system until all traces of the cleaning agent
and debris are removed and the pH of the water in the system is in the
range of 7 to 8. The water shall be tested to demonstrate compliance
with this requirement;
15/24
January 2011
(vi)
drain the system, add sacrificial anodes and flow limiter cores; and
(vii) refill the system with fresh water and add chemical treatment.
(c)
(d)
Test Pressures
Refrigerant systems and circuits shall be pressure tested with nitrogen gas to
test pressures as indicated below:
Refrigerant
Low Side
kPa
Test Pressure
KPa
R 22 (Air Cooled)
2950
1780
2080
1190
(b)
Tests for fans associated with ventilation systems, air handling units, fan coil
units and similar shall include but shall not be limited to:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Commissioning tests for design flow rate under full load condition, flowrate
under specific part load condition and minimum flow rate under minimum load
conditions associated with variable volume fans shall be undertaken to confirm
stable operation of Plant.
16/24
January 2011
Testing of variable frequency drives shall include but shall not be limited to:
(i)
(ii)
(b)
(c)
79.15.13 Chillers
Testing and start-up
(a)
Testing and commissioning for the chiller system shall follow the CIBSE
Commissioning Code `R Refrigerating Systems
(b)
(c)
(i)
Charging.
(ii)
Start-up.
(iii)
Field testing
Leak Test
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
17/24
January 2011
(d)
(e)
(ii)
Safety devices
(i)
(f)
All safety devices for all chillers shall be tested and certified during the
commissioning period.
Site Test
(i)
The Project Manager shall have the power to inspect all work in
progress and upon completion or substantial completion, and to require
the Contractor to carry out tests in his presence or in the presence of his
authorized representative in order to prove that all work carried out, and
all material, apparatus and equipment installed are wholly satisfactory
and fully meet the requirements of this Specification. All costs and
charges associated with or arising from such inspections and tests,
including costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out the prescribed
tests and in attending upon the Project Manager whilst tests and
inspections are in progress, but excluding the Project Manager's costs
and expenses, and shall be borne in full by the Contractor.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Tests not carried out in the presence of the Project Manager shall not be
regarded as valid for the purpose of the Contract, unless the Project
Manager shall have previously signified his inability to attend, and shall
have authorized the Contractor to proceed with the testing process in his
absence.
18/24
January 2011
(v)
(vi)
Except for those items which are painted prior to despatch to site no
work shall be painted until it has been inspected by the Project Manager
a notice of no objection issued.
The site test shall include but not limited to the following items:
(reading taken at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of full load capacity)
-
Ambient air
Compressor
Running kilowatts
Oil temperature C
19/24
January 2011
(x)
Anti-freeze device
Three actual tests of the above described safety protection controls are
required to be carried out as per the specified procedure. The remaining
protection controls can be tested by simulation.
General
(i)
(ii)
20/24
January 2011
(b)
All builders works associated with the IAQ systems must be completed
and painted with dust preventing compound.
All dust generating activities by other trades are completed and all
areas thoroughly cleaned to prevent ingress of building dust and debris
into the return air or fresh air intake systems
Fan and other equipment chambers are clean and free of construction
debris.
All condensate drains and trays are clear and water can be drained
away satisfactorily.
All outside air, return air and spill air dampers are operative.
All volume control dampers are fitted and are at appropriate opening
positions.
All VAV and CAV terminals are installed, together with grilles and
diffusers.
Air conditioning systems and the building indoor area are purged to an
appropriate standard to be reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager.
21/24
January 2011
(ii)
(c)
Air cleaning equipment: All pre-filters, main filters, high efficiency filters
and chemical filters.
(ii)
(iii)
22/24
January 2011
(d)
The hot smoke test shall be carried out in accordance with FSD circular letter
No. 2 of 2002 and Australian Standard AS4391-1999. Method statement,
prepared & endorsed by Fire Specialist, shall be submitted to FSD for
approval. Test fire location shall be agreed with FSD prior to commencement
of the test, and the intended test fire location is at ground floor, under centre
staircase void at grid 4/G-H. The size of test fire shall be at least 1MW or of
such size as agreed by FSD. The equipments for hot smoke test shall include,
but not limited to, the followings :
(i)
Fire trays
(ii)
Water bath
(iii)
Heat sensors
(iv)
(v)
Thermometer (Digital)
(vi)
Thermometer (Conventional)
Fuel
(x)
Water
(xi)
23/24
January 2011
(b)
79.16
In the event of sectioned completion, the Contractor shall rebalance all air,
water and control systems previously balanced, modified, adjusted, altered or
affected in any way of the Works. Sufficient confirmation shall be carried out,
recorded and witnessed to demonstrate that there has been either no effect or
that the required adjustments have been made.
24/24
January 2011
80.1
80.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for automatic sprinkler system.
(b)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(c)
The classification of fire hazard shall be defined according to the LPC Rules
for sprinkler protection of various occupancy of the building or area.
(d)
The complete sprinkler system shall comprise sprinkler heads, pipework and
fittings, flow switches, subsidiary monitored stop valve, sprinkler pumps and
tanks, pressure switches, pressure gauges, valves, alarm devices, sprinkler
control valve sets, sprinkler inlets, pump motors and starters, time delay relay,
electrical works and those shown on the Employers Drawings.
(e)
All notices required by LPC Rules and/or FSD shall be in both the English and
Chinese languages.
1/8
January 2011
80.3
MATERIALS
80.3.1
Sprinkler Heads
(a)
Sprinklers shall be of LPC approved makes and types and accepted by FSD.
They shall not be altered in any respect nor have any type of ornamentation or
coating applied after leaving the production factory, with the exception of anticorrosion treatment accepted by the LPC Rules.
(b)
All sprinklers shall be suitable for ordinary hazard classification with a nominal
orifice size of 15 mm.
(c)
(d)
Sprinklers heads of the same type shall be from the same manufacturer.
(e)
The metal parts of the quartzoid bulb sprinkler heads shall be chromium plated
brass.
(f)
(g)
Orientation
Upright /
pendent
Spray, fast
response
Pendent
Spray, fast
response,
concealed
Pendant
Pendent
Upright
Location
Exposed,
concrete ribbed
soffit
Concealed, flat
soffit
Ceiling with
exposed
structural
steelwork
Under obstruction
Under false
ceiling
2/8
Accessories
January 2011
80.3.2
80.3.3
80.3.4
80.3.5
Flow Switches
(a)
(b)
(c)
(b)
(c)
Leather strip padlock shall be provided for locking each valve at its open
position to prevent manual closing of the valve during normal operation.
(d)
Warning sign shall be provided for each valve to prevent accidental closure of
valve after regular maintenance.
Pressure Switches
(a)
Pressure switches shall have contact sets of silver or approved alloy rated to
suit the working voltage and current of the circuits controlled and shall have
independent adjustments for the cut-in and cut-out points and for the operating
differential. Electric alarm pressure switches shall be of the LPC approved
type.
(b)
Scale ranges shall cover a band of at least two times the rated system
pressure. Pressure switches shall have differentials adjustable between 5%
and 30% of the set point scale ranges. The pressure sensing element of the
switch shall be capable of withstanding a momentary surge pressure of at
least 2 times the designed working pressure without losing its accuracy.
Suitable provision shall be made for relieving pressure to the pressure switch
through an orifice plate to allow testing of the operation.
All sprinkler control valve sets shall be listed and approved by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM), LPC and FSD.
(b)
Sprinkler control valves and all associated trimmings shall be form one
principal system manufacturer and form one mutually compatible system, all of
which shall be approved by the LPC and FSD.
(c)
The minimum working pressure and factory hydrostatic test pressure of the
sprinkler control valve sets shall be 1,200 kPa and 2,400 kPa respectively.
3/8
January 2011
(d)
Each sprinkler control valve set shall be equipped with a sprinkler alarm valve
and the following trimmings:
(i)
(ii)
angle valves;
(iii)
ball valves;
(iv)
orifice restriction;
(v)
retarding chamber;
(vi)
80.3.6
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(e)
Each stop valve in the sprinkler installation including the main stop valve shall
be secured open by a leather strap and brass lock under the master key
system.
(f)
(g)
Electric monitoring device shall be fitted at each valve to give signals back to
the fire alarm control and indicating panel to indicate the open/close state of
the valve.
(h)
Audible signal shall also be given when the valve is not in fully open position.
(i)
(j)
Sprinkler Inlets
(a)
(b)
(c)
Outlet connection of the inlets shall not be less than 100 mm diameter.
4/8
January 2011
80.3.7
80.4
(d)
(e)
A metal plate indicating the type of inlets in Chinese and English characters
using raised lettering shall be fixed to the wall immediately behind the inlets.
Labelling and lettering shall be in accordance with the FSDCOP.
Orifice Plates
(a)
Orifice plates for system balancing, pump churning water circuits, where
applicable, shall be provided as required for proper commissioning of the
systems. Wherever necessary to suit the pump performance in respect of
system balance, orifice plates shall be provided even if they are not indicated
on the Employer's Drawings.
(b)
Orifice plates shall be constructed and installed according to LPC Rules. They
shall be manufactured by factories producing LPC approved or UL listed
sprinkler equipment or equipment approved by similar widely recognized
independent regulatory body, and acceptable to the FSD.
SUBMISSIONS
(a)
The Contractor shall submit the following for review without objection by the
Project Manager:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
5/8
January 2011
(b)
The following catalogues with full technical data, characteristic curves and test
certificates issued by an independent and recognised testing authority shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:
(i)
sprinkler heads;
(ii)
(iii)
flow switches;
(iv)
(v)
pressure switches;
(vi)
The following samples shall be labelled and submitted to the Project Manager
for review without objection with detachable parts left loose so that they may
be taken apart for examination:
(i)
(ii)
protection guard.
80.5
WORKMANSHIP
80.5.1
Spacing and location of sprinklers shall be in accordance with the LPC Rules.
(b)
Sprinkler heads at false ceiling level shall be installed at the exact center of
ceiling tiles. Positions shown on the Employers Drawings are for guidance
only. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating the sprinkler heads in
the exact levels/positions according to the suspended ceiling layout drawings.
The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary bends, tees, etc. to divert
the pipework to avoid structural beams and any other mechanical and
electrical services installations to reach the sprinkler heads in their locations
as shown on the Employers Drawings and as site conditions may dictate.
(c)
(d)
Metal baffles of the correct size shall be provided between sprinklers wherever
required by the LPC Rules.
6/8
January 2011
80.5.2
(e)
(f)
No sprinkler head shall be located directly above any luminaire, lamp holder,
loudspeaker, smoke/heat detector, fan coil unit and the like. No additional
cost can be claimed as a result of such coordination.
(g)
LPC approved automatic flow switch testing system shall be supplied and
installed for sprinkler flow switches installed in a position difficult to be
accessed or checked in routine inspection such as those inside false ceiling,
at level higher than 2m above ground, etc. The automatic testing system for a
single flow switch shall include a solenoid valve. The controlling wiring and
accessories shall be wired and connected to the relevant fire main panel/fire
sub panel.
(h)
Where automatic flow switch testing system is not provided, the Contractor
shall allow adequate drain points in the installation connected to the nearest
drain for routine testing of all flow switches when the sprinkler installation is in
operation.
Spare Sprinklers
(a)
80.5.3
Flow Switches
(a)
80.6
Adequate space shall be allowed above the pipework for the installation of
flow switches. All flow switches and the associated accessories shall be
horizontally mounted.
(b)
Major components of each system shall include but not be limited to:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
7/8
January 2011
(c)
(d)
(e)
(v)
(vi)
smoke detectors and sprinkler network within the areas specified in (i)
above.
(ii)
Air Compressors
(i)
(ii)
the air compressor shall be driven from a 220 volt single phase motor;
and
(iii)
(f)
Air compressor sets shall be fully automatic in operation and shall be selflubricating, with sealed compressor unit, designed for maintenance-free
operation. The duty rating of the compressor shall be such that it does not cut
in and out more than 4 times per hour, nor run continuously for more than 30
minutes in order to maintain the system pressure. Pump-up time shall not
exceed 5 hours.
8/8
January 2011
81.1
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for hydrant and hose reel
system.
(b)
Hydrant and hose reel system shall generally comply with the following:
(c)
81.2
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
The fire services inlets and hydrant outlets if not stamped with the British
Standard Mark shall be accompanied with a letter of approval issued by WSD.
BS 381C
BS 1042
BS 3169
BS 5041 : Part 1
BS 5252
Framework
purposes;
BS 5306 : Part 1
1/7
for
colour
co-ordination
for
building
January 2011
BS EN 671 : Part 1
BS EN 1982
81.3
MATERIALS
81.3.1
(b)
(c)
All hydrant outlets shall be installed not less than 800 mm and not more than
1,200 mm above finished floor level.
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
The pressure at any fire hydrant outlet shall in no case exceed 850 kPa. The
running pressure at any hydrant outlet when delivering 450 L/min shall be not
less than 350 kPa.
(h)
For those hydrant locations whose outlet pressure exceed 850 kPa, pressure
reducing valves or parity-drain shall be employed to maintain the outlet
pressure. The Contractor shall submit detailed hydraulic calculation for such
hydrant outlet selection to the Project Manager for review without objection.
(i)
(j)
The pipes run as shown on the Employers Drawings are diagrammatic only
and the Contractor shall design the pipe runs to avoid structural beams and
other obstruction as Site conditions dictate.
2/7
January 2011
81.3.2
Hose Reels
(a)
(b)
The hose shall be approved by FSD and shall be red reinforced rubber or PVC
tubing and comply with BS 3169 Type 2 with a design working pressure of not
less than 1,500 kPa. The length of hose shall be 30 m and internal bore shall
be 19 mm. There shall be no joint in the length of hose. The hose shall be
capable of being readily wound round a drum of 150 mm diameter without
kinking. The hose together with the connections, gland, etc. must be capable
of withstanding a bursting pressure of not less than 2,700 kPa and shall not be
porous or exhibit any sign of percolation under pressure up to 2,000 kPa.
(c)
(d)
Each hose shall be fitted with a jet nozzle having 4.5 mm orifice and simple
slow-closure type level-operated two way valve to open and shut off jet nozzle.
The valve shall not be spring loaded. The internal surface of the nozzle shall
be finished to provide a smooth surface. The nozzle shall give a plain jet only.
The nozzle shall be capable of projecting a jet of not less than 6m in length
with flow rate not less than 24 L/min as specified in BS EN 671 : Part 1.
(e)
A 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel box with glass front panel complete with
lockable door shall be provided for locking the hose reel nozzle as per WSD
requirement. The front glass panel of the box shall not exceed 1.5mm in
thickness and shall be breakable to release the nozzle in emergency. A metal
striker about 300 mm long, shall be provided inside the hose reel cabinet for
the purpose of breaking the glass panel. The box shall have at least 3 coats
of painting, the top finish coat shall be red in colour. Padlock for the steel box
shall be provided.
(f)
(g)
3/7
January 2011
81.3.3
81.3.4
(h)
The hose reels shall be installed such that the control valves, sited adjacent to
the nozzles are positioned above and not more than 1,350 mm from the
finished floor level. For recessed mounting type, the nozzles and control
valves shall be at a discernible and accessible position of not more than 500
mm from the surface of the wall.
(i)
For hose reels, mounted within binnacles, hose reel drums shall be bare
finished in die cast light alloy with polished mins. All other hose reel drums
shall be finished in red, preferably no. 538, post office red; no. 537, signal red;
or no. 539, red, as given in BS 381C or BS 5252.
(j)
A metal or plastic striker shall be provided in the vicinity of the cabinet for the
purpose of breaking the glass front panel in case of emergency.
(b)
Fire service inlets shall be made of gunmetal twin type comprising screw-down
globe type stop valve with male screwed outlet of suitable bore and two 65
mm horizontal male instantaneous inlet connections.
(c)
(d)
Outlet connection of the inlets shall not be less than 100 mm diameter.
(e)
A metal plate indicating the type of inlets in Chinese and English characters
using raised lettering shall be fixed to the wall immediately behind the inlets.
Labelling and lettering shall be in accordance with the FSDCOP.
All hydrant risers shall be supplied and installed with automatic air vents of
25mm size at the highest points and drain valves at the lowest points of the
system.
(b)
Automatic air vents with suitable working pressure shall be fitted where
necessary or indicated on the Employers Drawings for the removal of air from
the fire hydrant and hose reel system.
(c)
Drain valves shall be fitted on the lowest points of pipework as shown on the
Employers Drawings or where necessary for the water drainage of the system,
and drained water shall be discharged to a location agreed by the Project
Manager, and as acceptable to WSD.
4/7
January 2011
81.3.5
81.4
Controls
(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall provide pressure switches on the installation pipework for:
(i)
(ii)
SUBMISSIONS
(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall submit the following for review without objection by the
Project Manager:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
The following catalogues with full technical data, characteristic curves and test
certificates issued by an independent and recognised testing authority shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:
(i)
hose reel;
(ii)
(iii)
5/7
January 2011
(c)
The following samples shall be labelled and submitted to the Project Manager
for review without objection with detachable parts left loose so that they may
be taken apart for examination:
(i)
(ii)
rubber hose.
81.5
WORKMANSHIP
81.5.1
Pipework Installation
(a)
81.5.2
81.5.3
81.5.4
The installation shall include all pipework and fittings fully installed as
indicated on the Employers Drawings, and as specified in Section 87 of this
General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
The hydrant outlets shall be installed not less than 800 mm and not more than
1,200mm above finished floor level. The hydrant outlet shall be of FSD
approved type.
Hose Reels
(a)
(b)
If hose reels are located in recesses to which doors are fitted, such doors shall
be so fixed that when they are opened, they shall not cause obstruction to any
means of escape nor to the operation of the hose reels nor to the hose being
run out in either direction. Door locks shall not be fitted to such doors.
(c)
For fixed type hose reels, a hose guide shall be provided so as to permit ease
of withdrawal of the hose. The guide shall be so designed that it will permit
the hose to be run off in any direction from left to right. Rollers used in the
guide shall be not less than 25 mm diameter and shall be constructed of nylon
or other non-metallic material.
All hydrant risers both wet and dry types shall be provided with air relief valves
of 25 mm size at the highest points and drain valves at the lowest points of the
systems. Air relief valves on dry risers shall be of the automatic type.
6/7
January 2011
81.6
(b)
The system shall comply with the requirements of FSD and WSD.
(c)
(d)
The hydrant shall be of FSD accepted standard pattern and, when tested in
accordance with provision of BS 1042 with one 65 mm outlet working, shall be
capable of delivering not less than 2,000 L/min (33.3 L/s) with a minimum
running pressure of 170 kPa at the outlet. The minimum output and pressure
as stated above shall be made available from two 65 mm outlets of the system
delivering at the same time, i.e. a total output of not less than 4,000 L/min
(66.7 L/s) at 170 kPa.
(e)
Where the minimum standards are not possible from direct town mains, the
water supply shall be augmented by water tank and booster pumps. The
Contractor shall arrange to test the direct town mains water supply pressure
and flow at a nearby location reviewed without objection by the Project
Manager at early stage after the commencement of the Contract. The
Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for review without objection
soonest after the test proposal for providing booster pumps and tanks for the
street hydrant system if the water supply pressure and flow from town mains
are not adequate to meet with the requirements of FSD.
(f)
Valves shall be arranged such that clockwise rotation of the spindle closes the
valves.
(g)
The stem of ground valve shall not deeper than 500 mm from ground level.
7/7
January 2011
82.1
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for gaseous fire extinguishing
system (FM200).
(b)
Gaseous fire extinguishing system (FM200) shall generally comply with the
following:
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
all pipework;
(v)
discharge nozzles;
(vi)
(x)
(xi)
1/12
January 2011
82.2
(d)
The system shall be of the total flooding type with a high pressure open-ended
piping installation.
The gas release mechanism shall be operated
automatically by means of the smoke detection system within the protected
space or manually by means of a manual release unit.
(e)
BS 381C
BS 5252
BS 5839 : Part 4
82.3
MATERIALS
82.3.1
Storage Cylinders
(a)
(b)
(c)
Each cylinder shall be complete with gas valve, pressure gauge, pressure
switch, flexible hose, check valve and all other necessary accessories.
2/12
January 2011
82.3.2
82.3.3
(d)
A device shall be provided for measuring the amount of liquid in the cylinder at
any time. The method of measurement shall not require the cylinder to be
detached from the remainder of the installation.
(e)
The liquid shall be discharged from the cylinder through a syphon tube. The
pressure of the liquid stored in the cylinder shall be such that freezing cannot
take place at the lowest possible ambient temperature.
(f)
(g)
The gas valve assembly shall be equipped with a pressure gauge and safety
disc in accordance with NFPA 2001.
Control Head
(a)
The control head shall be mounted directly on the cylinder valve and shall
provide both electrical and mechanical actuation of the cylinder valve for
release of gas.
(b)
(c)
82.3.4
Emergency Release
(a)
82.3.5
Pipework
(a)
3/12
January 2011
82.3.6
82.3.7
(b)
Threaded steel pipework and fittings shall be free of burrs, spelter and rust
and shall be galvanized inside and out. Screwed threads shall conform to the
dimensions specified in BS 21. Screwed joints shall be made with PTFE tape
but chemically inert to the extinguishing agent used. Compressed fibre
gaskets free of asbestos shall be used for flange joints. Pipework shall be
painted signal red as specified in BS 381C in accordance with the
requirements of BS 5252. Brass fittings shall be left unpainted.
(c)
Pipe work supports shall be located as near as possible to all joints and
changes of direction. Each support shall take its own share of the load. The
maximum space between supports shall take into consideration the total mass
of pipe and extinguishing agent. The minimum support requirements shall be
as follows:
Pipe size (mm)
Span (m)
15
20
25
32
40
50
80
100
150
1.5
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.6
4.2
5.2
(d)
Additional supports shall be provided where there are extra loads such as
valves.
(e)
Flexible hose connections shall be designed for the working pressures and
temperatures to which they shall be subjected.
Discharge Nozzles
(a)
Discharge nozzles shall be designed to provide the required flow rate and
distribution of FM200 gas to totally flood the protected area.
(b)
(c)
Discharge nozzles shall be designed for use with the expected working
pressure and temperature without deformation.
A wall mounted gas control panel shall be provided for each gas extinguishing
system outside the protected area within each gas control room.
(b)
The gas control panel shall be capable of operating independently from the
main fire alarm and detection system. The main fire alarm and detection
system shall monitor the status only of the gas control panel.
4/12
January 2011
(c)
The gas control panel shall control and monitor the gas release system. The
manual release mechanism shall remain operative whether the automatic
system is on or off.
A time delay unit shall be provided which shall be
adjustable and lockable in the range 15 to 30 sec. Relays shall be provided to
shut down ventilation and air-conditioning, to close openings and to switch off
power supply to equipment. These relays shall operate immediately when two
zones of the smoke detectors are activated or when the manual release is
operated. Release of the gas shall follow after the pre-set time delay.
(d)
The gas control panel shall incorporate the following facilities and functions:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
interface with gas indicator panels located outside the protected area
adjacent to each entrance door;
(vii) voltage free alarm signals for activation panels located outside the
protected area adjacent to each entrance door;
(viii) voltage free signals for operation of motorised fire dampers or electro
thermal links via motor control centres;
82.3.8
(ix)
(x)
interface with the main addressable fire alarm and detection system to
provide gas system status information.
The Contractor shall provide a wall mounted gas indicator panel outside each
protected space immediately adjacent to each access door.
(b)
Each gas indicator panel shall be provided with the following facilities:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
5/12
January 2011
82.3.9
Smoke Detection
(a)
(b)
For each protected space detector shall be arranged in coincidence zones, i.e.
two smoke detection circuits per space.
The Contractor shall provide alarm bells and sirens within the protected space
and immediately outside the protected space.
(b)
(b)
(c)
A flashing red light to indicate gas release imminent with a notice which
shall read:
WARNING - FM200 gas release imminent.
Leave the room at once.
(d)
(ii)
(iii)
A red light to show that the system has operated, with a notice which
shall read:
"DANGER - Do not enter. FM200 gas discharged."
6/12
January 2011
(e)
The manual/automatic lock off key switches, the manual release units and the
emergency release handle shall all be labeled in English and Chinese so that
it is clear what their purpose is and how to operate them.
82.4
SUBMISSIONS
82.4.1
General
(a)
The Contractor shall submit the following for review without objection by the
Project Manager:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(b)
The following catalogues with full technical data, characteristic curves and test
certificates issued by an independent and recognised testing authority shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:
(i)
FM200 system;
(ii)
control panel;
(iii)
break glass;
(iv)
alarm bell;
(v)
(vi)
7/12
January 2011
(c)
82.4.2
The following samples shall be labelled and submitted to the Project Manager
for review without objection with detachable parts left loose so that they may
be taken apart for examination:
(i)
break glass;
(ii)
alarm bell;
(iii)
smoke detector;
(iv)
warning notices;
(v)
(vi)
Design Calculations
(a)
(b)
The actual size and location of pipes and nozzles and the number of nozzles
shall be designed on the basis of the calculated flow rates and terminal
pressures required to ensure successful operation. The calculations or
computer programme shall provide all the information necessary to complete
the installation including:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
82.5
WORKMANSHIP
82.5.1
Design Performance
(a)
8/12
January 2011
82.5.2
System Operation
Clean Agent total flooding gas extinguishing system shall be of high pressure openended piping installation on the distribution side. The automatic gas release
mechanism shall be operated by means of fire detectors installed at the protected
compartment or manually by a pull handle.
(a)
Automatic Release
A fire alarm shall be initiated automatically by means of the smoke detection
system.
The fire signal from the smoke detectors in the protected
compartment shall be verified to ensure that gas discharge shall not occur
unless at least two smoke detectors (cross zone actuation) are activated in a
fire situation. The automatic operation of the Clean Agent system shall be as
follows:
(i)
when either two detector operates, the coincidence unit shall initiate the
following functions:
- transmit a "Fire" alarm zone indication to the local Clean Agent
control and indication panel;
- operate the warning bells and flashing lights both inside and outside
the area; and
- close the pair of 5A 24V DC dry contact for the remote indication of
fire alarm of the protected area at the central fire detection and alarm
panel.
The alarm signal for each Clean Agent system shall be
addressed as a single zone on the central fire detection and alarm
panel.
(ii)
9/12
January 2011
(b)
Manual Release
The system shall also be operated manually by means of operating the
manual release pull station located outside the protected area as indicated on
plans. The manual operation of the system shall be as follows:
82.5.3
(i)
actuate all visual and audio alarm devices both inside and outside the
protected area when the manual release pull station is being operated;
(ii)
stop all ventilation and air-conditioning system and actuate the fire
dampers to seal up all openings through fire compartments; and
(iii)
address the fire zones in question on the respective Clean Agent control
panel. Activate the discharge of Clean Agent and address the Gas
Discharged signal on the respective Clean Agent control panel and the
central fire detection and alarm panel.
The works for individual Clean Agent system shall include the supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
Supply and install the number of Clean Agent cylinders with an adequate
amount of Clean Agent to perform the function. The cylinders shall be
securely mounted in a frame bolted to the wall and arranged so that external
parts can be readily inspected and that corrosion cannot occur.
(c)
(ii)
a tag recording the date of inspection, the gross weight of cylinder plus
agent, the net weight of the agent, the storage pressure at the recorded
temperature, the person performing the inspection as well as other
indications as required by the Project Manager;
(iii)
10/12
January 2011
(iv)
a mean to prevent gas discharge into the empty cylinders in a bank and
to prevent release of gas when any of the cylinders in bank is
disconnected;
(v)
a low-pressure switch;
(vi)
if chart is required to read out the weight of the Clean Agent inside the
cylinder, an ammoniated chart shall be tagged with the cylinders; and
(x)
if the cylinder is not equipped with a liquid level indicator, a device which
is UL listed or FM approved shall be provided for measuring the amount
of liquid in the cylinder at any time. This shall be done by a method
which does not require the cylinder to be detached from the system. If a
weighing device of the type that requires suspension is proposed,
means shall be provided above each cylinder for the attachment of the
weighing device.
(d)
(e)
Supply and install a complete 24V DC fire alarm, detection and control system
comprising automatic fire detection system, local Clean Agent control and
indication panels, manual release pull station, controls, wirings and all
necessary accessories and materials comply with Chapter 2 of NFPA 2001,
BS 5839 : Part 4 and Rules for Automatic Fire Alarm Installation for Protection
of Property issued by Fire Offices' Committee.
(f)
Supply and install the manual release pull station to act as a means to
manually discharge the Clean Agent when used in conjunction with the control
panel. Provide clear indication adjacent to each manual release pull station
notifying that the actuation shall cause Clean Agent discharge.
(g)
Supply and install the lock-off / indication units outside the protected area.
The manual release pull station and lock off / indication units shall be
accommodated in well ventilated metal boxes positioned at about 1,350 mm
above the finished floor level at locations as shown on the Employers
Drawings. The metal box shall be constructed from 1.6mm thick stainless
steel and completed with a hinged front plate with glass window. The
functions of all switches, LED indicators, etc. shall be properly labeled with
engraved letters in English and the equivalent Chinese on the panels and
units subject to the review without objection of the Project Manager.
11/12
January 2011
(h)
Provide the local Clean Agent control and indication panel to receive and
process all fire alarm from the smoke or heat detection system. The control
panel shall be positioned at about 1,350 mm above the finished floor level at
locations as shown on the Employers Drawings. The panel shall provide
pairs of dry contacts such as to shut down the air-conditioning and ventilation
systems, to activate the fire dampers, etc.
(i)
Supply and install one battery and charger unit in the extinguishing agent
cylinder store room for the local Clean Agent control and indication panel to
provide 24V DC supply for the control, monitoring and operation of the Clean
Agent systems.
(j)
Supply and install all F.S. control relays and signals to trigger the ventilation
control and the actuation of fire dampers.
12/12
January 2011
83.1
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for fire alarm and detection
system.
(b)
Fire alarm and detection system shall generally comply with the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
The Fire Officers Committee (FOC) Rules for Automatic Fire Alarm
Installations for the Protection of Property;
(v)
(vi)
The system shall raise alarm for open or short circuited condition of the
system. Where a residual current device is required to comply with the
statutory requirements for electrical installation, a fault on any other circuit or
equipment shall not be capable of resulting in isolation of the supply to the fire
alarm control system. The actuation of any detection device or any fault in the
loop shall not cause the loop to be disabled for any alarm and trouble signals
to be followed.
(d)
(e)
Surge arresters shall be supplied and installed for the fire alarm and detection
system to prevent false alarm and malfunctioning of the fire alarm control
system due to power surge.
1/30
January 2011
83.2
BS 5954 : Part 2
BS 5954 : Part 3
BS 7671
IEE Wiring
BS EN 54-2
Control and
BS EN 54-4
BS EN 54-5
BS EN 54-7
BS EN 54-11
BS EN 60529
Manual call
EIA Technical
Technical Systems
Bulletin Additional Cable
Systems Bulletin TSB- Specifications for Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables
36
EIA Technical
Additional Transmission Specifications for Unshielded
Systems Bulletin TSB- Twisted-Pair Connecting Hardware
40
IEEE 802-3
2/30
January 2011
83.3
MATERIALS
83.3.1
General
The fire alarm and detection system shall be of the analogue addressable type
consisting of the following components:
(i)
3/30
January 2011
Stand alone microprocessor based fire alarm control and indication main
panel and sub-panels, complete with associated battery and charger.
(iii)
Fire alarm control and repeater panels, complete with associated battery
and charger at both the IAC and Terminal Duty Management Office
(TDMO).
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Electric alarm bells and visual alarm including associated power wiring
from all fire main and sub panels.
(vii) Addressable loop wiring between all fire main/sub panels and
addressable field devices.
(viii) Portable personal computer (PC) connectable to fire main/sub panels for
maintenance, reconfiguration and diagnostic use.
(ix)
4/30
January 2011
(b)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
5/30
January 2011
(vii)
(viii)
Lift Homing
Upon activation of a confirmed fire alarm, the fire alarm shall be
relayed to firemen lift for lift homing.
(ix)
(c)
Hardware
-
The standby battery cabinet shall be separate from and below the
cabinet housing the fire main panel.
6/30
January 2011
The fire main panel shall have enough memory capacity to retain
at least 500 most recent events which can be recalled, displayed,
printed and downloaded on the portable computer.
The fire main panel shall monitor any short circuit, open circuit,
earth fault conditions in all detection loops and alarm bell circuits.
Electrical isolation between loop controller/interface card and field
devices shall be designed to withstand continuous short
circuit/over voltage conditions and to provide noise/transient
filtering.
The communication between the fire main panel and the repeaters
/ sub-panels shall be continuously monitored. Any communication
failure or wiring fault shall be acknowledged and registered at both
ends of the equipment.
The fire main panel shall include the fire alarm delay control
function with the following features:
7/30
January 2011
(d)
When the fire alarm is activated, the red alarm LED lamp will
light up, the buzzer will sound and the countdown function will
set off progressively from 60 seconds to 0 seconds.
Hardware
-
The standby battery cabinet shall be separate from and below the
cabinet housing the fire main panel.
8/30
January 2011
The fire sub panel shall incorporate the following provisions on the
front face of the panel:
y
The fire sub panel shall be of modular type design to facilitate easy
modification and maintenance. All printed circuit boards shall be
easily add-on as required for expansion without rewiring or
hardware change or any other major modification.
The fire sub panel shall have enough memory capacity to retain at
least 500 most recent events which can be recalled, displayed,
printed and downloaded on the portable computer.
The fire sub panel shall monitor any short circuit, open circuit, earth
fault conditions in all detection loops and alarm bell circuits.
Electrical isolation between loop controller/interface card and field
devices shall be designed to withstand continuous short
circuit/overvoltage conditions and to provide noise/transient filtering.
The fire sub panel shall have software which shall be retained in
erasable programmable read only memory (EPROM) to ensure
trouble free system and simplified start-up. The fire main panel
shall have monitoring control points, exclusive of trouble points
dedicated to system supervision and shall be equipped with
software routines whereby any alarm point may be programmed to
operate any or all of the control points within the system.
9/30
January 2011
(e)
Workstations
(i)
(ii)
hardware:
- workstations shall be, as a minimum, desktop PCs or Reduced
Instruction Set Computing (RISC) workstations using processors,
clock speeds, cache and on-board memory capacities to perform, at
interactive speeds, the graphic windows applications operating on the
fire main panel. The workstation shall comprise at least:
y
20 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) flat-screen, anti-static, noninterlaced 1280x1024 0.26 mm monitor;
near silent power supply unit loaded to no more than 60 per cent
full load.
10/30
January 2011
(iv)
11/30
January 2011
12/30
January 2011
customization
- the system software shall support advanced customisation capability,
where the administrators shall be able to modularly and dynamically
customise all objects, and make and assign macro library modules to
objects;
- the user shall be able to employ easy-to-comprehend-and-use
customisation graphical windows, tools, macros, and controls to
configure, setup, run up and tune the whole system to suit the
particular structured control and response management of the site;
- the system shall employ graphical customisation methodologies in the
form of:
y windows, views, forms, tools, controls;
y database interfaces, functions, queries, reports, forms;
y simplified programmable logic controller programming tools, e.g.
ladder and process control logic functions for customising time,
and device event initiated programs; and
y with extensive use of pick, click, drag and drop 3-button mouse
techniques to minimise typing.
- provide on-line, interactive, dynamic point, feature and system
configuration and customisation, including visual programming aids,
tools and controls, and productivity functions for group copying,
entries, changes, settings, and commands;
- there shall be no need to compile any custom entries or programs
off-line, nor take the system off-line to load and re-link code. New
connections to unoccupied spare inputs and outputs at the relevant
hardware, additions and removal of hardware and workstations shall
be carried out hot without any degradation and no risk to any part or
the overall system;
- it shall be the norm to configure and customise additions or changes
before any additional physical hardware and field devices are
installed, fitted, connected and made live. This customisation shall
cover hardware configuration, default and initial settings, response
instructions, database, graphical map and line diagrams, initiated
programs, queries and reports;
- for any expansion in hardware and field devices, provision shall be
made to configure and customise the unconnected hardware and
apply forced real-time states for simulated user checking. When the
hardware is connected, the fire alarm system shall be able to use the
customised information for downloading to them; and
13/30
January 2011
(g)
The panel shall comply with Section 5.23 of the FSD COP and shall
include the following:
-
One manual auto on/off control switch for each smoke zone within
the building;
One LED indicator light for each smoke zone within the building.
This light shall indicate the status of the associated extract/purge
fan(s); and
(ii)
The panel shall communicate directly with the fire main panel.
(iii)
(i)
(v)
The panel shall have self diagnostic function to report to fire main
panel any circuit fault inside the panel.
The panel shall comply with Section 5.27 of the FSD COP and shall
include one manual override, switch for every mechanical ventilating
system (as defined in the FSD circular letter). Upon activation of the
switch the mechanical ventilating system shall shutdown.
(ii)
The panel shall communicate directly with the fire main panel.
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
The panel shall have self diagnostic function to report to fire main
panel any circuit fault inside the panel.
14/30
January 2011
(h)
(ii)
(iii)
the wiring system shall consist of class A wiring loops, adaptable for
switching to two wire operation if one of the paths has failed;
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(i)
15/30
January 2011
(j)
smoke detectors
- automatic smoke detectors shall comply with BS EN 54-7 and the
FOC Rules and shall be of manufacture and type specifically
approved by FSD. They shall function correctly at ambient
temperature between 10C to +80C, relative humidity between 20
to 95% continuous without condensation. They shall also be suitable
for stable operation in the Hong Kong climate especially where high
humidity conditions may exist;
- smoke detectors shall be of the photo-optical type, designed to
operate in the presence of visible gases in the sampling chamber.
Detectors shall be suitable for inclusion in a supervised circuit and
failure of the light source or sensing amplifier shall activate a fault
signal but shall not initiate an alarm signal. The photo-optical detector
shall incorporate an external light which shall operate when the
detector is in a state of alarm. The detector shall not be initiated by
light from external sources. The internal light source shall have a
minimum service life of 8 years;
- the electronic circuitry may be of cold-cathode tube type, operating at
low voltage DC, or of solid-state type, operating at extra low voltage
DC. The quiescent current consumption of the unit shall be minimal
and shall not exceed 100 microampere. The printed circuit boards
shall be varnished, protected against moisture and dust;
- detectors shall be housed in a corrosion-proof plug-in unit designed to
be mounted pendent, surface or semi-recessed. Removal of the unit
from its base shall cause a fault alarm signal to be given. Sensitivity
shall be adjustable by means of a pre-set control only accessible by
use of a special tool. Built-in wind-shields shall be provided to ensure
that air currents of up to 10 m/s do not affect the proper operation of
the detector. Each unit shall be fitted with a flashing alarm condition
indicator lamp and shall also have an auxiliary facility for connecting
an extended alarm indicator lamp. A built-in wire mesh shall be
incorporated to prevent entry of insects into the interior;
- the internal electronic circuitry shall be of highest possible reliability
and protected against voltage spikes and surges. The detector shall
be capable of operating satisfactorily under minimum variation of
25% in supply voltage. The circuitry shall also be protected against
electromagnetic interference;
- the detector base shall incorporate all communication circuitry and
detector address' facility such that all detector sensor units are inter
changeable without alarm system reconfiguration;
- the detector base shall be sealed with a plate during the installation
period. This plate shall facilitate electrical continuity through the base
such that the circuits can be tested or maintained;
16/30
January 2011
heat detectors
- automatic heat detectors shall be of point-type complying with BS EN
54-5, BS EN 54-2 and BS EN 54-4, and the FOC Rules for Automatic
Fire Alarm Installations for Protection of Property, 12th Edition and
shall be of manufacture and type approved by FSD;
- detectors shall be of combined fixed temperature and rate-of-rise type;
and
- detector units shall be of surface mounting type. Detector units in
suspended ceilings shall be flush mounted and shall, in the case of
modular constructed ceilings, be coordinated into the ceiling layout.
17/30
January 2011
(k)
(l)
(ii)
(iii)
general
- the master TODC system provides a serial data signal to outlets
adjacent to each wall clock and each major computer-driven system
in the location as shown on the Employers Drawings. All other
associated fire alarm panels shall be synchronised internally with the
fire main panel master clock;
- the fire main and sub panels shall be capable of synchronising to
produce an accurate time signal immediately upon receipt of the
TODC signal under any system operating status;
- while this external synchronising clock signal shall be used to
synchronise the internal time clock of the fire main and sub panels,
the fire main and sub panels internal time clock shall be able to
operate independently of the external to TODC signal. The internal
time clock of the fire main and sub panels shall maintain an accuracy
of 10 ms/day while unsynchronised; and
- the interface standard associated with these outlets is as defined
below.
18/30
January 2011
(ii)
electrical interface
- at an outlet located adjacent to the fire main and sub panels a type
RJ12 jack on a flush mounted escutcheon shall be provided by Other
Contractors. This shall be connected as follows:
y pin 1
(not connected);
y pin 2 signal
y pin 3 signal
y pin 4
(not connected).
- the outlets shall present to the fire main and sub panels a balanced
interface circuit in compliance with EIA specification RS422-A; and
- the fire main and sub panels shall neither include specific line
terminating devices, nor provide a low impedance path between
circuit and protective grounds.
(iii)
data content
- the reticulated serial data stream shall consist of the American
Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) characters
YYMMDDhhmmss* followed by a carriage return character, where:
y YY
y MM
y DD
y hh
y mm
y ss
19/30
January 2011
(iv)
data format
- data shall be transmitted asynchronously, with each character using
the format:
y one START bit;
y seven ASCII DATA bits;
y one bit restoring EVEN PARITY; and
y one STOP bit.
- the data signalling rate shall be 9,600 bits per second;
- when synchronised by global positioning system (GPS) satellite, the
leading edge of the START bit for the first Y-character shall occur
within 1 ms of the Hong Kong Standard Time indicated by the data
group; and
- when free-running, the leading edge of the START bit for the first Ycharacter shall occur within 1 ms of the best-estimate Hong Kong
Standard Time derived from the TODC headend master oscillator,
and indicated by the data group.
(n)
(i)
Line isolator module shall be installed to monitor the detection cable loop
condition and when detects a short circuit, isolate the affected section
whilst allowing the rest of the addressing circuit to function normally.
(ii)
(iii)
A minimum of two line isolators shall be provided for each detection line
loop.
(iv)
20/30
January 2011
83.3.2
Signals for each of the above shall be provided via the control modules
at the field devices.
(b)
General
(i)
the conventional fire alarm control system shall be suitable for 24V DC
operation and the means of supplying power to the system is to be from
the public electricity mains and backed up by a standby supply
consisting of battery charging equipment and batteries;
(ii)
all the devices, components and equipment used in the system shall be
fully compatible with one another throughout the whole system. Special
attention shall be drawn to the compatibility between fire detectors and
the fire alarm panel and the Contractor shall submit to the Project
Manager information of the fire detectors, the fire alarm panel, and other
associated equipment, and the required electrical interface with the fire
alarm panel, control panel(s) and repeater panel(s) as applicable.
the panel shall be equipped to suit the fire alarm system of which it
forms a part. Conventional fire alarm control and indication panel shall
be supplied and installed to monitor centrally the manual fire alarm
system, fire hydrant and hose reel installation, VAC control system and
other fire service installations and equipment. Fire alarm signals may
originate from manual call points, flow switches, pressure switches and
gaseous flooding system alarm contacts as applicable. The connection
of these devices in zone (alarm circuits) shall be as specified;
(ii)
21/30
January 2011
y buzzer mute;
y sound alarm switch for all indicator circuits and internal buzzer;
y system reset switch after clearance of an alarm or fault condition;
y lamp test switch;
y pump start switch;
y key switches for isolating signals to the VAC control system to the
fire shutters and to the lift controls with visual warning indication;
and
y other necessary controls for fire hydrant/hose reel system and
sprinkler system as required by the FSD.
- visual indicators:
y supply on visual indicator, green;
y system on visual indicator, green;
y system or device isolated visual indicator, amber with buzzer;
y fire alarm visual indicator for each zone, red;
y zonal fault visual indicator, amber;
y system fault visual indicator, amber;
y battery
condition
(full/charging/low)
green/amber/red respectively;
visual
indicator,
22/30
January 2011
all visual indications shall be provided with twin indication lamps or twin
LED. All visual indications shall be easily seen at 2m away from the
panel;
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) indicator lamps shall be of a voltage rating 20% higher than the applied
voltage, and shall be of extra low voltage type. Where AC mains
operation is required, indicator lamps shall be operated at extra low
voltage via a step-down transformer and be suitably rated for long life
and reliability;
(viii) alarm bell circuits shall be interleaved and separately fused at the
control equipment;
(ix)
relays shall be of the potted type or similarly protected against dust and
shall have solenoids with varnish-impregnated or plastic encapsulated
windings;
23/30
January 2011
(c)
(x)
(xi)
Repeater Panels
The repeater panels shall conform to BS EN 54-2 and BS EN 54-4 and shall
be factory made by the same manufacturer as the fire alarm panel. The
repeater panel shall be of construction identical to the fire alarm panel shall be
compete with all indication functions as specified for the fire alarm panel, and
the control functions as specified elsewhere in this Section.
(d)
general
- all fire detectors together with the fire alarm panel and all other
accessories, shall be from one principal system manufacturer and
form one mutually compatible system. All fire detectors shall be
approved by the Loss Prevention Council;
- the sensitivity of all fire detectors shall be calibrated and tested at the
manufacturers works before dispatch;
- each fire detector shall have a built-in flashing response indicator
lamp for visual identification upon activation. The indicator lamp shall
not be energized during the quiescent state of the detector. The
detector shall be capable to drive an additional remote alarm indicator;
- the detector bases shall be equipped with purpose made sealing
plates supplied by the detector manufacturer, to prevent penetration
of dirt, water and moisture during the installation period. The sealing
plates shall facilitate electrical continuity through the bases such that
the circuits can be tested or maintained before the detectors are fixed
into positions;
- the siting and orientation of the detectors and/or the response alarm
indicators shall be such that the indicator of an actuated detector can
readily be seen by a searcher in determining the position of fire alarm.
Fire detectors installed inside concealed spaces or at locations where
the built-in response indicators are difficult to be seen, shall be
equipped with remote alarm indicators fixed at conspicuous locations;
- fire detectors installed on the false ceiling shall be provided with
necessary decorative rings for base flush mounting to the underside
of the false ceiling. Unless otherwise reviewed without objection by
the Project Manager, detectors installed on the false ceiling shall be
fitted at the centre of the ceiling tiles;
24/30
January 2011
rod shall be
removing fire
tool shall be
detection and
smoke detectors
- smoke detectors shall be of the photo-optical type and shall comply
with BS EN 54-7. They shall operate on the light scattering or light
obstruction principle and shall also be incorporated with rate-of-rise
temperature sensors (one exposed to the surrounding air and the
other insulated within the detector) for improving the smoke detection
performance of the detectors when a high rate-of-rise of temperature
is detected. The detectors shall respond adequately to T1 to T5 test
fires as specified in BS EN 54-7;
- optical smoke detectors shall function correctly at continuous relative
humidity up to 95%. They shall be designed to assume protection
rating of IP43. Each detector shall be housed in a corrosion-proof
plug-in unit designed to be mounted pendent, surface or semirecessed. Removal of the unit from its base shall cause a fault alarm
signal to be given in the fire alarm panel; and
- the internal electronic circuitry shall be of the highest possible
reliability and protected against voltage spikes and surges. The
detector shall be capable of operating satisfactorily under minimum
variation of 20% in supply voltage. The circuitry shall also be
protected against electromagnetic interference.
(iii)
heat detectors
- heat detectors shall comply with BS EN 54-5. They shall have
combined fixed temperature (57C to 65C or other temperature
ratings as specified on the Employers Drawings) and rate-of-rise type
feature except in areas where because the risk of unwanted alarms
caused by rapidly rising temperature is high, detectors without a rateof-rise element shall be used; and
25/30
January 2011
83.3.4
The alarm transmitters shall be provided, which shall be compatible with the
FSD Computerized Fire Alarm Transmission System. Alarm transmitters shall
be provided adjacent to or incorporated into the fire main panel.
(b)
The Contractor shall coordinate and shall closely monitor the status of
completion of fire alarm direct link and the telephone line before fire service
inspection by FSD. The Contractor shall apply for and provide the required
telephone point for connection of the fire alarm direct link as required. The
Contractor shall coordinate with relevant parties and shall arrange the power
supply point for the fire alarm control and indication panel and for the fire
alarm direct link as necessary. The Contractor shall supply and install all
conduit works for the fire alarm direct link and associated telephone point.
(b)
Battery chargers shall be of the automatic trickle charge type, with facility for
manually-operated boost charge, capable of re-charging the battery to fully
charged condition in not more than eight hours. Battery overcurrent protection
shall be provided to safeguard the battery against short-circuit. Instruments
shall include voltmeter for battery voltage and ammeter for battery current,
charge/discharge type.
(c)
The output of the rectifier shall be sufficient for the system to give visible and
audible fault warnings upon failure of the battery and shall be capable of
providing for additional alarm load arising from the operation of any alarm
device in two separate time zones.
(d)
(e)
26/30
January 2011
83.3.5
83.3.6
83.3.7
Flow Switches
(a)
Flow switches shall comply with Section 80 of this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
(b)
(c)
Flow switch drains shall be supplied and installed for all flow switches.
Solenoid valves shall be provided for all flowswitch installations to facilitate
automatic testing of each flowswitch at the fire main/sub panel.
(b)
(c)
For intelligent and addressable fire alarm control system, each monitoring
device shall be interfaced to an addressable monitor module for converting the
signal to the addressable loop.
Alarm Bells
(a)
(b)
Alarm bells shall incorporate a gong of minimum 150 mm. Each alarm bell
shall be capable of producing a sound level of 80 dB(A) at 3m. The bell shall
consist of a micro motor as the driving unit offering high performance and
reliability together with low current consumption and low starting voltage
characteristic. Bells shall be painted red and labelled FIRE ALARM in both
English and Chinese. Bell circuits shall be interleaved and separately fused
at the control equipment.
(c)
The alarm bells shall produce an alarm sound level complying with BS 5839 :
Part 1 in all accessible parts of the buildings and acceptable to FSD when the
doors of the rooms are closed. They shall produce an alarm sound level of
not less than 65 dB(A) and not less than 5 dB(A) above any background noise
likely to persist for a period longer than 30s when the building is in use at a
point anywhere in the building.
(d)
(e)
27/30
January 2011
83.3.8
83.3.9
(f)
Alarms bells shall be separately wired with 24V DC power wiring from the fire
main/sub panels.
(g)
(h)
(b)
Contacts shall be of silver or approved non-deteriorating alloy of the normallyopen or normally-closed type to suit the alarm system. A concealed test
device shall be included. The voltage and current ratings of the contracts shall
be marked in the unit.
(c)
Call points shall be of flush mounting type suitable for direct connection to the
wiring system. Where special boxes are necessary for installation of the call
points in a conduit system, the boxes shall be provided by the Contractor.
Boxes, which are to be recessed in concrete or plaster, shall be of galvanised
steel.
(d)
Generally, call points shall be fixed at a height of 1200 mm above the finished
floor unless otherwise indicated on the Employer's Drawings. They shall be
semi-recessed, presenting a side profile area of not less than 750 mm2. A
sample shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.
(e)
A metal striker with chain shall be provided and attached to each call point.
(b)
The operation of the indicator shall not affect the brightness of the detectors
built-in LED.
(c)
(d)
28/30
The
January 2011
(f)
The indicator lamp shall protrude from the surface of the mounting plate for
visual identification from all directions.
(g)
83.4
(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall produce evidence that all fire alarm and detection system
components including smoke and heat detectors comply with the requirements
of this Section.
SUBMISSIONS
(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall submit the following for review without objection by the
Project Manager:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
detailed point schedule diagram to identify the fire zones and interface
with other services shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review
without objection.
(iv)
The following catalogues with full technical data, characteristic curves and test
certificates issued by an independent and recognised testing authority shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:
(i)
alarm bell;
(ii)
breakglass unit;
29/30
January 2011
(iii)
smoke detector;
(iv)
heat detector;
(v)
(vi)
The following samples shall be labelled and submitted to the Project Manager
for review without objection with detachable parts left loose so that they may
be taken apart for examination:
(i)
alarm bell;
(ii)
breakglass unit;
(iii)
smoke detector;
(iv)
heat detector;
(v)
(vi)
(vii) cables.
30/30
January 2011
84.1
84.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for portable hand held
equipment.
(b)
All portable hand held equipment shall generally comply with the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
BS EN 3 : Part 1
BS EN 3 : Part 2
BS EN 3 : Part 3
BS EN 3 : Part 4
BS EN 3 : Part 5
BS EN 3 : Part 6
NFPA 10
ISO 7165
1/3
Charges, minimum
Specification
and
January 2011
84.3
MATERIALS
84.3.1
(b)
(c)
The body of the portable fire extinguishers shall be made of high quality steel
sheet and provided with an anti-corrosion polyester-resin lining. The body
shall be coloured in accordance with BS 7863, and have the following
information marked or labeled:
(d)
84.3.2
84.3.3
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Stored pressure type portable fire extinguishers shall be fitted with pressure
gauges.
Fire blankets, water buckets and sand buckets shall conform to the
requirements of FSD. Buckets shall be of 10L capacity and shall be
constructed of galvanized steel and painted red. Stands for floor mounting
buckets shall be provided. The materials of construction of the stands shall be
flame retardant type. The minimum size of fire blanket shall be 1,200 mm by
1,200 mm.
(b)
(b)
Each cylinder shall have steel squeeze-grip handle together with a hose and
horn assembly for controlling the discharge of extinguishing agent. A used
indicator or seal shall be provided at the handle.
2/3
January 2011
84.3.4
84.4
The fire extinguisher shall be 2.0 kg stored pressure type with multi-purpose
dry powder suitable for classes A, B & C fire.
(b)
The body shall be finished in stoved or powder coated epoxy paint to achieve
high degrees of corrosion resistant and finished in gloss French Blue,
complete with pictographic operating instructions.
(c)
Each cylinder shall have pressure gauge and zinc die-cast squeeze-grip
handle together with a hose and nozzle assembly for controlling the discharge
of extinguishing agent.
SUBMISSIONS
(a)
(b)
84.5
The Contractor shall submit the following for review without objection by the
Project Manager:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
The following catalogues with full technical data, characteristic curves and test
certificates issued by an independent and recognised testing authority shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:
(i)
(ii)
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
All portable fire extinguishers and fire blankets shall be fixed with wall
mounted brackets. Buckets shall be floor standing type. The mounting
method shall be such that free use of the extinguishers, blankets and buckets
can be achieved without any hindrance.
3/3
January 2011
85.1
85.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for visual fire alarm.
(b)
All visual fire alarm shall generally comply with the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
85.3
MATERIALS
(a)
The visual fire alarm system shall be supplied and installed completed with the
red flashing light labeled FIRE ALARM signal and the corresponding wirings,
control equipment as well as all other necessary accessories as indicated on
the Employers drawings.
(b)
Flashing lights shall produce signals which are distinctive from other similar
appliances used for other purposes in the same building. They shall have
pleasing appearance and styling, constructed of flame retardant high impact
housing with the exterior finishes to be gloss red. They shall give a clearly
visible light signals over a long distance which makes them ideal for noisy
environment.
1/2
January 2011
85.4
(c)
Each flashing light unit shall consist of one tungsten bulb and shall be fitted
with all necessary flashing and control provisions. The unit shall be suitable
for 24V DC operation. The light output of each flashing light shall not be less
than 75 candela. The flash rate shall not be slower than 1 flash every 3
seconds and shall not exceed 3 flashes per second. The pulse duration (i.e.
the time interval between initial and final points of 10% maximum signal) shall
be not more than 0.2 seconds with a maximum duty cycle of 40%.
(d)
(e)
All flashing light units shall be surface mounted type. The unit installed
outdoor shall be of weather proof type and shall have degree of protection to
IP 55.
(f)
Synchronized modules shall be provided in the flashing lights circuit and shall
be so arranged that the operation of all flashing lights will be synchronized.
SUBMISSIONS
(a)
85.5
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
All testing provisions for the operation and functioning of the control and alarm
system should be provided. In addition, manual keyed by-pass switches shall
be incorporated so as not to send out fire signal to the air-conditioning system
and the lift installations when routine testing is carried out. The buzzer shall
be activated if the by-pass switches or other test switched back to their normal
operating status after the test.
(b)
Flashing lights shall be so sited that the concentrated viewing path has to be
considered and that the operating effect of the appliance shall be capable to
be seen by the intended viewers and that the viewers shall be able to discern
when the appliance(s) have been illuminated regardless of the viewers
orientation.
(c)
The flashing light units shall actuate upon fire alarm signals from any of the
breakglass units or detection system.
(d)
2/2
January 2011
86.1
86.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for exit sign and directional sign.
(b)
All exit sign and directional sign shall generally comply with the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Emergency lighting.
Code of practice for the
emergency lighting of premises other than cinemas
and certain other specified premises used for
entertainment
BS 5499
BS 5499 : Part 1
BS 5499 : Part 2
86.3
MATERIALS
86.3.1
General
(a)
1/4
January 2011
(b)
86.3.2
(ii)
(iii)
Exit Sign
(a)
Exit signs shall conform to BS 5499. Exit signs shall include all related
directional signs in exit routes. Exit signs shall be internally illuminated
bearing the words EXIT in block letters and characters of not less than
125 mm high with 15 mm wide strokes. For industrial Building or Baggage
sorting area inside Passenger Terminal Building, the characters shall not be
less than 180 mm high with 15 mm wide strokes. Colour contrast for
translucent surrounds to lettering shall be either one of the following
combinations or as specified:
Colour
Green
White
(b)
86.3.3
Contrasting Colour
White
Green
Directional Sign
(a)
(b)
2/4
January 2011
86.3.4
Self-Luminous Sign
Self-luminous exit signs carrying radioactive substances shall not be used. All
illuminated exit signs shall be connected to the main supply. Self-contained exit
signs shall be provided with secondary battery. Central supplied exit sign shall be
connected to the central battery set of the emergency luminaire installation.
Centrally supplied exit signs or self-contained exit signs shall be supplied and
installed as specified. Where centrally supplied emergency luminaires are supplied
and installed, centrally supplied exit signs shall be used unless otherwise specified.
Where emergency power supply is available, the exit signs shall also be connected
to the emergency power supply. The design operating life of the batteries shall not
be less than four years. The battery, charger, wiring and testing facilities of the exit
signs shall comply with the relevant requirements of the centrally supplied
emergency luminaires or the self-contained emergency luminaires. The luminaires
for exit signs shall be of maintained type.
86.4
SUBMISSIONS
(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall submit the following for review by the Project Manager
without objection:
(i)
(ii)
The following samples shall be labelled and submitted to the Project Manager
for review without objection with detachable parts left loose so that they may
be taken apart for examination:
(i)
(ii)
directional sign.
86.5
WORKMANSHIP
86.5.1
General
(a)
Exit signs and directional sign shall be connected to both mains and
emergency power supply. If the building is not equipped with an emergency
generator, the exit signs and directional sign shall be provided with secondary
battery in accordance with BS 5266 : Part 1.
(b)
Where illuminated exit signs and directional sign are supplied and installed in
places with operation/performance mostly conducted in a dark environment,
the exit sign and directional sign shall be of such design that the illumination
shall be kept to the minimum level enough to satisfy the statutory
requirements but shall not be too bright as to cause discomfort to the public or
to affect the operation/performance taking place.
3/4
January 2011
86.5.2
(c)
The construction details, finishes and appearance of the exit signs and
directional sign shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval without
objection before fabrication. The Contractor shall allow modifying the
appearance and details of the exit signs and directional sign to the satisfaction
of the Project Manager without objection.
(d)
(e)
All wirings for the exit signs and directional sign commencing from the power
supply points as shown on the Employers Drawing shall be supplied and
installed by the Contractor.
(f)
The exit signs and directional sign shall be internally illuminated by fluorescent
lighting fitting or incandescent 1amp, acceptable to the FSD and suitable to
use on 220V, 50 Hz, single phase AC supply.
(g)
(h)
Operation
(a)
Under normal conditions, the 220V AC mains shall power the fluorescent lamp
and charge a sealed nickel cadmium battery through a battery charger. On
failure of mains supply, the emergency lighting modification unit shall
instantaneously switch to battery power operation. Upon restoration of mains
supply, the unit shall switch back to normal power and the batteries shall be
re-charged again. The changeover operations shall be automatic.
(b)
The duration of emergency operation shall be at least 2 hours after the mains
supply fails with a light output up to the end of the duration.
(c)
The charging system shall be capable of recharging the battery to full capacity
in 24 hours after a total discharge of the battery.
(d)
The battery shall be protected against over-discharge by a low voltage 'cutout' device which shall disconnect the battery from the load once the
discharging voltage of the nickel cadmium-cell drops below lV.
4/4
January 2011
87.1
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for pipework, valves and fittings
for fire services system.
(b)
All pipework, valves and fittings shall generally comply with the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(c)
(d)
Pipework shall include a complete piping system comprising all pipes, tubes,
valves, fittings, reducers, expanders, nipples, vents, bleed offs, drains,
expansion and contraction devices, hangers, brackets, anchors, saddles,
supports, sleeves, plates and all accessories and components connected
thereto as an integrated pipework installation.
(e)
Pipework, fittings, valves, vents expansion devices and the like, associated
with all water services shall be suitable for a minimum operating pressure of
1,600 kPa.
(f)
In the case of pipes passing through external walls and into water containing
chambers, adequate puddle flanges shall be provided by the Contractor.
(g)
Where pipe sizes are stated in the following clauses, this is intended to relate
to nominal bore in the case of steel tubes and to nominal outside diameter in
the case of copper tubes.
1/15
January 2011
87.2
BS 970
BS 1212 : Part 1
BS 1387
BS 1968
BS 3100
BS 3416
BS 3974
BS 3974 : Part 2
BS 4504
BS 4504 : Part 1
BS 5150
BS 5152
BS 5154
BS 6129
BS 8010
BS EN 545
BS EN 593
BS EN 837 : Part 1
2/15
January 2011
BS EN 1254 : Part 1
BS EN 1254 : Part 2
BS EN 1561
BS EN 1563
BS EN 1982
BS EN 10028
BS EN 10213
BS EN 12163
BS EN 12164
BS EN 12165
BS EN 12167
BS EN 12334
BS EN 12420
BS EN 12449
ASTM A-47
ASTM A-183
ASTM A-536
ASTM D-2000
ISO 7-1
ISO 65
3/15
January 2011
87.3
87.3.1
87.3.2
87.3.3
87.3.4
(a)
(b)
For galvanized mild steel pipe laid underground shall be of heavy grade to BS
1387 / ISO 65 for steel tubes and tubular for screwing to BS 21 / ISO 7-1 pipe
threads.
All tubes and fittings above 150 mm diameter shall be ductile iron to BS EN
545: Class K12, with cement mortar lining; and bitumen-based coatings
externally and internally to BS 3416 Type II.
(b)
For ductile iron pipe laid underground shall conform to BS EN 545: Class K12
for ductile iron pipes and fittings, with cement mortar lining.
(b)
Flanges for mild steel pipework shall be wrought iron or annealed steel,
machined full face, suitable for the working pressures to which they will be
subjected.
(b)
Mechanical grooved couplings and fittings shall be approved by FSD for the
type and dimensions as used in the piping network of fire services installations.
(c)
Suitable mechanical pipe coupling of approved type that can provide the
required allowance for angular deflection and contraction and expansion shall
be used.
(d)
(e)
4/15
January 2011
87.3.5
(f)
Couplings shall consist of one or more pieces of ductile or malleable iron cast
housing, a synthetic rubber gasket, with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle
or lugs to secure units together.
(g)
Gaskets shall be moulded or synthetic rubber in a central cavity pressureresponsive configuration conforming to the pipe outside diameter and coupling
housing, of elastomers having properties as designed in ASTM D-2000.
Gasket shall be a Grade "E" EPDM compound. Bolts and nuts shall be heattreated carbon steel, track head, conforming to physical properties of ASTM A183 minimum tensile 780 MPa, cadmium plated or zinc electroplated.
(h)
Fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-4512, or galvanized malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47, Grade 32510, with
grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
(i)
Mechanical grooved couplings and fittings including gaskets used on dry pipe
installations shall be suitable for dry pipe services.
(j)
Mechanical pipe couplings shall not be used in fire-exposed areas unless the
system is automatically actuated.
(k)
Mechanical pipe couplings shall consist of malleable cast iron or rolled steel
centre sleeve and end flanges, Nitrile (Grade T) wedge shape rubber sealing
rings, bolts and nuts and washers.
(l)
(b)
Hanger rod of steel threaded and furnished with two removable nuts at each
end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place shall be provided.
(c)
50 and below
65 and 80
100 and 125
150
200 and above
(d)
10
10
13
15
20
5/15
January 2011
(e)
(f)
Unless otherwise specified, hangers for horizontal pipework at high level shall
be supported from angle or channel irons, provided by the Contractor, suitable
for building-in or otherwise secured to the structure. Adjustable mild steel
hangers shall be used. Pipe rings shall be of malleable iron or fabricated steel,
made in halves and secured by bolts or machine screws.
Nominal pipe
size, mm
Steel
15
20 and 25
32
40 and 50
65 and 80
100
125
150
200
Copper
15
22 and 28
35 and 42
54
76 and 108
87.3.6
Spacing for
vertical runs, m
Spacing for
horizontal runs, m
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
4.5
4.5
5.0
5.0
6.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
6.5
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
Expansion Joints
(a)
(b)
Expansion joints shall be provided for all pipework passing across any building
expansion joints. They shall be of axial pattern bellows type and shall have
screwed or flanged ends as appropriate to facilitate replacement. They shall
incorporate internal liners if required and shall be manufactured from 18/8
stainless steel or other approved material appropriate to the system and shall
be designed to withstand the test pressure of the system. External protective
sleeves shall be fitted. Each joint shall be securely held by guides on both
sides.
(c)
6/15
January 2011
87.3.7
(d)
(e)
(f)
The expansion joints shall be the type of Water Authority approved and
accepted by FSD.
(g)
Working pressure of the expansion joint shall be not less than twice of the
system pressure involved.
(h)
All pipework passing through floors, walls, partitions, furring, roofs and ceilings
shall be installed with pipe sleeves. Sleeves shall be the full thickness of the
construction finish to finish.
(b)
(c)
(b)
Puddle flange shall be cast into the concrete water tanks. Connections to the
water tank shall be properly aligned in both the horizontal and vertical planes.
Additional compaction shall be provided around the puddle flange to ensure a
water tight joint.
All puddle flanges shall be gunmetal.
87.4
87.4.1
General
(a)
87.4.2
All valves shall be of approved by the WSD and manufacture complying with
the appropriate British Standard bearing the BS kite mark, and approved for
the working pressure of 150% greater than the system pressure and of
minimum 1,000 kPa.
Stop Valves
(a)
All stop valves on connections to water supplies, bypass stop valves and
sectional/subsidiary stop valves which may interrupt the flow of water to
sprinklers, shall be fitted with micro-switches for monitoring the status or mode
of the vales.
(b)
Any partial or total closing of the valves other than the bypass stop valves, and
any partial or total opening of the bypass stop valves, shall activated visible
and audible alarms at the fire alarm panel.
7/15
January 2011
(c)
Test valve shall be provided at all locations shown on the drawings and the
following locations:
(i)
(ii)
(d)
All stop valves shall be right-handed i.e. turn clockwise to shut. Controlling
wheels shall be clearly marked showing in which direction the wheel is to be
turned to close the valve and an indicator which shall show whether the valve
is open or shut.
(e)
All stop valves in the water supply main and the main stop valve shall be
secured open by a padlocked chain/leather strap.
(f)
All valves in each instance shall be suitable in all respects for the class of
service and function. All valves shall be sized not less than the pipe size.
Valves installed more than 2 m above floor level shall be provided with chain
operators.
(g)
(h)
(i)
Gate valves
(ii)
Globe valves
BS 5152, BS 5154;
(iii)
Butterfly valves
BS EN 593; and
(iv)
Non-return valves
BS EN 12334, BS 5154.
(ii)
BS EN 12165,
BS EN 12420;
(iii)
BS EN 12163,
BS EN 12164,
BS EN 12167;
(iv)
BS EN 1561;
BS EN 1561 Grade 220;
(v)
Stainless steel
BS 970 SS 316;
(vi)
BS EN 1563;
8/15
BS EN 1982;
BS EN 1982 LG2;
January 2011
BS EN 1563;
BS EN10028; and
BS EN 10213;
BS 3100.
(ix)
(i)
Steel castings:
- pressure purposes
- non-pressure purposes
Valve schedule:
Type of Valve
Size (mm)
Body Material
Disc
&
Material
15 50
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze
Butterfly
Stainless steel
Swing Check
15 50
Bronze
Bronze
Bronze / Stainless
Steel
Pressure
Reducing
Bronze
15 50
Bronze
Bronze
15 50
Bronze
Bronze
87.4.3
Bronze
Ball Float
(j)
Seat
Bronze
Valve Connections:
(i)
(ii)
Valve sizes 50mm and smaller shall have taper screwed ends to BS 21.
(iii)
Valves sizes 65mm nominal bore and larger shall have flanged
connection to BS 4504.
(iv)
(v)
Provide butterfly valve with tapped lug body when used for isolating
service.
Gate Valve
(a)
(b)
9/15
January 2011
87.4.4
87.4.5
87.4.6
Globe Valve
(a)
(b)
65 mm and larger with cast iron body, bronze mounted globe, regrinding,
replaceable seat and disc, bolted yoke bonnet. Flanged connection.
Check Valve
(a)
(b)
Check valves shall be of the silent type and approved by the WSD. The
working pressure shall be 150% greater than the system pressure and of
minimum PN10.
(c)
Silent check valves shall be of double guided disc sliding type and constructed
of cast iron body, bronze disc and seat, stainless steel spring with viton or
PTFE sealing material.
Butterfly Valve
(a)
General: tight closing, water type or integral flanged type where indicated with
resilient seats. Provide seats that cover inside surface of body and extend
over body ends; or provide o-rings so that valve body may be bolted and
sealed between flat faced flanges with minimum bolt loading and without
additional gaskets; or provide integral pipe ends to suit piping used, with pipe
and faces concentrically grooved to seal against concentric protrusions in seat.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
All butterfly valves 450 mm or above shall be fitted with 20 mm by-pass globe
valve.
(h)
10/15
January 2011
87.4.7
87.4.8
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Taper pieces to reduce to the valve bore and enlarge afterwards to the bore of
the low pressure main.
(e)
Pressure gauge installed on both high and low side of the reducing valve set,
registering in kPa and calibrated to twice the working pressure, fitted with a
hand set red pointer, in addition to the indicating block pointer. Each gauge is
to be fitted with a level handle, plug cock and gunmetal syphone and cock for
inspection gauge, and mounted on a hardboard panel fixed to the wall in an
easily readable position.
(f)
(g)
For normal sizes up to and including 50 mm valve shall be screw joints whilst
from 65 mm and upward valve shall be flanged joints to BS 4504 : Part 1
corresponding to system pressure.
(h)
Ball float valves shall be of cast iron body with nickel alloy and stainless steel
working parts. They shall be of a slow closing type and of PN10 pressure
rating.
(b)
(c)
Ball float valves in nominal sizes from 65 mm diameter and above shall be to
BS 1212 : Part 1 and in cast iron with bronze trim and copper ball float to BS
1968. With flanged ends, flanges to BS 4504 : Part 1, rated at working
pressure involved but in no case less tan PN10.
11/15
January 2011
87.4.9
Vortex Inhibitor
(a)
Vortex inhibitors shall be of LPC approved type with PN16 flanges to BS 4504 :
Part 1. They shall be used for operation under positive head conditions.
Drain valves shall be provided to ensure that every section of pipework can be
drained.
(b)
Drain cocks of gland pattern shall be provided in such locations that all
sections of piping systems can be drained and shall be of 10 mm for pipes up
to 50 mm diameter and 25 mm on larger pipes. Drain cock shall be completed
with hose union.
Water strainers shall be installed in all pipelines upstream of all pumps. For
pipelines of nominal bores between 15 mm and 50 mm diameter inclusive,
strainers shall be screwed gunmetal or bronze body Y type with brass or
stainless steel screen.
(b)
(c)
(b)
The maximum scale value of the pressure gauge shall be 150% of the
anticipated maximum operating pressure.
(c)
1,000 kPa
1,600 kPa
More than 1,600 kPa
Scale
with
exceeding
20 kPa
50 kPa
100 kPa
values
not
(d)
(e)
Each pressure gauge shall have black pointer, red overrun indicators, and red
mark at normal working pressure.
(f)
The pressure gauges at the suction and discharge side of the pumps shall be
damped type. Pressure gauges at the suction side of the pumps shall be with
measuring range showing the negative suction head.
12/15
January 2011
Automatic air vent shall be of float operated type having cast iron bodies,
stainless steel floats and non-corrodible valve seats.
(b)
Automatic air vent shall be mounted in the true vertical plane and shall be
equipped with an isolating valve.
Flexible connectors shall be of stainless steel and the working pressure shall
be not less than twice that of the system pressure involved.
(b)
All connectors shall have flanged connection to BS 4504 : Part 1 and shall be
suitable for connecting to the appropriate pipework and equipment.
(b)
(c)
87.5
SUBMISSIONS
87.5.1
Pipework
(a)
The Contractor shall submit the following for review without objection by the
Project Manager:
(i)
(ii)
pipes, pipe joints, pipe support, hangers, guides and anchor details;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
complete pipe material schedule, listing make, brand, origin and model;
and
13/15
January 2011
87.5.2
87.6
The Contractor shall submit the following for review without objection by the
Project Manager:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
WORKMANSHIP
Accessible pipes shall be in sections of convenient length for dismantling.
Embedded pipework shall be in straight lengths as far as possible. Pipes with
screwed joints shall be installed with hexagon unions at suitable intervals for easy
removal.
87.6.1
87.6.2
87.6.3
All piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose scale, dirt, etc, before
installation. After installation and sealing of joints all piping shall be thoroughly
cleaned out with clean water under pressure. On completion of the installation
the system shall be opened for inspection by the Project Manager. Water
used for this purpose shall be discharged as directed by the Project Manager.
Air vents and drain cocks shall be provided at high points and low points
respectively in all piping systems. Bottle type air vents terminating in an air
release cock shall be used where suitable.
Valves, vents, unions, piping accessories and the like shall be supplied and
installed to the requirements of this specification and accompanying
Employer's Drawings and where otherwise required for the proper layout,
valving and operating of the entire installation.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Pipework over passages for plant operators and services shall be 2,000 mm
minimum clear from the finished floor level wherever possible.
14/15
January 2011
87.6.4
(e)
Fixing generally shall be by metal expansion bolts for concrete and masonry.
Power fixings shall not be used. Applied loads shall not exceed 80% the
manufacturer's recommended maximum applied load.
(f)
(g)
(h)
Mitred
Dismantling Facilities
(a)
All pipe runs shall be arranged for ease of dismantling and re-erection.
Disconnecting flanges, mechanical pipe coupling or screwed unions, as
applicable, shall be supplied and installed at suitable locations and at valves
and equipment. Unions shall be of ground-in spherical seated type. Unions for
steel pipes shall be of forged steel heavy-duty pattern and unions for copper
pipes shall be of gunmetal. Unions shall have hexagon bodies.
15/15
January 2011
88.1
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for pumps and tanks.
(b)
(c)
88.2
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Water supplies for fire service installations and equipment shall be of types
approved by the Water Supplies Department and the FSD.
BS 970
BS 4999
BS 5512
BS EN 1561
BS EN 1982
BS EN 50347
BS EN 60034-9
1/6
January 2011
88.3
MATERIALS
88.3.1
Tanks
88.3.2
(a)
All tanks shall be constructed in compliance with the FSDCOP, LPC Rules for
Sprinkler Installations, FSD Requirements and Circular Letters, and the
requirements of Water Supplies Department, the HKSAR.
(b)
All pipe work connections to the concrete water tanks shall be cast into the
tank with puddle flanges unless otherwise shown on the Employers Drawings.
Pumps
(a)
General
(i)
(b)
pumps and pump installations for sprinkler systems shall comply with the
LPC Rules. Pumps and pump installations for hydrant/hosereel systems
shall comply with FSDCOP and LPC Rules wherever applicable.
Pump Construction
(i)
(ii)
pumps and motors shall be mounted and located with dowel pins on
common rolled steel channel sections or cast iron baseplates. Pressed
steel baseplates will not be accepted;
(iii)
pump feet and main piping connections shall be integrally cast with the
lower section of the casing;
(iv)
(v)
upper and lower sections of the pump shall be located using dowels;
(vi)
lifting facilities shall be provided on the upper section of the pump casing;
(vii) bearings shall be accessible for inspection and replacement without the
need to remove the upper section of the pump casing;
(viii) impellers shall be of leaded gunmetal to BS EN 1982 and shaft shall be
of stainless steel to BS 970 grade 316S16 statically and dynamically
balanced after assembly. Impeller rings shall be of cast iron renewable
and secured from relative movement by stainless steel end rotation ring;
(ix)
(x)
bearings shall be of the ball or roller type dowelled into position. Each
bearing shall be provided with a capped grease nipple;
(xi)
2/6
January 2011
(xii) bearings shall be located in suitable housings with efficient shaft seals to
prevent the entry of impurities and the escape of grease. Housings shall
be fitted with accessible grease nipples and relief plugs to enable
bearings to be lubricated without the removal of end caps and without
the risk of pressure build up. Pumps shall be delivered to Site with
bearings lubricated using a lithium based grease suitable for minimum
bearing temperatures of 150C; and
(xiii) inboard and outboard bearings shall be interchangeable.
(c)
electric motors for pump drives shall be of the drip proof or totallyenclosed fan-cooled squirrel cage induction type to BS 4999 and BS EN
50347. Totally enclosed fan-cooled motors shall be dust and moisture
protected to IP 54;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the power factor of the motors shall not be less than 0.85 lagging under
all normal operating conditions;
(v)
noise level of all motors shall be in accordance with or better than the
recommendations of BS EN 60034-9;
(vi)
(vii) approved ball bearings, guards at all motor shaft couplings, emergency
stop button mounted adjacent to the motor, and lift lugs for motors
heavier than 25 kg in weight shall be provided;
(viii) motors shall be statically and dynamically balanced, and mounted on
common bed with driven machine;
(ix)
(x)
cast iron terminal box suitable for connection of heavy duty flexible
conduit or armoured cables shall be provided. Box shall be rated at fault
level of 10 MVA at 415V assuming suitable back-up protection provided;
(xi)
power supply for motors below 0.75 kW and above 0.75 kW shall be
single phase and three phase respectively;
(xii) motors shall be sealed at cable joints and have conduit fittings arranged
to prevent the entrance of water;
3/6
January 2011
Jockey Pumps
(i)
88.4
SUBMISSIONS
88.4.1
Tank
(a)
88.4.2
The Contractor shall submit the following for review without objection by the
Project Manager:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Pump
(a)
The Contractor shall submit the following for review without objection by the
Project Manager:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
4/6
January 2011
(v)
(vi)
Pump characteristic submitted shall be plotted over the entire range from shut
off to free discharge as static pressure in kPa, total efficiency and operating
kW against water flow in L/s at the specified speed.
88.5
WORKSMANSHIP
88.5.1
Pumps
(a)
Pump Operation
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Pumps for fire service installations shall be selected to suit the design
requirements for capacity (flow rate) as indicated on the Employer's
Drawings and shall discharge at a pressure which will produce running
pressures within the statutory requirements at the location concerned.
The figures given on the Employer's Drawings are for guidance only.
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
5/6
January 2011
(b)
Maintenance
(i)
(c)
Pump Installation
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Each pump shall be provided with suction and discharge isolating valves
and where connected in parallel with other pumps, non-return check
valves. Each pump shall be provided with two gauges, one connected to
the suction side, the other to the discharge.
(vi)
6/6
January 2011
89.1
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the specific requirements for electrical equipment and
installation for fire services system. The general requirements for the same
shall be referred to Sections 45 to 50.
(b)
The Works and materials described herein shall comply with Sections 46, 48,
49, 53, 57, and 59 of the General Materials and Workmanship Specification for
general requirements and details regarding the electrical installation including
the following:
(i)
the Works and materials described herein shall comply with other
relevant sections of this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification including the sections which specify:
- Section 53 Motors; and
- Section 90 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning Fire Services.
89.2
BS 6387
BS 6724
BS 7211
Specification for thermosetting insulated cables (nonarmoured) for electric power and lighting with low
emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected
by fire
BS EN 60529
IEC 60331
IEC 60702
1/8
January 2011
IEC 60754-1
IEC 60754-2
IEC 61034
89.3
MATERIALS
89.3.1
(b)
General
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
An overall interior plate shall be provided with cut-outs to suit the fuse
carriers, operating face of contactors and switch dollies to present a neat
appearance within the enclosure and to ensure that all wiring, live
terminals etc., are contained behind the panel.
(v)
The panel shall be fixed by knurled screws for easy removal. If the
panel is of metal construction adequate bonding with the main enclosure
body shall be provided; in addition it shall not be possible to make
contact with the panel to any live parts while removing the panel.
(vi)
Indicating Lights
(i)
(ii)
2/8
January 2011
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
89.3.2
89.3.3
- pump running
green; and
- pump failure
red.
amber; and
- empty
red.
The electricity supply shall be fitted with high rupturing capacity fuses in
accordance with LPC Rules, Clause 17.4.12.4.
(b)
Electrical circuit protection devices, including but not limited to, circuit
breakers, isolators, switches, fused switches etc, shall comply with Section 46
of the General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
(b)
General
(i)
(ii)
The minimum conductor size shall be 2.5 mm2 for phase, neutral
conductors and earth conductors. Control circuit cabling conductor size
shall be 1.5 mm2 minimum subject to voltage drop limitations.
Type of Cable
(i)
Type B
Type C
3/8
January 2011
(c)
Type D
Type E
Type of cable
/ wiring
Audio/visual
advisory system
Automatic fixed
installations
using water
Automatic fixed
The power supply cable from main
installations other control panels to fire extinguishing
than water
agent actuating devices
Emergency
generator / main
backup power
source
General
emergency
lighting
C or E
Same as
lighting
C or E
Fire alarm
system
Fire detection
4/8
general
emergency
January 2011
Type of FS
Installation
system
Type of cable
/ wiring
(ii)
Fire hydrant /
hose reel system
Firemans lift
Fixed foam
system
Pressurization of
staircases
system
Ring main
The power supply cable form main
system with fixed / sub-main switchboards to electric
pumps
motor of pumps
Sprinkler system
Pre-action
recycling
sprinkler system
Water spray
system
Street fire
hydrant system
Places of public
entertainment
Cables / wirings
compartment
Power circuits
not covered in
this table and
installed by the
contractor
within
the
C or E
A
(unless
otherwise
specified)
5/8
January 2011
The cables described in (ii) above shall comply with the following:
- where cables run within cable ducts / conduits, they shall not be
mixed with other services cable;
- for cables connecting centrally supplied emergency luminaries, the
cables shall be at least Category B cable to BS 6387 or IEC 60331;
- for cables for firemans lifts, for emergency generator and for smoke
extraction fan, the cables shall be at least Category CWZ to BS 6387
or IEC 60331;
- for cables to pre-action recycling sprinkler system, the cables shall
withstand 815C for at least thirty (30) minutes;
- for control cables to the smoke extraction system and pressurization
of staircases system, the control cables shall be at least Category
AWX to BS 6387 or IEC 60331 and shall be suitable for continuous
operation at 250C for at least one (1) hour;
- for cables supplying essential power to all pumps in fire service
installation including sprinkler pumps, fixed fire pumps, drencher
pumps, street hydrant pumps, jockey pumps, intermediate booster
pumps, foam pumps, ring main fixed pumps, transfer pumps, etc.,
shall be at least Category AWX to BS 6387 or IEC 60331; and
(iv)
For cables other than the cases in ii), the cables shall be PVC insulated
cables complying with relevant section of this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification in concealed steel conduits or PVC insulated
and sheathed steel wire, with or without armour as required, complying
with relevant section of this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification in approved fire rated plant room, in approved fire rated
cable ducts, in underground cable ducts, or embedded inside soil, or
products having equivalent performance and function.
6/8
January 2011
(d)
(v)
Cables and wires shall be installed using the loop-in loop-out system.
Cables shall be terminated only in terminals of equipment or accessories.
(vi)
Cable and wire ends shall be prepared for termination without damaging
strands. Lugs or clips shall be fitted to prevent strands from spreading
when terminals are tightened.
Cable Installations
(i)
(e)
89.3.4
89.3.5
The colour coding of all cables shall comply with the New Cable Colour Code
for Fixed Electrical Installations, published by the EMSD.
Conduits shall be completely separated from those for all other services.
Separate compartments shall be used for any wiring using duct systems.
(b)
Conduits shall be sized to easily enable the insertion or removal of any one
cable with all other cables in place.
(c)
(d)
Conduits shall be packed out from walls and ceilings with spacers under
saddles and secured with a screw fixing.
(e)
89.4
WORKMANSHIP
89.4.1
(b)
Cables and wires shall be installed using the loop-in loop-out system. Cables
shall be terminated only in terminals of equipment or accessories.
(c)
Cable and wire ends shall be prepared for termination without damaging
strands. Lugs or clips shall be fitted to prevent strands from spreading when
terminals are tightened.
(d)
Where ratings or sizes are not detailed, cables shall be rated to match circuit
breaker or fuse ratings. Stranded conductors shall be used throughout.
7/8
January 2011
89.4.2
(e)
(f)
Cabling and wiring shall comply with Section 48 of the General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
Conduits and fittings shall comply with Section 49 of the General Materials
and Workmanship Specification.
89.5
All cable containments, including but not limited to conduits, cable trays, cable
trunkings and fittings installations shall comply with Section 49 of the General
Materials and Workmanship Specification.
SUBMISSIONS
The Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Project Manager for
review without objection:
(a)
Details of pump control panels shall be submitted to the Project Manager for
review without objection. The Contractors Drawings of the pump control
panels shall include, but not be limited to, all necessary wiring, all indication
signals, visual/audio alarms, control, functions and component arrangements.
Labelling shall be in English and Chinese.
(b)
Details of the pump control panels shall be submitted to the FSD for
endorsement.
8/8
January 2011
90.1
90.2
GENERAL
(a)
The Plant shall be inspected, tested and commissioned to confirm that Plant
performance complies with the requirements of the Contract.
(b)
All such inspection, testing and commissioning shall, in particular but without
limitation, be planned, carried out and documented in accordance with:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
the construction quality plans and inspection and test plans prepared by
the Contractor in accordance with the relevant ISO standard and
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
TERMINOLOGY
(a)
The following terms shall be used in all programmes, quality plans, reports
and other documents produced:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) Phase - one or other of the phases identified in (i) - (iv) above;
1/14
January 2011
(x)
Site Tests - tests on static items of Plant and systems (e.g. inspection
and testing of welds and hydraulic testing of pipework) to ensure correct
and safe installation before setting to work;
(xi)
2/14
January 2011
(c)
90.3
The term Performance Tests as defined and used in the General Conditions
of Contract refers to the Confidence Trials and such further tests, if any,
identified as such in the Specification.
Manufacturing Phase:
- Factory Tests; and
- Type Tests.
(ii)
Installation Phase:
- Site Tests.
(iii)
Pre-Commissioning Phase:
- Component Tests; and
- Commissioning of elements of the Plant.
- Setting to work
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(b)
Any Deferred Seasonal Tests shall also be clearly identified in all plans and
programmes.
(c)
For the duration of the Defects Liability Period, operational and safety controls
shall be sealed if adjustment beyond defined limits could result in malfunction
and give rise to a defect.
3/14
January 2011
(d)
90.4
90.5
The Contractor shall provide attendance and technical support during testing
and commissioning of any work with which the Contractor has an interface
during the confidence trails period in accordance with this General Materials
and Workmanship Specification.
QUALITY PLANS
(a)
The Contractor shall identify in his construction quality plans any division of
the Plant into discrete elements to facilitate the preparation and service of
Phase Notices as called for in this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification.
(b)
(c)
The Project Manager, in reviewing any inspection and test plan, may require
further and better inspection, testing and Commissioning documentation as
may be considered reasonably necessary to record these processes.
PHASE NOTICES
(a)
For each element of the Plant identified in the Contractor's construction quality
plans or, as the case may be, for the Plant as a whole:
(i)
the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager for
review without objection a Phase Notice at the end of the Manufacturing
Phase, the Installation Phase and the Pre-commissioning Phase;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the Phase Notice relating to an installation Phase shall confirm that the
Contractor is satisfied that the equipment or system or part of a system
is ready for starting the pre-commissioning tests; and
(v)
4/14
January 2011
90.6
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the tolerances;
(v)
(vi)
(vii) pass/fail;
(viii) whether a concession shall be requested under Section 14 of the
General Specification;
90.7
(ix)
(x)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit his proposed Test Results Forms as
part of his submission of the relevant Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
Plan.
PHASE REPORTS
(a)
5/14
January 2011
(b)
90.8
workmanship;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
(d)
Any modifications to circuitry, instrumentation, etc. carried out a any time shall
be recorded in detail in the Phase Reports and shown on the Contractors
Drawings.
(e)
(f)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
6/14
January 2011
(vii) the relevant codes and guides published by the American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE-USA);
(viii) the relevant codes and guides published by the National Environmental
Balancing Bureau (NEBB-USA); and
90.9
90.10
(ix)
x)
(b)
The Contractor shall provide all necessary skilled labour and assistance for
testing, operating, adjusting, Commissioning and verifying the performance of
all Plant.
(c)
The Contractor's testing and Commissioning staff shall have had previous
experience with testing and Commissioning similar Plant of comparable duty.
(d)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
7/14
January 2011
90.11
NOTIFICATIONS
(a)
90.12
90.13
Prior to any inspection and testing by the Project Manager, the Contractor
shall inspect and test the Plant to ensure that equipment and facilities are
clean and complete and can reasonably be expected to meet successfully all
inspection and/or testing criteria.
(b)
Prior to setting to Work, testing and Commissioning, the Contractor shall clean
all Plant and shall confirm in writing to the Project Manager that all the work is
complete and satisfactory for the purpose of testing and Commissioning.
(c)
In the event that the Contractor considers that any testing is not appropriate or
required, the Contractor may submit alternative proposals to the Project
Manager for review without objection.
90.14
(ii)
electrical motors.
FACTORY TESTS
90.14.1 General
(a)
Wherever practical, Factory Tests shall cover subsystems rather than just
individual components.
90.14.2 Pumps
(a)
(b)
8/14
January 2011
90.15
(c)
Software and hardware tests to prove the interfacing of the Works through
computer simulation of other systems.
(d)
MODEL TESTS
(a)
90.16
Prior to the Installation Phase the Contractor shall assemble a working model
of the system to test the interworking of the complete system. This model
shall include the following:
(i)
(ii)
sprinkler systems;
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
All testing shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the
FSDCOP, LPC Rules for Automatic Sprinkler Installation and any relevant
Circular letters issued by the FSD.
(c)
(d)
After flushing out the pipework, a flow test shall be performed on the
hydrant/hosereel system in accordance with the FSDCOP.
(e)
A water supply test with the drain and test valves fully opened shall be made
on the sprinkler system in accordance with the LPC Rules. An alarm test on
the water gong shall also be carried out by opening the test valve to ensure
that the alarm shall continuously sound for 30 seconds after the flow in the
system is detected.
9/14
January 2011
(f)
Current readings for the pumps shall be determined in the field at starters,
junction boxes or similar.
(g)
(h)
For street hydrant system without pumps, the Contractor shall test the
incoming water supply pressure at a nearby supply point and at such time as
agreed with the Project Manager before the completion of the installation to
establish the adequacy of the water supply pressure. If the supply pressure is
inadequate, the Contractor shall propose remedial measures to the Project
Manager for review without objection. The Contractor shall find and select the
most appropriate nearby supply point for the test.
(i)
Tests for fire pumps shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(j)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
The pump performance shall be tested at its duty point with the
pumped flowrate measured by water displacement in the tank.
(iv)
(v)
The pump motor current and supply voltage shall be measured at start
up and during operation.
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
Other tests to be carried out shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
(i)
(ii)
Flow rate and flow pressure test through FS inlets and sprinkler inlets
(iii)
(iv)
10/14
January 2011
(b)
The Contractor shall confirm by field observation that all programme functions
and routines operate correctly and that all field devices respond accordingly.
(c)
All fire alarm inputs and outputs shall be tested and witnessed by field
observation of device operation and field confirmation of readings recorded by
the fire alarm system:
(i)
smoke detectors;
(ii)
heat detectors;
(iii)
(iv)
flow switches;
(v)
pressure switches;
(vi)
Beam Detectors;
(x)
Fire services main panel and sub-panel, and all other mimic and control
panel operation interface with all other systems including:
System Interface
Mechanical services system
Fire shutter
Smoke curtains
11/14
Action
: Automatic and manual control
of
smoke
control
and
ventilation fans
: Automatic control of prerecorded
evacuation
announcements
: Automatic release of secured
fire escape doors
: Automatic
activation
of
flashing mode
: Automatic activation of fire
shutters
: Automatic activation of smoke
curtains
: Monitoring of major fire alarms
: Automatic lift homing
: Control and Monitoring of the
entire AFA system
January 2011
(xi)
System Interface
Action
Automatic Transfer Switch : Monitoring of status of ATS for
(ATS) in TX room
dual feed power supply
Motorised fire and smoke : Automatic
activation
of
dampers
motorised fire and smoke
dampers
Generator
: Automatic
activation
of
emergency generator upon
receive of common fire alarm.
(e)
(f)
(g)
Battery capacity shall be tested by discharging through the alarm circuits and
being charged via the incorporated charger unit. The specific gravity of the
electrolyte shall be tested with a clean hydrometer.
(h)
The input DC supply to the alarm supervisory circuitry shall be checked for
correct voltage and stability such as to match the signal and alarm triggering
devices.
(b)
Each central battery system shall be energized from its battery by simulation
of a failure of the supply to the normal lighting for a period of the rated duration
of the battery. During this period all luminaires and/or signs shall be examined
and tested in accordance with BS 5266 to ensure that they are functioning
correctly. All tests required in the FSDCOP shall be carried out and recorded.
12/14
January 2011
(c)
(d)
For emergency lighting system and exit signs provided with central monitoring,
testing and logging system, the system shall be tested in accordance with the
manufacturer's specification and to meet the requirements in the FSDCOP.
(e)
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with relevant parties, inspect and witness the
final tests on the emergency lighting installation and/or exit signs to comply
with FSDCOP, FSD requirements and Circular Letters. The Contractor shall to
notify the Project Manager before the tests take place.
(f)
The Contractor shall coordinate with relevant parties to carry out the final
functional test and performance test.
90.17
(a)
(b)
The piping shall be pneumatically tested (in a closed circuit) for a period of
10 minutes at a pressure not less than 10 bars or 1.5 times of the operating
pressure of system whichever is greater. At the end of 10 minutes, the
pressure drop shall not exceed 10 percent of the test pressure.
(c)
A puff test shall be carried out in accordance with NFPA 2001 and FSD
circular letter no.2/97.
(d)
Gaseous nitrogen, or other inert gas submitted for review without objection
by the Project Manager, shall be used for the test.
(e)
The Contractor shall undertake a full on-site discharge test after completion
of the installation, as and when required by FSD, to confirm the design
performance is achieved. The Contractor shall submit a method statement
describing how the test shall be carried out and shall submit this test to the
FSD and Project Manager for review without objection.
(f)
After all site discharge tests, including the inspection by FSD, the gas
cylinders shall be recharged and the whole system shall be reinstated to a
functional operation status.
Additional tests, where not specified above, shall be carried out to meet the
requirements of the FSD and WSD. The Contractor shall prepare and submit
all necessary applications to FSD and WSD and thereafter provide attendance
with their representatives for the purpose of these tests and inspections at the
Contractors own expense.
13/14
January 2011
(b)
90.18
(b)
90.19
The Contractor shall note that completion of the statutory inspection and
acceptance of the fire service installation by FSD is one of the considerations
for certifying the completion of the Works.
The Plant Integration Phase tests shall include integration with the building
systems integration head-end processor. These tests shall be detailed in the
Test Plan and shall include the following:
(i)
(ii)
a reliability test of no less than 4 weeks. During this test all equipment
shall be connected and operational and the relevant interfacing works
shall be fully operational simultaneously. The Contractor shall coordinate to ensure that all necessary simulated on-line data is available.
Availability measurements shall be taken during the test and any failure
shall cause the complete test to be restarted. Testing shall continue
until the availability required is achieved.
The Plant Integration Phase shall also be used to establish the actual system
sizing and traffic details to ensure the system can be operated within the
performance requirements as described in this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
TESTING AND
COMPLETION
(a)
COMMISSIONING
REPORT
AND
CERTIFICATE
OF
The Contractor shall submit a testing and commissioning report to the Project
Manager for review without objection within fourteen days after completion of
commissioning the installation. Together with this, a certificate of completion
signed by the Contractor shall be issued to the Project Manager with a copy
forwarded to the Director of Fire Services in conformity with Regulation 9 of
the Fire Service (Installations and Equipment) Regulations.
14/14
January 2011
91.1
GENERAL
This section of General Materials and Workmanship Specification covers the
general requirements for foul water disposal system.
(a)
91.1.2
91.1.3
All foul water disposal materials and workmanship shall generally comply with
all regulations and requirements of the relevant government departments (e.g.
Drainage Services Department-DSD, Building Department-BD and the like).
The Works shall comply with the following:
(i)
(ii)
All above ground soil and ventilating pipes and fittings shall refer to Section 95
of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
(b)
Balloon gratings shall be galvanized steel wire or copper wire balloons. Plastic
balloons shall be expressly reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
(c)
All floor drains inside toilets and public areas shall have stainless steel
gratings to match the floor finishes. Fixing screws shall be stainless steel flat
head counter-sunk type. Floor drains inside plant rooms shall have cast iron
grating fitted with stainless steel flat head counter-sunk screws.
Covers and frames shall comply with BS EN 124 with coating to BS 4164 of
the type and grade specified.
(b)
(c)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
1/6
January 2011
91.2
BS EN 124
BS 4164
BS 1247 : Part 1
BS EN 1562
BS 729
BS 1194
BS 1196
BS 65
BS 4962
BS EN 887
2/6
January 2011
91.3
MATERIALS
91.3.1
Pipework
91.3.2
91.3.3
(a)
Above ground foul water pipework shall comply with section 95 of this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification.
(b)
Underground foul water pipework shall comply with section 95 of this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification.
All suspended manholes, manholes, sump pits, valve pits, and interceptors
shall be provided by the Contractor including covers, frames, step irons and all
necessary accessories.
(b)
The Contractor shall make all connections to and between pipeworks, sump
pumps, controls, wiring/conduits, valves and fittings inside the manholes,
valve pits, sump pits and interceptors.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Cast covers, gratings, overflow weirs and frames clean shall be, free from air
holes, sand holes, cold shuts and chill, neatly dressed and carefully fettled.
Castings shall be free from voids, whether due to shrinkage, gas inclusions or
other causes.
(f)
All excavation work, rock cutting and backfilling for manhole shall comply with
section 5 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
91.3.4
Supply and install where shown on the Employers Drawings, fresh air inlets
consisting of a strong cast iron box approximately 150 mm x 100 mm
complete with fixing ears, cast brass front and mica flap. Inlets shall be fixed
with pipe nails and distance pieces and connected to manholes with 100 mm
cast iron ventilating pipe unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Floor Drains
(a)
Floor drains shall include gratings having a net area not less than the cross
section area of the pipe to which they are connected and shall be completed
with clamping device, dome strainer, internal caulk outlet and installed with
reference to the Employers Drawings.
(b)
3/6
January 2011
(c)
91.3.5
Wall Gratings
(a)
91.3.6
Floor drains shall have a minimum of 100 mm grating for toilet drains and
180 mm grating for plant room.
Traps
(a)
Traps shall be provided where shown and where required for all fittings, and
shall be suitable in all respects for their particular duty.
(b)
All traps shall be provided with an accessible cleaning aperture, the size and
location of which has been reviewed without objection, and shall have a clear
internal cross section similar to the corresponding soil or waste branch pipe
section. Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere, trap sizes shall be: (i)
(ii)
(iii)
(c)
The discharge outlet portion of anti-syphonage trap shall be suitable for the
connection with socketless epoxy coated cast iron pipe to BS EN 887.
(d)
Cast iron/bronze resealing traps shall be used for floor drains and shall be
similarly coated to the cast iron pipework to which they are connected.
91.4
SUBMISSIONS
91.4.1
The following particulars of the proposed foul water disposal systems shall be
submitted to the Project Manger for review:
(i)
(ii)
details of the pipe joints, pipe support hangers, guides and anchors;
(iii)
4/6
January 2011
91.4.2
(v)
Samples
(a)
91.5
(iv)
The following samples of the proposed foul water disposal system shall be
submitted to the Project Manger together with the particulars referred to in
91.4.1 above.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall provide bolted access doors or inspection units to all
branches and bends (other than ventilating and anti-syphon pipes) and at the
foot of main soil stacks.
Screw threads to UPVC pipes are not allowed. Plastic pipes shall be fixed
and jointed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Joint
plastic pipes to pipes of other materials with proprietary adaptors.
(c)
All gullies shall be set to levels such that sufficient depth is given to the
extension piece where back or side inlets are shown or required.
(d)
The Contractor shall provide and install galvanized steel wire or copper
balloon which shall be positively fixed to the open end of each vent pipe above
roof at the level indicated on the Employers Drawings, or as required.
(e)
(f)
The Contractor shall support the pipes under barrel with sockets overhanging.
Adequately chock bottom layer of pipes in stack to prevent stack collapse and
the stack shall not be higher than 2 m.
(g)
(h)
The Contractor shall only use one type of pipe and bedding within any
individual drain length between any two drainage chambers.
(i)
Lay pipes single straight to line and true to gradient with sockets facing
upstream starting at the downstream end of the trench.
(j)
Compact granular bedding and trim to correct gradient and shape under barrel
and pipe sockets to ensure uniform support along whole barrel length. After
laying, jointing and testing pipeline, compact granular bedding material
concurrently on each side of the pipe to the specified level.
5/6
January 2011
(k)
Accurately trim natural bed to provide uniform and solid bearing for pipes
throughout the length of the barrels. Form short recesses in bed to clear
sockets by 50 mm minimum.
(l)
During construction, plug open ends of pipes and maintain until completion, to
prevent entry of debris.
(m)
Ductile iron pipes and fittings shall have flexible joints with gasket type.
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(i)
nominal size;
(ii)
(iii)
Markings shall be in colour and marked at intervals laid down in the particular
standard.
6/6
January 2011
92.1
GENERAL
This section of General Materials and Workmanship Specification covers the
general requirements for storm water disposal system.
(a)
92.1.2
92.1.3
92.1.4
All storm water disposal materials and workmanship shall generally comply
with all regulations and requirements including those of the government
departments (e.g. Drainage Services Department-DSD, Buildings DepartmentBD and the like). The following are particularly standards:
(i)
(ii)
All above ground rainwater pipes and fittings shall refer to section 95 of this
General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
(b)
Cast iron roof outlets shall be proprietary products complete with sealing
flanges and screws fixed flat or domical grating, reviewed without objection by
the Project Manager.
Covers and frames shall be to BS EN 124 with coating to BS 4164 of the type
and grade specified.
(b)
(c)
Planter drain pipes shall be perforated plastic pipes and fitting to BS 4962.
(b)
The Syphonic Drainage System employs roof outlets which, under design
conditions exclude air so that the drainage pipes run at full bore, thus
generating water flow by syphonic action between the outlet level and
manhole level.
(c)
All rain water down pipes shall be installed in stainless steel with satin finish.
1/8
January 2011
(d)
(e)
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory approval for the
entire syphonic rainwater system to be installed.
(f)
The Contractor shall design the Syphonic Drainage System such that it will
perform in accordance with the Specification for a minimum period of 25
years.
(g)
Performance Criteria
(i)
The Contractor shall carry out and supply actual test performance data
to the Project Manager, for review without objection, for roof outlets
showing:
- Maximum flow rate;
- Depth of water required around roof outlet to initiate syphonic action;
- Frictional losses through outlet at maximum flow;
- Acoustic date to confirm that the system, when operating at either
partial or full capacity, is within the acoustic performance criteria for
the space through which the down pipe runs, and
- Changes in pipe diameter required to ensure the system will continue
to operate syphonically under all conditions, before and after the
change in diameter.
(ii)
(iii)
2/8
January 2011
92.2
BS EN 124
BS 4164
BS 1247 : Part 1
BS EN 1562
BS 729
BS 4962
BS EN 887
EN 1124-1
EN 1124-2
92.3
MATERIALS
92.3.1
Pipework
(a)
Above ground storm water pipework shall comply with section 95 of this
General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
(b)
3/8
January 2011
92.3.2
92.3.3
Rainwater Outlets
(a)
(b)
(c)
Apart from the main components as specified in (b), anti-vortex device shall be
provided for syphonage drain. All components shall be fixed by stainless steel
link rod.
(d)
Connection spigot pipe of rainwater outlets shall be suitable for the connection
with socketless epoxy coated cast iron pipe to BS EN 877.
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
92.3.4
92.3.5
Fresh air inlet shall comply with section 91 of this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
Wall Gratings
(a)
92.3.6
Manholes, sump pits, gully sumps, valve pits and interceptors shall comply
with section 91 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
Wall gratings shall comply with section 91 of this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
Flexible Hoses
(a)
The Contractor shall provide flexible hoses between the rainwater outlet and
the vertical down pipe / horizontal main run inside the main ceiling void as
follows:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
4/8
January 2011
92.3.7
(iv)
(v)
The Contractor shall supply and install an overflow alarm sensor for each
gutter at roof to monitor possible blockage of roof rainwater outlets and
overflowing of roof drain system.
(b)
An overflow alarm panel shall be provided for monitoring the overflow alarm.
(c)
92.4
SUBMISSIONS
92.4.1
The following particulars of the proposed storm water disposal systems shall
be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:
(i)
(ii)
details of the pipe joints, pipe support hangers, guides and anchors;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
full hydraulic calculations for the roof syphonic drainage system shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection and further
submission to Drainage Services Department/ Buildings Department;
and
(vii) full acoustic calculations for the roof syphonic drainage system shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection to confirm
the system can operate within the specified acoustic performance
requirements and without any disturbing tonal characteristics.
5/8
January 2011
92.4.2 Samples
(a)
92.5
92.6
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
roof outlet.
WORKMANSHIP
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Contractor shall also comply with section 91.5 of this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
(f)
All excavation work, rock cutting, trenching and backfilling shall comply with
section 5 of this GMWS.
(g)
The Contractor shall provide a neoprene mounting ring between the outlet and
supporting plate to cushion any load transferred from the outlet to the
membrane or vice versa.
(h)
The Contractor shall supply the outlet with a suitable method of fixing the roof
waterproofing membrane to the outlet, which shall be fully warranted. The
Contractor shall provide a written guarantee from the membrane manufacturer
for the installation and attachment of the membrane to the rainwater outlet. The
outlet shall be supplied with a pre-attached membrane skirt.
gutters
in
accordance
with
the
manufacturers
INSTALLATION
(a)
92.6.1
The following samples of the proposed storm water disposal system shall be
submitted to the Project Manger together with the particulars referred to section
92.4.1 above.
The Contractor shall install pipework to run in uniform gradients falling to the
outlets. Pipe work shall run straight in between changes of direction and shall
be adequately supported, with watertight joints aligned flush at internal
surfaces.
Structural requirements
(a)
The Contractors design shall make provision for and take full account of the
structural frame to which the Syphonic Drainage System is fixed including ,
but not limited to, any compensation for expansion and construction joints;
6/8
January 2011
92.6.2
(b)
All hangers and supports shall be secured to take all potential shock loads
imposed on the pipe support system when the Syphonic Drainage System
operated in its maximum load condition;
(c)
Dimensional co-ordination
(a)
92.6.3
92.6.4
92.6.6
The Contractor shall provide a neoprene mounting ring between the outlet and
supporting plate to cushion any load transferred from the outlet to the
membrane or vice versa.
Roof fixing
(a)
92.6.5
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager, for review without
objection, precise details of the proposed jointing and fixing system, methods
of adjustment and calculated tolerances to which the Syphonic Drainage
System can operate.
The Contractor shall supply the outlet with a suitable method of fixing to the
roof waterproofing details at the outlet. The Contractor shall provide a
Manufacturers Warranty from the roof manufacturer for the installation and
attachment of the rainwater outlet.
Accessibility
(a)
The Contractor shall locate all pipe fittings in accessible location, with
adequate clearance, to facilitate maintenance and/or servicing, including
inspection openings, cleaning points, joints designed to enable the easy
removal of pipes, and fittings.
(b)
Pipe supports
(a)
(b)
7/8
January 2011
92.6.7
(c)
The pipe support material shall be the same material as the pipe, or
galvanised or non-ferrous metals fixed onto the steel reinforcement before
concreting.
(d)
The Contractor shall note that the pipe thickness for the stainless syphonic
rainwater pipes running through the concourse shall be adjusted to ensure the
pipe can be run unsupported over the entire visible section.
Capping-off
(a)
92.7
During construction, the Contractor shall temporarily seal open ends of pipes
to prevent the entry of foreign matter into pipe systems, and shall provide
purpose-made covers of pressed steel or rigid plastic.
TESTING
(a)
The Contractor shall provide all necessary documentation including but not
limited to method statements, test reports, to demonstrate that the Syphonic
Drainage System satisfies the performance requirements of the Specification;
(b)
The Contractor shall test all systems hydrostatically for a minimum of two
hours at a pressure not less than 1.5 times the maximum operating pressure
and/or not less 400 kPa at the lowest part of the system, whichever is the
greater. No leakage shall be recorded during the testing period;
(c)
In the event of leakage, the Contractor shall carry out remedial works and
carry out further tests until it can be satisfactory shown that the complete
installation is leak free.
(d)
The Contractor shall schedule all testing in accordance with the construction
programme, and agree the test schedule in advance with the Project
Manager.
(e)
All final tests will be witnessed by the Project Managers representative and
where necessary the Buildings Department. Records of all testing shall be
retained and submitted to the Buildings Department for confirmation as
required.
(f)
Tests shall not be carried out without prior notice of at least 28 days being
given to the Project Manager; and
(g)
On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall carry out functional tests
for individual components and on the system as a whole to the satisfaction of
the Project Manager. Such testing shall include timed discharge tests of
selected individual systems.
8/8
January 2011
93.1
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for potable water system,
flushing water system and cleansing water system.
(b)
All water supply systems shall generally comply with the following standards
or suitable equivalent:
(c)
93.2
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
BS 1010 : Part 2
BS 6700
BS EN 1982
BS EN 13280
1/6
January 2011
93.3
93.3.1
93.3.2
Design Data:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
The potable water supply system shall be connected from Water Supplies
Department / Employer s main potable water supply pipe.
(c)
(d)
The potable water supply system shall be sized for simultaneous demand from
fixtures with a minimum pipe size of 20 mm when serving more than a single
fixture.
(e)
Design Data:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
The flushing water supply system shall be connected from Employer s main
seawater supply pipe.
(c)
The capacity of water storage tanks for flushing shall be 45 litres for each
flushing point. The tanks shall be provided with close-fitting but not airtight lids
to ensure that the water will not be polluted. Easy access shall be available for
maintenance inspection and cleaning. Suitable overflow pipes shall be
provided and pipe to nearest drain.
(d)
2/6
January 2011
93.3.3
(b)
The cleansing water system shall be connected from the Water Supplies
Department / Employers main potable water supply pipe.
(c)
Separate water storage tank shall be provided for cleansing water system.
(d)
(e)
All cleansing water points shall be housed in lockable box with padlock.
(f)
The cleansing water system shall be maintained a minimum head of 100 kPa
at each cleansing water point, pneumatic booster pump units shall be provided
if necessary. Details of pneumatic booster pump shall refer to Section 97 of
this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
(g)
93.4
MATERIALS
93.4.1
93.4.2
Pipe Supports
(a)
93.4.3
All pipe supports for potable water supply system, flushing water supply
system and cleansing water supply system shall refer to Section 95 of this
General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
93.4.4
All pipework and fittings for potable water supply system, flushing water supply
system and cleansing water supply system shall refer to Section 95 of this
General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
All the valves and cocks for potable water supply system, flushing water
supply system and cleansing water supply system shall refer to Section 95 of
this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
Cover Plates
(a)
Potable water pipes and flushing water pipes emerging from walls, floors or
ceiling surfaces, shall be covered by cover plates manufactured from either
non-ferrous metal finished to match the pipe, or stainless steel with
dimensions as follows:
Pipe diameter
Up to 20 mm
65 mm
Up to 50 mm
100 mm
Larger than 50 mm
3/6
January 2011
93.4.5
(b)
Refrigeration Unit
(i)
(c)
(f)
centrifugal pump installed on rubber pads over stainless steel drip pan.
Piping shall be fully insulated and include dial thermometer on discharge
line, manual by-pass valve, and drain.
Controls
(i)
(e)
Recirculating Pump
(i)
(d)
In-Loop Sterilizer
(i)
4/6
January 2011
93.5
SUBMISSIONS
93.5.1
(ii)
details of the pipe joints, pipe support hangers, guides and anchors;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager, for review without
objection, a complete set of hydraulic calculations showing the pipe
frictional loss of all the water supply systems.
93.5.2
Samples
(a)
(ii)
valves; and
(iii)
93.6
WORKMANSHIP
93.6.1
(b)
(c)
All water supply pipes shall be installed in straight lines and uniform grades
without sags.
(d)
All water supply pipes shall have sufficient unions, flanges and isolating valves
for satisfactory removal of piping and fittings for maintenance.
5/6
January 2011
93.6.2
(e)
(f)
(g)
All water supply pipes shall have adequate spacing of at least 25 mm between
pipes or pipe insulation, 50 mm between pipes or pipe insulation and electrical
cables.
(h)
All the pipe fittings (e.g. control valves and design joints to enable removal of
pipes) shall be located in accessible positions with adequate clearance for
maintenance.
(i)
All potable water pipework, water storage tanks and associated pumps and
equipment shall be cleaned internally and sterilized.
(j)
Pipe Supports
(a)
Installation of pipe supports for potable water supply system, flushing water
supply system and cleansing water supply system shall refer to Section 95 of
this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
6/6
January 2011
94.1
GENERAL
This section covers the general requirements for hot water supply system.
(a)
94.2
All hot water supply systems shall generally comply with the following
standards or suitable equivalent:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(b)
The hot water supply system shall comprise electric mains heater and all
necessary pipework and safety features.
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Test pressure of the water heaters shall be minimum 1.5 times to the
maximum working pressure.
(g)
BS 3955
1/6
for
January 2011
BS 5422
BS 6282
BS 6283
BS EN 1111
BS EN 1286
BS EN 60335-2-21
BS EN 60335-2-35
BS EN 60730-2-1
BS EN 60730-2-9
94.3
MATERIALS
94.3.1
94.3.2
Pipe Supports
(a)
94.3.3
All pipework and fittings for the hot water supply system shall comply with
Section 95 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
All pipe supports for the hot water supply system shall comply with Section 95
of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
Valves, Cocks
(a)
Valves and cocks (except thermostatic mixing valves) for the hot water supply
system shall comply with Section 95 of this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
2/6
January 2011
(b)
94.3.4
(i)
(ii)
the thermostatic mixing valves shall supply blended water between 35C
and 45C with supplies of 15C cold and 65C hot with normally
balanced pressures;
(iii)
(iv)
Thermal Insulation
(a)
94.3.5
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Water Heaters
(a)
the electric thermal storage type water heater shall be unvented type
with storage capacity not exceeding 200 litres and comply with BS EN
60335-2-21;
(ii)
3/6
January 2011
- pressure relief valve shall comply with BS 6283 and have a set
pressure not greater that the maximum designed pressure of the
water heater or 1000 kPa. A manual test easing gear shall be
provided; and
- a combined temperature and pressure relief valve as an alternative to
the temperature relief valve and the pressure relief valve may be
employed in the heater.
(iii)
(iv)
the drain pipe shall be provided for the relief valves to discharge the
water released from the valves to a safe and visible location;
(v)
(vi)
electrical supply to the electric water heater shall be 220V, single phase
or 380V, 3 phases; and
(vii) the water heater power supply shall be cut-off automatically when the
water outlet temperature reaches to 60C.
(b)
(ii)
the water heater shall be suitable for low flow pressure and conductive
water;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
4/6
January 2011
(vi)
(vii) partial load switch shall be provided to enable selection to 2/3 of the full
load. A pilot light shall be provided in the heater casing to indicate the
ON / OFF status of the heaters;
(viii) as overheat protection switch and safety valve shall be provided in the
heater. All switches and valves shall be factory tested and each heater
shall be accompanied by a test certificate;
(ix)
quick coupling sockets shall be provided in water inlet and outlet of the
water heater for ease of removal / maintenance. Each connection shall
be provided with factory cut gasket suitable for hot water;
(x)
the water heater shall be supplied with at least 1 meter of supply cable
for necessary adjustment when required. Cable shall be installed inside
flexible metallic conduits;
(xi)
(xii) material of the water contacting part shall be in copper and the external
finishes shall in white enamelled paint or equivalent; and
(xiii) no part of the pipework shall be used as the support of the water heater.
94.4
SUBMISSIONS
94.4.1
The following particulars of the proposed hot water supply system shall be
submitted to the Project Manger for review:
(i)
(ii)
details of the pipe joints, pipe support hangers, guides and anchors;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
5/6
January 2011
94.4.2
Samples
(a)
The following samples of the proposed hot water supply system shall be
submitted to the Project Manger together with the particulars referred to in
94.4.1 above.
(i)
(ii)
valves; and
(iii)
94.5
WORKMANSHIP
94.5.1
Pipework
(a)
94.5.2
Pipe Supports
(a)
94.5.3
Installation of pipework for the hot water supply system shall comply with
section 95 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
Installation of pipe supports for the hot water supply system shall comply with
section 95 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
Water Heaters
(a)
All water heaters shall be firmly fixed in position with the factory supplied
supporting brackets.
(b)
All water heaters shall be installed so as not to allow the weight of the water
heater transmitted to its water connection pipes.
(c)
All water heaters shall be installed in the position to allow easy access and
enable future maintenance / replacement of heaters.
6/6
January 2011
95.1
GENERAL
95.1.1
Pipework
(a)
Pipework shall include all pipes, tubes, valves, fittings, reducers, nipples,
vents, bleed offs, drains, expansion and contraction devices, hangers,
brackets, anchors, saddles, supports, sleeves, plates and all accessories and
components connected thereto as an integrated pipework installation.
(b)
(c)
(d)
nominal size;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(e)
Pipework shall be installed with correct falls to ensure adequate venting and
draining.
(f)
Pipework installed in ducts, trenches, voids and inaccessible places shall have
joints for connecting to valves or where a particular type of joint is specifically
called for.
(g)
(h)
The Contractor shall provide pipe sleeves where pipe pass through wall, floors
or ceilings. Sleeves for cast iron and steel pipes shall be steel. Sleeves for
galvanized pipe shall be galvanized steel. For plastic pipes the sleeves shall
be galvanized steel . The Contractor shall provide puddle flanges where pipes
pass through water tanks, rooves, diaphragm walls or screen walls rendered
liquid-tight.
(i)
(j)
Pipes passing through the building expansion joints shall be fixed with pipe
expansion joints.
(k)
1/26
January 2011
95.1.2
All valves and cocks shall require approval by the Water Supplies Department
and review without objection by the Project Manager.
(b)
All valves supplied shall be suitable for the working pressure and testing
pressure of the system as specified elsewhere in this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification and shall be non-asbestos type.
(c)
All valves delivered to Site shall provide adequate identification for different
grades and sizes.
(d)
Provide pressure gauges, air vents, drain valves and gunmetal test cocks for
all equipment.
(e)
(f)
Provide regulating valves of globe type shall be fitted on branch lines and
bypass where regulation of flow is required for balancing.
(g)
Brand name and standards of the valves shall be cast on the body and cast or
stamped on the bonnet. Provide valves of a given type from same
manufacturer expect for special application.
(h)
Provide valves suitable for the working hydraulic pressure specified for the
services and as specified in the Section 99 of this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification. Provide gate and globe valve suitable for
repacking under pressure. Regardless of service, do not furnish valves rated
for less than 1,035 kPa working pressure.
(i)
Valve Connections:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(j)
(k)
All valves used in flushing water system shall be suitable for use with
seawater.
(l)
All valves shall be arranged so that clockwise rotation of the spindle closes the
valve. Where installed at a change in direction of the pipework, angle valves
are preferred to straight valves and bends.
(m)
All valves shall be provided with an indicator to show the open and shut
position.
2/26
January 2011
95.2
(n)
(o)
Valves and cocks for installation in screwed jointed pipework shall have taper
screwed ends. Flanges of flanged valves shall be to BS EN 1092-2 for PN 16
rating or otherwise specified.
(p)
ISO 7005
Metallic Flanges
BS 416
BS 970 : Part 1
BS 1010 : Part 2
BS 1188
BS 1212 : Part 1
BS 1212 : Part 3
BS 1244 : Part 2
Metal
Sinks
for
Domestic
Purposes.
Specification for Sit-On and Inset Sinks
3/26
January 2011
BS 1254
BS 1256
BS 1387
BS 1876
BS 1965 : Part 1
BS 1968
BS 2456
BS 3100
BS 3505
BS 3974 : Part 2
BS 4346 : Part 1
BS 4772
BS 5150
BS 5152
BS 5154
BS 5163
BS 5422
4/26
January 2011
BS 5503 : Part 3
BS 5520
BS 5627
BS 6129 : Part 1
BS 6340 : Part 8
BS 7357
BS EN 545
BS EN 593
BS EN 598
BS EN 877
BS EN 1044
BS EN 1057
BS EN 1092-1
BS EN 1092-2
BS EN 1124
5/26
January 2011
BS EN 1254-1
BS EN 1254-2
BS EN 1254-4
BS EN 1329-1
BS EN 1452 -1
BS EN 1452 -2
BS EN 1452 -3
BS EN 1452 -4
BS EN 1452 -5
BS EN 1515-1
BS EN 1561
BS EN 1563
Bs EN 1982
BS EN 10028-1
BS EN 10028-2
6/26
January 2011
BS EN 10029
BS EN 10051
BS EN 10213-1
BS EN 10213-2
BS EN 10216-1
BS EN 10217-1
BS EN 10253-1
BS EN 10259
BS EN 12106
BS EN 12164
BS EN 12165
BS EN 12167
BS EN 12334
BS EN 12420
BS EN 13709
7/26
Wrought and
and
January 2011
95.3
MATERIALS
95.3.1
Above Ground Waste, Soil, Combined Soil and Waste and Vent Pipes
95.3.2
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Cast iron pipes and fittings with epoxy paint. The epoxy paint shall be applied
to provide a thickness of not be less than 130 m.
(e)
(f)
The flexible couplings shall be made of stainless steel grade 316 tightened
multiple high grade stainless steel bolts of adequate strength to hold the pipe
works in their correct alignment throughout the maximum imposed loads plus
20%
(g)
(h)
(i)
Access points shall be provided in pipe and fittings to comply with the
Buildings Department's requirements.
Underground Rainwater, Waste, Soil, Combined Soil and Waste and Vent
Pipes
(a)
(b)
8/26
January 2011
95.3.3
95.3.4
Pipework shall be of ductile iron pipes and fittings to BS EN 598 Class K9 with
flexible joint.
(b)
(c)
The flexible couplings shall be made of stainless steel grade 316 tightened by
one or more high grade stainless steel bolts of adequate strength to held the
pipe works in their correct alignment.
(d)
(e)
(f)
Adequate access doors shall be provided in pipe and fittings to meet Buildings
Department's requirements.
(g)
Unless otherwise shown, all visible pipe work shall be constructed in Stainless
Steel to Grade 316 with Satin Finish.
(h)
The stainless steel pipes shall be jointed by stainless steel flexible couplings.
The coupling housing is to be manufactured in 316 stainless steel conforming
to ASTM A 351, A 743 & A 744. Bolts/Nuts shall be of the round-head,
square-neck, type 316 stainless steel bolts and heavy hex nuts conform to
ASTM F-593. The seals shall be EPDM to B.S. 2494.
(i)
No joints shall be allowed in any portion of the pipework within the visible
length of the RWP passing through the public areas.
(j)
(k)
The Contractor shall select the pipe diameter and pipe thickness to allow the
pipe to run unsupported through the entire exposed length of the concourse
taking into account all expected operational forces and potential impact loads
of passengers and baggage
9/26
January 2011
(l)
The pipework shall not contain any joints within the visible length of the RWP
passing through the public areas.
(m) The Contractor shall be responsible for all necessary submissions to the
BD/DSD.
95.3.5
(b)
For Distribution to All Draw Off Points and Cleansing Water Pipe
(i)
95.3.6
(b)
95.3.8
95.3.7
Pipework for hot water supply shall be copper in half hard condition with
thermal insulation and shall comply with BS EN 1057 R250. Fittings for use
with copper pipes shall comply with BS EN 1254 Part 1 & 4, capillary joint and
shall be non-dezincifiable. Silver brazing filler material shall comply with BS
EN 1044 and shall be used on all capillary joints on hot water supply system.
Pipework shall be carbon steel and shall comply with BS EN 10216-1 and BS
EN 10217 Part1 with minimum pipe thickness of 5.6 mm. Carbon steel butt
weld fittings shall comply with BS 1965 : Part 1 and BS EN 10253-1 jointed by
welding. All pipes and fittings shall be coated with minimum one layer of
external epoxy primer.
10/26
January 2011
95.3.9
Above ground irrigation water pipework shall comply with Section 95.3.5 (a).
(b)
General
(i)
(ii)
gate valves
: BS 5150, BS 5154;
globe valves
: BS 5152, BS 5154;
butterfly valves
: BS EN 593; and
non-return valves
: BS EN12334, BS 5154;
: BS EN 1982;
gunmetal
: BS EN 1982 LG2;
: BS EN 12163,
: BS EN 12164,
: BS EN 12167;
: BS EN 1561;
stainless steel
: BS EN 1563;
steel castings:
y
pressure purposes
non-pressure purposes
: BS 3100.
11/26
January 2011
(b)
Gate Valves
(i)
isolating valves shall be of fullway gate type and regulating valves shall
be of globe type, unless otherwise specified;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) gates valves for the hot water system shall be copper alloy and shall
comply with BS 5154 PN 25. Gates shall be double disc or split wedge
type, all gunmetal. Pipe connections shall be screwed BSP or flanged
and shall comply with BS EN 1092-1 & 2 and BS EN 1515-1.
(c)
Globe Valves
(i)
heavy pattern outside screw rising stem type with cast iron hand
wheel;
cast iron with bronze trim for use in the potable water supply
system;
cast iron with zinc free bronze trim or stainless steel trim grade 316
to BS 970 : Part 1 and suitable for sea water duty for use in the
flushing water supply system;
12/26
January 2011
(d)
(e)
Non-Return Valves
(i)
Non-return valves for use in the potable water system not exceeding
50 mm shall be of bronze construction to BS 5154 PN 25, of the silent
type with screwed plug cover and shall be suitable for installation in a
horizontal or vertical pipe line. Pipe connections shall be screwed BSP
or flanged to BS EN 1092-1 & 2 and BS EN 1515-1;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(f)
loose jumper stop cocks and valves in nominal sizes up to and including
50 mm shall be:
-
ball float valves shall be of the slow closing type with tinned copper float,
unless otherwise specified elsewhere. The valve body shall be robust
shaped to give a good flow pattern;
13/26
January 2011
(ii)
the valve piston shall close in the direction of flow such that the pressure
from the mains supply acts to keep the valve closed and the piston seal
is afforded protection from the flow by the piston;
(iii)
(iv)
ball float valves shall be of bronze or cast iron valves body with nickel
alloy and stainless steel working parts;
(v)
(vi)
ball float valves over 50 mm for water tank shall be cast iron body with
gunmetal piston, seat and guide, suitable for high pressure. For salt
water systems ball float valves shall have a cast iron body with zinc free
bronze piston, seat and guide;
(vii) where ball float valves are installed inside sump tanks, extended guide
pipes with submerged discharge ends shall be provided after ball valves.
Guide pipes shall be of diameters not less than the incoming pipes and
shall be holed as appropriate to avoid back siphoning;
(viii) all internal parts shall be easily removable for maintenance with the face
and piston seals easily replaceable;
(ix)
ball floats selected for valves shall be sized in accordance with the
pressure zone of the valve, and shall comply with BS 1968 or BS 2456;
(x)
ball float valves for flushing cisterns shall be diaphragm type float
operated valves to BS 1212 : Part 3 with rubber or plastic diaphragms
suitable for high, medium or low pressure. Metal parts of valves shall be
suitably coated to prevent corrosion;
(xi)
for fresh water applications ball floats may be of copper, tinned copper,
or plastic. For salt water applications ball floats shall be either neoprene
coated copper or plastic. All ball floats shall be spherical unless
otherwise specified; and
(xii) the use of jointing material based on red lead will not be permitted.
Solder used for jointing copper or copper alloy potable water pipes shall
be lead free and comply with BS EN 1254-1 and 2.
(g)
14/26
January 2011
(ii)
(h)
(i)
pressure gauges shall be installed on both the inlet side and the
outlet side of the reducing valve set. Each pressure gauge shall,
register kPa and be calibrated to twice the working pressure, fitted
with a hand set red pointer and an indicating block pointer. Each
gauge shall be fitted with a lever handle, plug cock and gunmetal
syphon and cock for inspection gauge, and mounted on a
hardboard panel fixed to the wall in an easily readable position;
the water hammer arrestor shall be stainless steel grade 316 to BS 970 :
Part 1 construction suitable for seawater application;
(ii)
the unit shall have welded nesting type bellows surrounded by non-toxic
mineral oil in a factory sealed pressurised compression chamber
capable of absorbing the hydrostatic shock occurring in water-lines; and
(iii)
the unit shall be suitable for 1,600 kPa working pressure and shall be
installed in an upright position or as recommended by the manufacturer.
(iv)
The water hammer arrestor installed inside tank rooms shall be of hydropneumatic accumulator bladder type whilst those installed for toilet
blocks shall be piston type.
to BS 1010 : Part 2;
(ii)
(iii)
in seawater corrosion resisting zinc free bronze for use in flushing water
supply system;
(iv)
(v)
chromium plated;
(vi)
15/26
January 2011
(j)
(k)
(ii)
suitable for the water supply pressure of 70 kPa to 700 kPa with
minimum flow rate of 0.15 L/s;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Flushing Valves
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
valve body and all water contacting parts shall be made of either/or the
combination of gunmetal to BS EN 1982 and stainless steel in grade 316
to BS 970 : Part 1;
(v)
all flushing valves shall pass the 200,000 cycles endurance test as
required by Water Authority;
(vi)
(vii) flushing valves for water closets shall be manually operated by lever.
-
16/26
January 2011
(b)
Shower
(i)
(ii)
Wash Basins
(i)
wash basins shall be to BS 1188 and shall be made from vitreous china
of the following types:
-
type A (1) with back skirting up to 76 mm high, size 635 x 455 mm;
(ii)
cold water tap shall be connected to wash basins and shall be spring
loaded type for the wash basins in public areas;
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
water tight seal between the walls and the basins shall be made by
using silicone sealant.
Sinks
(i)
17/26
January 2011
(ii)
(d)
(e)
Urinals
(i)
95.4
SUBMISSIONS
95.4.1
The following particulars of the proposed pipework, fittings and valves shall be
submitted to the Project Manger for review without objection:
(i)
(ii)
details of the pipe joints, pipe support hangers, guides and anchors;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
18/26
January 2011
95.4.2
Samples
(a)
The following samples of the proposed pipework, fittings and valves shall be
submitted to the Project Manger together with the particulars referred to in
Section 95.4.1 above.
(i)
(ii)
valves; and
(iii)
95.5
WORKMANSHIP
95.5.1
Pipework
(a)
(b)
Pipework shall not generate or transmit vibration or noise, nor shall it sag,
bow, reverse pitch, liquid flushing, trap, deflect, hammer or strain any
connected plant.
(c)
Pipes shall be installed with correct falls for venting and draining and attention
must be paid to neatness of installation, i.e. groups of pipes shall be
accurately spaced, valves and joints symmetrically arranged.
Where
practicable, when two or more pipes are visible and change direction together
bends shall be formed from a common radius point. All vent pipes shall have
a minimum gradient of 1:80 unless otherwise noted on the Employers
Drawings.
(d)
In particular for drainage pipes, cleaning eyes shall be provided at bends and
tees, etc. and access doors shall be provided at the lowest accessible point of
the pipes. The access doors shall be sealed with a rubber or synthetic washer
and secured by bolts.
(e)
The Contractor shall bond all metal water pipes to the electrical installation
main earth terminal as near as possible to their point of entry into the building.
(f)
(g)
Provide solar protection or insulation for pipes running at roof top by shelter or
by painting them white.
(h)
Pipes shall not run through lift motor rooms, switch rooms, transformer rooms,
PABX rooms, telephone rooms, or computer rooms.
(i)
In other areas, pipes shall not be located within 1.5 m of any electrical
apparatus.
(j)
Pipework over passages for plant operators and services shall have a
minimum clearance of 2100 mm from the finished floor level.
19/26
January 2011
95.5.2
95.5.3
(k)
Sufficient elbows and offsets shall be provided to permit free expansion and
contraction of pipe runs.
(l)
Large radius elbows and bends shall be factory fabricated for drainage pipes.
(m)
(n)
Pipe Penetrations
(a)
Pipes shall be sleeved when passing through walls, floors and ceilings.
(b)
The sleeves shall be short lengths of galvanized mild steel pipe and where
fitted in floors, they shall extend 100 mm above the finished floor level unless
otherwise indicated on the Employers Drawings. For copper pipe, sleeves
shall be either copper or brass.
(c)
(d)
Pipe sleeves fitted in fire rated walls or floors shall be caulked for the full depth
with fire resistant material providing the same fire resisting period as the
element through which the pipe breaches.
(e)
Masking plates shall be provided on both sides of walls and ceilings and shall
be sealed by the weather proof material.
(f)
Where UPCV / PE pipes pass through any fire / protected compartment floor
or wall, fire collars acceptable to FSD shall be installed to pipework with
installation method recommended by the manufacturer of the fire collar and
approved by FSD.
Pipe Supports
(a)
(b)
All pipe supports shall be steel, adjustable for height and prime coated and
finish coated with rustoleum. Pipe support materials shall be:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
20/26
January 2011
(c)
(d)
(e)
All fasteners and bolts shall be furnished with lock washers and nuts.
(f)
(g)
Pipe supports shall provide for the removal of any pipe section without the
necessity of disconnecting other adjacent pipes.
(h)
For pipework up to 50 mm fixed to solid structures: brackets shall be screwon or long shank built-in type. Fixings to timber or to light-weight structures
shall be screwed.
(i)
(j)
The discharge pipework from pumps and all pipework where vibration could
be transmitted to the building structure shall be supported with brackets
through neoprene-in-shear hangers or with spring mounted brackets though
neoprene/rubber washers at contact of bracket to pipe shall be provided.
(k)
(l)
(m)
Spacing of supports shall not exceed the intervals given below unless
otherwise indicated.
Table for Maximum Support Spacing
Material of
Pipework
Nominal
Ductile Iron
Support Centre(m)
Bore(mm)
Vertical
Horizontal
All
3.0
1.75
Cast Iron
All
3.0
1.75
Galvanized
Steel
Up to 15
2.4
1.8
20and 25
3.0
2.4
32
3.0
2.7
40 and 50
3.6
3.0
65 and 80
4.5
3.6
5.4
4.5
21/26
January 2011
Material of
Pipework
Nominal
Copper
UPVC
95.5.4
Support Centre(m)
Bore(mm)
Vertical
Horizontal
15 to 22
1.8
1.2
28
2.4
1.8
35 and 42
3.0
2.4
54
3.0
2.7
76 and 108
3.6
3.0
15-20
0.9
0.6
25-32
1.1
0.9
40-80
1.4
1.2
100
1.9
1.9
150
2.1
2.1
Pipe Joints
(a)
be
in
accordance
with
the
manufacturers
(b)
Ductile iron pipes shall be jointed with flanges or flanged fittings. Flanges
shall comply with BS EN 1092: Part 2 PN 16.
(c)
Galvanized mild steel pipes up to and including 100 mm nominal bore shall
be jointed with screwed fittings. Screwed flanges shall only be used for
galvanized steel pipes 150 mm and above.
(d)
(ii)
(iii)
the outside of the tubing and inside of the fittings at the point of contact
shall be cleaned before commencing jointing.
(e)
UPVC / PE pipe shall not be joined by screw threads. Fixing and jointing
UPVC / PE pipes shall follow the manufacturers recommendations. Jointing
UPVC / PE pipes to pipes of other material shall be connected by proprietary
adaptors.
(f)
Fittings for carbon steel pipes shall comply with BS 1965 : Part 1 and BS EN
10253-1 jointed by welding. All pipes and fittings shall be coated with minimum
one layer of external epoxy primer.
22/26
January 2011
95.5.5
95.5.6
Every Section of branch supply piping and water supply risers shall be
controlled by a stop valve.
(b)
(c)
Fire Collars
(a)
95.5.7
95.5.8
95.5.9
All UPVC / PE drain pipes and flushing pipes passing through floor slabs or
walls separating fire compartment shall be equipped with FSD approved fire
collars to maintain the compartmentation.
Access Pipes
(a)
Access pipes shall be provided at the lowest accessible point of each rain
water, soil and waste pipe, at each junction and change in direction of piping,
or elsewhere indicated on the Employers Drawings.
(b)
Access pipes shall be sealed with a rubber or synthetic washer and secured
by two bolts.
(b)
(c)
Anchors & guides and metallic bellows shall comply with BS 3974 : Part 2 and
BS 6129 : Part 1 respectively.
(d)
Bellows type expansion joints shall be provided for all pipework passing
through building expansion joints.
(b)
Joints shall comprise thin wall multi-plied omega formed convoluted bellows of
stainless steel material to BS EN 10029, 10051 and 10259 of appropriate
type.
(c)
The bellow expansion joint shall be provided with a close fitting stainless steel
internal liner to reduce turbulent flow.
(d)
End termination to be carbon steel threaded male to ISO 7-1 or carbon steel
flanges to ISO 7005 Standard to suit the line pressure.
23/26
January 2011
(e)
(f)
Design working pressure shall not be less than 2,000 kPa unless otherwise
specified.
(g)
(h)
The lateral and axial movements of the expansion joint shall not be less than
6 mm.
(i)
(b)
Waste outlets to wash basins, sinks, and showers shall be bedded using
proprietary jointing compounds. The Contractor shall provide and install
compression couplings or soldered capillary jointed couplings to connect water
tubing to taps and valves, to connect wastes and overflows.
(c)
Taps shall be fixed to make a watertight seal with the sanitary appliance. Hot
taps shall be fitted on the left and cold taps on the right as viewed by the user
of the appliance.
(d)
All accessories shall be fixed using brass or stainless steel screws set into
plastic plugs as required.
(e)
(f)
Water tight seal between the walls and the basins shall be made by using
silicone sealant.
(g)
(h)
Stainless steel sinks shall be properly built into cabinets with the sink back set
into the tile work as shown on the Employers Drawings. The Contractor shall
ensure that no crevices remain anywhere around the edge surfaces which will
harbour dirt and shall point joints between counter tops and sink sides with
silicone sealant as detailed
(i)
bed W. C. pans on concrete floors in white lead putty or other nonhardening compound. If cement mortar is used for bedding, it shall be
not richer than 1:6 ratio of cement to sand, and a thin layer should be
applied only to that part of the pedestal which is in contact with the floor.
Fix with No.14 SG round-headed brass screws 70 mm long with domed
plastic inserts in colour to match to fixture; and
24/26
January 2011
(ii)
jointing W.C. pans to soil pipes with PVC W.C. pan connectors to BS
5627 or other type shall be reviewed without objection by the Project
Manger;
(j)
(k)
Wall hung type W.C. pans shall be fixed to load bearing walls or support the
walls and the edge of the W.C. pans shall be made by appropriate sealant.
(l)
(m)
(n)
(i)
(ii)
bed treads in cement and sand mortar 1:3 with fall towards channel;
(iii)
completely fill space behind slabs with cement and sand mortar 1:5; and
(iv)
(ii)
bed base and overlap facing in cement and sand mortar 1:3.
(o)
(p)
fix bowl and division to wall with brackets, concealed hangers or screw,
as required.
Samples: (i)
(ii)
Prototypes: (i)
(ii)
(iii)
25/26
January 2011
(q)
(iv)
(v)
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and/or clear away all prototypes.
Benchmarks: (i)
The Contractor shall ensure that a benchmark is completed for the first
public toilet block including all fixing seals in order that the quality of the
Contractors work can be assessed prior to commencement of the
Permanent Works.
(ii)
26/26
January 2011
96.1
96.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the general requirements for town gas reticulation and
installation works.
(b)
Town gas reticulation and installation works shall generally comply with all
regulations and requirements including those of the government departments
(e.g. FSD, BD and EMSD) and Gas Supply Company. The Works shall
comply with the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
BS 5501 : Part 5
BS 5501 : Part 7
DW/144
96.3
MATERIALS
96.3.1
96.3.2
All pipework and fittings for town gas reticulation and installation works shall
refer to Section 95 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
Pipe Support
(a)
All pipe support for town gas reticulation and installation works shall refer to
Section 95 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
1/7
January 2011
96.3.3
Enclosure for town gas pipes shall be provided at the non ventilated area and
had individual continuous pipe enclosure (2 HRS F.R.P.) with ventilation
opening at both high level and low level to open air.
(b)
Enclosure shall have free opening area equal to 1/150 of cross section area of
the duct or 0.05m2 whichever is the greater.
(c)
(d)
(e)
The table of minimum internal size of enclosure for gas pipe are as follows:
Gas Pipe Diameter (mm)
15
100
20
100
25
150
32
150
40
150
50
200
80
300
100
300
150
350
200
450
250
500
300
550
96.4
96.4.1
General
Gas detection systems shall be installed to continuously monitor methane and
hydrogen gas concentrations in the sheaths. Details of the gas detection system
are as follows:
(a)
System Description
(i)
The gas detection system shall consist of three major components: (1)
the microprocessor-controlled gas alarm control unit, (2) the explosionproof pellistor (electrocatalytic principle of heat reaction) sensor gas
detector and (3) a printer which records the time and LEL status of
individual gas detector.
2/7
January 2011
(b)
(ii)
(iii)
Equipment Specification
(i)
(c)
The gas detectors shall be able to detect either of the following gases at
20% and 40% of the LEL (lower explosive limit):
- methane; or
- hydrogen.
(ii)
The gas sensor for combustible gases and vapours shall work on an
electrocatalytic principle of heat of reaction (Pellistor).
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
The wiring of the detector data bus shall be with unshielded 3 or 4 wires
twisted pair in conduits.
(x)
(xi)
3/7
January 2011
(xii) The gas detector shall comply with the following conditions:-
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
IEC Protection Category
Supply Voltage
Gas Concentration
-25C to +64C;
10% to 95%;
> IP 65;
19V to 27V; and
20% LEL to
selectable.
100%
LEL
(ii)
The gas control unit shall be a self contained unit, capable of operating
in a stand-alone mode, with or without connection to a higher
hierarchical system level.
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
The gas control unit shall process and evaluate a minimum of 40 gas
detectors via data bus loop or stub lines.
(vi)
The gas control unit shall have common potential free contacts for
failure, warning, pre-alarm, alarm and remote transmission to the MBMS
and FSD.
4/7
January 2011
(vii) The potential free contacts shall be free programmable in "and/or" mode.
(viii) It shall be possible to integrate a protocol printer into the local gas
control unit.
(ix)
The gas control unit shall contain the power supply for the entire gas
detection system.
(x)
(xi)
The gas control unit shall be equipped with a built-in standby battery and
charger rated to maintain operation for 6 hours after mains power failure.
An alarm condition shall be maintained for at least 30 minutes after the
expiry of the 6 hours time period.
(xii) Upon loss of mains power, the power supply unit shall automatically
revert to battery power, and the system shall remain fully operational.
Automatic re-start after power surge is required.
(xiii) When battery voltage drops below 20V of nominal 24V DC, a fault
indication shall be provided to indicate a battery fault condition.
(xiv) The entire power supply and charger circuits including all fuses shall be
monitored by MBMS. Any malfunction, blown or missing fuse shall
result in a fault indication on the local gas control unit, and transmission
of the fault to the MBMS.
(xv) The gas control unit shall comply with the following ambient conditions:
- Operating temperature
- Relative
humidity
condensing)
- IEC protection category
-5C to +50C;
(non- Maximum 95%; and
Minimum IP 20.
(xvi) Automatic gas detector signals from gas detection panel shall be
repeated to the existing MBMS and gas detection system. Digital I/O
shall be provided in each detection panel for connection to the existing
MBMS and gas detection system.
(e)
Protocol Printer
(i)
The printer shall be protocol type and record all detector status. It shall
be integral with the gas control unit.
5/7
January 2011
96.5
SUBMISSIONS
96.5.1
96.5.2
The following particulars of the proposed town gas reticulation and installation
works shall be submitted to the Project Manger for review:
(i)
(ii)
details of the pipe joints, pipe support hangers, guides and anchor;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
Samples
(a)
The following samples of the proposed town gas reticulation and installation
works shall be submitted to the Project Manger together with the particulars
referred to in Section 96.5.1 above.
(i)
(ii)
valves;
(iii)
(iv)
96.6
96.6.1
Pipework
(a)
(b)
6/7
January 2011
96.6.2
(c)
Short lengths of horizontal pipework between risers and kitchen cabins, and
similar arrangements, shall be enclosed in 6 mm thick mild steel sheaths in a
similar manner to that required for risers.
(d)
Pipework associated with the town gas installation shall be fully welded. All
joints shall be tested using non-destructive methods incorporating X-ray
techniques or similar. The testing method shall review without objection by
the Project Manager.
(e)
(f)
Adequate access panels shall be provided in the sheaths for access and
maintenance of the automatic gas detectors.
(g)
Pipe Supports
(a)
Installation of pipe support for town gas reticulation and installation works shall
refer to Section 95 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
7/7
January 2011
97.1
GENERAL
This section of General Materials and Workmanship Specification covers the
general requirements for all pump, tank and relevant accessories.
(a)
97.2
All pump, tank and necessary materials and workmanship shall generally
comply with all regulations and requirements of the Relevant Authorities (e.g.
Drainage Services Department-DSD, Buildings Department-BD, Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department-EMSD and the like). The Works shall
comply with the following standards:
(i)
(ii)
BS 3134
BS 4164
BS 5512
BS 559
1/18
for
January 2011
97.3
MATERIALS
97.3.1
Pump
97.3.2
(a)
(b)
The pumps shall be able to deliver water at flow rates as indicated on the
equipment schedules on the Employers Drawings. The pump duty heads
indicated on the equipment schedules are for guidance only.
(c)
Water pumps shall operate normally under automatic control, by water level
control switches and / or pressure switches. A manual overriding switch shall
be provided for each pump.
(d)
The pumps selected shall have a relatively flat characteristic suitable for both
of the combined parallel operation and single-pump operation. Curves
indicating excessive shut-off head shall not be permitted.
(e)
Pumps speeds shall not exceed 2900 r.p.m. unless otherwise specified.
(f)
Each complete pump unit including motor and drive shall be supplied from a
single manufacturer.
(g)
(h)
Pump manufacturers shall have been in manufacturing pumps for at least five
years.
(i)
The friction head shall be evaluated based on the total flow when the duty
pumps are operating simultaneously.
(j)
(k)
Lifting frames or eye bolts shall be fitted to casings for the connection of lifting
chains.
(l)
Two mechanical seals shall be fitted on the shaft between the electric motor
and the pump impeller. The space between these two seals shall be oil filled
and an oil seepage detector shall be provided.
(m)
Type of Pump
(a)
(ii)
2/18
January 2011
(b)
(iii)
(iv)
Cast iron stuffing boxes housing shall comply with BS EN 1561 and shall
be of ample length with bronze lined gland and neck bush, fitted with
packing reviewed without objection by the Project Manager and lantern
ring water seal. Drain piping to remove gland leakage shall be provided.
(v)
Pump sets shall comprise duplicate pumps, and complete with pressure
vessel, motor starter panel and control unit. Pump set shall a package
unit. Locally assembled pump sets will not be accepted.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Cast iron stuffing boxes housing shall comply with BS EN 1561 and shall
be of ample length with bronze lined gland and neck bush, fitted with
packing reviewed without objection by the Project Manager and lantern
ring water seal. Drain piping to remove gland leakage shall be provided.
(vi)
(vii) One or more pressure vessels shall be provided and installed on the
same mounting.
The vessels shall be of adequate capacity to
accommodate a considerable fluctuation in water demand by the system
and shall minimize the start/stop cycles of the pumps.
(viii) The vessels shall be constructed of steel plate built to ASME Standards
for Unfired Pressure Vessels. All ancillary internal parts shall be copper
and bronze. The vessel cell body and the jointing/welding part shall be
free from scale and sharp edge.
(ix)
3/18
January 2011
(x)
(xi)
The unit shall be complete with control panel and all accessory controls,
including starters, isolators, overload relay, selector switch, low level outout for pumps and pressure switches. The complete control panel shall
also be mounted on the common bed plate fabricated from mild steel.
(xii) The operation of the working pumps shall be initiated by the pressure
sensors/switches in sequence. If the pressure in the system drops to
the predetermined level, the working pumps shall cut in automatically.
Pump start/stop frequency shall not be more than 6 times per hour at the
rated output.
(xiii) The pump casings shall be of close-grained cast iron accurately
machined and assembled with metal-to-metal joints.
(c)
(d)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Cast iron stuffing boxes housing shall comply with BS EN 1561 and shall
be of ample length with bronze lined gland and neck bush, fitted with
packing reviewed without objection by the Project Manager and lantern
ring water seal. Drain piping to remove gland leakage shall be provided.
(v)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
4/18
January 2011
(e)
(ii)
Facilities shall be provided for raising and lowering the pump, and the
discharge pipe connection shall be automatic.
(iii)
The coupling between the pump and motor shall be a double mechanical
seal. The seal shall be enclosed in an oil fill chamber for dissipation of
heat.
(iv)
The pump impeller and water chute shall be a non-clog type and
capable of pumping both soil or waste water containing solids up to 65
rnm and high viscosity sludge.
(v)
(vi)
(vii) The pump casing shall be of stainless steel grade 316 to BS 970 with
impeller of stainless steel grade 316 to BS 970 or other approved
materials. Shaft sleeves shall be of zinc free bronze, and shaft of
stainless steel grade in 316 to BS 970.
(f)
Each pump set shall comprise duplicate pumps, and come complete
with pressure vessel, motor starter panel and control unit as a
packaged unit.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Cast iron stuffing box housings shall comply with BS EN 1561 and
shall be provided with a bronze lined gland and neck bush, fitted with
packing and lantern ring water seal. Drain piping to remove gland
leakage shall be provided;
5/18
January 2011
97.3.3
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
(xiii)
The unit shall be complete with control panel and all accessory
controls, including but not limited to, starters, isolators, overload relay,
selector switch, low level cut-out for pumps and adjustable pressure
switches to control pump operation. The complete control panel shall
also be mounted on a common bed plate fabricated from mild steel.
Pump Fitting
(a)
Pump Bearings
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
6/18
January 2011
(b)
(c)
Pump Packings
(i)
(ii)
The packing shall be suitable for use in fresh water, potable water, sea
water and flushing water applications as appropriate. Size of the
packing shall be commensurate with the size of the pump.
Pump Casing
(i)
(d)
Flexible Connectors
(i)
(e)
Bed Plates
(i)
(f)
The pump casings for flushing water system and drainage sump pump
shall be stainless steel grade 316 to BS 970 accurately machined and
assembled with metal-to-metal joints. All other casings including potable
water and hot water shall be of close-grained cast iron.
The common bed plates for pumps and motors shall be from the same
manufacturer as for the pump. The complete assembly shall be skid
mounted on spring type vibration isolators.
Strainers
(i)
(ii)
The total open area of basket perforation shall be 3 times the inside area
of pipes.
(iii)
Strainers shall have cast-iron body and stainless steel, grade 316 to BS
970, basket with 1.5mm perforation.
(iv)
7/18
January 2011
(g)
(h)
(v)
(vi)
Initially each screen shall be fitted with lined baskets, reinforced on both
sides with an open bottom. After initial cleaning, they shall be replaced
with standard basket, suitable for service. All Y type strainers shall be
complete with 25 mm isolating valve for drain or blow-off.
Pressure Gauges
(i)
Baked enamel iron case with dials not less than 100 mm, threaded
chromium plated brass ring with heavy glass, bronze spring tube,
precision movement and micrometer adjustment. Furnish pulsation
dampers, steel pipe fittings and shut off cocks of needle point globe type
all brass contactor, for 1,000 kPa working pressure.
(ii)
97.3.4
A coupling shall be provided between the pump and motor, and shall be
semi-flexible of the steel pin/rubber bush type, accurately aligned. The
coupling shall reduce shock to the bearings etc. and shall not
compensate for misalignment. The pin and bush coupling shall be
installed to the same accuracy of alignment as rigid coupling,
Pump Control
(a)
General
(i)
(b)
Controls for the pumps shall consist of watertight float switches mounted
on stainless steel rods (separate on and off switches for each pump).
Upfeed Pumps
(i)
Unless otherwise stated the system shall include a duty and a standby
pump. The pumps shall be automatically controlled to maintain the
water level in the gravity water tanks.
(ii)
When the water level in the gravity tank is drawn to below half of the full
storage levels, the duty pump shall operate and continue to run until the
water level reaches 25 mm below the invert of the overflow pipe, when
the tank is at full storage capacity.
(iii)
Float type mercury switches shall be used for both potable water and
flushing water tanks.
8/18
January 2011
(iv)
An overriding differential float switch in the sump tank shall cut off the
pumps operation when the tank has been exhausted.
(v)
(vi)
Unless otherwise stated the system shall include a duty and a standby
pump. The pumps shall be automatically controlled to maintain the
water level in the gravity water tanks.
(ii)
The duty pump shall be started when the pressure switch senses a
pressure drop in the pressure vessels to the preset low level or the high
level water control switch in the water tank senses high water level in the
tank.
(iii)
When the duty pump is overloaded, the standby pump shall be brought
into operation automatically by an overload relay.
(iv)
The pumps shall be operated alternately, that is, changing between the
duty/standby status by an alternate relay.
(v)
Variable frequency drive shall be used for all pump motor starting.
(vi)
Sump Pumps
(i)
Unless otherwise stated, there shall be two sump pumps in each sump
pit, one as duty and one as standby. The pump(s) shall be automatically
controlled to transfer the soil or waste water to the manhole or the
nearest drainage pipe connections.
(ii)
(iii)
When the water level in the sump pit reaches the first predetermined
high level, the duty pump shall operate and continue to run until the
water level drops back to the low level.
9/18
January 2011
(iv)
If the water level continues to rise to the second predetermined level, the
stand-by pump shall also operate in parallel with the duty pump. The
pumps shall only stop when the water level drops back to the low level.
(v)
An extra high level alarm shall be provided at the vicinity of the pit or on
the control panel, when the water raises up to the level, an audible and
visual alarm shall be raised.
(vi)
(f)
Float Switches
(i)
High/low level float switches shall control pump starting and stopping.
Float switches shall also initiate the level alarm system.
(ii)
Float switches in the water tanks and sump pits shall be directly
connected to the motor control panels.
(iii)
All the alarms of the sump pits shall be wired back to the associated
motor control panels in the pump rooms or at the vicinity of the pit
respectively. Should any one of these alarms be actuated, an audible
and a visual alarm shall be indicated on the pump control panel.
The following status and alarm signals for remote indication at both local
control panels and the central control panel shall be provided:
- pump failure (one signal for each pump);
- pump running (one signal for each pump);
- pump stop (one signal for each pump);
- high level warning alarm for water tanks; and
- low level warning alarm for water tanks.
97.3.5
Control Panel
(a)
General
(i)
(ii)
10/18
January 2011
(iii)
(iv)
Volt free terminal strips shall be provided in each control panel for
connection by the GBMS for monitoring of the following status.
- pump operation pumps on, off and overload; and
- overflow and low water levels in water tanks (if necessary).
(v)
An overall interior plate shall be provided with cut-outs to suit the fuse
carriers, operating face of contactors and switch dollies to present a neat
appearance within the enclosure and to ensure that all wiring, live
terminals etc., are contained behind the panel.
(vi)
The panel shall be fixed by knurled screws for easy removal. If the
panel is of metal construction adequate bonding with the main enclosure
body shall be provided; in addition it shall not be possible to make
contact with the panel to any live parts while removing the panel.
(vii) In general the enclosures shall be IP 54 protection class and suitable for
wall mounting.
(b)
Indicating Lights
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
:white;
:blue or yellow
Vibration Control
(a)
General
(i)
(ii)
11/18
January 2011
(b)
(c)
(d)
Spring type isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without
any housing and complete with 6 mm neoprene acoustic friction pads
between the baseplate and the support.
(ii)
All mountings shall have levelling bolts that shall be rigidly bolted to the
equipment.
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Vibration Hangers
(i)
(ii)
Spring diameter and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough
to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 arc before contacting the
hole and short circuiting the spring.
(iii)
(iv)
(ii)
Manufacturer of multiple plies of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene both
molded and cured in hydraulic rubber presses.
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
12/18
January 2011
(vii) All connections shall be made with flanged sphere properly preextended as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent additional
elongation under pressure. Provide control tie-rods for all flexible
connector, as recommended by the manufacturer.
(viii) Connectors shall be type MFTNC.
(e)
Vibration Pads
(i)
(f)
(g)
Neoprene in-shear multi-layer waffle type with steel shims shall be used
in between waffles.
Bellows type expansion joints shall be provided for all pipework where
passing through building expansion joints.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Design working pressure shall not be less than 2,000 kPa unless
otherwise specified.
(v)
The lateral and axial movements of the expansion joint shall not be less
than +/- 6 mm.
(vi)
(h)
(ii)
(iii)
13/18
January 2011
97.3.7
Tank
(a)
General
(i)
(b)
(ii)
(iii)
Stainless steel or chrome plated bolts, washers and nuts on joints shall
be used.
(iv)
(v)
97.3.8
The Contractor shall supply and install flow switches in water tanks as
indicated below and shown on the Contractors Drawings.
(i)
roof tanks
- high level alarm (over-flow);
- low level alarm;
- high level cut-out for the upfeed water pump;
- low level cut-in for the upfeed water pump;
14/18
January 2011
- earthing probe;
- low level lock-out for booster pump set; and
- high level reset for booster pump set.
(ii)
sump tanks
- high level alarm (over-flow);
- low water level lock-out for the upfeed water pumps;
- high water level reset for the upfeed water pumps;
- earthing probe;
- low level alarm; and
- all alarm signals shall be linked to control room.
(b)
Water level controller shall be fitted in water tanks for monitoring the water
levels in the tank and to give the appropriate control / warning signals for the
system.
(c)
97.4
SUBMISSIONS
97.4.1
Submit Contractors Drawings showing plant room details, sump pit details,
plans, elevations, sections dimensions and operation weights of equipment,
electrical wiring and control diagram, pipework connections and flange details,
mounting and fixing details.
(b)
Submit Contractors Drawings for mounting and fixing details shall include
details and dimensions of pump bases, fixing bolts, flexible connections and
vibration isolators.
(c)
(d)
Submit calculation to indicate the exact pump head required according to the
pressure drops equipment being offered for review without objection by the
Project Manager.
(e)
(f)
(g)
15/18
January 2011
97.4.2
97.4.3
97.4.4
(h)
Submit all technical details for review without objection by the Project Manager
before the plinth/inertia block is being cast.
(i)
(j)
The Contractor shall calculate the pump heads and provide pumps with
adequate capacities, having submitted their detailed calculations to the Project
Manager for review without objection, before ordering.
(b)
Submit Contractors Drawings for tank openings, location and tank support
details.
(c)
(d)
Fibre glass tank when used for fresh water storage must be accompanied with
letter of compliance/certificate proving the tank material is non-toxic and is
entirely suitable for storage of water for potable use. An review without
objection letter from the WSD. is required.
(e)
Tanks shall be secured and rest on concrete plinth provided by the Contractor.
Details of tank plinth and required builder's work shall be submitted to Project
Manager for review without objection.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Submit the operation of alarm for review without objection by the Project
Manager.
(e)
Submit the installation detail of the sensing elements such as float switches for
review without objection by the Project Manager.
(b)
16/18
January 2011
(c)
(d)
(e)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
97.5
97.5.1
General
(a)
(b)
(c)
Each pump shall be provided with suction and discharge isolating valves and
where connected in parallel with other pumps, non-return check valves. Each
pump shall be provided with two pressure gauges, one connected to the
suction side, the other to the discharge.
(d)
(e)
(f)
17/18
January 2011
(g)
Cover the inlet and openings of the pump. Store pumps in rates and well
cornered and protected until ready to install.
(h)
18/18
January 2011
GENERAL
(a)
This section covers the specific requirements for electrical equipment and
installation for hydraulics services system. The general requirements for the
same shall be referred to Section 44.6.
(b)
The Works and materials described herein shall comply with Sections 46, 48,
49, 53, 57, and 59 of the General Materials and Workmanship Specification
(General Materials and Workmanship Specification) for general requirements
and details regarding the electrical installation including the following:
(i)
The Works and materials described herein shall comply with other
relevant sections of this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification including the sections which specify:
- Section 53 Motors; and
- Section 99 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning Hydraulic
Services.
98.2
98.3
MATERIALS
98.3.1
General
(i)
98.3.2
The degree of protection for pump control panels (PCPs), control panels
and similar enclosures shall be to IP 54 as specified in BS EN 60529.
Cable shall comply with Section 48 of the General Materials and Workmanship
Specification.
(b)
Electrical circuit protection devices, including but not limited to, circuit
breakers, isolators, switches and fused switches, shall comply with Section 46
of the General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
1/2
January 2011
98.3.3
98.3.4
Cable shall comply with Section 48 of the General Materials and Workmanship
Specification.
(b)
Cables shall be sized for the rated current of the connected load.
(c)
(d)
Colour coding of all cables shall comply with the New Cable Colour Code for
Fixed Electrical Installations published by the EMSD.
(b)
The Works and materials described herein shall comply with section 53.
98.4
WORKMANSHIP
98.4.1
98.4.2
(a)
Cabling and wiring shall comply with Section 48 of the General Materials and
Workmanship Specification.
(b)
The minimum conductor size shall be 2.5 mm2 for phase, neutral conductors
and earth conductors. Control circuit cabling conductor size shall be 1.5 mm2
minimum subject to voltage drop limitations.
98.4.3
98.5
Conduits and fittings shall comply with Section 49 of the General Materials
and Workmanship Specification.
Cable Containment systems, including but not limited to, cable trays, cable
trunkings, conduits and fittings installations shall comply with Section 49 of the
General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
SUBMISSIONS
The Contractor shall submit the following documents to the Project Manager for
review without objection:
(a)
details of pump control panels shall be submitted to the Project Manager for
review without objection. The Contractors Drawings of the pump control
panels shall include, but not be limited to, all necessary wiring, all indication
signals, visual/audio alarms, control, functions and component arrangements.
Labelling shall be in English and Chinese.
2/2
January 2011
99.1
99.2
GENERAL
(a)
The Plant shall be inspected, tested and commissioned to confirm that Plant
performance complies with the requirements of the Contract.
(b)
All such inspection, testing and commissioning shall, in particular but without
limitation, be planned, carried out and documented in accordance with:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
the construction quality plans and inspection and test plans prepared by
the Contractor in accordance with the relevant ISO standard and
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
TERMINOLOGY
(a)
The following terms shall be used in all programmes, quality plans, reports
and other documents produced:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) Phase - one or other of the phases identified in (i) - (iv) above;
1/11
January 2011
(x)
Site Tests - tests on static items of Plant and systems (e.g. inspection
and testing of welds and hydraulic testing of pipework) to ensure correct
and safe installation before setting to work;
(xi)
2/11
January 2011
99.3
(b)
(c)
The term Performance Tests as defined and used in the General Conditions
of Contract refers to the Confidence Trials and such further tests, if any,
identified as such in the Specification.
Manufacturing Phase:
- Factory Tests; and
- Type Tests.
(ii)
Installation Phase:
- Site Tests.
(iii)
Pre-Commissioning Phase:
- Component Tests; and
- Commissioning of elements of the Plant.
- Setting to work
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
3/11
January 2011
99.4
99.5
(b)
Any Deferred Seasonal Tests shall also be clearly identified in all plans and
programmes.
(c)
For the duration of the Defects Liability Period, operational and safety controls
shall be sealed if adjustment beyond defined limits could result in malfunction
and give rise to a defect.
(d)
The Contractor shall provide attendance and technical support during testing
and commissioning of any work with which the Contractor has an interface
during the confidence trails period in accordance with this General Materials
and Workmanship Specification.
QUALITY PLANS
(a)
The Contractor shall identify in his construction quality plans any division of
the Plant into discrete elements to facilitate the preparation and service of
Phase Notices as called for in this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification.
(b)
(c)
The Project Manager, in reviewing any inspection and test plan, may require
further and better inspection, testing and Commissioning documentation as
may be considered reasonably necessary to record these processes.
PHASE NOTICES
(a)
For each element of the Plant identified in the Contractor's construction quality
plans or, as the case may be, for the Plant as a whole:
(i)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager for
review a Phase Notice at the end of the Manufacturing Phase, the
Installation Phase and the Pre-commissioning Phase.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
The Phase Notice relating to an installation Phase shall confirm that the
Contractor is satisfied that the equipment or system or part of a system
is ready for starting the pre-commissioning tests.
(v)
4/11
January 2011
99.6
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the tolerances;
(v)
(vi)
(vii) pass/fail;
(viii) whether a concession shall be requested under Section 14 of the
General Specification;
99.7
(ix)
(x)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit his proposed Test Results Forms as
part of his submission of the relevant Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
Plan.
PHASE REPORTS
(a)
(b)
workmanship;
(ii)
5/11
January 2011
99.8
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
(d)
Any modifications to circuitry, instrumentation, etc. carried out any time shall
be recorded in detail in the Phase Reports and shown on the Contractors
Drawings.
(e)
(f)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
6/11
January 2011
99.9
99.10
99.11
(b)
The Contractor shall provide all necessary skilled labour and assistance for
testing, operating, adjusting, Commissioning and verifying the performance of
all Plant.
(c)
The Contractor's testing and Commissioning staff shall have had previous
experience with testing and Commissioning similar Plant of comparable duty.
(d)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
NOTIFICATIONS
(a)
7/11
January 2011
99.12
99.13
Prior to any inspection and testing by the Project Manager, the Contractor
shall inspect and test the Plant to ensure that equipment and facilities are
clean and complete and can reasonably be expected to meet successfully all
inspection and/or testing criteria.
(b)
Prior to setting to Work, testing and Commissioning, the Contractor shall clean
all Plant and shall confirm in writing to the Project Manager that all the work is
complete and satisfactory for the purpose of testing and Commissioning.
(c)
In the event that the Contractor considers that any testing is not appropriate or
required, the Contractor may submit alternative proposals to the Project
Manager for review without objection.
electric motors;
(ii)
water pump;
(iii)
valves;
(iv)
L.V. cables;
(v)
(vi)
99.14
FACTORY TESTS
(a)
Wherever practical, Factory Tests shall cover subsystems rather than just
individual components
(b)
(c)
(d)
8/11
January 2011
99.15
99.15.1 Pipework
(a)
The Contractor shall test each drainage stack as soon as practicable after
installation.
(b)
All pipework shall be tested by the Contractor for leaks before any pipework is
enclosed, insulated, or concealed in any way.
(c)
Pipework shall remain completely watertight during the testing time. Pipework
shall be filled with water sufficiently in advance of the test to allow it to come to
room temperature so that any sweating can evaporate.
(d)
Supply and install all necessary testing junctions and bends for underground
pipework, and seal off or remove them as directed by the Project Manager.
(e)
Services
(i)
Testing
Pressure
Kpa (Gauge)
1.
Underground
2.
Upfeed
3.
Distribution
1500
4.
Valves
1500
(ii)
(f)
Testing
Working
Pressure
Kpa (Gauge)
1500
Hydrostatic test Refer
item 1.5 time the
working
as item 99.15.1f
99.15.1g
pressure or
1500 kPa
which one is
greater
1.
Above Ground
2.
Underground
Water test of
1.5M
height
Mirror test and
colour water test
for alignment
3.
Pumped drain
pipe
Hydrostatic test
as item 99.15.1f
Refer item
99.15.1g
1200
Hydrostatic Test
(i)
All pipework shall be hydrostatically tested for a period of not less than
24 hours without leakage. The Contractor shall record all test figures
together with schedules of pipe lengths.
9/11
January 2011
(g)
The working pressure shall be the system static pressure plus the surge and
operation pressure of the system whilst the testing pressure shall be at 50%
higher than the working pressure or as stated in table 99.15.1e whichever is
higher.
(h)
Air testing above the level of the lowest sanitary appliance shall be carried out
by the Contractor as flows:
(i)
(j)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Water testing below the level of the lowest sanitary appliance shall be carried
out by the Contractor as flows:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
static head should not exceed 1200 mm at the high point of the test and
be a maximum of 2400 at the low point; and
(iv)
Smoke Test
(i)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10/11
January 2011
(b)
The Contractor shall confirm, by field observation and measurement, that all
programme functions and routines operate correctly and that all controlled
devices respond accordingly.
(c)
All GBMS inputs and outputs shall be tested and witnessed by the Contractor
through field observations to confirm the correct measurement and operation.
Confirmation of readings recorded by the GBMS shall include, but shall not be
limited to, the following:
(i)
(ii)
(b)
(c)
Test the operation of bimetallic overloads by winding down the set point
adjustment until the device trips.
11/11
January 2011
100.1
GENERAL
(a)
(ii)
hydraulic system;
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
communication systems;
(vi)
Any system changes in the GBMS shall involve changes to the system
configuration and programming of the GBMS as well as the screen graphics in
the BSI PC/workstations.
(c)
Any system changes in the GBMS shall not degrade the MTBF of the existing
equipment.
(d)
The GBMS is only adopted for PTB. The GBMS, when used in outside the
PTB and GTC, is called the SCADA system. This SCADA system is an
identical system to the GBMS and its function is to control and monitor the
following facilities:
(i)
(ii)
pumping stations;
(iii)
(iv)
tunnel facilities;
(v)
(vi)
1/5
January 2011
100.2
100.3
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A
Commercial
Standard
Building
Telecommunications
Cabling
BS 7671
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(ii)
electrical system:
- monitoring of individual distribution panel boards to indicate
operational alarms and status including lighting circuits, power
availability, and load shedding and restoration;
- monitoring of individual main switchboards to indicate power status,
alarm and load shedding and restoration;
- monitoring of lighting levels using photocell sensors and perform
other user functions to automatically control area lightings and
intensity control requirements;
- monitoring of substation alarms and power availability condition by
interfacing with the High Voltage Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition (HV SCADA) system and perform load shedding and
restoration functions; and
- monitoring of UPS power status;
(iii)
hydraulic system:
- level monitoring and pump status of potable water tanks and flushing
water tanks;
- status and level monitoring of sump pits, soil and grey water pits; and
- status monitoring of roof overflow detection;
2/5
January 2011
(iv)
fire alarm system for monitoring of fire tanks water levels and general
equipment status;
(v)
(vi)
communication systems:
-
(c)
Any system changes in the GMBS shall involve changes to the system
configuration and programming of the GMBS
(d)
3/5
January 2011
100.4
(a)
(b)
Communication links between field control units and I/O panels shall be Cat 5
UTP cables or fibre optic cables as specified in Section 102.
(c)
Interconnecting cables for data, signal and power between I/O panels and field
devices being monitored and controlled shall be shielded twisted pair cable as
specified in Section 102.5
(d)
The details of the system architecture and protocols shall refer to Employers
Drawings and the Employers existing Operation and Maintenance manuals.
The Contractor shall reconfigure the database and the associated screen
graphics for any changes to the system.
Points monitoring function activated by digital input (DI) signals to the GBMS
shall be in the form of voltage free contact type for relay, and configured in
Normally Open (N/O) or Normally Close (N/C) status as selected.
(b)
The control voltage associated with the GBMS remote switching facility shall
be maximum 24V DC or AC.
Points control function activated by digital output (DO) signals from the GBMS
shall be in the form of voltage free contact type rated at 24V DC and 2A
inductive, and are the change-over type to provide both normally open and
normally close connections.
(b)
The control voltage associated with the GBMS remote switching facility shall
be maximum 24V DC or AC.
(c)
(d)
Points monitoring function from sensor data measured by analogue input (AI)
signals shall be in the form of 2-wire at 4 to 20mA at 24V DC signals.
4/5
January 2011
(b)
Analogue to digital conversion shall be performed for the use of GBMS with
the following requirements:
(i)
Absolute accuracy
(ii)
(iii)
Input impedance
(iv)
Isolation
frame
input
to :
850V.
Points control function activated for driving actuator by analogue output (AO)
signals shall be in the form of 4 to 20 mA capable of operating into a 500
Ohms resistive load or 0 to 10V DC capable of operating into a 500 Ohms
resistive load.
(b)
(c)
5/5
January 2011
101.1
101.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section specifies the equipment and materials of the existing Mechanical
Building Management System (MBMS) in the Hong Kong International Airport.
(b)
Any system changes in the MBMS shall involve changes to the system
configuration and programming of the MBMS.
(c)
Any system changes in the MBMS shall not degrade the MTBF of the existing
equipment.
101.3
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A
Commercial
Standard
Building
Telecommunications
Cabling
BS 7671
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
101.3.1 General
(a)
(b)
In summary, the MBMS control and monitoring functions for the mechanical
systems comprise:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Automatic control of fan coil units, with operator control and monitoring
facilities;
(iv)
1/5
January 2011
(v)
(vi)
The MBMS utilizes a dual redundant computer system acting to effect central
processing of the following functions:
(i)
(ii)
(b)
(c)
The MBMS is divided into mechanical loops. Each loop is supported by a loop
controller formed from a dual redundant computer system.
(d)
(e)
The I/O panels are connected directly to the mechanical plant and general
interfaces with a number of I/O panels connected via a bus to the designed
BNA computer.
(f)
The system is widely distributed and makes extensive use of both optical fibre
and Category Type 5 cable for communications between the various nodes.
(g)
(h)
Any actions initiated by the operator are logged in the Event Database by
operator identifier. In addition, any control actions to a given point are allowed
only if the control level configured in the operator's profile exceeds the level
assigned to the controlled point.
(i)
2/5
January 2011
101.4
HARDWARE
101.4.1 Overview
(a)
(b)
The central servers are configured as redundant PCs operating in a hotstandby arrangement where one PC is designated as the primary and the
other as the hot standby computer. The central servers are situated in
communications rooms 2. Each central computer contains hard disks
configured in a RAID 1 array, a CD-ROM, an Ethernet network interface card
for redundant communications to the central HUB.
(b)
(ii)
provide central control and monitoring functions for the MBMS system
(iii)
(iv)
reflect the current status of all field equipment, sensors, and alarm
activity
(v)
(vi)
101.4.3 Workstations
(a)
The MBMS operator workstations are PCs with 21 monitors, together with an
Ethernet network interface card and a transceiver for communications to the
hubs. In addition each operator station is provided with a black & white laser
printer which is attached to the PC via its parallel port. These workstations
form an operator interface to the central system. The workstations run
software, which allows operators to monitor and control aspects of the
operation. Operator access to the MBMS system is controlled by graded levels
of password security.
The Building Network Adapter (BNA) are units located in each of the
communications rooms and are effectively data collectors and concentrators
for the lower level I/O controller.
3/5
January 2011
101.5
(a)
(b)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Points monitoring function activated by digital input (DI) signals to the MBMS
shall be in the form of voltage free contact type for relay, and configured in
Normally Open (N/O) or Normally Close (N/C) status as selected.
(b)
The control voltage associated with the MBMS remote switching facility is a
maximum of 24V DC/ AC.
Points control function activated by digital output (DO) signals to the MBMS
shall be in the form of voltage free contact type rated at 24V 2A inductive, and
are the change-over type to provide both normally open and normally close
connections.
(b)
The control voltage associated with the MBMS remote switching facility is a
maximum of 24V DC/ AC.
(c)
(d)
Points monitoring function from sensor data measured by analogue input (AI)
signals shall be in the form of 2-wire at 4 to 20mA in 24V DC signals.
4/5
January 2011
(b)
(c)
Analogue to digital conversion shall be performed for the use of MBMS with
the following requirements:
(i)
Absolute accuracy
(ii)
(iii)
Input impedance
(iv)
Isolation
frame
input
to :
1500V
101.6
(a)
Points control function activated for driving actuator by analogue output (AO)
signals shall be in the form of 4 to 20mA capable of operating into a 500 Ohms
resistive load or 0 to 10V DC capable of operating into a 500 Ohms resistive
load.
(b)
(c)
SYSTEM INTERFACES
The MBMS central servers, loop controllers, and other headend networking
equipment are fed from UPS backed fused spur units in the communications
rooms.
(b)
The MBMS I/O controllers are fed from the essential supplies in MCCs.
The MBMS interfaces to mechanical plant and systems for control and
monitoring via the Excel controllers.
The MBMS has a high level interface to the Chiller PLCs for monitoring and
control via the Data Highway Plus connection.
5/5
January 2011
102.1
GENERAL
This section specifies technical and performance requirements for the voice and
data cabling system for the Hong Kong International Airport.
102.2
102.3
Commercial
Standard
Building
Telecommunications
Cabling
EIA/TIA 606
EIA/TIA 607
Commercial
Building
Grounding
Requirements for Telecommunications
BS 7671
BS 7718
and
Bonding
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The voice and data network in Hong Kong International Airport comprises of
copper and optical fibre cables to provide Voice and Data transmission
connectivity. The basis of the design is compliant with the standards laid
down within EIA/TIA-568-A.
(b)
Primary Comms Rooms for voice and low speed data (Group A),
Primary Comms Rooms for high speed data (Group B); and
(ii)
Secondary/ Satellite Comms Rooms for both low and high speed
service distribution.
1/13
January 2011
(c)
(d)
Primary Comms Rooms Group B comprises of all other systems utilizing the
Voice and Data cabling network for connectivity to terminal devices.
(e)
Secondary Comms Rooms are located throughout the PTB. These, together
with a number of associated communications cupboards, providing the radial
and backbone cabling topology necessary to meet the Voice and Data cabling
distribution. These Comms Rooms are referred to as Satellite Comms
Rooms.
(f)
(g)
The category 3 UTP cable is used in the same configuration as the fibre optic
backbone cable but used for voice connection to ISDN primary rate standard.
The category 3 UTP provides connection between the main distribution frames
(MDF) in Comms Rooms 4A, 4B, 22A and 22B Satellite Comms Room IDFs.
(b)
Due to the demands of critical user applications associated with safety which
will require very high operational availability, versus other applications
requiring lower levels of operational availability, the network shall provide for
selective allocation of relative user access priorities and quality of service
(QOS) objectives.
(c)
The intrinsic availability of optical fibre cables shall be high due to cable routes
being restricted to defined utility reserve area within the airport. Therefore, the
calculated intrinsic network availability shall be determined by the intrinsic
availability of active Plant, and the use of defined availability figures for
supporting facilities.
(d)
All Plant and optical cables routes destined to carry airside communications
traffic shall be restricted to locations within the airside areas of the airport to
ensure highest operational availability.
2/13
January 2011
102.4
(b)
568-A
ANSI/EIA/TIA
455-164/167/170
IEC
793-2
All multimode cable for indoor use shall comply with the following requirement:
No. of Core
Fibre Mode
: Multimode
Fibre Size
: 62.5/125/250 m
Core Diameter:
: 62.53 micron
Attenuation (max.)
(c)
Strain Relief
: Central non-metallic
Outer Sheath
: LSF/OH
Cable Construction
Installation
All multimode cable for outdoor use shall comply with the following
requirement:
No. of Core
Fibre Mode
: Multimode
Fibre Size
: 62.5/125/250 m
Core Diameter
Attenuation (max.)
Strain Relief
: Central non-metallic
Inner Sheath
: Polyethylene sheath
Armour barrier
Outer Sheath
: Polyethylene sheath
Cable Construction
Installation
3/13
January 2011
(b)
568-A
ANSI/EIA/TIA
455-164/167/170
IEC
793-2
All single-mode cable for indoor use shall comply with the following
requirement:
No. of Core
Fibre Mode
: Single-mode
Fibre Size
: 8/125/250 m
Attenuation
(c)
Strain Relief
: Central non-metallic
Outer Sheath
: LSF/OH
Cable Construction
Installation
All single-mode cable for outdoor use shall comply with the following
requirement:
No. of Core
Fibre Mode
: Single-mode
Fibre Size
: 8/125/250 m
Core Diameter
Attenuation (max.)
Strain Relief
: Central non-metallic
Inner Sheath
: Polyethylene sheath
Armour barrier
Outer Sheath
: Polyethylene sheath
Cable Construction
Installation
4/13
January 2011
102.5
(a)
The connector for the termination of optical fibre shall be the T568-SC as
specified in the recommendation ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
(b)
The design of these connectors and their usage shall be fully in accordance
with the ANSI/TIA/EIA standard.
(b)
All Category 6 UTP cables shall comply with the following standards:
ANSI/TIA/EIA
568-B
BS
7671, 7718
Category 6 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair internal grade cable for indoor use
shall comply with the following requirements:
ANSI/TIA/EIA category
: Category 6
:4
Outer Sheath
: LSF/OH
(b)
All Category 5 UTP cables shall comply with the following standards:
ANSI/TIA/EIA
568-A
BS
7671, 7718
Category 5 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair internal grade cable for indoor use
shall comply with the following requirements:
ANSI/TIA/EIA category
: Category 5
Outer Sheath
: LSF/OH
568-A
BS
7671, 7718
5/13
January 2011
(b)
(c)
Category 4 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair internal grade cable for indoor use
shall comply with the following requirements:
ANSI/TIA/EIA category
: Category 4
: 4 pairs minimum
Outer Sheath
: LSF/OH
Category 4, 100ohm, STP Shielded Twisted Pair external grade cable for
outdoor use shall comply with the following requirements:
ANSI/TIA/EIA category
: Category 4
: 10
Outer Sheath
Description
: In cable ducts
All Category 3 UTP cables shall comply with the following standards:
ANSI/TIA/EIA
(b)
(c)
568-A
BS
7671, 7718
Category 3 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair internal grade cable for indoor use
shall comply with the following requirements:
ANSI/TIA/EIA category
: Category 3
: 50 pairs minimum
Outer Sheath
: LSF/OH
Category 3 UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair external grade cable for outdoor use
shall comply with the following requirements:
ANSI/TIA/EIA category
: Category 3
: 25, 12
Outer Sheath
: Polyethylene
Description
: In cable ducts
Category 5, 4 pair unshielded twisted pair jumper wire shall comply with the
following standards and requirements:
ANSI/TIA/EIA
: 568-A
ANSI/TIA/EIA category
: Category 5
BS
: 7671, 7718
:4
6/13
January 2011
(b)
102.6
Connectors
Outer Sheath
: LSF/OH
Description
: Jumper leads
Category 3, unshielded twisted pair jumper wire shall comply with the following
standards and requirements:
ANSI/TIA/EIA
: 568-A
ANSI/TIA/EIA
category
: Category 3
BS
: 7671, 7718
Connectors
Insulation
: PVC
Description
: Jumper leads
DISTRIBUTION FRAMES
102.6.1 General
(a)
(b)
The main distribution frames (MDF) provides connection for category 3 UTP to
satellite communication room. These frames provide both the primary link and
service distribution for voice communication.
(ii)
(iii)
7/13
January 2011
(iv)
Port type
: LC-connector
(b)
Type A frame:
-
(c)
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A
Single and double verticals
Termination capacity for double vertical (excluding space taken by
backmount label holders)
Used for the block mounting and termination of the category 3 x 50 pair
cables feeding in from the MDFs located in Comms Rooms 4 and 22.
Type B frame:
-
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A
Single and double verticals
Termination capacity for double vertical (excluding space taken by backmount label holders)
Cat 5 x 25 pair blocks
(d)
Used for the block mounting and termination of the category 5 x 25 pair
House Services Connection Blocks.
8/13
January 2011
102.6.4 House Distribution Frames (HDF) and Tenant Distribution Frames (TDF)
(a)
Used for the block mounting and termination of the category 5 x 25 pair
house services connection blocks.
(b)
Main Distribution Frames (MDF) shall be installed within Comms Room 4 and
22 located in the PTB. These frames shall provide the PABX distribution
points for the PTB category 3 cabling network and shall have the following
requirement:
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A
Single and double verticals
Termination capacity for double vertical (excluding space taken by backmount label holders)
(b)
102.7
All category 5 voice and data RJ45 outlets shall comply with the following
standards:
ANSI/TIA/EIA
568-A
BS
7671
9/13
January 2011
(b)
The VDOs shall be installed in two groups. Group 1 shall be for installation
directly into the lid types House Distribution Frames (HDF) and shall be the
insert type RJ45 single outlets. Group 2 shall be for mounting onto standard
back boxes and either manufactured with a plastic or satin-brushed stainless
steel finish facia, which is fixed with a simplex or duplex RJ45 adaptor module.
All VDOs shall comply with the following requirements:
ANSI/TIA/EIA
category
: Category 5
Connector type
:
RJ45
(incorporating
technology)
Number of pins
:8
Cover type
: Shuttered
Pinouts
: T568A
Faceplates
IDC
connecting
(c)
(d)
Pair No.
White/ Green
Green
White/ Orange
Blue
White/ Blue
Orange
White/ Brown
Brown
The details of conduits and trays shall refer to Section 49 and 50 of this
GMWS.
10/13
January 2011
102.8
102.8.1 Numbering
(a)
In order to successfully operate and maintain the cable system at the Airport,
a structured and efficient numbering scheme has been employed. The
numbering scheme is fully compatible with the cable management system for
sorting and tracing of circuits, paths, routes and the like.
(b)
The numbering scheme shall be fully compatible with the cable management
system and EIA/TIA 606 Administration Standard for Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings.
(c)
The Contractor shall adopt the same system used during the initial
construction and fit-out of the Airport.
(d)
(e)
The numbering scheme shall include (where applicable) but not be limited to
cables, management modules, verticals, frame numbers, pairs or cores
(fibres), cable trays, riser numbers, ducting, conduits, etc, to fully describe
physical elements routes, electrical circuit connections and cross connections,
voice data outlets and terminal equipment.
(f)
The detailed numbering scheme employed shall use the following hierarchy in
structuring the numbering scheme ranging from the highest level to the lowest
level:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
11/13
January 2011
102.9
(a)
The Contractor shall clearly and indelibly label each end of every cable.
Where a cable consists of multiple cores, labeling of the outer sheath only
shall be considered adequate, provided that individual cores are identified at
the point of termination.
(b)
The Contractor shall select the colour of lettering to contrast with the cable
sheath.
(c)
CABLE INSTALLATION
(b)
(c)
Fibre optic cable shall be used instead of copper UTP cable when the data
cable length is longer than 90 meters to guarantee the data transmission
performance.
The design and installation of the cabling system shall be in accordance with
the requirements of the cable manufacturer and the IEE Regulations.
(b)
(c)
(d)
When a cable is drawn into a duct a new draw rope shall be installed by the
Contractor to permit future cable installation. Draw ropes shall consist of
multifilament nylon cord in a woven nylon sheath with a typical minimum
breaking load of 4.4 kN.
(e)
After the installation of all cables the ends of all ducts and pipes rising to the
surface, or entering draw pits, shall be sealed to form a gas tight waterproof
barrier. For ducts or pipes entering a tunnel or building, the seal shall be gas
tight, waterproof and have a 2 hour fire resistance.
(f)
Gas tight, waterproof and fire resistant seals in ducts or pipes shall be made
using a proprietary system that provides the necessary resistance.
12/13
January 2011
(g)
Every precaution shall be taken to ensure that the cables and accessories are
not installed in a manner or under conditions likely to cause electrolytic or
other corrosive action or damage to the cables, or be detrimental to the
performance of the cable during operation.
(h)
The cable system shall be fully protected from mechanical damage and shall
be readily accessible for inspection at all pits and termination frames.
(i)
All cables shall be provided with identification markers, at each end of the
cable, at entry and exit point of cable ducts and conduits, including in every
draw pit, and in other such positions as are necessary to identify and trace the
route of the cables.
(j)
Where twisted pair copper cables are terminated onto distribution frames, the
Contractor shall ensure that after striping back the outer sheath, the correct
twist of each individual pair is maintained as close as is practically achievable
to the actual point where the wires are terminated.
The quality control procedures for all optic fibre, STP and UTP cable including
design, cable and termination manufacture, installation, inspection, testing and
commissioning shall be implemented to ensure that the final installation meets
the requirements of Section 108 of this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification. The Contractor shall propose and submit to the Project Manager
for review without objection quality control measures and a testing and
commissioning plan which include as a minimum the following:
(i)
(ii)
(b)
Fibre optic cables All cable shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements as specified in Section 108.14.1 (a). Optical power loss criteria
shall also be referred to Section 102.4.1 (b).
(c)
Copper cables All cable shall be tested in accordance with the requirements
as specified in Section 108.14.1 (b).
13/13
January 2011
103.1
103.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section specifies the equipment and materials of the existing Public
Address (PA) System in the Hong Kong International Airport.
(b)
Any system changes in the PA system shall involve changes to the system
configuration and programming of the PA system.
(c)
Any system changes in the PA system shall not degrade the MTBF of the
existing equipment.
103.3
BS 5839
BS 6259
BS 6840
BS 7671
BS EN 60268
BS EN 60801
BS EN 60849
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The public address (PA) system provides audio signals typically voice
announcements and alarm tones, including fire warnings and evacuation
messages, to all public areas of the passenger terminal building (PTB).
(b)
(c)
The PA zones in the PTB shall correspond to the fire zones. The PA zones
can be accessed either individually or in selectable combinations.
1/6
January 2011
(d)
The speakers are connected such that the different PA zones are driven from
independent power amplifier modules. Each amplifier module is a twin unit
(consisting of two separate amplifiers) and has a dual output (i.e. A and B
circuits). Speakers in each zone shall be connected as interleaved circuits so
that alternate speakers are driven by the A and B amplifiers respectively.
(e)
All speakers shall connect to Public Address Distribution Frames (PAF) and
through which connect back to Comms Room racks in Comms Room.
(f)
(g)
Any system changes in the PA system shall involve changes to the system
configuration and programming of the PA.
(h)
(b)
(c)
The system shall have a minimum SPL of 80 dB(A) sound pressure level
(SPL) at 1.5m above finish floor level, when all power amplifiers are driven to
< 70% of rated power.
(e)
(f)
2/6
January 2011
(g)
(h)
103.4
The message shall be audible in all areas within the specified zone. The signal
to noise ratio shall not be less than 40 dB when the loudspeaker output level
in the area concerned is not less than 20 dB above the background noise level
normally expected in the respective area during fire conditions. The variation
in sound power level between the outlet nearest to and farthest from the
amplifier shall not exceed 3 dB.
103.4.1 Microphone
(a)
On-axis frequency
response
(ii)
Sensitivity
(iii)
Distortion
(iv)
Front-to-back
discrimination ratio
(v)
Impedance
Power amplifiers shall provide a minimum SPL in the space of 10dB(A) higher
than the nominal background noise level when driven by a nominal + 4dBm
line signal. The continuous power handling level shall be 3dB and the peak
power handling level be 6dB above this value.
(b)
The line output for a single channel power amplifier shall be 100V to match
with existing system
(c)
Input sensitivity
(ii)
Frequency response
(iii)
3/6
January 2011
(iv)
Noise level
(v)
Output regulation
103.4.3 Loudspeakers
(a)
Loudspeakers shall be dimensioned such that the SPL over 95% of the zone
area is at least 10dB(A) above the nominal background noise level when
driven by a nominal + 4dBm signal at the test points. Under these conditions,
a loudspeaker shall run at least 3dB below its rated continuous power
handling capacity, and shall be 6dB below its short term peak power handling
capacity.
(b)
(c)
(d)
For column and projection (horn) loudspeakers, the directivity factor Q and the
6dB vertical beamwidth within a range of bandwidth shall match the installed
location and application to achieve the required performance.
(e)
Rated power
Nominal coverage angle
Directivity factor Q
Sensitivity
On-axis frequency
response
:
:
:
:
:
103.4.4 Cables
(a)
At least 16
:
:
:
At least 0.15mm
50mm maximum
110 pF/m maximum
:
:
At least 0.25mm
36 Ohm/km maximum at 20C
4/6
January 2011
The local zonal console shall provide zone selection, paging and status
indication. They are capable of addressing the zones that have been
programmed in the system controller and can be used for live broadcasting.
(b)
The console shall be compatibility with existing system, Media matrix Q-Host
System.
(c)
The local zone console shall be flush mounted desk-top unit, terminated by
means of a multi-pin plug allowing easy removal for servicing or replacement.
(d)
The local zone console shall allow locally generated broadcast to one paging
zone. The single zone console shall consist of:(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Panel OK LED
(vi)
(f)
The Technical requirements of the single zone and multi-zone local zone
console are as follows.
(i)
30Hz to 20kHz
(ii)
Cardioid
(iii)
Microphone element
Electret
(iv)
Microphone sensitivity
(v)
0dBm
(vi)
Compressor
(vii) Equalisation
(g)
(h)
The console shall communicate with the existing system controller via. RS485
serial link.
5/6
January 2011
(i)
(iv)
103.5
At least 19
:
:
At least 0.21mm
0.5dB maximum
At least 0.5mm
(j)
(k)
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
(a)
All equipment supplied shall be immune from and shall not radiate signals
exceeding the limits of BS EN 60801.
(b)
No part of the PA installation shall be within a distance of less than one sixth
of a wavelength away from the disturbing source of voltage lines carrying
more than 220V. PA cables shall segregated from all other cables by at least
300 mm in any direction as far as practical. Long parallel runs of PA and
mains cables and of microphone and loudspeaker shall be avoided. Cables
shall only across at right angles.
(c)
6/6
January 2011
104.1
104.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section specifies the equipment and materials of the existing Access
Control System (ACS) in the Hong Kong International Airport.
(b)
Any system changes in the ACS shall involve changes to the system
configuration and programming of the ACS.
(c)
Any system changes in the ACS shall not degrade the MTBF of the existing
equipment.
104.3
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A
Commercial
Standard
Building
Telecommunications
Cabling
BS 7671
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
after hours securing of public areas that are not required for passenger
processing (e.g. transfer areas);
(vi)
1/10
January 2011
(b)
104.4
level 1
ACS Users;
(ii)
level 2
(iii)
level 3
(iv)
level 4
(v)
level 5
(b)
(c)
The field security devices shall be connected to the S9032 access controller
via shielded or unshielded twisted pair cables or to RTC via Ethernet
connections for low or extra low voltage, or via fibre optics with data-optical
transceivers.
(d)
Any system changes in the ACS shall involve changes to the system
configuration and programming of the ACS.
(e)
104.4.1 General
(a)
Field security devices include but are not limited to the followings devices:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
2/10
January 2011
(b)
(ix)
(x)
The materials, mounting method and installation details of the field security
devices shall suit the installation locations and complying with the
manufacturers recommendations.
(b)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
The card reader/ keypad terminals are S610f Fingerprint card readers.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
3/10
January 2011
The egress / exit push button assembly shall be easy to use with a diameter of
25mm minimum. It shall be green in colour, surface or flush mounted adjacent
to the controlled door to allow egress through the door, to be mounted in a
standard switch box as per Section 50, with face plate to be as 50.1 (b) and
50.12.1 (a).
(b)
A label Press to Exit in the Chinese and English languages shall be provided
on the face plate adjacent to the push button.
(c)
The push button shall directly interrupt power to the door strike or locking
mechanism and simultaneously activate the door forced open alarm shunt
circuit as per card reader terminal.
Emergency break glass units for door release shall be white in colour, surface
or flush mounted. Red colour finish shall not be accepted to avoid confusion
with red fire alarm stations. These units shall be located at any emergency
egress door where egresses are electrically controlled by exit card readers. A
metallic rod for striking the glass shall be included and chained to the
emergency break glass unit.
(b)
(c)
(d)
The operation of emergency break glass unit shall act directly on the power
circuit of the electric locking mechanism and interrupt the circuit, causing the
locking mechanism to release. Simultaneously an individual and separately
identifiable emergency escape activation alarm shall be initiated. Operating
under 24V DC, the alarm siren tone is 95 dB minimum at one metre.
(e)
When these units are used with motorized doors, the unlock / open connection
shall be connected directly into the door control unit. An activation of the break
glass unit shall remove the motorized opening/closing and locking
mechanisms. The door shall be openable by manual operation in an
acceptable manner.
(f)
All fixings shall be tamperproof and shall allow replacement of the glass panel
or for service purpose. Fixings with standard flats or star screws are not
acceptable. Two replacement glass plates shall be included for each unit
The disabled toilet personnel distress push button assembly shall be easy to
use with a diameter of 25mm minimum. It shall be surface or flush mounted at
disabled toilets in a standard switch box as per Section 50.
(b)
4/10
January 2011
(c)
The activation of personnel distress push buttons shall generate an alarm for
the response of ACS workstation operators. Local audible alarm shall be
provided whenever required on the Employers Drawings.
Electric locks shall be monitored for their presence and locking status,
separately from the door open / close status.
(b)
(c)
For electromagnetic locks and internal micro-switch in an electric deadlatching lockset, the lock / unlock status shall be monitored by an integral bond
sensor, preventing activation until the doors are at rest and aligned with the
lock.
Assistance alarm button/ duress button/ kickbar alarm shall be of the push-toactivate, self latching and mechanical master-key-only-resettable type.
(b)
(c)
Electric strikes and latch keepers shall either incorporate a security magnetic
reed switch which shall be operated by a magnet in the lock bolt when the
dead-latching bolt is latched within the keeper, or positive action micro-switch
which shall be mechanically operated by the dead-latching bolt in the strike.
(b)
(c)
Heavy duty glass-sealed reed switches of the biased high security type shall
be fitted to all roller shutters, fold up doors and any other heavy duty gates or
doors as shown on the Employers Drawings.
(d)
5/10
January 2011
(b)
The sounders shall remain active after activation until a customized program
(such as time-out or overriding keyswitch) or an ACS user command
terminates their activation.
(c)
(d)
Should a fire alarm and/or emergency evacuation occur in any building zone,
the affected audible sounders shall be disabled or silenced in accordance with
customized fire and evacuation response programs.
The existing installation comprises units, Type DIU/700/210. For any new
installations, if the existing models shall no longer be available, an equivalent
unit shall be provided that is both hardware and software compatible to the
existing systems and shall have the same or better performance specification.
(b)
The door interface unit (DIU) shall have sufficient 24V DC operational output
power to supply up to two door strike and / or door holder and local power for
the card reader. An auxiliary relay shall be provided to meet additional user
requirements.
(c)
The DIU shall have sufficient input/ output capacity to monitor the connected
door, providing standard door modes, when the unit is directly connected to a
S9032 Access Controller.
(d)
Each DIU shall maintain its own battery backup sufficiently sized depending
on lock used and rated for full load operation for a minimum period of 4 hours.
The batteries shall be of heavy-duty industrial
lead acid type, protected
against deep discharge and overcharge.
All battery cells shall be
rechargeable, maintenance free sealed type.
(e)
The DIU shall be self-monitoring in terms of tamper and power fail, protected
by tamper sensor and equipped with a power status indicator panel mounted
on the exterior of the enclosure.
(f)
The door interface electronics shall be housed in one high impact steel case
enclosure, sealed to IP54.
6/10
January 2011
(g)
(h)
The DIU shall provide 2 master reader inputs and shall provide direct interface
at least to the following devices (up to 8 inputs):
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
The Sliding Door interfacing requirements include but not limited to the
following:
(i)
The ACS system shall be installed to take full remote manual control of
the sliding doors. The system shall place the doors in free access mode
or secure card access control mode. It shall perform the following
automatic and manual control functions during the secure card access
control mode as a minimum:
- off;
- automatic (open-dwell-close)
- open + hold opened; and
- closed.
(ii)
(iii)
Door Closed and Door Locked conditions shall be monitored by the ACS
system by using heavy duty biased magnetic reed switches for the door
closed monitoring and a voltage free contact from the automatic door
controller for the door locked condition.
(iv)
Where automatic sliding doors are fitted with movement sensing devices
to open the doors during the free access mode, these devices shall be
disabled when the doors are in secure card control mode.
(v)
The Contractors shall provide all interfacing control relays and timers
within pelmets and door controller cabinets to perform all control
functions.
(vi)
All control and interlock functions except safety interlock functions shall
be provided by the ACS to ensure correct and safe operation with the
ACS system.
7/10
January 2011
(b)
(c)
(d)
The S9032 access controller shall also responsible for determining alarm
conditions on various devices, including (without limitation) tamper
detectors, fire interface activated detectors, panic buttons and door contacts.
It shall report to the Regional CDC immediately upon the occurrence of any
alarm condition.
(e)
When the S9032 access controller is off-line to the Regional CDC, the
alarms and events shall continue to be buffered. When the S9032 access
controller is on-line to the Regional CDC, the alarms and events shall be
transferred to the Regional CDC immediately, for it to pass on to the Alarm
Handling CDC.
(f)
The internal battery shall provide a minimum 4-hour backup capacity to the
S9032 access controller, in the event of mains failure. When the battery
voltage drops below 85% of the nominal value, a battery low signal shall be
generated and handled as a system alarm. After the battery low alarm is
reported, the remaining backup power shall last for 30 minutes of operation
time. The database shall be retained even in the event of battery backup
failure.
(g)
In addition to S9032 access controller tamper, mains failure and battery low,
the S9032 access controller shall also able to detect and report S9032
access controller reboot conditions.
The S9032 lift controller shall be an integral component designed to offer the
ability to control the floor access of either one or two lift cabs, each of which
can support access to up to 128 floors with the AC2000 system.
(b)
The S9032 lift controller shall provide access control to specific lift floors
with a building when a cardholder presenting a valid access controlled card
to an access control card reader, which in conjunction with the S9032 lift
controller carries out access checks on the AC2000 database to determine
which floors the cardholder is allowed access to.
8/10
January 2011
(c)
(d)
The S9032 lift controller shall be fully integrated within a standard Ethernetbased TCP/IP Local Area Network, and configured/monitored using
Telnet/Web-based tools.
(e)
The S9032 lift controller shall maintain a database of card numbers, access
level and time zones, etc., in order to answer fully autonomously card
access requests from the reader terminals, and it shall report all card
transactions, floor selections and alarms to the connecting Regional CDC.
(f)
The S9032 lift controller shall also responsible for determining alarm
conditions on various devices, including (without limitation) tamper
detectors, fire detectors, panic buttons and door contacts. It shall report to
the Regional CDC immediately upon the occurrence of any alarm condition.
(g)
When the S9032 lift controller is off-line to the Regional CDC, the alarms
and events shall continue to be buffered. When the S9032 lift controller is
on-line to the Regional CDC, the alarms and events shall be transferred to
the Regional CDC immediately, for it to pass on to the Alarm Handling CDC.
(h)
The internal battery shall provide a minimum 4-hour backup capacity to the
S9032 lift controller, in the event of mains failure. When the battery voltage
drops below 85% of the nominal value, a battery low signal shall be
generated and handled as a system alarm. After the battery low alarm is
reported, the remaining backup power shall last for 30 minutes of operation
time. The database shall be retained even in the event of battery backup
failure.
(i)
In addition to S9032 lift controller tamper, mains failure and battery low, the
S9032 lift controller shall also able to detect and report S9032 lift controller
reboot conditions.
(b)
The sDCM 300 controller shall communicate with the AC2000 host system
via RS-485 communications to the S9032 access controller.
9/10
January 2011
104.5
(c)
The sDCM 300 controller shall be equipped with a 32bit processor with
structured database to allow storage of large amounts of cardholder records
for offline card validation and decision making at the point of entry, even
when host communication is not available.
(d)
The sDCM 300 controller shall be configured for 2 read heads on 2 separate
doors, with optional Exit push buttons, or to support an Entry/Exit
configuration for bi-directional control on a single door.
The ACS interfaces with several other systems within the airport buildings.
The Contractor shall liaise and co-ordinate with specialists and others working
on other systems (where necessary) in order to facilitate the provision of
shared data between the ACS and the systems to which it interfaces.
(b)
(c)
(d)
The test, commissioning and integration of the installed works shall be carried
out by the commissioning specialist who has previous experience of
commissioning an ACS of similar design and complexity and is familiar with
and understands the functional and operational requirements of the already
installed (existing) ACS.
(e)
10/10
January 2011
105.1
105.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section specifies the equipment and materials of the existing Trunked
Mobile Radio (TMR) Systems at the Hong Kong International Airport.
(b)
Any system modification and new equipment addition to the existing TMR
systems shall be integrated into the existing systems via a new structured data
cabling, RF leaky cable, optical fibre works that connects to existing system
and not a new stand-alone service. The technical performance of the
existing TMR systems shall not be adversely affected as a result of any new
extension work. Also, the existing systems shall be operational at all time
during new extension works. The relocation of any hardware such as antenna
and RF amplifiers shall not adversely affect the overall system performance.
(c)
The system of any new expansion shall be configured as per the existing
equipment installed. All protocols and standards shall be the same. All
software/ firmware related to the operating of existing TMR equipment
together with associated cabling installed shall be reconfigured if necessary to
accommodate the additional hardware, providing a seamless integration into
the existing system.
(d)
(b)
IEE
BS EN 50082-1
1/8
January 2011
105.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
(ii)
(b)
The Airport Authority (AA) TMR system is a 3-site Tetra digital trunk mobile
radio system operating in the 800MHz frequency band. This system provides
radio communication facilities for all radio users throughout the whole airport
area It provides portable coverage to both within the Passenger Terminal
Building (PTB) and the outdoor Airfield, comprising a network of indoor
antenna system inside the PTB primarily consisting of multiple low profile
indoor antennas and leaky coaxial cables. This system is operated by AA.
(c)
In addition, the AA TMR distributed antenna network also shared with Police
and Fire Services Department (FSD) 400MHz and the upper end 300MHz
frequency band respectively. Both Police and FSD will integrate their RF
signals to the AA TMR distributed antenna network.
(d)
(e)
System hardware shall include RSX coaxial cable, leaky co-axial cable, bidirectional amplifiers, splitters, cross band or wide band couplers and antenna
as shown in Employers Drawings.
The system performance specified in this section shall only apply to indoor
antenna of the AA TMR and commercial TMR systems. Specifications for
others shall refer to PTS of specific projects and/or Employers Drawings.
(b)
The IMP shall be 110dBc within the operating temperature range of 10C to
+60C. The insertion loss for all inputs to output shall be equal, with 1dB
tolerance. The test ports for each transmitter port and receiver port shall be 40
dB and 10dB, respectively.
(c)
(d)
The TMR distribution antenna network shall not impart interference to other
radio frequency (RF) systems both inside and outside the PTB. Likewise, the
network shall not itself incur any interference from existing RF systems.
2/8
January 2011
(e)
Any system changes to the existing TMR systems shall not degrade the MTBF
of the existing equipment. The MTBF of equipment or components of systems
provided shall not affect the overall system performance.
(f)
Any additions to the system shall not degrade the performance of the existing
system.
Indoor antenna shall be low profile, wide band, compact and light weight. The
colour and style shall match the architecture of the surroundings.
(b)
Indoor antenna
characteristics:
(i)
shall
frequency range
exhibit
the
following
minimum
performance
(ii)
gain
high gain ;
(iii)
radiation
omni-directional
applications ;
(iv)
power rating
(v)
VSWR
1.5 : 1 maximum
(vi)
impedance
50 ohms; and
(vii) colour
(c)
for
wide
coverage
The antenna brackets shall be made of stainless steel and shall be capable of
supporting the antenna securely to the mounting structure.
(b)
They shall be compact and modular in design and shall enable channel-bychannel expansion.
Transmitter combiners shall meet the following
performance characteristics:
(i)
frequency range
(ii)
insertion loss
5dB maximum;
(iii)
transmitter
transmitter isolation
60dB minimum;
(iv)
VSWR
(v)
channel separation
3/8
January 2011
Receiver multicouplers shall use low noise amplifiers that offer high immunity
to inter-modulation and interference. It shall be modular in design and easily
expandable in small channel increments.
(b)
frequency range
(c)
(ii)
gain
3dB minimum;
(iii)
25dB minimum;
(iv)
(v)
power input
220 V AC / 50Hz.
105.3.6 Duplexers
(a)
(b)
frequency range
(ii)
insertion loss
(iii)
70dB minimum;
(iv)
(v)
VSWR
1.3 : 1 maximum.
1.5dB maximum;
The power dividers shall operate within the frequency band of 380 900MHz
with the same bandwidth requirement. The minimum power rating shall be
500 watts.
(b)
(c)
(d)
Three-way uneven split power dividers shall have a maximum insertion loss of
20dB at ports 1 and 2. The maximum insertion loss at port 3 shall be 0.5dB.
4/8
January 2011
(e)
(f)
Four-way uneven split power dividers shall have a maximum insertion loss of
20dB at ports 1, 2 and 3. The maximum insertion loss at port 4 shall be 0.5dB.
All leaky coaxial cables used shall be broadband and capable of handling a
combined RF signal from 100 MHz to 2.4 GHz simultaneously.
(b)
All leaky coaxial cables installed in tunnels and enclosed areas shall have LSF
protective jackets.
(c)
(d)
7/8-inch leaky coaxial cables shall have the following minimum performance
characteristics:
(e)
(i)
0.055 dB/m;
(ii)
69 dB;
(iii)
28mm;
(iv)
impedance
50 ohms; and
(v)
50 mm.
1 1/4-inch leaky coaxial cables shall have the following minimum performance
characteristics:
(i)
0.040 dB/m;
(ii)
71 dB;
(iii)
40mm;
(iv)
impedance
50 ohms; and
(v)
50 mm.
5/8
January 2011
(f)
Coaxial feeder cables shall be of low attenuation and low VSWR type with
great strength and flexibility. Coaxial feeder cables shall completely RFI/EMI
shielded to protect against interference. Connector attachment shall be quick
and reliable with excellent electrical contact. For cables installed in tunnels
and enclosed areas, the outer sheath or protective jackets for the cables shall
be of low smoke zero halogen type. Coaxial feeder cables shall exhibit the
following minimum performance characteristics:
(i)
attenuation
(ii)
impedance
50 ohms maximum;
(iii)
(iv)
tensile strength
145 kg minimum.
frequency range
(ii)
number of passbands
2;
(iii)
passband separation
(iv)
18 MHz;
(v)
60;
(vi)
gain
80 dB (AGC disabled);
50 dB;
44 dBm minimum;
(ix)
noise figure
10 dB maximum;
(x)
operating temperature
-30 to 60 0C
(xi)
impedance
50 ohms;
(xii) VSWR
1.5 : 1 maximum;
220V AC / 50 Hz;
25 Kg.
6/8
January 2011
Transceivers to be used to convert RF signal into optical signal and vice versa
shall have the following minimum characteristics:
(i)
(ii)
0 to 30 dBm;
55 dB;
55 dBc;
supply input
220VAC/50Hz.
806-870 MHz(AA);
0.5 uV;
gain
continuously adjustable
dynamic range
greater than 60 dB
spurious emissions
supply input
220VAC/50Hz.
Coaxial feeder cables shall feature low attenuation, low VSWR as well as
great strength and flexibility. They shall be completely RFI/EMI shielded to
protect against interference. Connector attachment shall be quick and reliable
with excellent electrical contact.
(b)
All coaxial feeder cables installed in tunnels and enclosed areas shall have
LSF protective jackets.
(c)
0.04 dB/m;
(ii)
28 mm;
(iii)
impedance
50 ohms;
(iv)
(v)
250 mm maximum.
7/8
January 2011
For the TMR systems, the majority of commissioning will be based around
transmission and reception performance of the new antenna installed (leaky
coaxial and discreet antennae), ensuring an acceptable level of coverage is
achieved in all new (expansion) areas.
(b)
The Contractor shall be responsible for the testing and commissioning all TMR
and related equipment installed under their scope of works. The Contractor
shall review the new antenna network to ensure that the required level of
coverage can be obtained. In the event that antennas need to be added,
deleted, or relocated, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for
review without objection the signal strength, readings and calculations to
justify such additions, deletions or relocations.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Prior to any modification to the system taking place the Contractor shall
undertake signal strength tests in locations to prove the overall performance.
The test points shall be agreed with the Project Manager. Following
completion of the works the Contractor shall carry out further signal strength
measurements in the same locations to prove that the addition of the new
service has not degraded the existing service.
(f)
The Project Manager shall reserve the right to choose his/her own
commissioning specialist whom he/she shall then instruct the Contractor to
employ.
8/8
January 2011
106.1
106.2
GENERAL
(a)
This section specifies the equipment and materials of the existing Closed
Circuit Television (CCTV) System in the Hong Kong International Airport.
(b)
Any system changes in the CCTV system shall involve changes to the system
configuration and programming of the CCTV system.
(c)
Any system changes in the CCTV System shall not degrade the MTBF of the
existing equipment.
BS 3573
Specification
for
polyolefin
telecommunication cables
BS 7671
BS EN 50082-1
BS EN 60529
CCITT G 703
EIA RS-170
EIA RS-232D
EIA RS-422D
1/12
copper
conductor
January 2011
106.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The existing closed circuit television (CCTV) system is a PAL-I colour system
conforming to CCIR Recommendation 472-3.
(b)
(c)
(d)
All CCTV cameras are connected to switching matrices. The video switches
are user-programmable to provide software barring of inputs to particular
outputs.
(e)
All monitors are able to view any camera in the system as designated on a
database table by the system administrator.
(f)
The CCTV video signals shall be 1 volt peak-to-peak composite video signal
utilizing BNC type connectors and are transmitted via fibre optics and coaxial
cables.
(g)
All control signals and data for the CCTV system shall be one or more of ISO /
IEC 10BaseT, RS232 or RS422 type.
(h)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
video switchers;
2/12
January 2011
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
signal-to-noise ratio
: 43 dB minimum (unweighted);
(ii)
picture signal
: 0.70.03 V;
(iii)
sync signal
: 0.30.009V;
(iv)
pulse-to-bar ratio
: 4 % maximum;
(v)
2T pulse response
: 3 % maximum;
(vi)
2T bar response
: 3 % maximum; and
: 4 % maximum; and
: 25 ns.
(c)
The time delay between initiating the movement of a PTZ CCTV camera from
an operator console and the movement of camera shall be less than 150ms.
(d)
In the event of a power failure to any part of the system, full system operation
shall be restored to normal within 2 minutes.
(e)
All equipment shall function properly under the operation temperature range
from 10 to +54C and relative humidity up to 95% non-condensing. The
voltage requirement of each piece of equipment shall match with others and
the existing system.
(f)
Any system changes in the CCTV system shall involve changes to the system
configuration and programming of the CCTV system as well as the screen
graphics in the PC/workstations.
(g)
(h)
The data protocol of the CCTV system shall be compatible with Pelco
Coaxitron Protocol.
3/12
January 2011
106.4
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The CCTV system shall be interfaced to with GBMS system for monitoring of
CCTV equipment status to alert maintenance personnel of equipment failures.
Such that power failure, bad contact and not connected of the newly installed
equipment rack can be detected and alerted.
106.4.1 General
(a)
Each CCTV camera shall house the lens, image pickup devices, electronic
circuitry and sync pulse generation circuit. The camera imaging devices shall
be of the solid state charge-coupled device (CCD) sensor and the whole unit
shall transmit colour images. The construction of the camera shall be rugged
and compact suitable for mounting into camera housing with other accessories.
The camera shall be designed for industrial application.
(b)
(c)
Suitable optical filter or other means shall be included to reduce the spurious
alisaing components apperating in the video bandwidth (up to 6 MHz) to
negligible quantities. Anti-charge-accumulation devices or other means shall
be provided to reduce any abnormalities such as red vertical line smearing
when bright objects move across the image plane in a dark background.
(d)
All cameras shall be well shielded against radio frequency pickup. The
construction of the camera shall satisfy the relevant emission and immunity
requirements of the IEC 61000 series standard on electromagnetic
compatibility. The sensors shall be firmly fixed to minimize microphonic
interference.
4/12
January 2011
(e)
All cameras may operate directly from 220V AC 50Hz or 24V AC 50 Hz unless
otherwise specified. They shall be of low power consumption and have a
Power ON indication.
(f)
The image transfer mechanism of the CCD sensor shall be interline transfer
(IT).
(g)
The choice of the dimension of the CCD sensor shall satisfy the minimum
luminance resolution requirements such that the illuminance on the test chart
shall be set to produce full video output at a lens setting of f/5.6 +2 stop or -1
stop.
(h)
All cameras shall have phase adjustments to allow different electrical phases
to be used to feed cameras in the system without causing synchronization
problems.
(b)
TV standard
CCIR System
fields/second;
(PAL),
(ii)
active
picture :
elements (sensor pixel
content)
(iii)
horizontal resolution
480 TV lines;
(iv)
signal-to-noise ratio
(v)
white balance
(vi)
625
lines,
50
On/off selectable;
(vii) backlight
compensation
On/off selectable;
C-mount or CS-mount;
(ix)
output impedance
75 ohms;
(x)
(xi)
video connector
BNC.
The sensitivity (minimum scene illumination) of the cameras shall comply the
following requirements
(i)
indoor camera
(ii)
outdoor camera
5/12
January 2011
All CCTV cameras shall be installed in camera housing with suitable mounting
method. Cameras in the out-of-gauge lifts shall be covered by a protective
enclosure.
(b)
The housing shall accommodate the camera provided, complete with lens and
other accessories. The housing shall be made from a rigid, not-corrosive
metal, and shall be sturdy and tamper-proof. Notwithstanding, with the aid of
tools, operation and maintenance staff shall gain ready access to the camera
and other accessories of the cameras or housing for maintenance, cleaning
and/or water-filling purposes.
(c)
All power, control and video cables entering or leaving the housing externally
shall be protected by a flexible conduit. Cables shall be terminated in plug
and socket arrangements within the housing.
(d)
The field of view of the camera shall not be obstructed by the housing. The
housing shall not cause degradation of the performance of the camera under
any operating conditions.
(e)
The colour of the camera housing shall conform to RAL 9016 unless otherwise
specified.
(f)
The minimum index of protection (IP) of the camera housing shall be:
(g)
(i)
indoor
(ii)
outdoor
(ii)
(h)
Dome type cameras shall be used for public areas unless otherwise
specified.
(i)
(j)
6/12
January 2011
(b)
pan
360 minimum;
(ii)
tilt up
15 minimum; and
(iii)
tilt down
65 minimum.
(iv)
Adjustable
camera :
viewing position
(c)
(d)
For cameras with remotely controlled pan and tilt heads, the mounting shall
provide a field adjustable mechanism and a suitable mechanical joint so that
the camera assembly can be swung or tilted to the appropriate surveillance
direction and locked into this particular position.
(e)
The tensile strength of the mounting and the method used to connect the
mounting to the architectural or structural support must withstand the total
weight of the camera, plus housing and the pan/tilt head in a safe manner.
106.4.5 Lens
(a)
There are 2 types of lens : fixed focal length and adjustable focal length. The
characteristics of the each type of lens shall be as follows:
Fixed focal length lens
(i)
focus
fixed focus;
(ii)
iris
(iii)
focus
(ii)
iris
(iii)
7/12
January 2011
(b)
(c)
The near focusing distance shall not be higher than 1m for fixed equivalent
focal length lens and 1.5m for zoom lenses.
(d)
Speed of zoom shall be such as to double the field of view in less than 2.5
seconds.
(e)
Operation of motorized drives for these controls shall not cause any radio
frequency radiation or interference to the video signal, e.g. patterning, noise
streaks, etc.
All pan/tilt units shall be low profile compact units constructed with corrosionresistant materials. For outdoor operation, they shall be completely sealed
and weatherproof to IP 66.
(b)
They shall produce output torques which is compatible with the total weight of
the camera assembly including camera, lens, housing and related accessories
such as wiper set and water reservoir. They shall have preposition accuracy
of less than 2 as well as minimum backlash better than 0.5.
(c)
(d)
All video, control and power cables into the pan/tilt units shall be terminated in
plug and socket type arrangements. The pan/tilt head shall be controlled
remotely at the control console via on-site receiver/driver (OSRD). The control
signals shall be 24V DC.
(e)
duty cycle
continuous;
(ii)
degree of panning
(iii)
pan speed
(iv)
degree of tilt
(v)
tilt speed
(b)
The OSRD shall accept the bi-directional control data via shielded twisted pair
cables from the existing video switching system. It shall accept RS-232 data
protocol as well.
8/12
January 2011
(c)
(d)
It shall have minimum 16 preset positions with the lens output for zoom, focus
or iris control matching the lens voltage and current requirement. In particular
the voltage output for different equipment shall be:
(e)
106.5
(i)
pan/tilt control
24V DC;
(ii)
lens control
(iii)
auxiliary output
24V AC.
106.5.1 General
(a)
For cameras external to the PTB, the CCTV system shall utilize paths for both
video and control either via direct cabling or via the fixed communications
system (FCS). Note: the FCS is a data transmission network, transparent to
the user, that provides connectivity for a wide variety of data, voice and video
signals throughout the airport platform.
(b)
For cameras internal to the PTB and Ground Transportation Centre: (GTC),
video and control signals shall be transmitted to/from the control console via
video switches through dedicated cables.
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
The transceiver shall comply with the following requirements on video signal:
i)
characteristic impedance
ii)
1 Volt peak-to-peak
iii)
video bandwidth
:
:
9/12
75 ohms
January 2011
(f)
iv)
signal-to-noise ratio
55 dB
v)
video connector
vi)
Differential gain
< 5%
vii)
differential phase
< 5
The transceiver shall comply with the following requirements on control data
signal:
(i)
(g)
data interface
Coaxitron
Up to 100 kbps
The transceiver shall comply with the following requirements on optical signal:
(1) Multimode:
(i)
wavelength
ST connector
ST connector
(2) Singlemode:
(i)
wavelength
Fibre optic cables shall be provided from the communication rooms to the fibre
distribution frames (FDF) which then shall connect to the fibre optic
transceivers to separate the signals into video and data. The fibre optic
cables for CCTV system from the fibre optic transceivers to the
communication rooms will be dedicated for CCTV system usage while from
communication rooms to the control system will be a part of the structural
cabling network.
10/12
January 2011
(b)
All fibre optic cable for the CCTV system shall comply to Section 102 of this
General Materials and Workmanship Specification and compatible with the
existing CCTV system.
(c)
All patch cords provided shall comply with the optical characteristics listed in
Section 102 of this General Materials and Workmanship Specification.
The coaxial cables shall be used to link the CCTV cameras to the fibre optic
transceiver for video signal transmission. The length of coaxial cable shall not
exceed 100 meters.
(b)
The core conductor shall be made of copper with solid polyethylene insulation
and plain copper wire braid screen under the outer sheath.
(c)
characteristic impedance
75 3 Ohms;
(ii)
attenuation
(d)
(iii)
60mm; and
(iv)
insulation resistance
All video patch cords shall have the above coaxial cable characteristics.
The control cables shall be shielded twisted pair cables from the OSRD to the
local fibre optic transceiver or to the nearest communication rooms. The
number of pairs shall be determined by the usage and the exact equipment
connected.
(b)
The conductor shall be tinned copper. The cable shall be screened with an
aluminium/polyester tape in contact with a tinned copper drain wire under the
outer sheath.
(c)
DC loop resistance
(ii)
Normalized impedance
600 ohms;
(iii)
attenuation
(iv)
100mm;
11/12
January 2011
(v)
insulation resistance
(vi)
capacitance
106.6
106.7
(a)
For cables installed in buildings or service tunnels, the outer sheath shall be
PVC with the property of low smoke zero halogen.
(b)
(c)
For cables running in external underground ducts or exposed to air, the outer
sheath shall withstand water ingress and sunlight exposure.
The CCTV system shall be equipped with 24-hour digital video recording
system. The new recording system shall be of modular design and be easily
expandable. Expansion of the new recording system shall not cause any
interruption on the normal operation of the new CCTV system.
(b)
The recording capacity of the digital video recording system shall be adequate
for the no. of camera as required in this project plus 20 % spare capacity.
(c)
The video recording shall be of at least 25 frames per second with video
resolution of 2CIF.
(d)
The video recording equipment shall be the same or compatible with the
existing one.
106.7.1 General
(a)
(b)
12/12
January 2011
107.1
GENERAL
This section specifies the equipment and materials of the existing Master Antenna
Television (MATV) in the Hong Kong International Airport.
107.2
107.3
(b)
The system shall be designed to provide a sound and vision impairment rating
of no less than 5 throughout the system according to CCIR
Recommendations.
(c)
Minimum MATV network standards, measured from the television outlet shall
be:
(d)
(i)
46dB;
(ii)
54dB; and
(iii)
54dB.
(e)
Outputs
38-44dBmV
3-14 dBmV
Inputs
14.0dBmV
Varies
The system shall be designed such that the channel outlet signal level shall be
within the range of 3dBmV and 14dBmV, and that the maximum signal level
difference of any channel on any outlet or between various outlets on the
system shall be 6dB.
1/4
January 2011
107.4
CABLE
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(c)
Maximum (dB/100m)
0.46
1.54
3.75
4.63
6.10
inner conductor
3.34 ohms/km;
(ii)
outer conductor
(iii)
loop conductor
5.28 ohm/km.
2/4
January 2011
107.4.2 Amplifiers
(a)
(b)
Forward
54 750
Reverse
5 - 30
750/54
12/12
33/30
9
25
33/5
17/17
34/34
6.5
20
102
90.5
97
59.5
3
85
94
104
69.5
-
16
16
16
16
The system shall be designed such that amplifiers shall not operate above
80% of their rated value.
Coaxial drop cables shall be RG-6 type with the following characteristics:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
PVC jacket;
(vi)
(x)
3/4
January 2011
(b)
Maximum (dB/100m)
1.90
5.25
11.64
14.43
24.00
4/4
January 2011
108.1
108.2
GENERAL
(a)
The Plant shall be inspected, tested and commissioned to confirm that Plant
performance complies with the requirements of the Contract.
(b)
All such Inspection, Testing and Commissioning shall, in particular but without
limitation, be planned, carried out and documented in accordance with:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
the construction quality plans and inspection and test plans prepared by
the Contractor in accordance with the relevant ISO standard and
reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.
TERMINOLOGY
(a)
In this Contract, and in all programmes, quality plans, reports and other
documents produced in the course of this Contract, the following terms shall
be used:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) Phase - one or other of the phases identified in (i) - (vi) above;
January 2011
(xi)
January 2011
(c)
108.3
The term "Performance Tests" as defined and used in the General Conditions
of Contract refers to the Confidence Trials and such further tests, if any,
identified as such in the Specification.
Manufacturing Phase:
- Factory Test; and
- Type Tests;
(ii)
Installation Phase:
- Site Tests;
(iii)
Pre-Commissioning Phase:
- Component Tests; and
- Commissioning of elements of the Plant;
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(b)
Any Deferred Seasonal Tests shall also be clearly identified in all plans and
programmes.
(c)
For the duration of the Defects Liability Period operational and safety controls
shall be sealed if adjustment beyond defined limits could result in malfunction
and give rise to a defect.
(d)
The Contractor shall provide attendance and technical support during the
confidence trails period in accordance with the Specification.
January 2011
108.4
108.5
QUALITY PLANS
(a)
The Contractor shall identify in his construction quality plans and division of
the Plant into discrete elements to facilitate the preparation and service of
Phase Notices as called for in this General Materials and Workmanship
Specification.
(b)
(c)
The Project Manager, in reviewing any inspection and test plan, may require
additional inspection, testing and commissioning documentation as may be
considered reasonably necessary to record these processes.
PHASE NOTICES
(a)
(b)
For each element of the Plant identified in the Contractor's construction quality
plans or, as the case may be, for the Plant as a whole:
(i)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager for
review a Phase Notice at the end of the Manufacturing Phase, the
Installation Phase and the Pre-Commissioning Phase.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
The Phase Notice relating to an Installation Phase shall confirm that the
Contractor is satisfied that the equipment or system or part of a system
is ready for starting the pre-Commissioning tests.
(v)
January 2011
108.6
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
the tolerances;
(v)
(vi)
108.7
(ix)
(x)
(b)
(c)
The Contractor shall prepare and submit his proposed test Results Forms as
part of his submission of the relevant Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
Plan.
PHASE REPORTS
(a)
(b)
workmanship;
(ii)
January 2011
108.8
(iii)
(iv)
(c)
(d)
Any modifications to circuitry, instrumentation, etc. carried out at any time shall
be recorded in detail in the Phase Reports and shown on the Contractors
Drawings.
(e)
(f)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii) the relevant codes and guides published by the American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE-USA);
January 2011
108.9
(b)
The Contractor shall provide all necessary skilled labour and assistance for
testing, operating, adjusting, commissioning and verifying the performance of
all Plant.
(c)
The Contractor's testing and commissioning staff shall have had previous
experience with testing and commissioning similar Plant of comparable duty.
(d)
(b)
Testing and commissioning instrumentation shall be designed for field use and
to minimize field measurement errors through the use of electronic sensors,
digital displays and similar devices.
(c)
(d)
(e)
108.11 NOTIFICATIONS
(a)
January 2011
Prior to any inspection and testing by the Project Manager, the Contractor
shall inspect and test the Plant himself to ensure that equipment and facilities
are clean and complete and can reasonably be expected to meet successfully
all inspection and/or testing criteria.
(b)
Prior to setting to Work, testing and Commissioning, the Contractor shall clean
all Plant and shall confirm in writing to the Project Manager that all relevant
work by Other Contractor is complete and satisfactory for the purpose of
testing and Commissioning.
(c)
In the event that the Contractor considers that any testing is not appropriate or
required, the Contractor may submit alternative proposals to the Project
Manager for his review.
(b)
(c)
Testing of this phase of the Works shall include all off-Site Factory Tests and
off-Site model testing as required by the Specification and the Project
Manager. The Contractor shall include in the test plan the details of all factory
and model tests and submit the same to the Project Manager for review. This
shall include detailed test procedures on all hardware, firmware and software
and the quality assurance methods used during manufacture. Manufacturing
tests shall be completed in two stages.
January 2011
(b)
Factory Tests
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Software tests shall be fully detailed on all existing software that shall be
used in the works;
(v)
(vi)
Installation Phase Site tests shall be detailed in the Contractor's test plan and
shall include but not be limited to:
(i)
(ii)
physical tests to ensure that cabinets are correctly installed and all subassemblies and sub-racks within the cabinets are correctly installed and
are removable for maintenance.
(ii)
functional tests of all equipment delivered from the factory and not used
in the model tests; and
(iii)
functional tests of all links, patch panels, UTP and fibre connections that
interconnect sub-assemblies, sub-racks, cabinets and external
connections.
Plant Commissioning Phase tests shall be used as the primary tests to ensure
that the plant fully complies with the design and operational requirements of
the Contract. During these tests the plant shall be tested without being
interfaced to other systems.
January 2011
The Plant Integration Phase tests shall include integration with other systems.
These tests shall be detailed in the test plan and shall include but not be
limited to:
(i)
(ii)
a reliability test of no less than 4 weeks. During this test all Plant shall
be connected and operational and interfaces with other systems shall be
fully operational simultaneously. Availability measurements shall be
taken during the test and any failure shall cause the complete test to be
restarted. Testing shall continue until the availability required is
achieved.
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
January 2011
(b)
(c)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
continuity;
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
January 2011
Prior to any inspection and testing by the Project Manager, the Contractor
shall inspect and test the Plant himself to ensure that equipment and facilities
are clean and complete and can reasonably be expected to meet successfully
all inspection and/or testing criteria.
(b)
Prior to setting to Work, testing and Commissioning, the Contractor shall clean
all Plant and shall confirm in writing to the Project Manager that all relevant
work by Other Contractors is complete and satisfactory for the purpose of
testing and Commissioning.
(c)
In the event that the Contractor considers that any testing is not appropriate or
required, the Contractor may submit alternative proposals to the Project
Manager for his review.
The cable systems specified and described in this General Materials and
Workmanship Specification are high quality fibre and UTP systems. Quality
control procedures including design, cable and termination manufacture,
installation, inspection testing and commissioning shall be implemented to
ensure that the final installation meets the requirements of this General
Materials and Workmanship Specification. The Contractor shall submit quality
control measures and a testing and commissioning plan for review by the
Project Manager. Upon receipt of a notice of no objection the Contractor shall
adopt the quality control measure and the testing and commissioning plan
which shall include as a minimum the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
January 2011
SECTION 109
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 110
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 111
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 112
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 113
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 114
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 115
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 116
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 117
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 118
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011
SECTION 119
NOT USED
1/1
January 2011